III-1 & III-2 Specifications - Volume 1

Amiri Diwan
New Jahra Hospital

STATE OF KUWAIT

AMIRI DIWAN

TENDER NO. ( / / 08 )

DESIGN DEVELOPMENT, CONSTRUCTION,
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT, FURNISHING, AND
OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

OF
THE NEW JAHRA HOSPITAL

TENDER DOCUMENTS

DOCUMENT III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DOCUMENT III-1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
DOCEMENT III-2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME-1

April 2013

08

III
1-III
2-III

1823
STATE OF KUWAIT

AMIRI DIWAN

TENDER No. ( / / 80 )

DESIGN DEVELOPMENT, CONSTRUCTION, MEDICAL
EQUIPMENT, FURNISHING, AND OPERATIONAL
MAINTENANCE
OF

TECHNICAL CONDITIONS

DOCUMENT III-1: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
DOCUMENT III-2: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 1

Amiri Diwan Technical Conditions
New Jahra Hospital
STATE OF KUWAIT

AMIRI DIWAN

TENDER No. ( / / 80 )

MAINTENANCE
OF


DOCUMENT III-1: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Amiri Diwan Technical Conditions
New Jahra Hospital
Amiri Diwan III-1/1 General Specifications
New Jahra Hospital

DOCUMENT III-1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Document III-1, General Specifications shall include the following:

1. MPW General Specification for Roads and Sewerage Published December 1984 and
reproduced October 1993 by the Roads Administration, Ministry of Public Works.
2. MPW Roads Administration General Specifications for Motorway/Expressway Systems,
August 2004.
3. MPW General Specifications for Building and Engineering Works (1990).
4. MEW General Specifications for Electrical Installation, MEW/S-1 Third Edition 1984, and
Regulations for Electrical Installation, MEW/R-1 Fourth Edition 1983.
5. MOC Specifications for Telephone and Communications, latest amendment.

The above specifications are not provided with this Document but shall be obtained by the
Contractor from the office of the concerned Ministry.

Clauses in the above referenced General Specifications which are concerned with methods of
measurement and payment, or matters relating thereto, shall not be applicable to this Lump Sum
Contract and shall be considered as deleted from the Terms and Conditions hereof.

The Particular Specifications shall take precedence over General Specifications wherever there is
conflict between the two documents.

STATE OF KUWAIT

AMIRI DIWAN

TENDER No. ( / / 08 )

MAINTENANCE
OF


DOCUMENT III-2: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

Amiri Diwan III-2/011100-1 Summary of the Works
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 011100

SUMMARY OF THE WORKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Introduction
B. Location of the Site
C. Scope of Work for this Contract
D. Work performed under other Contracts
E. Future Work
F. Work Sequence/Phases if any
G. Special Conditions

1.02 INTRODUCTION

A. In order to enhance the provision of Medical facilities for the people of Kuwait, the Amiri
Diwan plans the construction of the New Jahra Hospital. This shall provide a comprehensive
range of services, and shall offer exemplary care of the highest international standards.

1.03 LOCATION OF THE SITE

A The New Jahra Hospital will be constructed on a 214,785 m plot of land adjacent to the
existing Jahra Hospital, by the intersection of Bisher Bin Abi Awanah Road and Marshed al-
Shamree Street in Al Qasr in the Jahra Governate of Kuwait.

1.04 SCOPE OF WORK FOR THIS CONTRACT

A. The scope of work to be executed under this Contract includes Construction, Completion,
Equipment, Furnishing, Commissioning, Handover, Operational Maintenance of the New
Jahra Hospital including all facilities.

The New Jahra Hospital provides a total of 1157 beds, and comprises
- Regional Hospital building
- Accident and Emergency unit
- Out-patient care
- Maternity and neonatal care
- Diagnostic facilities
- Dental clinic
- Regional Health administration building
- Multi-storey carparks for 3,000 vehicles
- Complete external works

In total plus 435,000 m of new facilities are planned (not including car parking and external
works). All new buildings include basements.

The works comprise complete Civil, Structural, MEP and External Works as well as all
temporary works.

The scope also includes all Fixed and Moveable Furniture, Medical and Laboratory
Equipment, Furnishings, Art Work etc.

B. Operational Maintenance of all the works is for two years from the Date of Substantial
Completion and extended operational maintenance period for a further three years
thereafter.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Extended Operational Maintenance period for Three (3) years shall be considered Provisional
Item. i.e. this may or may not be carried out as per the discretion of the Employer; and if this
is not carried out, then the price of this item shall not be paid to the Contractor and will be
deleted from the Contract. The Contractor will not have any right for compensation if this
work is deleted from the Contract.

1.05 WORK PERFORMED UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. The Employer may during the execution of these works employ Other Contractors on a
direct contract basis to execute other works currently unknown.

B. The Contractor shall allow for all costs in connection with scheduling and executing his
construction operations in conjunction with Works by the above Other Contractors, if
appointed and shall cooperate and coordinate therewith.

C. Items indicated on drawings as NIC (Not in Contract) are not included in this Contract but the
Contractor must provide "roughing in (Builders Work in Connection) services for NIC items.

D. Cooperate and Coordinate fully with Other Contractors so that work under those Contracts
may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.

1.06 PROGRAMME

A. It is recognized that the required programme is challenging. Notwithstanding, the required
programme dates are absolute and are non-negotiable. As a consequence it is anticipated
that working extended shifts or multiple shifts will be necessary, and this may range to three
full shifts being deployed 24/7 for some or all of the construction period. The Contractors
programme must clearly show the proposed shift pattern.

B. The Contractor shall be deemed to be fully cognizant of the challenging programme, and
shall be deemed to have fully priced for compliance therewith. No claim whatsoever relating
to meeting the programme dates shall be entertained.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCE/PHASES IF ANY

A. Construct, Equip and Furnish Works in sequence/phases to accommodate Employers
occupancy requirements, and in compliance with the Contractors Schedule as per
requirements of the Contract as well as stated in the Document III-7-1, Terms of Reference.

1.08 SANITARY SYSTEM AND STORMWATER DRAINAGE

A. Contractors use of Site
1. The site of the work may be at location/s areas where construction operations may
disrupt existing hospital, residential, commercial and other urban activities or essential
urban services.
a. The Contractor is required to organise his operations in such a way that
disruption of access to contiguous properties and interference with existing
services and improvements is minimised.
b. The Contractor will be required to describe his operations to avoid disruption,
inconvenience and nuisance, in a detailed Method Statement, which will be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that roads and thoroughfares used by him for the
transportation of construction plant, labour, materials, or debris are not soiled because
of his operations. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractors operations result in
dirty conditions, the Contractor, upon notification by the Engineer, shall take all
necessary steps to clean or repair roads and thoroughfares at no extra cost to the
Employer.
3. Access to the work sites shall be maintained by the Contractor at all times and he shall
take all necessary steps to ensure the safety of persons on the sites.
New Jahra Hospital
4. All construction operations and site established facilities shall be confined within the
site boundaries as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
and the relevant authorities. Following such approvals, all such areas shall also be
designated and treated as included within the Site.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding all structures, plant or property in
the vicinity of the site and shall provide all shoring, or supports as may be necessary to
preserve their stability.
6. The Contractor shall also ascertain from the public utility authorities, the positions of all
existing underground services and he shall maintain and protect or divert them as
required.
7. The Contractor shall note that existing underground services are not always in the
exact position and depth as shown on the record drawings. The Contractor shall allow
for the full ramifications of any differences in position and depth.
8. The Ministry will serve the necessary notices to permit construction in private lands in
accordance with the agreed programme of work and the Contract. Entry onto private
lands is not permitted, until permission has been given by the Engineer.
9. The Contractor must use the site only for the construction of the work.
10. It is forbidden to disturb any trees, bushes or plants without permission from the
relevant authorities.
11. Do not display, or permit advertisements to be displayed on site, without the consent
of the Engineer.

B. Reinstatement of Surfaces
1. The Contractor should note that reinstatement is required to all surfaces disturbed
during the construction works and all reinstatement is deemed to be entirely covered
by the Contractor's rates.
2. Temporary reinstatement must be provided and maintained for the duration of the
Contract or until the permanent reinstatement is carried out.
3. All roadways, footpaths, landscaped surfaces, car ports/ sheds and other areas
disturbed by the Contractors construction works shall be restored.
4. The Contractor shall take a sufficient number of digital photographs prior to beginning
construction to ensure that all surfaces and existing conditions are recorded in detail,
to determine the minimum standard of reinstatement required after construction. The
Contractor shall take particular care to photograph all structures and surfaces which
have been constructed, or improved, in front of, or adjacent to, properties.

C. Utility Replacement
1. The Contractor shall note that the following utilities may exist in the project area up to
the limit where the works are to be connected.
HV and LV electrical cables;
Street lighting cables and lamp posts;
Telephone ducts, cables and cabinets;
Potable water mains;
Brackish water mains
Sanitary and Stormwater mains and drains
The above list is indicative and is not to be considered definitive.

Where such utilities are disturbed these are to be reinstated in their existing
condition/s and such reinstatement/s is deemed to be entirely covered by the
Contractors Tender Price.

D. Materials
1. The Contractor shall submit lists of manufacturers and suppliers he proposes to use
for the materials required for this Contract. The Contractors attention is also drawn to
the requirements of Document II (Conditions of Contract) with regard to priority of
National Products.
2. The Contractor must nominate his proposed supplier(s) of medical equipment for
approval. The Contractor is deemed to have priced for the inclusion of alternative
supplier(s) of medical equipment, should approval not be granted. Approval shall not
be unreasonably or vexatiously withheld.
3. See appropriate sections within the technical specifications.
New Jahra Hospital
E. Execution
1. Refer to the relevant sections for the execution of the works
2. Non-Compliant Or Defective Works: When any part of work is known to be, or
suspected to be, defective, the Contractor shall submit proposals as soon as
possible to the Engineer for his approval, for further testing, opening up, inspection,
repair or removal and re-execution.

1.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Any ambiguity, repetition, similarity or confusion shall be clarified by the Engineer in
response to queries raised by the tenderer during the Tender Period.

B. Should the Contractor not solicit clarifications and/or interpretation before tender date this
shall signify full and correct understanding of the tender documents by the Contractor.
Further interpretation or clarification during the contract shall be provided by the Engineer.
The Engineers decision shall be final. (Refer also to Section 01009).

1.10 VALUE ENGINEERING

A. Post contract signature, the Employer may at his sole discretion instruct the Engineer to
carry out one or several Value Engineering exercises. The Contractor shall fully participate in
all Value Engineering exercise(s) and shall be deemed to have priced for such participation.
The Contractor shall deploy such staff as the Engineer requests to participate in the Value
Engineering exercise(s).

B. Any cost saving generated by Value Engineering exercise shall be shared by the Employer
and the Contractor. The Employer shall receive 75% of any saving so generated. The
Contractor shall receive 25% of any saving so generated.

C. Any Value Engineering exercises carried out pre-contract signature will not attract the above
percentages, and all savings generated shall be received by the Employer.

1.11 INTERCHANGEABLE TERMS

A. The terms Employer, Client, Owner are interchangeable and shall mean Amiri Diwan.

B. The terms Amiri Diwan, Ministry of Health, MOH are interchangeable and shall mean the
Employer.

C. The terms Engineer, Engineers Representative are interchangeable and shall mean M/s. Pan
Arab Consulting Engineers (PACE)

D. The terms Tenderer, Contractor are interchangeable and shall mean both the firms
submitting the tender, and the firm appointed to execute the works.

1.12 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

A. The design programme has also been challenging, and although largely complete, some
elements of design remain outstanding.

B. Completion of outstanding design is termed design development.

C. The Contractor is responsible for all design development, and for all ramifications arising
from design development.

D. The lump sum tender figure submitted by the Contractor shall include the full costs of
executing all design development. Inter alia this shall include employing in house designers
and/or internationally recognized external specialist consultant designers. The Contractor
shall submit all design development to the Engineer for approval. The Contractors lump
sum tender figure is deemed to include all necessary re-design development work
necessitated by the Engineers comments.
New Jahra Hospital
E. The lump sum tender figure submitted by the Contractor shall include the full costs of
procuring, constructing, installing, commissioning all elements of work generated by the
design development process. Such elements shall be highlighted in the Tender Adjustment
Schedule.

F. The Contractor is deemed to be full cognizant of all programme aspects of design
development. All design development, and all ramifications arising from design development
must be incorporated into the project programme. No claim whatsoever, whether for
extension of time, acceleration, etc., shall be entertained.

G. Full cooperation by the Employer and by the Engineer shall be given during the design
development process. Similarly the Contractor shall also give full cooperation during the
design development process.

H. Tenderers all pre-qualified by achieving or exceeding high standards set by the Employer
and the Engineer. A significant part of such pre-qualification is an established pedigree of
hospital and medical facility construction. The Contractor shall therefore be deemed to be
expert in hospital construction, and to possess the deep understanding and knowledge
necessary to develop the design and to construct the project within the acknowledged
challenging constraints. No claim whatsoever based upon a lack of knowledge, expertise or
understanding shall be entertained.

I. The Contractor is deemed to accept and embrace the transfer of risk (from the Employer to
the Contractor) associated with design development.

1.13 DESIGN, BUILD, AND EQUIP SPECIALIZED AREAS

A. Notwithstanding the design development requirement for the whole project, Specialized
Areas shall be Design, Build and Equip, refer to Section 012600 Contract Modification
Procedures.

B. There is a full risk transfer for Specialized Areas (from the Employer to the Contractor). The
Contractor is deemed to accept and embrace this full risk transfer.

1.14 WORKING IN PARTNERSHIP

A. Due to the challenging project constraints, the Employer and the Engineer are committed to
working in partnership with the Contractor. The Contractor is deemed to share and to
reciprocate this partnership working.

B. Partnership working shall include, but not be limited to, the sharing of information,
knowledge and expertise, early problem identification, joint problem solving, accurate and
timely reporting, joint focus on quality, programme and budget.

C. The Engineer site supervision personnel shall be deployed in multiple and/or extended shifts,
to ensure collaborative working with the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/012100-1 Allowances
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 012100

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1. Selected materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by
allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and
to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional
information is available for evaluation. Additional requirements will be issued by
Variation Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Provisional item allowances.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 012600 - Contract Modification Procedures; specifies procedures for
submitting and handling Variation Orders.

1.02 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Engineers
Representative of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system
described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At the Engineers Representative request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in
making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Following Engineers instruction to purchase products and systems selected by the Engineer
from the designated supplier.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
approved by the Engineer.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Refer to the Schedule of Rates and Bills of Quantities.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/012600-1 Contract Modification
New Jahra Hospital Procedures
SECTION 012600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and
processing contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 012900 : Payment Procedures for administrative procedures governing
applications for payment.
2. Section 013300 : Submittal Procedures for requirements for the Contractors
Construction Schedule.
3. Section 016300 : Product Substitution Procedures for administrative procedures
for handling requests for alternative and substitutions made after
award of the Contract.

1.02 GENERAL PRINCIPLES

A. Any items arising from the design development process are deemed to be included in the
Contractors lump sum tender, and as such, variations orders for the same shall not be
issued.

B. The project team of the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor shall jointly strive to
execute the project with zero variation orders being required, and zero variation orders being
issued.

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Engineer or Engineers Representative will issue instructions authorizing minor changes
in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.04 VARIATION ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Employer-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Engineer or Engineers Representative will issue
a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the
Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or
revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal requests issued by the Engineer or Engineers Representative are for
information only. Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in
progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost
necessary to execute the change to the Engineers Representative for the
Employers review.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work
will have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications
to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change
to the Engineers Representative.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
Amiri Diwan III-2/012600-2 Contract Modification
New Jahra Hospital Procedures
2. Include a remeasurement of quantities for the effected work and unit rates, with the
total amount indicated. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
3. Comply with requirements in Section Substitutions if the proposed change
required substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use forms provided by the Engineer for Variation Order Proposals.

1.05 ALLOWANCES

A. Unit Rate Adjustment: For unit rates cost adjustment refer to applicable clauses in
Document II-1 Legal Clauses and Conditions and Document II-2 Particular Conditions.

B. Quantities: The Employer reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place
by independent quantity survey, measure or count.

C. Notification: Refer to Document II-1 General Conditions Clause 52(6) Procedure for Claims
for giving notice of intention to claim. A claim shall mean any additional sum not included in
the Lump Sum Contract Price.

1.06 SITE WORKS INSTRUCTION

A. Site Works Instruction: The site work instruction signed by the Employer and issued by the
Engineer or Engineers Representative instructs the Contractor to proceed with a variation in
the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Variation Order.
1. The site works instruction contains a complete description of the change in the
Work.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time, quantity and unit rate basis of work
required by the Site Works Instruction.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.07 VARIATION ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the Employers approval of a Proposal Request, the Engineers Representative will
issue a Variation Order for signatures of the Employer, Engineer and the Contractor.

B. Variation Order Form: Use forms provided by the Engineer for Variation Orders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/012900-1 Payment Procedures
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 012900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process applications for payment.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that related to this section:
1. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures

1.02 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments
as certified by the Engineer and paid for by the Employer.
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment-Application Times: Refer to Document II-2 Particular Conditions Clause 60(5).

C. Payment-Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Engineer for Applications for
Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include signature and seal
execution by a person authorised to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The
Engineers Representative will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Work executed and approved shall be scheduled as per the Bills of Quantities with
additional columns for quantity executed and value executed.
2. Include amounts of approved Variation Orders issued prior to the last day of the
construction period covered by the application.

E. Transmittals: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to the Engineers Representative by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the
Engineers Representative.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractors Construction Schedule.
4. Schedule of products.
5. Submittal schedule.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of
the Work.
8. Initial progress report.
9. Report of preconstruction meeting.
10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
11. Performance and advance payment bank guarantee.
12. Initial settlement surveyed and damaged report, if required.
13. The Engineers site supervision fees.
Amiri Diwan III-2/012900-2 Payment Procedures
New Jahra Hospital
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1. This application shall reflect certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Employer occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this
application include:
a. Contract Closeout Requirements.
b. Project Record Documents.
c. Warranties and Bank Guarantees.
d. Maintenance Agreements.
e. Test/adjust/balance records.
f. Startup performance reports.
g. Final cleaning.
h. Final progress photographs.
i. List of incomplete Work recognized as exceptions to Engineers Certificate
of Substantial Completion.

H. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of contract closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue
delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Employer.
6. Tax clearance certificate of Ministry of Finance.
7. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013100-1 Project Management
New Jahra Hospital and Coordination
SECTION 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes: administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. General project coordination procedure.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Cleaning and protection.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to these Sections:
1. Section 013110 : Project Meetings for progress meetings, coordination
meetings, and pre-installation conferences.
2. Section 013300 : Submittal Procedures for preparing and submitting the
Contractors Construction Schedule.
3. Section 016100 : Basic Product Requirements for coordinating general
installation.
4. Section 017220 : Field Engineering specifies procedures for field engineering
services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
5. Section 017700 : Closeout Procedures for coordinating contract closeout.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. General: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work.
Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications
that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other
components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction
activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.
2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components
to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved
outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as
required notices, reports and attendance at meetings.
5. Prepare similar memoranda for the employer and separate Contractors where
coordination of their work is required.
6. Coordinate with other Contractor(s) employed by the Employer, for all activities
interfacing or interfering with this work, in particular on the common boundary limits.

B. Specifications: The arrangement of the specifications into Divisions, Sections, Clauses, Sub-
clauses and paragraphs, shall not control the division of the work among subcontractors, nor
establish the extent of Work to be performed by any particular trade or subcontractor. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of all works including that
required between different trades and different subcontractors, suppliers, utility Employers,
governmental authorities, etc.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress
of the work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Contract close-out activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out
with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated in the Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by
separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of
space for efficient installation of different components.
1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate shop drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures".
4. Refer to Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16 Electrical for specific
coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.

B. Details Of Contractor's Technical Site Staff:
1. The provision by the Tenderer of names and details of the Contractors senior core
staff and other technical staff that will be provided if this Tender is awarded to him.
The details shall be stated on the forms provided in Document I Tendering
Procedures.
2. The Engineers Representative shall have the right to interview any of the
Contractors proposed staff before final approval is given and not withstanding any
such final approval, the Engineers Representative retains the right to instruct the
removal forthwith of any person employed by the Contractor in or about the Works
who, in the opinion of the Engineers Representative, misconducts himself, or is
incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or where
employment is otherwise considered by the Engineers Representative to be
undesirable.
3. Each site staff member as referred to hereunder shall possess a bachelor's degree in
a related Engineering field from an acceptable University and a current membership
of Kuwait Society of Engineers.
4. These staff members shall be on Site on a full time basis unless exempted by the
Engineers Representative. Their absence shall be subject to a penalty as stipulated
in Contract Document. These staff members must read, write and converse
proficiently in English.
5. The list of staff designations does not preclude the Engineers Representative from
instructing the Contractor to provide additional site staff at no additional cost and
subject to an absence penalty as stipulated in Document I.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the
substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling
and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage
or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components
to assure operability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such
exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressure.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Dust
7. Air contamination or pollution
8. Water.
9. Solvents.
10. Chemicals
11. Light.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Birds.
19. Combustion.
20. Electrical current.
21. High-speed operation.
22. Improper lubrication.
23. Unusual wear or other misuse.
24. Contract between incompatible materials.
25. Destructive testing.
26. Misalignment.
27. Excessive weathering.
28. Unprotected storage.
29. Improper shipping or handling.
30. Theft.
31. Vandalism.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013110-1 Project Meetings
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 013110

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Design work meeting.
2. Preconstruction conferences.
3. Preinstallation conferences.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Coordination meetings.

1. Section 013100 : Project Management and Coordination for procedures for
coordinating project meetings with other construction activities.
2. Section 013300 : Submittal Procedures for submitting the Contractors
construction schedule.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-Construction Meeting: (kick-off meeting) Will be held within seven (7) days of receipt of
the order to commence the works and should be attended by the Contractor and his major
subcontractors together with the Engineers Representative and Employers Representative.
The meeting will be chaired by the Engineers Representative.

B. Agenda: The agenda for the pre-construction meeting will be provided to the Contractor by
the Engineers Representative with a minimum three (3) days prior to the meeting. The
agenda will include but not limited to:
1. Contractors organization arrangements.
2. Channels and procedures for communication.
3. Construction schedule including sequence of critical work.
4. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies.
5. Processing of shop drawings and other data to be submitted to the Engineers
Representative for review.
6. Processing of instructions and variations orders.
7. Rules and Regulations governing performance of work.
8. Procedures for safety, first aid, security, quality control, etc.
9. Procedures for reporting and monitoring progress, cost, materials, labour and
equipment.
10. Parking availability.
11. Office, work, and storage areas.
12. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
13. Housekeeping.
14. Working hours.

1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity
that requires coordination with other construction.

B. Attendees: The Contractor, Subcontractor, representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
or their agents involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration
with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the
meeting. Advise the Engineers Representative of scheduled meeting dates and agenda.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including
requirements for the following:
New Jahra Hospital
a. Contract Documents.
b. Authorities Approval.
c. Options.
d. Related Variation Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries
g. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
h. Review of mock-ups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedule.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturers recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Governing regulations.
t. Safety.
u. Inspecting and testing requirements.
v. Required performance results.
w. Recording requirements.
x. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each
conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the
meeting to everyone concerned, including the Engineers Representative.
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.04 PROGRESS AND COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Schedule and Coordination Meetings: Job site progress meetings will be held twice each
month, or as instructed by the Engineer, to review the Contractors Construction Schedule
and to discuss work progress and coordination. Attendees at this meeting shall include the
Employers Representative and Engineers Representative, the Contractor, approved
Subcontractors and other direct Contractors as required. The job site progress meetings
shall be convened as directed by the Engineers Representative. Such meetings will be
chaired by the Engineers Representative.

B. Pre-Meeting Submittals: Three days before each meeting the Contractor must submit the
following information to the Engineers Representative:
1. List of completed activities.
2. List of current activities, with an estimate of time required for completion.
3. List of any variations in starting dates and duration of outstanding activities from
planned dates and times.
4. Percentage completion in every activity.
5. List of activities that the Contractor plans to start during the following period.
6. Three (3) back-up copies on CDs.
7. Other information required by the Engineers Representative.
8. Shop drawings submittals status log.
9. Material submittals status log.
10. Material Procurement status log.

1.04 SUBCONTRACTORS SITE MEETINGS

Hold meetings with appropriate subcontractors and suppliers shortly before main site
meetings to facilitate accurate reporting of progress. The Engineers Representative may
attend such meetings at his discretion.
New Jahra Hospital
1.05 TOP TEAM MEETINGS

A. In the spirit of partnership, a top team of six shall be created, which shall consist of two very
senior representatives from each of the Employer, the Engineer, and the Contractor.

B. The Employer shall host top team meetings on site eight times per year (months 1, 2, 4, 5, 7,
8, 10 & 11). The Contractor shall host and fund top team meetings off site in a restaurant
four times per year (quarterly months 3, 6, 9, 12)

C. The top team shall review the project, and shall attempt to amicably defuse conflict and
resolve problems. The guiding principle of such meetings shall be the maintenance and
advancement of the spirit of partnership and the collaborative approach.

D. Typically minutes of top team meetings will not be taken, but when requested by two or three
parties, minutes or a distillation of outcomes will be taken by the Engineer.

1.06 MINUTES OF MEETINGS

A. The proceedings of all meetings (except subcontractor meetings) shall be recorded and
minutes distributed by the Engineers Representative to all parties present or concerned by
not later than the beginning of the next meeting. Such minutes, when accepted, shall be
binding upon all parties.


PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not used.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013140-1 Mechanical and Electrical
New Jahra Hospital Coordinators
SECTION 013140

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
coordinating construction operations including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Mechanical and electrical coordinator.
2. Submittals.
3. Coordination required.
4. Coordination documents.
5. Coordination of submittals.
6. Coordination of substitutions and modifications.
7. Observation of Work.
8. Documentation.
9. Equipment start-up.
10. Inspection and acceptance of equipment.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Section 011100 - Summary of the Works
2. Section 012600 - Contract Modification Procedures
3. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination
4. Section 013110 - Project Meetings
5. Section 013260 - Scheduling of Construction
6. Section 013330 - Shop, Record, As-Built Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
7. Section 016100 - Basic Product Requirements: Product list
8. Section 016300 - Product Substitution Procedures
9. Section 017500 - Starting and Adjusting: Starting of systems, Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing of Systems, Systems Demonstration.
10. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures
11. Section 017870 - Product Warranties
12. Section 017880 - Project Record Documents
13. Section 018300 - Operation and Maintenance

1.02 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK COORDINATORS

A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of sufficient number of persons having
graduation in any MEP engineering discipline with fifteen years experience in design,
engineering, and field coordination for the type of mechanical and electrical work required for
this Project, for the duration of the Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Submit name and resume with qualifications for Coordinator before starting work.

B. Submit coordination and composite drawings and schedules prior to submitting shop
drawings, product data, and samples.

C. All other tasks necessary.

1.04 COORDINATION REQUIRED

A. Coordinate electro-mechanical work of Divisions 2, 11, 12, 14, 15 and 16 and with work of
other divisions.

B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of Products.
C. Conduct meeting among Subcontractors, separate contractors, and others concerned with
the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination
matters in dispute.

D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of Work to be adjusted under
coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of
meetings and reports to concerned parties.

E. All other tasks necessary.

1.05 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of Products for efficient use of
available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to identify potential conflicts.

B. Prepare a master schedule to identify responsibilities under each section of Divisions 1
through 16 of the Contract Documents for activities which directly relate to this work,
including submittals and temporary utilities.

C. Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of
equipment.

D. Maintain documents for the duration of the Work, recording changes due to site instructions,
modifications or adjustments.

E. After Engineer Representatives review of original and revised documents, reproduce and
distribute copies to concerned parties.

F. All other tasks necessary.

1.06 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Review Design Work, Shop Drawings, Composite Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for
compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with work. Transmit for review,
copy reviewed documents to Engineers Representative.

B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors.

C. Check compatibility with equipment and Work of other sections, electrical characteristics,
and operational control requirements.

D. Check motor voltages and control characteristics.

E. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of pneumatic switches, and relays.

F. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams.

G. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections.

H. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents.

I. All other tasks necessary.

1.07 COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Review proposals and requests from Subcontractors and separate contractors.

B. Verify compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with Work and Products of
other sections.

C. Submit with recommendation for action.

D. All other tasks necessary.

1.08 OBSERVATION OF WORK

A. Observe Work for compliance with Contract Documents.

B. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects; promptly submit.

1.09 DOCUMENTATION

A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record:
1. Specification section number, Product, and name of Subcontractor.
2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector.
3. Name of manufacturers representative present.
4. Date, time, and duration of tests.
5. Type of tests, and results.
6. Retesting required.

B. Assemble background documentation for dispute and claim settlement by Engineer and

C. Submit copies of documentation to Engineers Representative upon request.


1.10 EQUIPMENT START-UP

A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operation
condition as required by Section 01750 Starting of Systems.

B. Observe star-up and adjustments; record time and date of start-up, and results.

C. Observe equipment demonstrations to Employer; record times and additional information
required for operation and maintenance manuals.


1.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready for
operation.

B. Assist Engineers Representative with review. Prepare list of items to be completed and
corrected.

C. All other tasks necessary.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013210-1 Construction Photographs
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 013210

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for construction photographs.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures specifies general requirements for
submitting construction photographs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Prints: Submit 4 albums with colour prints of each view required directly to the Engineer
within 7 days of taking photographs. The Engineers Representative will distribute the
albums as follows:
1. Employer: Two prints of each view for the Employers permanent record.
2. Engineers Representative: Two prints of each view for the Engineers
Representative file.

B. Electronic Media: With each submittal, include three (3) Compact Disks (CD), in protective
cases, identified by date photographs were taken.

C. All expenses in connection with the photographs shall be born by the Contractor.

D. Copy Right: All photographs shall become the property of the Employer and copyright shall
be rested in him. Photographs may only be reproduced after written permission has been
authorised.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engage a suitable experienced and qualified photographer to take photographs during
construction.

B. Photographers Qualifications: Photographer shall be an individual of established reputation
who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer for not less than five (5)
years.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Nobody shall be allowed to take photograph without obtaining
prior written permission from the Engineers Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC COPIES

A. Electronic Media: Digital photographs taken with a suitable digital camera complying to the
following specification:
1. Minimum 5 Mega Pixels resolution
2. File format Jpeg or Tiff
3. Monitor LCD for viewing
4. Built-in flash for illumination
5. SD Card compatible
6. Non-Digital zoom (minimum 5X)

B. Prints: Provide album mounted colour prints size A4 on high quality gloss photocopy paper
gauge 120.
Amiri Diwan III-2/013210-2 Construction Photographs
New Jahra Hospital
C. Identification: Provide an attached narrative underneath the photograph indicating:
1. Name of the Project.
2. Date the photograph was taken.
3. Vantage Point: Description of vantage point, in terms of location, direction (by
compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
4. Vantage Point: Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction
of shot on a key plan of the site and building. Indicate elevation (story height).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Before starting construction, take photographs of the site and surrounding properties from
different points of view, as selected by the Engineer.
1. Take photographs in sufficient number as required by the Engineer to show existing
conditions adjacent to the property before starting Work.
2. Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining the property in
sufficient detail to record accurately the physical conditions at the start of
construction.

3.02 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Associated Services: Cooperate with the photographers work. Provide auxiliary services as
requested, including access to the Project Site and use of temporary facilities including
temporary lighting.

B. Take 30 colour project photographs views per building monthly in accordance with
requirements indicated, to best show the status of construction and progress since taking
previous photographs.
1. Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cut-off date associated
with each Application for Payment.
2. Vantage Points: Comply with the Engineer directions concerning desired vantage
points for shots.
3. Vantage Points: During each of the following construction phases, take at least 1
shot of each building from the same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse
sequence as follows:
a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction.
b. Above-grade structural framing.
c. Exterior building enclosures.
d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion.
e. External works.

C. The Contractor shall allow all reasonable facilities for the responsible Government Authorities
to take photographs and films or televise the works at no additional expense to the
Employer.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013260-1 Scheduling of Construction
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 013260

SCHEDULING OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the critical path method
(CPM) of scheduling and reporting progress of the Work.
1. Refer to the Conditions of Contract for definitions and specific dates of Contract
Time.
2. The work under this clause consists of the scheduling and reporting procedures
required to be carried out by the Contractor in conjunction with the progress of the
project.

1. Section 013110 - Project Meetings specifies requirements for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes.
2. Section 013300 -Submittal Procedures specifies requirements for submitting the
Submittal Schedule.
3. Section 014500 -Quality Control specifies requirements for submitting inspection
and test reports.
4. Section 016100 -Basic Product Requirements specifies requirements for
submitting the list of products.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Critical Path Method (CPM): A method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships and network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.

B. The Design and Construction Programme depicts in general the key activities and milestones
and the duration allotted for the same. The Contractor shall be required to plan, perform and
coordinate his works with that of other direct Contractors (if any) to meet the time
requirements of the project.

C. Design and Construction Schedule(s): The Contractors developed schedule(s) for execution
of the Contract that meets the contract requirements for the performance of this contract
and the requirements of the Design and Construction Program.

D. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall project duration.

E. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing the activities and
activity relationship.

F. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction
schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can
be started.

G. Event: An event is the starting or ending point of an activity.

H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
New Jahra Hospital
I. Float is the measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float time belongs to
the Employer.
1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely
affecting the early start of the following activity.
2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned project completion date.

1.03 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting adequate planning data and acceptable
cost distribution information for the development and maintenance of the Contractors cost
loaded construction schedule (hereinafter referred to as the Design and Construction
Schedule, all to the approval of the Engineer as detailed hereafter.

B. The Contractor shall use a computerized precedence Diagram CPM technique in preparing
the Design and Construction Schedule. The software proposed to be used by the
Contractor for the CPM is to be approved by the Engineer prior to generation of the
construction schedule.

C. The Contractor shall develop the design and construction schedule demonstrating fulfillment
of all contract requirements by cost loading design and construction schedule activities with
the further construction activities hammocked within the milestone activities. Each milestone
activity should represent the related design and construction activities hammocked within it
by using true connections to reflect the progress on the milestone activity as measured on
the hammocked design and construction activities. Summary collection activities are not
accepted as hammocking tools.

D. The design and construction schedule shall be updated fortnightly, or when required by the
Engineer at joint meetings with the Engineer, the Contractor, Subcontractors, and other
direct contractors who may be required to attend.

E. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this section shall be grounds for
recommendation by the Engineer that no further progress payment shall be made until the
contractor is in compliance.

F. Each revision of the design and construction schedule shall be signed by the duly authorised
representative of the Contractor and these documents, upon approval by the Engineer, shall
thereupon become incorporated in to the contract documents of the project.


A. Contractors Representative: The Contractor shall designate a Scheduling Engineer who
shall be responsible for the content and development of the Contractors Design and
Construction schedule. This representative shall have direct control and complete authority
to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of the Design and
Construction Schedule requirements and such authority shall not be interrupted throughout
the duration of the contract.

B. Qualified Scheduling Engineer with ten (10) years experience and in compliance with
requirements of Contract Document.

1.05 CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT

A. The contractor shall meet with the Engineer to review the scheduling requirement of the
project. This review will include the specific requirements of the Contractor regarding
restraints and milestones, including the interrelation with other direct contractors, as they
relate to the overall design and construction programme. The Contractor will present
restraints, if any, foreseen by himself in the proposed Design and Construction Schedule that
may affect the design and construction programme.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Preliminary Schedule: Submit a preliminary schedule within 14 days of the Date of
Enterprise. The preliminary schedule shall outline activities for the first 60 days of
construction. Include a skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work with the preliminary
schedule.
1. Include each significant design and construction activity. Coordinate each activity
with other activities. Schedule each design and construction activity in proper
sequence.
2. Indicate completion of the Work on the date established for Substantial Completion,
unless the Employer agrees otherwise.

C. Within Forty five (45) days of the Date of Enterprise the contractor shall submit for the
Engineers approval, the design and construction schedule in a bar-chart time-scaled format,
to show the sequence and interdependence of activities required for complete performance
of all items of work under the contract or portion thereof. Further, this schedule shall reflect
the milestones required by the contract documents. In preparing the design and
construction schedule, the contractor shall:
1. Exercise care to produce a clear, legible, and accurate diagram. Activities related to
specific areas of the project shall be grouped on the diagram for ease,
understanding, and simplification. The diagram shall show the following for each
construction activity, where applicable.
a. Concise description of the work
b. Early start and finish dates
c. Number of working days
d. Manpower loading
e. Cost loading
f. Equipment & Machinery Loading
g. Total Float of each activity.
2. Include any trade or material restraints to indicate the movement of trades who are
performing major work.
3. Should the Contractors scheduling software allow open ends to be shown, critical or
not critical, then the option of not critical will be adopted.
4. Demonstrate work activities in the Contractors Design and Construction Schedule
to have maximum duration of fifteen (15) days with not more than 2% exceeding
these limits, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer except as to non
construction activities (such as design work, procurement of materials, delivery of
equipment, etc.).
5. The Design and Construction Schedule developed above shall not be changed
throughout the duration of the project without getting prior approval from the
Engineer.

D. At monthly intervals the Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval, a detailed
schedule developed from the approved Design and Construction Schedule, covering a
period of the next 90 days and relating the contractors daily work activities.

E. Every two weeks the Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval, a detailed schedule
covering the next 15 days activities.

F. The Contractor shall submit the undermentioned supporting data with the submittal of his
Design and Construction Schedule and any successive updates and revisions in an
approved format by the Engineer.
1. The proposed number of working days per week.
2. The holidays, and other non-working days (except Fridays), including days lost due
to diminished productivity during Ramadan, observed during the duration of the
contract (by date).
3. The planned number of shifts per day.
4. The number of hours per shift.
5. The planned usage of major construction equipment on the site, on a monthly basis.
6. The planned procurement and delivery of materials on a monthly basis.
7. The average weekly manpower (e.g. number of carpenters, steel fixers, labourers,
etc.) usage for each trade to be employed for the works considering activities,
duration and production rates.
New Jahra Hospital
8. Explanation of all changes in logic in duration, manpower, and equipment.
9. Actual start dates and completion dates of activities already completed.
10. Computer generated text reports listing activities with their early and late start and
finish dates sorted by activity number, by early start and by criticality.
11. Productivity rates for all items of work shall identify the basic of production for
labours to justify the attached duration of each activity with type and quantity.

G. Failure to include any element of the works required for the performance of the contract shall
not excuse the contractor from completing all work required within any applicable
completion date of each phase or the whole of the project, notwithstanding the Engineers
approval of the Design and Construction Schedule.

1.06 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit an updated Design and Construction Schedule when the
monthly payment is due.

B. Acceptance of the updated construction schedule and all supporting data is contingent upon
compliance with all other articles of this clause and any other previous agreements or
requirements made with or by the Engineer or his representative.

1.07 ADJUSTMENT AND REVISIONS

A. The contract duration will be adjusted only in accordance with the provisions of clause 44
(Document II-1) legal clauses and conditions and its amendments in Document II-2 particular
conditions. In the event the Contractor requests an adjustment of the contract duration, he
shall furnish such justification and supporting data as the Engineer may deem necessary for
evaluation by the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor will be entitled to an
extension of time for completion. Submission of proof based on revised activity, logic,
duration, and costs is obligatory with any request.

B. The Contractor shall submit with every request, his revised Design and Construction
Schedule whenever the actual field progress of the work does not conform to the latest
approved Design and Construction Schedule in force at the time of the alleged delay.

C. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of a request for extension of the
Contractor will be informed his decisions.

D. When the Engineer has not yet made a decision as to any extension of time, and the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be reflected in the design and
construction programme, and should the Contractor choose to reflect the requested amount
of time adjustment in this Design and Construction Schedule, he will do so at his own risk.
Such reflection of time adjustment shall only serve the purpose of monitoring the schedule of
the works until such time as the Employer has made the final determination as to any
extension of time. The Contractor will revise his Design and Construction Schedule
thereafter in accordance with the Engineers decision and act and perform the works
accordingly.

E. The Contractor shall submit, as requested by the Engineer, a revision to the Design and
Construction Schedule for any of the following reasons:
1. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are encountered which
make replanning or re-scheduling of the work necessary.
2. When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and progress of the
works as being performed in the field.

1.08 SCHEDULING SYSTEM

A. The Engineer has established Primavera Project Manager software (for windows) as the
standard scheduling application for this project. The latest version of this software shall be
used to develop all CPM design and construction schedules. The Design and Construction
Schedules information and supported data to be provided on data diskettes compatible for
use on the Engineer computer system.
New Jahra Hospital
1.09 SUBMITTALS

A. All Design and Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, shall
consist of the following:
1. Complete blue line set of diagram from the last approved Design and Construction
Schedule marked up in red showing all revisions and changes in accordance with the
monthly meeting and signed by the Contractor.
2. Colour prints of each diagram and with copies of scheduling reports.
3. Copies of supporting data.
4. Back-up copies on CDs.
5. 3 Coloured copies in A0 or A3 size as required and approved by the Engineer.

B. The Contractor has to submit the following reports:
1. Monthly status report which shows detailed activities, actual start and completion
dates, percent complete or remaining duration, and any other requirement by the
Engineer.
2. Material monthly status report which includes material description, unit, material
delivered (during the month, accum), material planned (during the month, accum),
adjusted by V.O., variance (quantity, %) and any other requirements requested by
the Engineer.
3. Weekly Manpower Report that includes the following in accordance with the
approval of the Engineer:
a. Profession
b. Average Number
c. Average working days
d. Average working hours
e. Total man-hours
f. Total man-days.
4. Weekly production report which includes the following:
a. Description of major work items
b. Contract quantity
c. Quantity installed during the week
d. Quantity installed to-date
e. Percent of the above
The number and type of the description of the work items shall be as required by the
Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION Not used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013290-1 Submittal Requirements
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 013290

SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

This section to be read in conjunction with all other related Documents:

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 INTRODUCTION

A. Under this section and together with its Tender, the Tenderer shall provide detailed Technical
and Financial information as set out herein.

B. The Contractor is required to appoint for the full duration of the project, a specialized
international consultant firm experienced in HealthCare facilities and the medical equipment
and FF&E associated therewith, having previous and relevant experience in the procurement
and fit out of facilities comparable in size , complexity and scale of the project . All
consultants must be registered with Consultants Department in the State of Kuwait at the
time of contract

C. Should the Contractor intend to engage an international subcontractor for any specialized
work or any other work(s), then details of such participation shall be submitted along with the
Tender.

1.02 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL

A. The Technical Proposal shall fully detail the Tenderer's approach in dealing with major
technical matters associated with the project, in compliance with the requirements of the
tender documents shall explain, but not be limited to, the following:
Challenges of the project.
Understanding of the project.
Project approach, methodology and deliverables.
Technical and professional considerations
Statutory approvals
Inter-disciplinary coordination
Project implementation including fast track approach to construction including
resources.
Overall project Management of Construction, Equipment and Furniture Installation, and
Operation and Maintenance Works.
Programming considerations.
Project risk analysis
Recommendations for mitigation of major risks

B. Specialized Areas are departments and/or areas within departments, and/or rooms within
areas within departments that have only been assigned net areas in the Functional Space
Program. No finishes, doors, electromechanical guidelines, or room data sheets have been
developed for these areas. All architectural designs and drawings for such areas in this
documents are indicative not definitive.

C. It is the responsibility and obligation of the Contractor to fully review, verify plan, price, and
provide fully integrated Design/Build/Equip/ and Maintain turnkey solution for each
Specialized area to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Contractor shall procure and
provide a fully integrated turnkey solution for each and every Specialized Area in such detail
which renders the Specialized Area ready for operations to the satisfaction and approval of
the Employer.

D. The Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Study, Research (using international codes and established best practices),verify
understand, and comprehend the intent of each Specialized Area, using the narrative
description reflected in this Document as guidance as to the intended use, in order to
establish an executive understanding of its intended use within the overall context of the
New Jahra Hospital
department, service, or hospital wide (as is the case, for example, in the Pharmacy) in
which it is located.
2. Submit any specific questions requiring clarification to the Employer within the
designated period, related to the complement of clinical, clinical support, non-clinical
support, administrative services, workflow processes, space programs, system
integration, finishes, medical and non-medical Furnitures, Fixtures and Equipment
(FF&E) requirements, Information and Communication Technology (ICT) requirements,
etc. that the Employer requires the Contractor to provide.
3. Achieve a full and comprehensive executive understanding and analysis of the intent of
the Employer for each Specialized area and his obligations and responsibilities in
relationship to Specialized areas in general, and each and every Specialized Area in
particular, is obligatory for realizing the required turnkey solution required by the
Employer and for applying that information in compiling his financial proposal when
pricing this Document

E. For each and every Specialized Area, the Contractor shall present to the employer within
detailed narrative description and detailed schedules reflecting:
1. Definition of the Specialized Area, along with a detailed scope and analysis of its
intended clinical, clinical support, non-clinical support, administrative/management
functions, and overall impact on department in which this Specialized Area is
incorporated as well as the overall hospital. For all Specialized Areas in which patient
care interventions will occur, list all the clinical interventions using an internationally
recognized clinical interventions classification system (ICD, DRG, CPT, or similar).
Submit to the Employer for review and approval and instructions before proceeding to
next stage.
2. Submit fully Functional Space Programs, Workflow Processes, Finishes, Doors, and
Door Hardware Schedules, Electromechanical and ICT Schedules, and Room Data
Sheets covering all Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment (medical and non-medical), as
well as any further documentation that the Employer could request for their review and
decision making. Present to Employer for review and approval and instructions before
proceeding to next stage.
3. Develop a Preliminary Schematic Design for the area, as required, showing respective
components and rooms in such a way which enables achievement of the intent of the
Employer for that area. Submit to Employer for that area. Submit to Employer for review
and approval and instructions before proceeding to next stage.

F. Based on the Employer approved medical and non-medical manufacturers of selection
required to meet the intent of the Employer for the function of the area, the Contractor shall
identify all the required finishes, doors, door hardware, together with all best
practices/evidence based design engineering requirements needed to enable the area to
meet its intended use. Present to Employer for review and approval and instructions before
proceeding to next stage.

G. Develop the Room Data Sheets for each component of the particular area to meet, as a
minimum, the level of detail reflected in the room data sheets included in this tender
document. Develop a full and detailed Furniture, Fixture, and Equipment package for the
intended area, together with the manufacturers literature, and submit to Employer for review
and approval and instructions before proceeding to next stage. All Furniture, Fixtures, and
Equipment (medical and non-medical) items to be procured shall as a minimum, meet the
standards specifications, terms and conditions outlined in relevant section of this document.

H. Upon officially receiving the Employers approval on all of the above noted stages, the
Contractor shall undertake full review, modification as needed, or reproduction as required,
to the full list of technical drawings, layouts, load calculations, and full documentation
required to realize the Specialized Area to the satisfaction and Approval of the Employer.
Such list include, but are not limited to, Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT,
Interior Design, load calculations, etc. together with any other technical document and/or
drawing, and/or drawing and/or perspective required by the Employer.

I. The Contractor shall hold and retain sole responsibility and risk for the impact that
Specialized Areas have on the overall Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing systems, if any, as
New Jahra Hospital
reflected in the Documents and shall be deemed to have priced for the full ramifications
thereof.

1.03 TECHNICAL CAPABILITY

A. The Tenderer shall fully and effectively describe its technical capabilities to undertake the
Project. References should be given of the projects of similar nature done and challenges
faced during their execution. Technical resources available to meet the project requirements
are to be described. The Tenderer's capabilities to make use of latest technologies are to be
outlined for material sourcing, procurement and handling, work methods and use of
equipment, manpower utilization and overall site administration. The Tenderer must
demonstrate technical capability in all technical respects to execute and manage this project
in a timely manner and in compliance with the quality expected.

1.04 ORGANIZATION CHART

A. The Tenderer shall submit a complete organization chart for construct, equip, furnish, operate
and maintain activities, detailing various staff positions with authorities, responsibilities and
job descriptions. This will include the staff of consultants / sub-consultants and contractor/
sub-contractors, including interaction with the Tenderers supervisory and management staff.
The local and overseas firms involved in the execution of the project shall be clearly identified
with their place/s of work and proportion of work distribution.

1.05 METHODOLOGY

A. The Tenderer shall submit a detailed methodology explaining his approach in fulfilling the
Project requirements with regard to the construction, equipment, furnishing, operation and
maintenance of the works, quality control and time control and overall site management to
achieve efficient and timely completion of the Project. The methodology shall include all
coordination and control systems including, but not limited to, following:
Planning schedule Control
Document Control
Communication Control
Client Criteria Compliance
Local Authorities Code Compliance
Coordination Meeting Strategy
Construction Quality Control
Financial Plan & Cash Flow
Procurement planning & control
Furniture , furnishing and equipment implementation strategy
Project closeout and handover
Operation of works
Maintenance of works

1.06 WORK PROGRAM FOR EXECUTION

A. A general milestone schedule is provided in Document I. The Tenderer shall prepare and
submit with the Technical Proposal a time-based programme to show how the project
phases shall be scheduled, in coordination with the projects execution construction strategy
and the timely procurement of statutory approvals.

B. The Work Program shall be presented in bar chart format (CPM). It shall identify proposed
work tasks or activities for each phase, and show duration of tasks and contacts with
governmental agencies.

C. The program must be logically sequenced, adequately detailed to convey a clear
understanding of the proposed approach, and consistent with current professional practices
and state-of-art analysis.
New Jahra Hospital
1.07 SPECIALIST CONSULTANTS / SUB-CONTRACTORS

A. The Tenderer shall provide names of manufacturers, suppliers, companies, subcontractors
and specialist consultants it proposes to engage during the construction to satisfactorily
deliver the project. List of work done with value of each, shall be submitted. It is expected
that highly qualified and experienced parties will be selected and offered for approval by the
Engineer. Such approval shall not limit, diminish or in any way transfer the project risk away
from the Contractor.

1.08 CURRICULUM VITAE

A. CVs of all senior personnel involved in the construction shall be submitted. The details to be
included are Name, Nationality, Qualification, Affiliation with Professional Organizations,
Names of Employers, Dates of Employment, Position, Details of Experience and Value of
each project involved in. All senior positions must have at least 15 years experience with a
minimum of Bachelor's Degree in respective disciplines.

B. The Tenderer shall also seek the participation of qualified and experienced Kuwaiti personnel
and shall follow the requirements of the Government of Kuwait's regulations for employment
of Kuwaiti nationals.

1.09 CONSTRUCTION COST

A. The Tenderer shall incorporate in his Tender all expenses such as Mobilization,
Demobilization, labour, Materials, Plant and Equipment, Design Development, Temporary site
facilities, Camp facilities, Transportation, Insurance, Medical facilities, Profit & Overheads and
two years operational Maintenance cost etc. The Construction Cost details shall be
submitted for all elements of Works for which the Tender is submitted as per requirements of
Document III-4 Bills of Quantities, together with breakdown and price analysis.

B. The Tenderer shall consider in its Cost in particular the following elements:
Other Costs:
The Tenderer shall include within his Contract price other Costs not specifically catered for
elsewhere, some of which are listed below:
Testing Costs of materials or any finished works as required by the contract.
Removal of improper materials from the site.
Remedial of any default works executed by the Contractor,
Substitution of any improper materials used at site and rejected by the Engineer.
Any extra-over costs due to night or Friday works or in any other holidays.
Any storing facilities, sheds or temporary structures and any Engineering works related
thereto.
Any safe guarding and security works or facilities.
All the expenses related to statutory, insurance policy, Tender Bond, performance Bond,
renting storage or offices etc.
Design development (design costs and construction costs).

The above list is indicative and not exhaustive. The Contractor shall be deemed to have
priced for all elements necessary to deliver the project to programme.

1.10 OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE COST

A. The Tenderer shall be responsible for satisfactorily maintaining all the Works under the
Contract for a period of two years from the date of Substantial Completion. The Tenderer
shall include in his Contract Price all Costs related to the maintenance period and provide
detailed breakdown. This will include Cost of all Material, Spares, Manpower, Equipment,
Specialist inspection etc.
New Jahra Hospital
1.11 SCHEDULE OF SPECIALIZED AREAS

MAIN HOSPITAL
LIST OF SPECIALIZED AREAS -(Design, Equip and Build)
Contractor to coordinate with Design, Equip and Build contractor and furnish all services
as required to connect to the main HVAC system
Room No. Item code Name
1953 SPA030 ANDROLOGY LAB-ASSISTED REPRODUCTION
1954 SPA030 EMBRYOLOGY LAB-ASSISTED REPRODUCTION
1955 SPA030
ARTIFICIAL INSEMINATION ROOM-ASSISTED
REPRODUCTION
1956 SPA031 C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-CAESARIAN BIRTH ROOM
1957 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-OPERATING ROOM,
GYN&IVF
1958 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-LAPAROSCOPIC
SURGERY,MIS
1959 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-OPERATING
ROOM,SUBSTERILE AREA
1960 SPA031
ROOM,CLEAN & STERILE STORAGE
1961 SPA031
ROOM,EQUIPMENT STORAGE
1962 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-FROZEN SECTION
LABORATORY
1963 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -PACS DIGITAL QUALITY CONTROL AREA
1964 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -DIGITAL ARCHIVING STORAGE ROOM
1965 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -3D WORKSTATION
1966 SPA035 PHARMACY FACILITIES
1967 SPA035 PHARMACY FACILITIES
1968 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE- ANAESTHESIA
INDUCTION ROOM
1969 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-OPERATING ROOM,
MULTISPECIALITY
1970 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE-OPERATING ROOM
CLEAN & STERILE
1971 SPA031
C-SECTION & SURGICAL SUITE - OPERATING
ROOM,SUBSTERILE AREA
1972 SPA031
ROOM,EQUIPMENT STORAGE
1973 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES/DENTAL CS SUITE
1974 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES/DENTAL MECHANICAL ROOM
1975 SPA036
HYPERBARIC OXYGEN THERAPY-OXYGEN THERAPY
ROOM
1976 SPA037
MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES-AUTOMATED DATA
PROCESSING,CONTROL
1977 SPA037
MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES-AUTOMATED DATA
PROCESSING,PROCESSOR AREA

New Jahra Hospital

1978 SPA037
MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES- BLOOD BANK, BLOOD
PRODUCT STORAGE
1979 SPA037 RADIOLOGY -POWER & EQUIPMENT ROOM
1981 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -PACS DIGITAL ARCHIVAL STORAGE ROOM
1982 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -PACS 3D WORKSTATION
1983 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-AUTOMATED DISPENSING
ROBOTS AREA
1984 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-EMERGENCY MEDICATION STAT
COUNTER
1985 SPA035 PHARMACY FACILITIES- DISPENSING STATIONS
1986 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-RECEIVING, BREAKDOWN AND
VERIFICATION AREA
1987 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-STORAGE,PRE-PACKAGED
MEDICATIONS
1988 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-TEMEPERATURE CONTROLLED
STORAGE
1989 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES
STORAGE & DISPENSING AREA
1990 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-STORAGE PROSTHETIC &
MEDICAL SUPPLIES
1991 SPA037
MEDICAL LABORATORY FACILITIES- HEMATOLOGY
MICROSCOPY EXAMINATION ROOM
1992 SPA037
MEDICAL LABORATORY FACILITIES- BLOOD BANK &
PRODUCT STORAGE
1993 SPA040 DIALYSATE PREPARATION ROOM
1994 SPA039 AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM TESTING ROOM
1995 SPA036
ROOM,CLASS A
1996 SPA036
ROOM,CLASS B
1997 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -PROCEDURE ROOM-FLUOROSCOPY ROOM
1998 SPA038 HYDROTHERAPY SUITE
1999 SPA038 HYDROTHERAPY SUITE
2000 SPA038 HYDROTHERAPY POOL
2004 SPA035
ROBOTS AREA

New Jahra Hospital

2006 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-RECEIVING, BREAKDOWN AND
VERIFICATION AREA
2007 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-STORAGE,PRE-PACKAGED
MEDICATIONS
2008 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-TEMEPERATURE CONTROLLED
STORAGE
2009 SPA035
STORAGE & DISPENSING AREA
2010 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-STORAGE PROSTHETIC &
MEDICAL SUPPLIES
2011 SPA035 PHARMACY FACILITIES-NON-STERILE PRODUCTS
2012 SPA032 RADIOLOGY-CARDIAC CATHETERIZATION
2013 SPA032
RADIOLOGY-CARDIAC CATHETERIZATION CONTROL
ROOM
2016 SPA003
RSPIRATORY THERAPY-WORK AREA -SOILED
EQUIPMENT WORK CENTER SUITE
2017 SPA003
RSPIRATORY THERAPY-WORK AREA -SOILED
EQUIPMENT WORK CENTER SUITE
2018 SPA031 C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -CYSTOSCOPY SUITE

2020 SPA031
C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -OPERATING ROOM-
HYBRID/TRAUMA /EDUCATIONAL RROM
2021 SPA031
C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -OPERATING ROOM -
GENERAL SURGERY
2022 SPA031
UROLOGY
2023 SPA031 C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -OPERATING ROOM - ENT
2024 SPA031
OPTHALMOLOGY
2025 SPA031
MINIMALLY INVASIVE
2026 SPA031
SPECIALIZED,NEONATAL/PAEDIATRIC
2027 SPA031
SPECIAL PURPOSE,ORTHOPAEDICS
2028 SPA031
C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -STORAGE-
ORTHOPAEDICS
2029 SPA031
NEUROSURGERY
2030 SPA031
C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -EQUIPMENT ROOM -
NEUROSURGERY
2031 SPA031
CARDIOTHORACIC SURGERY

New Jahra Hospital

2032 SPA031 C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -PUMP ROOM - CARDIAC
2033 SPA031
CLEAN & STERILE STORAGE
2034 SPA031
SUB STERILE AREA
2035 SPA031
EQUIPMENT STORE
2036 SPA031 C-SECTION &SURGICAL SUITE -FROZEN SECTION LAB
2037 SPA037
MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES -
MICROBIOLOGY,PARASITOLOGY
2038 SPA037 MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES -FLOW CYTOMETRY
2039 SPA037 MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES -EQUIPMENT STORAGE
2040 SPA037 MEDICAL LAB FACILITIES -CRYOPRESERVATION ROOM
2041 SPA037 RADIOLOGY-INTERVENTIONAL RADIOLOGY ROOM
2042 SPA037 RADIOLOGY-POWER & EQUIPMENT ROOM
2046 SPA032
RADIOLOGY -PATIENT DOSE
ADMINISTRATION/INHALATION ROOM
2047 SPA032 RADIOLOGY -PET/MR SCANNING ROOM
2048 SPA035
ROBOTS AREA
2050 SPA035
STORAGE AREA
2051 SPA035
DISPENSING AREA
2052 SPA035
PHARMACY FACILITIES-ASEPTIC TRANSFER ROOM,
PARENTERAL NUTRITION PRODUCTS
2053 SPA035
INTRAVENOUS ADDITITVE INJECTIONS/INFUSIONS
2054 SPA035
INTRAVENOUS ANTIBIOTIC INJECTIONS/INFUSIONS
2055 SPA035
CYTOTOXIC
2056 SPA019 MORGUE- BEREAVEMENT ROOM
2057 SPA019 MORGUE- BODY VIEWING ROOM
2058 SPA019 MORGUE- BODY PREPARATION ROOM
2059 SPA019 MORGUE-REFRIGERATOR(COLD) ROOM

New Jahra Hospital

2061 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE ROOM
2062 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - RECEIVING AREA
2063 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE,DRY FOOD &
INGREDIENT CONTROL : GENERAL
2064 SPA028
INGREDIENT CONTROL :RICE & SUGAR
2065 SPA028
INGREDIENT CONTROL :POTATOES&ONIONS
2066 SPA028
INGREDIENT CONTROL :NON FOOD
2067 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES -
STORAGE,REFRIGERATED FOOD :FRUITS &
VEGETABLES
2068 SPA028
STORAGE,REFRIGERATED FOOD :DAIRY & JUICE
2069 SPA028
STORAGE,REFRIGERATED FOOD :FRESH MEAT
2070 SPA028
STORAGE,REFRIGERATED FOOD :EGG STORAGE
2071 SPA028
STORAGE,REFRIGERATED & FROZEN FOOD
:DEFROSTERS
2072 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE, FROZEN
FOOD : MEAT
2073 SPA028
FOOD : FISH
2074 SPA028
FOOD : VEGETABLES
2075 SPA028
FOOD : ICE CREAM
2076 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE, TROLLEY
2077 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE,
REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
2078 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - FOOD PREPARATION &
PRODUCTION - GENERAL
2079 SPA028
PRODUCTION - MEAT PREPARATION
2080 SPA028
PRODUCTION - SALAD/VEGETABLE PREPARATION
2081 SPA028
PRODUCTION - JUICE & FLUID

New Jahra Hospital

2082 SPA028
PRODUCTION - BAKERY AREA
2083 SPA028
PRODUCTION - COOKING AREA
2084 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - NOURISHMENT
PREPARATION (SPECIAL DIETS)
2085 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - STORAGE NON FOOD
ITEMS
2086 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - TRAY ASSEMBLY AREA
2087 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - TRAY CART STORAGE
AREA,CLEAN CARTS
2088 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - BULK FOOD CART
HOLDING AREA,COOK/SERVE
2089 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - DISHWASHING
2090 SPA028 NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - POTWASHING
2091 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - CARTWASH AREA
MANUAL
2092 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - CARTWASH AREA
AUTOMATED
2093 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - TRAY CART STORAGE
AREA,SOILED CARTS
2094 SPA028
NUTRITION & FOOD SERVICES - WASTE PULPER SYSTEM
ROOM
2097 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING -
STORAGE,EMS
2098 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - CLEAN
LINEN, DISTRIBUTION ROOM
2099 SPA027
SOILEDLINEN, COLLECTION ROOM
2100 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - TRASH
COLLECTION
2101 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - UNIFORM
EXCHANGE
2102 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - GENERAL
WASTE HOLDING
2103 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - RECYCLED
WASTE STAGING
2104 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - BIOHAZARD
WASTE HOLDING
2105 SPA027
WASTE MANAGEMENT & HOUSE KEEPING - CHEMICAL
HAZARD WASTE HOLDING
2106 SPA027
RADIOACTIVE WASTE HOLDING
2107 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - RECEIVING

New Jahra Hospital

2108 SPA029
LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - SOILED LINEN
DISPOSAL,CHUTE COLLECTION
2109 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - SORTING&WASHING
2110 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - LINEN &PACKS
2111 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - CLEAN LINEN ROOM
2112 SPA029
LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - CENTRAL LIQUID SUPPLY
SYSTEM
2113 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - CART WASHER
2114 SPA029
LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - CLEAN LINEN
PROCESSING
2115 SPA029
LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - CLEAN LINEN HOLDING &
ASSEMBLY
2116 SPA029
LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - DISTRIBUTION(CART
STORAGE,DISPATCH)
2117 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE -LINEN REPAIR
2118 SPA029 LAUNDRY & LINEN SERVICE - UNIFORM EXCHANGE
2119 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-EDU AUDITORIUM 1
2120 SPA034
EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-STAGE OR INSTRUCTION
AREA
2121 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-MEDIA CONTROL ROOM
2122 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-EDU AUDITORIUM2
2123 SPA034
AREA
2125 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-EDU AUDITORIUM3
2126 SPA034
AREA
2128 SPA034
EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-STORAGE- MOVEABLE
FURNITURE
2130 SPA034
EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-STORAGE- KITCHENETTE -
SERVING
2131 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-SIMULATION LAB
2132 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-CARD CATALOG
2134 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-SHELVING
2135 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA-
STORAGE
2136 SPA016
COMPUTER ROOM
2137 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- IT
ACTIVE EQUIPMENT

New Jahra Hospital

2138 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- IT
PASSIVE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
2139 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- FMS
ACTIVE EQUIPMENT
2140 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- FMS
PASSIVE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
2141 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- VOIP
ACTIVE EQUIPMENT
2142 SPA016
NETWORK OPERATIONS ROOM
2143 SPA016
STORAGE ,ACTIVE DATA
2144 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- HVAC
,ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT,COMPUTER AREA.
2145 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- BACKUP
COMPUTER ROOM
2146 SPA016
RECEIVING & BREAKDOWN ROOM
2147 SPA016
STORAGE, IT EQUIPMENT
2148 SPA016
STORAGE, TEMPORARY DATA
2149 SPA016
WORKROOM,EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION & REPAIR
2150 SPA016
TELEPHONE OPERATORS ROOM
2151 SPA016
INFORMATION &COMMUNICATION TECH AREA- DEMARC
ROOM
2152 SPA016
ANTENNA & HEADEND EQPT ROOM
2153 SPA016
STORAGE & COMPUTER TRAINING
2154 SPA016
ENGINEERING CONTROL CENTER

New Jahra Hospital

2170 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-ACTIVITY AREA
2171 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-CUBBY STORAGE
2172 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-FOOD PREAPRATION
2173 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-EATING AREA
2174 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-NURSING AREA
2175 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-SLEEPING AREA
2176 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-DIAPER STATION & STORAGE
2177 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-STORAGE AREA
2180 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-FOOD PREAPRATION
2181 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-NAPPING AREA
2182 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-HANDWASHING SINKS
2183 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-TODDLER TOILETS
2188 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-CHILDRENS ART SINK
2190 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-CHILD TOILETS
2195 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-CHILDRENS ART SINK
2197 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-CHILD TOILETS
2199 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-ISOLATION ROOM
2200 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-TOILET ISOLATION
2201 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-LOBBY
2205 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-FOOD SERVICE
2206 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-MULTIPURPOSE ACTIVITY AREA
2207 SPA026 DAY CARE CENTER-EXTERIOR PLAY AREA

New Jahra Hospital

DENTAL BUILDING
LIST OF SPECIALIZED AREAS -(Design, Equip and Build)
Contractor to coordinate with Design, Equip and Build contractor and furnish all services
as required to connect to the main HVAC systems
2155 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES -TEL OPERATORS ROOM
2156 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES -DENTAL MECHANICAL ROOM
2157 SPA033
DENTAL SERVICES -LABORATORY, REISDENCY
TRAINING ROOM
2158 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES -DENTAL MECHANICAL ROOM
2159 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES -SCRUB & STERILIZER ROOM
2160 SPA033
DENTAL SERVICES -PRESCRIPTION FILLING &
ASSEMBLY AREA
2161 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES -PRESCRIPTION DISPENSING AREA
2163 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES - CENTRAL ISSUE/SUPPLY
2164 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES - DECONTAMINATION ROOM
2165 SPA033 DENTAL SERVICES - CLEAN ROOM
2166 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-EDU AUDITORIUM
2167 SPA034
AREA
2169 SPA034 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES-STORAGE/EQUIPMENT



END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/013300-1 Submittal Procedures
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the work, including the following:
1. Contractors CPM construction scheduling system.
2. Contractors submittal log.
3. Contractors procurement log.
4. Progress reports.
5. Shop Record and as-built Drawings.
6. Composite drawings.
7. Product Data and manufacturers data.
8. Samples including mock-ups.
9. Quality assurance submittals.
10. Site layout, site staff organization charts and method statement.
11. Product procurement monitoring.
12. Construction photographs.
13. Labour, plant and visitors records.
14. Overtime work.
15. Defective works.
16. Engineer and Engineers Representative action.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents
for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for Payment.
3. Performance and Advance payment bonds.
4. Insurance policies.
5. List of subcontractors.

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 012900 - Payment Procedure specifies requirements for submitting
application for payment.
2. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination specifies requirements
governing preparation and submittal of required Coordination
Drawings.
3. Section 013110 - Project Meetings specifies requirements for submittal and
distribution of meeting and conference minutes.
6. Section 013210 - Construction Photographs specifies requirements for submittal
of periodic construction photographs.
4. Section 013260 - Scheduling of Construction specifies requirements for submittal
of CPM schedules/Reports, etc.
5. Section 013330 - Shop, Composite Record, As-Built Drawings, Product Data and
Samples specifies requirements for preparation and submittals.
7. Section 014500 - Quality Control specifies requirements for submittal of
inspection and test reports.
8. Section 016100 - Basic Product Requirements specifies requirement for submittal
of products list.
9. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures specifies requirements for submittal of
Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.
10. Section 017880 - Project Record Documents specifies requirements for submittal
of project record documents and samples during contract period.
New Jahra Hospital
1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction
elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space
provided or to function as intended.
1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Section 010400 Coordination
and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or
Product Data.

B. Field Samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings,
or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will
be judged.

C. Mock-ups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or
operation; they are not Samples.

1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities at the Contractors own cost. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in
advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. The Engineers Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a
submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related
submittals are received.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to
process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals.
a. Allow 14 days for divisions 1 to 9 and 21 days for divisions 1016 for initial
review. Allow additional time if the Engineers Representative must delay
processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial
submittal.
c. Allow the same periods in (a) above again for re-processing each submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorised because of failure to
transmit submittals to the Engineers Representative sufficiently in advance
of the Work to permit processing.

B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or
title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 100 x 125mm on the label or beside the title block on
Shop Drawings to record the Contractors review and approval markings and the
action taken.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action
taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of the Engineers Representative.
d. Name and address of the Contractor.
e. Name and address of the subcontractor.
f. Name and address of the supplier.
g. Name of the manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Contractors Review:
a. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field
measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturers catalogue
numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract
Documents.
b. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract
Documents.
c. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product data, and each
sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents, identify as Coordinated Submittal. Notify Engineers
Representative in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from
requirements of Contract Documents.
d. Contractors submission to contain complete information regarding all
drawings, materials used, and related items.
e. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until
return of submittal with Engineers Representative acceptance.

C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Engineers Representative using a
transmittal form approved by the Engineer. The Engineers Representative will not accept
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form,
or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including variations and limitations. Include Contractors certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
2. Transmittal Form: Use the sample form in Section 014500 for transmittal of
submittals.

D. Submittal Procedures by Contractor
1. Refer Section 017880 Project Record Documents for submittal procedures for
Record Drawings, As-Built Drawings, etc.
2. Two (2) sets of samples of each material or prefabricated component with transmittal
forms to the Engineers Representative.
3. Three (3) copies of brochures, one of which must be an original, with transmittal
forms to the Engineers Representative. Brochures shall be in English or
accompanied by a certified English translation. Brochures in Arabic shall be
acceptable at the Engineers Representative discretion.
4. Construction Schedule: Three (3) blue line prints of each diagrams, three (3)
schedule reports, three (3) sets supporting data, three (3) sets of back-up copies on
3.5 inch diskettes. One (1) complete blue line set of diagrams from last approved
construction schedule marked up in red.

E. Submittal of Correspondence and Product Data:
1. Except where more are required by the Contract, all correspondence and product
data to the Engineers Representative shall be submitted as follows:
a. One (1) original and three (3) photocopies of transmittals and letters including
attachments/enclosures.
b. All correspondence from the Contractor to the Engineers Representative
shall be submitted on A4 size paper whenever possible. All correspondence
shall clearly indicate:
i) Contract number.
ii) Title of the Contract.
iii) Contractors Name.
iv) Date and reference number of the correspondence.

F. Submittal of Samples by Contractor:
1. Submit two (2) sets of samples. One (1) of the two (2) sets will be returned marked
with the action taken.
2. Maintain set of samples, as returned by the Engineers Representative at the Project
Site available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of the
construction activity.
New Jahra Hospital
1.05 CPM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING SYSTEM

A. Comply with the requirements of section 013260 Scheduling of Construction.

1.06 CONTRACTORS SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Within 10 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineers
Representative to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractors Submittals Log.
B. After 21 days from meeting, the Contractor shall submit his Submittal Log for the Engineers
Representative initial review, including all those items required to be submitted as per the
Contract Documents.

C. After development and acceptance of the Contractors Construction Schedule, prepare a
complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required
for submittal of the Contractors Construction Schedule.
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and
the list of products as well as the Contractors Construction Schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples etc.).
d. Name of the subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Engineers Representative final release or approval.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the
Engineers Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations.

E. Updating: Revise and update the schedule in a regular manner and submit 48 hours prior to
progress meeting for the Engineers Representative review.

F. Format: Utilize Contractors Submittal Log format provided by the Engineers
Representative and approved by the Engineer.

G. Refer 1.07 I of this section for the penalty in case of failure to submit such information.

1.07 Contractors Procurement Log

A. Within 10 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor should meet with the Engineers
Representative to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractors Procurement
Log.

B. After 21 days from meeting, the Contractor to submit his Procurement Log, for the
Engineers Representative initial review, including all those items required to be submitted as
per the Contract Documents.

C. After the development and acceptance of the Contractors Design and Construction
Schedule, submit the Contractors Procurement Log within 10 days, for the Engineers
Representative review and approval, after inserting all particular dates and data from
approved schedule, manufacturers/suppliers and agents confirmations.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the
Engineers Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
procurement dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations.
New Jahra Hospital
E. Updating: Revise and update the Log in a regular manner, and submit forty eight (48) hours
prior to progress meeting for the Engineers Representative review.

F. Format: Utilize format as provided by the Engineers Representative and approved by the
Engineer.

G. The Contractor, in addition to above, will be required to provide, at any time required by the
Engineer, full and complete details of all product procurement data relating to all
manufactured products which have been ordered and/or procured by the Contractor for
incorporation in the works.

H. Such details shall include copies of Letters of Credit, product order forms, confirmations
from manufacturers and/or suppliers, request for quotations, letters of enquiry, etc.

I. Failure by the Contractor to submit such information punctually and in strict accordance with
the Engineer requirements will result in the Contractor being penalized in the amount of KD.
250/- per incident, such monies being deducted from the Contractors monthly payments.

1.08 PROGRESS REPORTS

A. Prepare and submit the following Progress Reports described hereinafter in a form provided
by the Engineers Representative. Work activities and procurement status reports should be
referenced where relevant to the approved Contractors Design and Construction Schedule.
1. Daily Report: Submit this report on daily basis. The report shall describe the labour
force and its allocation, material, equipment utilized and describe the work in
progress during the day.
2. Procurement Status Log: Submit the Contractors Procurement Log and the
Contractors Submittal Status Log on weekly basis. These reports shall include the
preparation, submittal, and approval status of Shop Drawings, material submittals,
samples, catalogues of equipment, procurement of materials and delivery dates to
site. Utilize format as provided by Engineers Representative and approved by the
Engineer.
3. Monthly Report: Submit a detailed report reflecting the monthly progress and status
of work. This report shall include a description of problem areas, current or
anticipated causes of delay and their estimated impact on progress, together with a
description of corrective measures taken or proposed. Monthly report shall contain a
copy of the latest monthly updated Contractors Design and Construction Schedule,
cash flow diagram, manpower and equipment histograms and progress
photographs.

1.09 DEFECTIVE WORKS

A. As soon as possible after any part of the work is known or suspected to be defective, submit
proposals to the Engineers Representative for his approval for further testing, opening up,
inspection, making good or removal and re-execution. Whenever inspection or testing
shows that the work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents and measures (e.g.
testing, opening up, experimental making good) are taken to establish the acceptability of
the work, such measures:
1. Will be at the expense of the Contractor, and
2. Will be not considered as grounds for an extension of time.

1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Contractors Construction Schedule: The Contractor is required, as described elsewhere, to
provide co-ordination, installation, shop and builders working drawings, composite drawings
for services co-ordination with architectural and structural works and other information as
appropriate, collectively referred to as shop drawings. Allow for completion of all such
drawings, checking, inspection by the Engineers Representative and any subsequent
amendment(s) re-submission(s) and re-inspection(s) when preparing the Construction
Schedule for the Works.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Checking by Contractor: Obtain all drawings in time to meet the programmed dates.
Thoroughly check all drawings from all sources to ensure that the various works, installations
and services do not conflict with each other or with the building structure, fabric or finishes,
either during construction or in the finished building. Note any such discrepancies or
divergences on one copy of the drawings, date and sign to show that they have been
checked then submit to the Engineers Representative with the required number of additional
unmarked copies.

C. Engineers Representative Review: The Engineers Representative will note any comments on
one copy of the drawings, date and sign to show that they have been inspected, then return
to the Contractor. Review of drawings, and any comments made by the Engineers
Representative will not relieve the Contractor, subcontractors and/or suppliers of
responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements, documentation and checking as
appropriate.

D. Amendments: ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are made in accordance
with any comments of the Engineers Representative and resubmit without delay. Unless
and until the Engineers Representative confirms that resubmission is not required, obtain
copies of amended drawings, check, re-submit to the Engineers Representative ensuring
incorporation of necessary further amendments all as before.

E. Distribution of final version: obtain final version of all drawings, submit the required number
of copies to the Engineers Representative additional copies as appropriate to all concerned
subcontractors and suppliers, and keep at least one copy on Site. Ensure that work is
carried out in accordance with the final drawings.

F. Dimensions: metric measurements shall be used in all documents and drawings.

G. Variations: if submitted drawings differ from requirements of the Contract Documents, each
such difference must be the subject of a request for substitution or variation, supported by
all relevant information. Should any amendment to drawings required by the Engineers
Representative or any discrepancy or divergence that he may find be considered to involve
or be a variation, notify the Engineers Representative without delay and in any case within 7
days, and do not proceed with ordering, fabrication, erection or installation until
subsequently instructed. Claims for the extra cost of such work, if made after it has been
carried out, may not be allowed however any savings may be deducted from the Contract
Sum.

H. Shop Drawings shall include detailed fabrication and erection drawings, setting out drawings,
diagrammatic drawings and materials schedules, together with relevant samples.

I. Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which product or item is being
submitted for consideration and each product or item shall be marked for identification with
the applicable page and paragraph number of the Specification and/or the detail and sheet
number of the Contract Drawings.

J. Shop drawings shall include types, gauges and finishes of materials and show the brand
name and manufacturers type identification number where a shop coat of paint is required.

K. Each set of shop drawings shall include sufficient data to permit a detailed study of the
product or system submitted.

L Submit manufacturers or fabricators pre-printed product literature and data sheets, normally
transmitted in booklet or brochure form, in bound and indexed brochures. If brochures
contain sheets longer than A4, they shall be bound to allow them to be unfolded for reading
without being removed from the binding.

M. Composite Coordinated Drawings: Immediately after approval of individual trade drawings,
the Contractor shall submit composite drawings duly coordinated showing cross sections,
elevations, reflected plans, etc., resolving all conflicts in level, alignment, access, space, etc.
New Jahra Hospital
1.11 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers instructions and Contract Documents.

1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturers
instructions, manufacturers field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required
under other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product,
material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification
from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
independent testing agencies are specified in Section 014000 Quality Control.

1.13 SITE LAYOUT, SITE STAFF ORGANIZATION CHARTS AND METHOD STATEMENT

A. Site Layout Organization and Safety Chart
1. Prepare and submit to the Engineers Representative for approval before
commencing any construction activities a Site Layout Organization and Safety Plan
and any modifications or relocations thereafter showing the Contractors proposed
layout of facilities on the Site.
2. The layout of facilities shall provide clear full details of location, capacity, etc., and
shall include but not be limited to:
a. Temporary facilities including accommodation, fences, and gates.
b. Plant, storage areas.
c. Access for other Contractors, visitors and the like.
d. Temporary fire fighting equipment types and locations.

B. Location of Contractors Facilities: The layout of the Contractors site offices and storage
areas is subject to the approval of the Engineers Representative.

C. Contractors Site Staff Organisation:
1. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date of commencement of the mobilisation
period and before commencement of construction activity on site, the Contractor
shall submit a full listing of his proposed site staff for the organisation, management
and supervision of the Works. The list shall include all personnel from Project
Manager through to foreman level and shall amplify and reflect the details already
given by the Contractor in the Site Organisation Chart submitted with his Tender and
incorporated in the Contract. Such listing shall be supported by authenticated
details of the qualifications and experience of such personnel, (to the extent not
previously submitted with the Tender and incorporated in the Contract) for review
and approval by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.
2. Before approving any Contractors staff, the Engineer or Engineers Representative
shall have the right to interview any of the Contractors proposed staff and
notwithstanding their approval, retains the right to instruct the removal forthwith of
any person employed by the Contractor in or about the Works, who in their opinion,
misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his
duties, or whose employment is otherwise considered to be undesirable.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Contractors Method Statement: Within 14 days of the date of commencement of the
mobilization period and before commencement of construction activity on site, the
Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement further elaborating on the method
statement submitted with the tender in Document I. As a minimum both the Tender
submittal and the post contract submittal shall comprise the following:
1. Method statement narrative, construction sequencing and schedule methodology.
2. Project Construction Schedule.
3. Project site organization.
4. Material resource usage analysis.
5. Crew/days resources monthly productivity.
6. Funding requirements and expected value of work executed per month with S
curve.

1.14 PRODUCT PROCUREMENT MONITORING

A. The Contractor will be required to provide, twice each month or at any time required by the
Engineers Representative, full and complete details of all product procurement data relating
to all manufactured products which have been ordered and/or procured by the Contractor
for incorporation in the Contract Works.

B. Such details shall include copies of Letters of Credit, product order forms, confirmations
from manufacturers and/or suppliers, requests for quotations, letters of enquiry, etc.

C. Failure by the Contractor to submit such information punctually and in strict accordance with
the Engineers Representative requirements will result in the Contractor being penalised in
the amount of KD. 250/- per incident, such monies being deducted from the Contractors
monthly payments.

1.15 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Refer to Section 013210 Construction Photographs requirements governing Construction
Photographs.

1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section 013330 Shop Composite, Record, As Built Drawings, Product Data and
Samples for requirements governing Record Drawings.

1.17 AS-BULIT DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section 013330 Shop Composite, Record, As Built Drawings, Product Data and
Samples.

1.18 OVERTIME WORK

A. Whenever working outside normal hours is proposed, the Contractor shall request approval
from the Engineers Representative giving not less than two working days notice, specifying
times, types and locations of work and approximate number of men involved.

B. Concealed work executed outside normal hours for which approval has not been given may
be required to be opened up for inspection and reinstated at the Contractors expense.

1.19 ENGINEER AND ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE ACTION

A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the
Engineer or Engineers Representative will review each submittal, mark to indicate action
taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractors responsibility.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Responsibility for Review:
1. The Engineer and Engineers Representative review of submittals by the Contractor
is for general conformance with the information given in the Contract Documents and
such review or approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any
deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. The Engineer's and Engineers Representative review shall not be construed as a
complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any
kind in submittals, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the
Contract Documents, which may have been omitted on the submittals. The Engineer
and Engineers Representative will review with reasonable promptness and will
return them to the Contractor with the Engineer's stamp applied thereto. No
acceptance or approval of submittals, nor any indication or request marked by the
Engineer or Engineers Representative on any submittal, shall constitute an
authorization for any increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or a change in
the Contract requirements.
3. The Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract after approval of submittals by the Engineer or
Engineers Representative or such deviation at the time of submitting submittals.
The Contractor shall indicate on resubmitted submittals, all revisions as well as those
requested by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.
4. Comments by the Engineer or Engineers Representative which increase Contract
cost or time of completion shall be brought to the Engineer's or Engineers
Representative attention before proceeding with the Works, otherwise any claim
regarding this subject matter will not be considered.

C. Action Stamp:
1. Each submittal will be returned to the Contractor stamped or marked by the Engineer
or Engineers Representative indicating the appropriate action as follows:
(A) APPROVED means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may
proceed.
(B) APPROVED SUBJECT TO COMMENTS means that fabrication, manufacture,
or construction may proceed provided submittal complies with the
Engineers or Engineer's Representative's comments. If, for any reason, the
Contractor cannot comply with the notations, the Contractor shall make
revisions and resubmit as described for submittals stamped RESUBMIT.
(C) REJECTED AND RESUBMIT means that the submittal does not comply with
the Contract Documents and that fabrication, manufacture or construction
shall not proceed. Submittals stamped RESUBMIT are not permitted on the
Site of the Works and are not to be used. The Contractor shall make the
required revisions and resubmit.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of the preparation of
all drawings necessary to provide those amplifications of drawings needed for
completion of the construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct
location of his works irrespective of approval by the Engineer or Engineers
Representative and shall pay all costs and expenses incurred by other contractors
due to improper location of his works.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of alterations of the
Works due to discrepancies, errors or omissions in the drawings and other
particulars supplied by him whether such drawings and particulars have been
approved by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.
4. After submittals have been approved by the Engineer or Engineers Representative
they shall not be departed from, unless resubmitted and approved by the Engineer or
Engineers Representative or modified by Variation Order as provided under
Conditions of Contract Clause 51.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/013330-1 Shop, Composite,Record, As Built
New Jahra Hospital Drawings, Product Data and Samples
SECTION 013330

SHOP, COMPOSITE, RECORD, AS BUILT DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of Shop,
Composite,Record, and As Built Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other miscellaneous
quality control submittals.

B. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Fabrication drawings.
2. Installation drawings.
3. Setting diagrams.
4. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
5. Templates and patterns.
6. Schedules
a. Standard information prepared with specific reference to the project
requirements.

C. Product Data include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Manufacturers product specifications
2. Manufacturers installation instructions.
3. Standard colour charts.
4. Catalog cuts.
5. Roughning-in diagrams and templates.
6. Standard wiring diagrams.
7. Printed performance curves.
8. Operational range diagrams.
9. Mill reports.
10. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.

D. Samples include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Partial Sections of manufactured or fabricated components.
2. Small cuts or containers of materials.
3. Complete units of repetitively used materials.
4. Swatches showing colour, texture and pattern.
5. Colour range sets.
6. Components used for independent inspection and testing.
7. Field samples.

E. Quality control submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Design data.
2. Certifications.
3. Manufacturers instructions.
4. Manufacturers field reports.

F. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination specifies requirements
governing preparation and submittal of required coordination
drawings.
2. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures specifies requirement for submittal of shop,
composite, record, as built drawings, product data and samples.
3. Section 014500 - Quality Control specifies requirements for submittal of inspection
and test reports and the erection of mockups.
4. Section 017220 - Field Engineering
5. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures specifies requirements for submittal of
project record documents, including copies of drawings, at project
closeout.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction
elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space
provided or to function as intended.
1. Preparation of coordination drawings is specified in Section 013100 Project
Management and Coordination and may include components previously shown in
detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.

B. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings,
or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the work will be
judged.

C. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or
operation, they are not samples.

D. Shop Drawings shall establish actual plans, section and details of all construction
assembled, manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work,
amply design details whether or not included in contract drawings of all work including but
not limited to civil, architectural, interiors, mechanical, electrical and site works in proper
relation to physical spaces and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit
actual conditions at no additional cost.

E. Record Drawings are a record of the works actually installed as the work progresses
including records of all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents.

F. As-Built Drawings embody the latest amendment of shop drawings including variations to
the Contract to the standards set out in BS 308 part 2.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. All design layouts provided form part of this tender and are for the propose of general
guidance. The contractor is required to submit full design shop drawings, complete with
calculations, catalogues etc. for the Engineers and Engineers representative approval before
ordering materials or proceeding with the work on site.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Refer to Section 013300 Submittal Procedures for requirement of submitting
Contractors scheduling log.

B. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of Shop Drawings.
1. Include the following information on Shop Drawings.
a. Dimensions using SI units.
b. Identification of products and materials included.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Number shop drawings for each section of the works consecutively and the
numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.
3. Shop Drawings shall show in detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, assembly,
joints, attachments, relation to adjoining work, and all other pertinent data and
information. In checking shop drawings, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions
and site conditions and shall check and coordinate the shop drawings of any Section
or Trade with the requirements of the Sections or Trades of other Contractors as
related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the works. The
works shall conform to the Contract Drawings or to such other Drawings as may be
issued from time to time during the progress of the Works by the Engineer or

4. The Contractor shall submit composite Shop Drawings coordination of the work of
contractors for mechanical, electrical, structural architectural and site work. The
composite drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of
ductwork, piping conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural members and related
architectural features, and shall show clearance between such work.
5. The Contractor shall attend coordination meetings with his sub-contractors and all
other Contractors where work is affected. Following the coordination of the work
each subcontractor and each other contractor shall indicate his approval on the
reproducible original coordination drawings by signing such drawings. The
Contractor shall then distribute a copy of the coordination drawings to each of the
subcontractors and other contractors for their respective use.
In the event any one of the other contractors employed or to be employed by the
Employer is not on board in a timely manner, then coordination is to be done based
on design drawings made available by the Engineers Representative. The Engineers
Representative will not accept any shop drawing without this necessary coordination
step having been completed.
6. The Contractor shall submit individual shop drawings following the distribution of the
coordination drawings that shall bear a stamp indicating that the work has been
coordinated with all subcontractors and other Contractors.
7. The Contractor shall prepare composite Shop Drawings and installation layouts,
when required, to describe proposed solutions for congested or restricted site
conditions. The composite Shop Drawings and site installation layouts shall be
coordinated on the site by the Contractor and his subcontractors for the correct
coordination and relationship to the work of all other Contractors, based on site
conditions.
8. Shop Drawings shall bear the contractors stamp and signature certifying that they
have been coordinated and checked by the Contractor for completeness and
compliance with the approved by the Contractor.

1.05 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Mark
each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the project.
1. Where Product Data includes information on several similar products, some of which
are not required for use on the project, mark copies clearly to indicate which
products are applicable.
2. Where Product Data must be specially prepared for required products, materials, or
systems because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as shop
drawings not Product Data.
3. Include the following information in Product Data.
a. Manufacturers printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
4. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.

B. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of
options by the Engineers Representative is required.

1.06 SAMPLES

A. Submit full size, fully fabricated samples, cured and finished in the manner specified, and
physically identical with the material or product proposed for use.
1. Mount, display or package samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare samples to match the Engineers Representative sample
where so indicated. Include the following information.
a. Generic description of the sample.
b. Size limitations.

c. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Compliance with governing regulations.
g. Availability.
h. Delivery time.
2. Submit sample for review of kind, colour, pattern and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between the submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Submit full range of manufacturers standard finishes except when more
restrictive requirements are specified, indicating colours, textures and
patterns for Engineers representative selection.
b. Where variation in colour, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent
in the material or product represented by a sample, submit at least 3 multiple
units that show approximate limits of the variations.
c. Refer to other specification Section for requirements for samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly,
connections, operation and similar construction characteristics.
d. Refer to other specification Sections for sample to be returned to the
Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such samples must be in an
undamaged condition at time of use. On the transmittal form, indicate such
special requests about disposition of sample submittals.
e. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designed as the
Employers property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
from the site prior to substantial completion.

B. Field samples specified in individual specification sections are special types of samples.
Comply with sample submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process
transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Submit quality control submittals, including design data certifications, manufacturers
instructions manufacturers field reports, and other quality control submittal as required under
Sections of the Specification.

B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product,
material or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification
from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section Quality Control.

1.08 RECORD DRAWING

A. As the work progresses the Contractor shall maintain on a continuous basis a complete and
accurate record of all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents which shall be
kept at the Site for inspection by the Engineer, his representative, or Employers
Representative.

1.09 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish As-Built Drawings incorporating all updated details
from shop drawings and record drawings including all variations to the Contract for the
approval of the Engineer in accordance with the standards set out in BS 308.

B. The as built drawings shall show the works as executed complete with existing and finished
levels and all other things necessary to form an accurate pictorial record of the finished work.

C. Prior to the preparation of as built drawings the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
Engineers representative as to the size of drawings, quality of transparent sheets, method of
drawing and other relevant details in accordance with the Contract Documents.

D. All as built drawings shall be numbered and shall have a number series approved by the
Engineers representative. A drawing index shall be provided. All negatives of drawings so
prepared shall be dated and signed by the Contractor and, when approved, countersigned
by the Engineers representative.

E. Any drawings, transparencies etc., produced by the Consultant will be made available to the
Contractor and the cost of reproducing shall be borne by the Contractor.

F. All as built drawings, shall be on the ISO A series of sheet sizes. As far as possible only SI
units of dimensions and the recommended decimal multiples are to be used. The scales
must be clearly indicated on the drawings. Dimensioning shall generally be in accordance
with BS 308 Part 2.

G. Submit compact discs of all as-built drawings using the latest format of Autocad as with
stipulated in the Section 017880 Project Record Documents.

1.10 COMPOSITE DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish full composite drawings in order to avoid clashes of
services, structure and finishes etc.

B. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible and liable for full coordination of all drawn
information, and for all rectification measures and/or work necessary to remedy any short
coming in coordination and any resultant clashes.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/014220-1 Reference Standards
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 014220

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of Contract Document II.

B. Where as shown, as indicated, as detailed, or words of similar import are used, it shall
be understood that reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specifications is made
unless otherwise stated.

C. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders
issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within
the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

D. Furnish: The term furnish means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

E. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site as described in Section
011100 Summary of Works including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

F. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use.

G. Installer: An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either
as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1. The term experienced, when used with the term installer, means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope
to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Trades: Using a term such as carpentry does not imply that certain construction
activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a
corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that
requirements specified apply exclusively to trades persons of the corresponding
generic name.
3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific
construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts
in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their
assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However,
the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the
Contractor.
a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building
codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to
interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar
conventions.

H. Project Site as mentioned in Section 011100 Summary of the Works is available to the
Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with
others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown
on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
the Project is to be built.
New Jahra Hospital
I. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required,
to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

J. Abbreviations and Symbols: The following abbreviations are used in the Documents and
Drawings:
K.D. = Kuwaiti Dinar(s)
m = linear metre(s)
m
2
= square metre(s)
m
3
= cubic metre(s)
No. = Number = each
mm = millimetre(s)
cm
2
= square centimetre(s)
mm
2
= square millimetre(s)
kg = kilogram(s)
L = Litre
t = Tonne
Hrs = Hours
Mths = Months
SWG = Standard wire gauge
W.W.F = welded wire fabric
"(e.g. 4") = inch (4 inches)
KVA = kilo-volt-ampere
CFM = cubic feet per minute
PVC = polyvinyl chloride
uPVC = unplastisized polyvinyl chloride
B.T.U/Hr. = British Thermal Units per Hour
Amp or A = ampere

1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on
the 16-Division format and CSI/CSCs Master Format numbering system.

B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated, as the sense requires. Singular
words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the
Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words shall, shall be, or shall comply with, depending on the
context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry codes, regulations, specifications and
standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract
Documents to the extent referenced. Such codes, regulations, specifications and standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by this reference and the Contractor shall
comply therewith.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Publication Dates: All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred
to in the Contract Documents shall, unless otherwise stated, mean the latest edition,
amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract
Documents.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and
the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements
that are different but apparently equal to the Engineers Representative for a decision before
proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric
values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the
requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Engineer' Representative for a decision
before proceeding.

D. Within 30 days from the date of signing the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer adequate proof that the referenced codes, regulations and standards have been
ordered or are in the Contractors possession and available for use on site. Failure to provide
this proof within the said 15 days or to have the codes etc. on site within 30 days of the Date
of Enterprise shall entitle the Engineer to purchase the referenced codes, regulations and
standards and the costs will be recovered from the Contractor.

E. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product complies
with Federal Specification, British Standards Institute, American Society of Testing and
Materials, American National Standards Institute or other association, standards, etc., the
Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product
complies therewith. Where requested or specified, submit supporting test data to
substantiate compliance.

F. Where reference standards referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or
suggestion, such recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory under
this Contract unless conflicting with the particular specifications contained herein.

G. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association,
standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable
to the context of the text provision.

H. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the
Contract Documents, mean the associated names. Unless otherwise stated the following
abbreviations and names are from the U.S.A.:
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADC Air Diffuser Council
AFI Air Filter Institute
AGCA Association General Contractors of America
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIMA Acoustical & Insulating Materials Association
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Eng.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALS American Lumber Standards
AMCA American Moving & Conditioning Association
New Jahra Hospital
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOAC Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants
ASGRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Institute of America
BRI Building Research Institute
BRE Building Research Establishment (UK)
BS British Standard Specification
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
BSI British Standard Institute
CDA Copper Development Association
CEE International Commission on Rules for Approval of Electrical
Equipment (Europe)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
DIN Deutsches Institute for Normung
EWS Engineered Wood Association
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
FS Federal Specification
FSIWA Federation of Sewage & Industrial Waste Association
FTI Facing Tile Institute
GA Gypsum Association
GTA Glass Tempering Association
HPMA Hardwood plywood Manufacturers Association
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers of London (UK)
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineering (UK)
IES Illuminating Engineering Society (UK)
ISO The International Organization for Standardization
KFB/KFD Kuwait Fire Brigade or Kuwait Fire Dept.
KSS Kuwait Standard Specification
MEW Ministry of Electricity and Water (Kuwait)
MIA Marble Institute of America
MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturers Association
MPW Ministry of Public Works (Kuwait)
MSSVFI Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturers
NAPF National Association of Plastic Manufacturers
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code (NPFA No. 70)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMI National Elevator Manufacturing Industry, Inc.
NFC National Fire Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
New Jahra Hospital
NHPMA National Hardwood & Pine Manufactures Association.
NPA National Particleboard Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSC National Safety Council
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NTMA National Terrazzo & Foundation
NWC National Water Council (UK)
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration Portland Cement Association.
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (USA)
PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
PS Product Standard, U.S.Department of Commerce
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
RTI Resilient Tile Institute
SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joint Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SMFMA Sprayed Mineral Fiber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation U.S Dept of Commerce
SSPC Steel Structure Painting Council
SWFPA Structural Wood Fiber Products Association
TCA Tile Council of America
TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturing Association
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
TPI Truss Plate Institute
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USGS U.S. Geodetic Survey
WCLB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
WWPA Western Wood Products Association

1.04 GOVERNMENT AGENCIES

A. The following list of Government Agencies (Local Authorities) is not intended to be exhaustive
and the Contractor shall carry out all works in strict accordance with current Codes and
Regulations of all Government Agencies whether listed hereunder or not.
a. The Civil Defence Department
b. The Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW).
c. The Ministry of Communications (MOC).
d. The Kuwait Fire Brigade (KFB).
e. The Kuwait Municipality (KM).
f. The Roads and Drainage Department of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
g. The Ministry of Health (MOH).
h. The Ministry of Interior (MOI) - General Traffic Department.
j. The Kuwait Environmental Public Authority
k. The Environmental Projection Council (EPC).
New Jahra Hospital
1.05 TECHNICAL LITERATURE

A. Provide the Engineers Representative with one complete, latest edition copy of all standard
specifications referred to in these documents and further copies as necessary of all
manufacturers catalogues and the like dealing with proprietary products specified or
proposed as substitutes. Make such submissions within three months of the Date of
Enterprise or earlier as required by the Contractors construction schedule or in the case of
substitute materials, as soon thereafter as is reasonably practicable.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/014500-1 Quality Control
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 014500

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of
Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and
tests specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function.
Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the
construction sequence.

B. Related Section: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Section 014570 Testing Laboratory Services

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION

A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Preparatory Inspection: Perform this inspection prior to beginning of work on any
definable feature of the Works. Include a review of the Contract requirements with
the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure
that materials, products and equipment have been tested, submitted and approved;
check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine
the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically
examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to Shop Drawings and
data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
2. Initial Inspection: Perform this inspection as soon as the work commences on a
representative portion of a particular feature; review control testing for compliance
with Contract requirements.
3. Follow-up Inspection: Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure
continuing compliance with Contract requirements until completion of that particular
work.
4. Documentation of CQC Program: Identify the inspections hereinbefore specified and
document in the CQC report with a brief description of the subject matter covered
and the personnel involved.

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS

A. Perform factory quality control inspection for items fabricated or assembled Off-Site as
opposed to off-the-shelf items. The CQC representative at the fabricating plant shall be
responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the Site. The CQC
representative at the Site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during
shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in
good condition throughout the period of On-Site storage and during erection, installation and
maintenance. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before it is used, final
acceptance of an item by the Engineer is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the
Works and acceptance of the completed Project.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) PLAN

A. Furnish a schedule outlining the procedure, instructions and reports to be used as follows:
1. Quality control organization.
2. Qualification of personnel.
3. Authority and responsibility of personnel.
4. Schedule of inspections and tests with personnel assigned to each task and duration
of each task.
5. Test methods.
6. Methods of performing and documenting control operations.
New Jahra Hospital
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS

A. Inspections shall be recorded and submitted daily on approved forms certifying items
correctly installed and items found to be defective with a statement on corrective measures
taken.

B. Starting of systems shall be recorded and submitted on approved forms certifying systems
have been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.06 LATEST DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractors Quality Control program shall provide for procedures which will assure that
the applicable portions of the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings and instructions required
by the Contract are used for fabrication, testing and inspection.

1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION DEVICES

A. Provide and maintain all measuring and testing devices, equipment, instruments and
supplies necessary to accomplish the required site testing and inspection. All measuring
and testing devices shall be calibrated periodically against certified standards.

1.08 ENGINEERS AND ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE CHECKING AND CONTRACT
ADMINISTRATION PROCEDURES

A. To facilitate the Engineers and Engineers Representative checking of the quality of
workmanship, compliance with Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit signed
Request for Inspection lists in a format provided by the Engineers Representative and
approved by the Engineer. The list shall be deemed to constitute:
1. A request by the Contractor for the Engineers Representative to inspect the
preparation or completion of a certain element of the work in a particular location
before proceeding with the next stage in such work.
2. A representation by the Contractor to the effect that the work for which he is
requesting inspection has been properly coordinated between all trades, complies
with the applicable Specifications, shop drawings and other data included in the
Contract or approved by the Engineer or Engineers Representative, and is complete
in itself and ready for such inspection and for the next stage of related work.

B. Request for Inspection Lists shall be dated and numbered in approved sequence and
submitted for each of the elements of the Works in accordance with the inspection phases
stated in the foregoing clause 1.02 in this section. Each of the Request for Inspection lists
shall be signed by all concerned electrical and mechanical sub-contractors thereby
warranting that all trades have been properly coordinated and completed prior to the
Request for Inspection list submission.

C. In addition to the signature of all concerned electrical and mechanical subcontractors upon
the Request for Inspection lists required by the preceding Sub-Clause, such sub-
contractors shall also submit, to the Engineer through the Contractor, Request for
Inspection for all mechanical and electrical elements of the works upon completion and
testing of sections thereof, prior to embedding in concrete, covering up with finishings, etc.
Mechanical and Electrical Requests for Inspection shall be signed by the Contractor and
his concerned Subcontractor on a form and in a manner as required and approved by the

D. Submit request for inspection when the work is completed and allow 24 hours (1 working
day) time for the Engineer and Engineers Representative for checking at site.

E. In case the Contractor or his Subcontractors take no action within 14 days of the Engineers
Representatives action comments on the check slip, the check is considered out of date. A
new check slip must be submitted for inspection cross referenced to the previous check slip.
New Jahra Hospital
1.09 OUT OF COUNTRY INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor should arrange for out of country inspections for all major equipment factory
inspection and witnessing of factory test for performance and quality requirements.

1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packaged and protected to prevent
damage during transportation and handling.

B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the technical
Sections.

1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,
erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective manufacturers, unless
more stringent requirements are specified.

1.12 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS

A. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed surfaces of
manufactured items installed in finished spaces.

1.13 PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

A. Refer Clause 1.10 of Section 016100 Basic Product Requirements.

1.14 TESTING OF MATERIALS

A. Refer to specification Section 014570 Testing Laboratory Services.

1.15 MOCK-UPS GENERAL

A. When required by individual specification section, erect complete full scale mock-up of
assembly at project site. Test will be performed in accordance with this section. Remove
mock-up at completion, when approved by Engineer or Engineers Representative.

B. Mock-up may remain as finished work if so indicated in specification section and approved.

C. All relative further materials and workmanship shall confirm to the standards of the approved
mock-up.

1.16 STONE MOCK-UPS AT SOURCE

A. Before selection of stone type the Contractor shall arrange a complete mock-up to simulate
the final condition at the source of supply for direction of grains, and indicating joint
conditions, use of spacers, shims, anchorage, relieving angles, supports, joint fillers,
sealants, and all other features of the final work. Erect wall and soffit mock-up adequately
reinforced and braced to sustain the imposed loads. Build in all items of anchorage and
support.

B. Replace and/or interchange stone types, finishes and patterns all to the requirement of the
Engineer until all types, patterns and finishes are approved.

C. The inspection team will review the mock-ups at the location selected by the vendors and
final approval will be given on the selection of stone types.

D. Minimum of two mock-up shall be arranged for inspection for each building.

New Jahra Hospital
E. The selected mock-up materials shall be brought to the construction site for future
verification. Each approved mock-up materials shall be signed by the Inspection Team.

1.17 ON SITE STONE MOCK-UP

A. Dismantle and re-assemble from approved mock-up at source to simulate final condition,
direction of grains, and indicating joint conditions, use of spacers, shims, anchorage,
relieving angles, supports, joint fillers, sealants, and all other features of the final work. Erect
wall and soffit mock-up adequately reinforced and braced to sustain the imposed loads.
Build in all items of anchorage and support.

B. Replace and/or interchange stone types, finishes and patterns all to the requirement of the
Engineer until all types, patterns and finishes are approved.

1.18 IN PLACE STONE INSTALLATIONS

A. Provide in place sample installations at locations shown or directed by the Engineer, of each
type of marble and granite work shown and specified. Each sample installation shall consist
of a full pattern and shall be complete with all anchors, bedding, jointing, sealers, etc., as
shown and in accordance with final shop drawings. Sample installations shall be reviewed
by the Engineer for acceptance of marble and granite colour, finish, jointing, pointing and
general workmanship. Replace unsatisfactory work as directed for final acceptance.
Maintain sample installations during construction as a standard for judging acceptability of
marble and granite work. Properly finished and maintained sample installations may be
retained as a portion of the completed work.

1.19 EXTERNAL ELEVATION MOCK UP

A. As soon as the structure is ready, create a full mock up of one section / bay of the external
faade of each building for the Employers and Engineers approval. These shall include but
not be limited to
1. Curtain walling.
2. Windows.
3. Pre cast concrete panels.
4. Zinc Cladding.
5. Stone Cladding.
Note that these sections/bays shall be mocked up out of sequence of the main works and
shall not be incorporated in to the main works.

B. Once approved prepare a full photographic record of each section/bay. The sections/bays
shall be retained in its mocked up state for as long as is practical, and can only be stripped
out with the Engineers consent.

C. Strip out the mocked up sections/bays so that the external facades can be complete in
accordance with the program.

1.20. TYPICAL INPATIENT ROOM MOCK-UP.

A. As soon as the structure is weather tight, create a full mock up of an inpatient room for the
Employers and Engineers approval. This shall include but not be limited to
1. Doors and Windows.
2. Wall, floor, ceiling finishings, decorations.
3. Dummy (non working) services (electrical, lighting, HVAC grills, bed head services
etc.)
4. FF & E.
Note that this room shall be mocked up out of sequence of the main works and shall not be
incorporated in to the main works.

B. Once approved prepare a full photographic record of the room. The room shall be retained in
its mocked up state for as long as it practical, and can only be stripped out with the
Engineers consent.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Strip out the mock up room so that it can be refitted in accordance with the program.

1.21 PROJECT CONTROL FORMS

A. Formats of required Project Control forms will be provided to the Contractor by the Engineer
at the commencement of the project and updated/supplemented as may be necessary from
time to time thereafter. The Contractor will be required to utilize these formats/forms as
directed by the Engineer.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/014570-1 Testing Laboratory Services
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 014570

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating
construction operations including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Selection and payment.
2. Contractor submittals.
3. Laboratory responsibilities.
4. Laboratory reports.
5. Limits of testing laboratory authority.
6. Contractor responsibilities.
7. Schedule of inspections and tests.

1. Information Available to Tenderers: Soil investigation data.
2. Document II Conditions of Contract: Inspections, testing, and approvals required
by public authorities.
3. Section 013300 Submittal Procedures: Manufacturers certificates.
4. Section 014500 Quality Control
5. Section 017500 Starting and Adjusting of Systems and Section 159900 Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing of Systems.
6. Section 017700 Closeout Procedures: Project record documents.
7. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for
testing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C802 : Practice for Conducting and Inter Laboratory Test Program to
Determine the Precision of Test Methods for Construction.
2. ASTM C1021 : Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building
Sealants.
3. ASTM C1077 : Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory
Evaluation.
4. ASTM C1093 : Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
5. ASTM D290 : Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.
6. ASTM D3740 : Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and
Construction.
7. ASTM D4561 : Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing
Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.
8. ASTM E329 : Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing
Agencies as Used in Construction.
9. ASTM E543 : Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive
Testing Agencies.
10. ASTM E548 : Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of
Testing Laboratories and Inspection Bodies.
11. ASTM E699 : Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing,
Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in
Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee
E6.
New Jahra Hospital
1.03 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Employment and payment for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
specified inspecting and testing shall be at the Contractors expense.

B. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work
in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C802, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM
D290, ASTM D3740, ASTM D4561, ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM E548, ASTM E699.

B. All materials and work will be tested as required in the Specifications and testing shall be
carried out at the Contractors expense at any of the following:
1. MPW Research Station Testing Facilities.
2. Approved testing agency or approved testing laboratory.

C. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineers Representative to the tests to
be conducted at any or all of the above facilities.

D. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.

E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable
to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.05 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and
names of full time registered Engineer for approval by the Engineers Representative.

1.06 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineers Representative and
Contractor in performance of services.

C. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified
standards.

D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Promptly notify Engineers Representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of Work Products.

F. Perform additional inspection and tests required by Engineers Representative.

G. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

1.07 LABORATORY REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit three (3) copies of laboratory report to
Engineers Representative and additional copy to Contractor.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Include:
1. Date issued,
2. Project title and number,
3. Name of inspector,
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection,
5. Identification of product and specifications section,
6. Location in the Project,
7. Type of inspection or test,
8. Date of test,
9. Results of tests,
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.

C. When requested by Engineers Representative provide interpretation of test results.

1.08 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY

A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. The Contractor shall allow for all necessary labour, containers, wrappings and labelling in
connection with the samples for testing and for all transport charges.

C. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

D. Provide incidental labour and facilities to undertake the following:
1. Provide access to Work to be tested.
2. Obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested,
3. Facilitate tests and inspections,
4. Provide storage and curing of test samples.

E. Notify Engineers Representative and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring inspecting and testing services.

F. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

1.10 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Refer to respective sections for testing requirements.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/015000-1 Temporary Facilities and Controls
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provision of Contractors temporary works, which includes:
1. Installation, maintenance, relocation whenever necessary by the progress of the
works and or as directed by the Engineers Representative, operation by the
Contractor of all temporary works, clearing away and cleaning on completion of the
Contract, including making good as directed by the Engineers Representative.
2. Provide, maintain and operating an approved system for refuse collection, surface
water drainage and sewage disposal for the duration of the Contract and for clearing
away, deodorizing, sterilizing and backfilling same as necessary upon completion of
the project.
3. Adequate and proper provision for the storage and protection of materials, plant and
equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineers Representative.
4. Provision of telephone and/or wireless communication for his use and that of his
Subcontractors, which shall be separate from that provided for the Employer and
5. All air-conditioned temporary facilities shall be constructed to the standards for
similar permanent facilities.
6. Provide and maintain all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations
acceptable to the Engineers Representative and local authorities having jurisdiction
thereof. Make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such
authorities and the Engineer Representative. Remove temporary installations and
connections when no longer required and restore the services and sources of supply
to proper operating condition.
7. Maintenance and protection of traffic.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the relevant authorities approval to
construct all temporary works, including road closures and traffic diversions
(Maintenance and protection of traffic).

1. Section 015160 - Temporary Telephones.

1.02 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIES

A. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field offices or for storage without the approval of
the Engineer.

1.03 TEMPORARY SITE OFFICES

A. Contractors Offices: The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the provision and
maintenance during the operational life of the Contract of adequate air conditioned office
accommodation and car sheds, for the usage of the Contractor and his Subcontractors.
Adequate fire prevention measures shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Such offices shall be sited within the limit of Contract area and as approved by the
Engineers Representative and shall be cleared away on completion to the satisfaction of the
Engineers Representative. See also Section 013300 Submittal Procedures.

1.04 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND PLANT

A. Submit to the Engineers Representative for approval, drawings showing proposed layout of
temporary storage and plant on the Site and areas for use by specialty trades. Drawings for
each proposed change in layout of storage and plant must be re-submitted.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Provide at the Site and maintain in good condition, suitable watertight storage required for
materials that may be damaged by storage in open and provide adequate Fire Protection as
approved by the Engineers Representative.

C. On completion of the Works, or when directed by the Engineer or Engineers Representative,
clear away all temporary storage and plant to the satisfaction of the Engineers
Representative.

1.05 TEMPORARY COVERINGS

A. Protect finished surfaces including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or
through which materials are handled against possible damage resulting from contact of work
by other trades.

B. Tight wood sheeting shall be laid under all materials stored on finished surfaces. Planking
shall be laid before moving materials over finished areas. Wheel barrows used for such
areas shall have rubber-tyred wheels.

C. Finished surfaces including factory finished and job finished items shall be clean and not
marred upon delivery of the building to the Employer. The Contractor shall without extra
compensation refinish such spaces where such surfaces prove to have been inadequately
protected and are damaged.

D. Provide all necessary protection to executed work to the approval of the Engineer or
Engineers Representative, including but not limited to temporary coverings and protective
measures stated herein.

1.06 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION

A. Ensure that no fires are lit in or about the Site and take all reasonable precautions to avoid
outbreaks of fire on the works, temporary works, offices, stores and other places and things
connected therewith, especially with respect to the safe storage of petroleum products,
paints, explosives and other combustible, dangerous or hazardous goods. Comply with all
rules, regulations and orders made by any local authority having jurisdiction and provide and
maintain in good order and hold available at all times and in all places connected with the
works a sufficiency of efficient fire fighting facilities and equipment together with personnel
trained in its use.

B. The type, location and sufficiency of the fire fighting facilities and equipment shall be to the
Engineers Representative satisfaction and shall be approved by Kuwait Fire Department
(KFD). Such facilities/ equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. A temporary fire water tank which shall be of a non-corrosive material with an
actual capacity of at least 500 gallons or as per KFD requirements.
2. Temporary fire pumps which shall be provided in duplicate and shall be
automatically controlled by pressure switches. Capacity of each pump shall be at
minimum 2.3 litres/second against a residual pressure of 2 bar at the most remote
hose reel. Pressure loss calculation shall be submitted for approval.
3. The hose stations at all the individual building locations and floors shall be fed
through a temporary network around the project site with riser pipes (min. 50mm
dia. steel) to each individual structure or building. The number of hose stations per
floor and around the site shall be approved by the Engineers Representative and
KFD and shall be sufficient to ensure that all parts of the project site permanent
works are within effective reach of water hoses.
4. Provide one 4.5 Kg dry powder, 6 Kg CO2 and 9 litre water type fire extinguishers
and bucket filled with sand adjacent to each hose station and at any other location
requested by the Engineers Representative.
5. Provide all fire fighting facilities and equipment required by the Kuwait Fire
Department, whether or not specifically detailed herein. It is not permitted to use
the temporary fire fighting system for any other water source purpose at site.
New Jahra Hospital
C. The temporary fire fighting system shall be fully operational as soon as construction starts.
Extend the system progressively as construction proceeds maintaining its operational status
at all times.

D. Schedule work so that risers for the permanent fire protection system are installed, tested
and made operable at the earliest possible date. Obtain early approval and delivery of
permanent fire pumps and jockey pump with temporary motor controller and install in
permanent or temporary location ready for use in the event of fire. Furnish sufficient properly
sized fire hoses with nozzles to provide adequate coverage of all floors and the site.

E. The temporary fire fighting system shall not be removed until the permanent system is
operational, thereby ensuring that the building is always protected during construction. The
permanent system shall not be placed in operation without the prior approval in writing of the

F. Take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and torch cutting operations as
follows:
1. Welding or torch cutting operations shall be carried out only in well ventilated spaces
having little or no combustible materials in the vicinity, and preferably in an area
designated and used exclusively as a welding shop.
2. Where welding or torch cutting operations are carried out in-situ, surrounding areas
shall be suitably protected by covering or screening off, and suitable portable fire
extinguishers shall be kept immediately available with an attendant standing-by.
3. The number of gas cylinders in any working area and the storage of such cylinders,
full or empty, shall be in accordance with KFD requirements.

G. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in conformance with requirements of
KFD. Storage shall not be within the building.

H. Tarpaulins used during construction work shall be made of material which is resistant to fire,
water, weather and approved by KFD.

I. Make all arrangements for periodical inspection by Kuwait Fire Department and cooperate
with KFD and promptly carry out their recommendations.

J. Ensure that adequate, and to the extent possible, unimpeded means of egress from all parts
of the Works, is available at all times in case of fire.

1.07 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Make all arrangements with the Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW) for temporary
electrical service to the construction Site, pay all expenses, provide all equipment necessary
for temporary power and lighting. The electrical service shall be of adequate capacity for all
construction tools and equipment without overloading the temporary facilities and shall be
made available for power, lighting and construction operations of all trades. If temporary
supply is not granted by the MEW, then the Contractor must make his own arrangements for
providing supply of electricity in order to complete the Works.

B. Provide power distribution as required throughout the Works for power tools of all kinds.
Termination of power distribution shall be at locations approved by the Engineer.
Termination shall be provided complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other
electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system.

C. Temporary site electrical network including power and light system shall be furnished,
installed and maintained by the Contractor as required to satisfy the requirements of safety
and security. Temporary lighting system shall be adequate day and night for illumination in
all areas of the building. Where work is being performed at night, increase the illumination
level. The Contractor shall provide adequate outdoor lighting to illuminate staging,
stockpiles, trenches, projections, etc., to the satisfaction of the Engineer and general
illumination throughout, adequate for watchmen and emergency personnel. Temporary
electrical works shall be according to latest MEW regulations. Temporary electrical
distribution system design should be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for
New Jahra Hospital
approval with all electrical data of used equipment (cranes, lift, fire pump, welding machine,
workshop units, domestic power and light, etc.)

D. Temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the governing codes. Temporary wiring shall be maintained in a safe
manner and utilized so as not to constitute a hazard to persons or property.

E. At the completion of the Works remove all temporary electrical equipment and wiring.

1.08 TEMPORARY MATERIAL AND PERSONNEL HOISTS AND TOWER CRANE

A. Provide temporary material hoists to the Engineers Representatives approval and as
required to facilitate execution of the Works. Such hoists shall be erected, inspected and
maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance with ANSI A10.5
Safety Requirements for Material Hoists, and shall not be used for transporting personnel.

B. Provide tower crane(s) of adequate capacity for material handling and execution of works.
Upon installation of tower crane(s), get the entire installation regularly tested by Lloyds or
other approved testing agency certifying fitness prior to commencement of operation.

1.09 TEMPORARY ROADS AND ACCESS TO SITE

A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself regarding the suitability and
availability for his use during the Contract Period of access routes and the like and shall be
entirely responsible for the provision of any signs or directions on such routes that may be
considered necessary for the guidance of his personnel, Subcontractors, suppliers and the
like and for obtaining all necessary permission from any Government, Ministry or Land Owner
concerned, for the use of such routes or the provision of such signs or directions. The
Employer shall not be held responsible for any claims that may be made by any Landowner.

B. The Employer will not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular access route
and will not entertain any claim in respect of the non-suitability or non-availability for
continuous use during the Contract Period of any such route.

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary means of access to the Site from the
nearest permanent roadway together with any necessary crossovers and all necessary
temporary site roads leading to or upon the Site and/or working areas. The Contractor shall
take over the existing temporary roads, utilize them and maintain the same during his
Contract period, but the Contractor must coordinate/cooperate and share these roads as
necessary with Municipality the Engineer, Engineers Representative and other Contractors
on site.

D. The means of access, crossovers and temporary roads shall be maintained, altered,
adapted, etc., as may be found necessary during the course of the Contract and excavated
and cleared away upon completion including forking over and leaving same to the
satisfaction of the Engineers Representative.

E. Access to the Site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be made only from
locations approved by the Engineers Representative.

F. The Contractor must ensure that all access remain clear to provide access to other users
such as may be required for emergency vehicles, service vehicles, and other contractors.

G. The Contractor must enforce a 10 Kmph speed limit on all access and site roads.

H. The Contractor must provide a fully manned constant 24 hour per day security point on all
entry and exit points.

I. The Contractor must provide full temporary lighting to all access and site roads, together
with temporary carparks.

New Jahra Hospital
1.10 TEMPORARY STAIRS, SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS, ETC.

A. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, scaffolding, ladders, ramps,
runways, chutes, etc., as required for the proper execution of the Works.

B. As soon as permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary protective treads, handrails and
shaft enclosures.

1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY ACCOMMODATION

A. The sanitary accommodation at the ground level shall comprise temporary toilet building(s) in
an approved location, of approved construction in compliance with the local authority having
jurisdiction.

B. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the facilities ready for
inspection by such authorities whenever requested.

C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary.

D. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than this accommodation shall be
discharged immediately.

1.12 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Furnish all water required for the performance of the contract. All water shall be clean, clear,
drinkable and free of deleterious substances. No brackish water will be allowed to be used
for construction of the Works. Water outlets shall be conveniently located for
Subcontractors about the Site at ground level. All costs of providing temporary water shall
be borne by the Contractor. Provide an adequate supply of drinking water from approved
sources of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled, for employees. Where required, furnish
drinking water in suitable containers and provide cups for use of employees. Drinking water
dispensers shall be conveniently located where work is in progress.

1.13 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE

A. Upon taking possession of the Site the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for draining
rainwater, ground-water and water arising from construction processes, and shall provide
and maintain such temporary drainage installations as may be necessary during the period of
construction in a manner approved by the Engineers Representative and so as not to
adversely affect the permanent works or adjacent areas and properties.

B. Temporary drainage installations (storm water and foul water) may be connected to existing
drains provided written permission is obtained from the local authorities have jurisdiction
thereof, and provided such connection work is executed and maintained in strict accordance
with those authorities regulations and directions.

C. At completion of the work, or at such times as the Engineers Representative may direct,
remove all temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the Engineers
Representative satisfaction and as required by the concerned authorities.

1.14 KITCHENS AND CANTEENS

A. All kitchens and canteens are maintained to the hygienic requirements of the Ministry of
Public Health.

B. Food beverages served from all kitchens shall be prepared and provided in conformance
with the latest requirements of the Ministry of Public Health and the Kuwait Municipality. All
kitchens shall be open to inspections for hygiene conducted by the concerned governmental
authorities.

New Jahra Hospital
C. All staff who are employed to prepare food and beverages from the kitchens shall have been
medically certified and accordingly obtained health cards from the Ministry of Public Health
before commencing duties.

D. The Ministry of Health and the governmental authorities supervising the health-affairs in the
country shall have the right to remedy the health-requirements by Contractors personnel
and the Contractor will not be entitled to claim for any compensation pertaining thereto.

1.15 SECURITY

A. Protect work, products, materials, plant, temporary work, existing premises, and Employer's
operations, from theft, vandalism and unauthorised entry.

B. Safeguard Employer's staff.

C. Initiate programme at job mobilisation, maintain throughout construction period until
Employer occupancy or Employer acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security.

D. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. Allow
entrance only to authorised persons with proper identification. Maintain log of workmen and
visitors, make available to Employer or Engineers Representative on request.

E. Issue colour coded identification tags including photograph, to all permanent site based
personnel, including operatives, management, subcontractors, the Employers staff and the
Engineers staff. All tags must be worn at all times.

F. Issue temporary identification tags to all site visitors, including delivery drivers, etc. All tags
must be worn at all times.

G. Check all identification tags daily at points of ingress. Record the name, company and
vehicle registration number of all visitors.

H. Regularly and randomly stop and search vehicles at points of egress for stolen materials,
unauthorized goods, etc.

I. Maintain regular peripatetic security patrols of the whole site, particularly of the perimeter
throughout each 24 hour period. The security guards must not be static but must constantly
patrol. Each guard must be issued with a digital camera and a powerful flash light. Each
guard must record each peripatetic patrol by electronically logging in at established stations.

1.16 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Dust Control:
1. Execute work by methods to minimise raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

B. Erosion and Sediment Control:
1. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and
fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
2. Minimise amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
3. Provide temporary measure such as berms, dikes and drains, to prevent water flow.
4. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or
clays.
5. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation;
promptly apply corrective measures.

C. Water Control
1. Rough grade site and provide all necessary drainage to prevent standing water and
to direct surface drainage away from excavations, trenches, adjoining properties,
and public right-of-way until permanent drainage is accepted.
2. Allow for removal of temporary drainage upon acceptance of the whole work.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Maintain excavations and trenches free of water. Provide and operate pumping
equipment of a capacity to control water flow.
4. Provide dewatering system to maintain excavations dry and free of water inflow on a
24 hours basis.
5. Provide piping to handle pumping outflow to discharge in a manner to avoid erosion.
6. Remove equipment and installation when no longer needed.
7. Comply with the Local Authorities Regulations.

D. Noise Control
1. All motorized equipment on the site including hauling trunks shall be equipped with
sound control devices at all times. The sound level measured at a distance of 5
metres from any piece of equipment shall not exceed 60 decibels.
2. Comply with Municipality Regulations.
3. Electrical generators and other heavy equipment are to be housed in soundproof
enclosure.
4. Workmens voice communication shall be kept under control at all times.

E. Pest and Rodent Control
1. Provide proper measures to control pests in temporary accommodation and storage
areas.

F. Pollution Control
1. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced
by construction operations.

G. Fire Control
1. Fires are not permitted on site.
2. Provide temporary fire protection system for the site as required by Clause 1.05 of
this Section. Allow for removing temporary fire protection on completion and
acceptance of the whole works.

1.17 SAFETY MEASURES AND STANDARDS

A. Accident Prevention Programme
1. Within 30 days of the date of Enterprise, the Contractor will submit, for the
Engineers approval, his Accident Prevention Programme naming the key person in
his organization who will be responsible for administering the programme. This
Accident Programme shall incorporate in it the requirements of Safety Programme,
which it follows, and in particular the safety requirements listed in the safety
checklist.
2. All employees will be physically qualified for performing the duties to which they are
assigned. Operators of equipment and vehicles shall be able to read and understand
the signs, signals and operating instructions in use. Prior to start of work,
arrangements will be made for assistance from medical services in existence in the
vicinity of the project site. Communication and transportation to effectively care for
injured workers will be provided as necessary. First Aid Kits, in the ratio of one unit
for each 25 persons or less, will be provided on the job. They shall be easily
accessible to all the workers.

B. Safety Programme
1. The safety programme established and maintained on this project will incorporate
the requirements of the safety and health requirements of the Government of Kuwait,
the AGC manual of Accident Prevention on construction, and all other local codes
and regulations.
2. The purpose of the programme is to elicit the interest and efforts of all personnel,
both management and supervisory, required for the prevention of injuries and
accidents, through proper and thorough training and instructions to employees and
labour. All Contractors are responsible for the administration of a comprehensive
safety programme.
New Jahra Hospital
3. This project safety programme embodies the prevention of accident injury,
occupational illness and property damage. Each contractor shall provide and
maintain a safe, hazard free workplace for their employees, for fellow workers and
the general public. As a minimum, the Contractors safety programme shall
incorporate all of the principles of the project safety programme.
4. This project safety programme shall ensure the involvement and active participation
of all project employees by requiring safety training which will promote recognition of
unsafe acts, potential and actual hazards and the immediate corrective action to be
taken. All employees shall be constantly aware of their responsibility to work in a
safe manner.
5. Each Contractor, and his subcontractors, has a contractual obligation to perform
their work using safe methods and to comply with the Projects safety programme.

C. Management Organization
1. A safety Coordinator is responsible for the implementation and further development
of the safety programme. His duties will include the following:
a. Conduct monthly safety meeting with site personnel and subcontractors.
b. Inspect the project daily, and record all visible safety hazards, including
identification of violators.
c. Follow through on timely correction of safety hazards, making immediate
corrections as necessary.
d. Monitor on-the-job safety meetings and report same on his Daily Report.
e. Foster a Safety Awareness in all tradesmen and supervisors on the Project.
f. Follow-up, for insurance purposes, all relevant safety reports.
g. Check all areas at least once a day for housekeeping and cleanup. Take
immediate action to ensure compliance with requirements.
h. Submit Job Hazards Analysis for each major phase or element of work as
necessary.
i. Post safety signs on the project.

D. Subcontractor Participation: The officers and personnel of all subcontractors shall be
responsible for compliance with this safety programme. This will entail indoctrinating their
on-the-job representatives with a working knowledge of the: General Safety Programme on
the job. They are further responsible to have their firms represented at all project safety
meetings.

E. Accident Prevention Responsibility
1. Safety Meetings will be held at least once a month at the jobsite. The meetings will
be convened and conducted by the safety coordinator. All supervisors and foreman
are expected to be in attendance. Each subcontractor will have a responsible
representative present to follow through on information and resolutions discussed
and adopted at these meetings. The Engineers representative may attend these
meetings.
2. The Agenda for the safety meetings will generally include inter alia:
a. Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety
bulletins, signs and notices.
b. A review of the safety coordinators inspection.
c. Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month and discussion
and implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.
d. Appointment of safety Representatives for subcontractors.
3. All supervisors and foremen are responsible to plan and accomplish their work with
due regard for the safety of all individuals on the jobsite. They will be expected to
eliminate all possible accident hazards when planning the work under their control. It
is expected the subcontractors will observe and correct any accident producing
practices before injury occurs. If an accident does occur, they will investigate to
determine the cause and take the required corrective action to prevent a recurrence.
All accidents shall immediately be reported to the project superintendent and to the
Engineer.

F. First Aid and Medical Facilities: The Contractor shall provide first aid and medical services
as required by the relevant municipal and ministerial authorities of Kuwait.
New Jahra Hospital
G. Accident Reporting
1. All lost time injuries, property damage accidents (excluding off-project vehicle
accidents) and material losses in which the property damage exceeds KD. 100/- will
be reported in writing to the Engineer within 48 hours of the accident or incident.
Immediate notification will be provided in advance of the written report.
2. In the event of any employee being sent to a doctor for treatment, a release will be
obtained from the doctor stating whether (1) the employee is not fit for duty; (2) the
employee is fit for light duty; or, (3) the employee is fit for duty. A copy of this release
will accompany the accident report.

H. Protective Equipment
1. Minimum requirements for protective equipment shall be the wearing of hard hats by
all personnel, including subcontractors, as well as protective clothing, as warranted.
2. Supplemental requirements for protective equipment shall be developed to cover
specific areas of the work for such items as eye protection, protective clothing, life
belts and life lines as per the requirements of this safety specifications.

I. Hand Tools and Power Tools
1. All hand tools and portable power tools to be used shall be of good order and shall
be used for the purpose intended. All electric power tools will be grounded and will
be inspected frequently for worn out parts and connections.
2. Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose cutting
edges. Radial arm power saws shall be equipped with automatic brakes. Explosive
actuated tools and the use will be discouraged, and must have prior written
Engineers Representatives approval before delivery to the project.

J. Worker Indoctrination
1. Minimum Protective Clothing
a. Hard hats are required at all times.
b. Protective eye covering will be worn when welding, hammering metal, stone,
or concrete, grinding or cutting metal units.
2. Minimum Safety Observances
a. Work areas and access ways are to be free of trash, materials, and all
tripping hazards.
b. Temporary electrical wiring will be protected from damage by traffic, be in
good condition and protected by ground fault interrupters.
c. All portable containers for gas and other inflammable liquids shall be UL or
FM approved, with self-closing lids. No plastic containers are allowed.
d. Maximum speed for automobiles and vehicles on the site is 10 kilometers
per hour.
e. All accidents are to be reported directly to supervisors, the Engineer and the
Engineers Representative. If serious injury is apparent or suspected, utilize
the pre-established emergency hospital service. The telephone number shall
be prominently displayed at all site telephone locations. For small cuts,
scratches, etc. first aid kits are available from the contractor and each
subcontractor.
f. In the event of fire, if it cannot be immediately contained, notify the nearest
Kuwait Fire Brigade. The telephone number shall be prominently displayed
at all site telephone locations. Then attempt to put out the fire with available
fire extinguishers and water hoses until help arrives. Do not endanger
personnel in fighting the fire.
g. Heavy Equipment Suppliers must obtain clearance from the Engineers
Representative before commencement of their work.
h. All equipment must meet the Safety Standards, described in these
specifications.

K. Safety Check List
1. Prepare safety programme.
2. Post safety programme on job bulletin board. Prepare and post fire preventive
programme.
3. Analyze job for potential hazards and hazardous procedures.
New Jahra Hospital
4. Establish plan for location of material storage, personal facilities and traffic flow.
5. Arrange for sanitary facilities.
6. Arrange for debris removal.
7. Establish procedure to obtain subcontractor safety programme.
8. Arrange for doctor.
9. Arrange for hospital.
10. Arrange for ambulance service.
11. Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical and ambulance service at each of the
on site telephone locations.
12. Obtain claims forms.
13. Contact loss Prevention Department of Insurance Carrier.
14. Arrange for exposure checks by Insurance Carrier.
15. Obtain from the Engineers Representative a report form for reporting accidents and
injuries.
16. Establish adequate first aid kit and stretcher facilities.
17. Post chart to signify weekly checks of first aid kits.
18. Hire qualified first aid personnel, if more than ten minutes from a medical facility with
which and emergency medical service has been established.
19. Conduct a pre-construction survey of surrounding property existing condition, if
appropriate.
20. Prepare and post at each on site telephone location off hours emergency
notification list.
21. Arrange for watchman service, if required.
22. Prepare a watchmans log.
23. Obtain any required state forms and posters.
24. Verify insurance on sub-contractors starting work on site prior to final execution of
sub-contractors.
25. Obtain safety equipment appropriate to operations:
a. Hard hats
b. Safety belts
c. Goggles
d. Ear protection
e. Carbon monoxide tester
26. Post sketch showing locations of fire alarm boxes, hydrants and first aid facilities.
27. Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs.
28. Establish weekly tool box safety talks.
29. Set-up an accident control chart.
30. Establish monthly safety meeting.
31. Appoint a safety supervisor and set date for the first safety meeting.

L. Non-Compliance with Safety Requirements
1. Where the Contractor violates any of the safety provisions described within this
Section 015000, the Engineer shall take the appropriate remedial action, and all
costs associated therewith shall be for the Contractors account.
2. On the occurrence of the first violation, the contractor shall be warned in writing by
the Engineers Representative, and shall be instructed to remedy the violation within
a specified time. Where the contractor fails to remedy the violation within the time
stipulated, the contractor shall be prohibited from carrying out any further work
within the affected area until the specific exposure has been corrected.
3. On the occurrence of all further violations, the severity of each violation shall be
considered by the Engineers Representative and the contractor instructed
accordingly. Where the contractor unreasonably ignores the Engineers
Representatives instructions, then the foreman responsible for operations in the
area where the safety violations are occurring shall be dismissed from the site.
4. Should the Contractor persistently breach the safety requirements with undue
reason, then the principal of the contractor shall be summoned to the site and
instructed to take the appropriate action to ensure that his employees comply with
the safety requirements of the Contract. The following is a summary of Engineers
action in the event of the Contractors non-compliance with safety requirements.
5. On the third recorded recidivist health and safety violation, the individual perpetrator
shall be permanently removed from site.
New Jahra Hospital
Summary of Engineers Action

In the Event of Contractors Non-Compliance with Safety Requirements

CATEGORY

SAFETY ITEM

ORDER OF
ACTION

ACTION

Material
or
Equipment

- Scaffolding
- Guard Rails
- Excavation Protection
- Safe Hand & Power Tools
- Temporary Elect. Grounding
- Machinery & Mech.
Equipment

1.0
2.0

3.0

Contractor warned to rectify.
If contractor fails to rectify,
contractor is barred from
working in exposed area.
In the case of continuous
breach, employees and foreman
responsible for exposed area
shall be dismissed from site.

Protective
Garments

- Head Protection
- Eye Protection
- Hearing Protection
- Respiratory Protection
- Hand Protection
- Foot Protection
- Body Protection

1.0

2.0

3.0

Responsible employee
prevented from continuing work
until properly attired.
When same employee is in
breach a second time, he will be
dismissed from the site.
When more than 2 employees
are dismissed per week, then
responsible foreman shall be
dismissed.

Facilities

- First Aid
- Sanitation
- Material Storage
- Fire Protection

1.0
2.0

Contractor warned to supply.
If contractor fails to supply,
engineer shall supply and
deduct the cost from the
contractor.

1.18 PARKING

A. Maintain traffic and parking areas including that of the Employer and the Engineers
Representative in a sound condition free of excavation material, construction equipment,
products and mud.

B. Parking on site will be limited. Site operatives are forbidden from parking on site or in the
neighbourhood around the site. The Contractor must provide sufficient and adequate crew
buses to transport all site operatives onto and away from site. The Contractor must provide
marshals to control the embarkation and disembarkation of crew buses.

1.19 TRAFFIC REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall ascertain from the Municipality and other government departments
what restrictions and regulations exist concerning the flow of traffic to and from the Site, and
shall pay all charges. Provide all temporary diversions, traffic signals, signs and the like as
required. Ensure that all vehicles abide by the restrictions and regulations.

New Jahra Hospital
1.20 ON-SITE BATCHING PLANT

A. The Contractor must check with the relevant authorities regarding the possible siting of a
batching plant on-site. The Contractor is deemed to have included for alternative material
sources should a batching plant not be permissible. No claim whatsoever shall be
entertained should a batching plant not be permissible.

1.21 CENTRALIZED ON-SITE WASTE FACILITY (TRANSFER STATION)

A. The Contractor shall provide and manage one or more on-site waste facilities. The
Contractor shall bear all costs in relation to this facility(s). The facility(s) shall be located on
site but remote from the works and shall have adequate vehicular and pedestrian access,
hard standing, lighting, firefighting equipment. It shall be contained on three sides by
reinforced concrete walls. The Contractor shall periodically remove the waste from the site.
This facility shall be provided for the full duration of the works and shall be available for use,
free of charge, by all Subcontractors.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all areas of work clean and tidy and for
transporting all waste and arisings to the centralized waste facility.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the general and communal areas of the site
clean and tidy and for transporting all waste and arisings to the centralized waste facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LABOURS SANITARY/TOILET FACILITIES

A. Provide sufficient number of prefabricated structure buildings as site toilets with all
necessary plumbing, electrical and ventilation connections required to make the system
operational. The number and the location/relocation of the temporary sanitary/toilet facilities
to be to the approval of the Engineers Representative.

B. Each of the Site toilet units shall comprise of the following:
1. Steel frame with sandwich panel to walls and partitions, corrugated metal sheet
roofing.
2. Wall mounted lavatories with faucet, plastic shelf and mirror. At least 1 No. for each
(25) persons.
3. Wall hung Urinals with water stop valve. At least 1 No. of the use of and per each
(25) persons.
4. Water Closets with plastic flush tank and flexible wash hose. At least 1 No. for the
use of and per each twenty five (25) persons.
5. Electrical Water Heaters complete with safety valves.
6. Electrical connections for power and lighting.
7. Exhaust fans and ventilators.
8. Water supply connection from source provided by the Contractor.
9. Plumbing and drainage connections.
10. Percolating (collection) Pit of proper capacity.
11. Drainage Manholes as required.

2.02 UNOFFICIAL LATRINES

A. The mis-use of any area of the site as an unofficial latrine is strictly prohibited. Any area so
mis-used must be immediately cleaned and sanitized.

B. All operatives must be made aware of this prohibition. Temporary signs in various languages
must be posted around site to reinforce this prohibition.

C. Any operative found disregarding this prohibition must be immediately and permanently
removed from site.
New Jahra Hospital

2.03 TEMPORARY PRAYER FACILITIES

A. Provide adequate and suitable prayer facilities on-site for all personnel. The size, suitability
and location/relocation of temporary prayer facilities to be to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/015160-1 Temporary Telephones
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015160

TEMPORARY TELEPHONES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The temporary telephone to the Employer, and Engineers Representative
Site Offices. The Contractor shall pay all associated fees and charges for the full duration of
the project. The Contractor shall also arrange for and provide separate temporary service for
his own and his Subcontractors use. Work Includes:
1. Temporary telephone services.
2. Maintenance.
3. Removal.

1. Section 011100 - Summary of the Works.
2. Section 015210 - Field Offices and Sheds

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Employers office telephones:
1. One (1) CO/MOC direct line and for DSL Internet use.
2. One (1) separate MOC line for fax machine.
3. Two (2) separate CO lines for local calls only shall be through EPABX having
exchange capacity for 15 extensions. Provide one (1) executive telephone set and
other telephone sets shall be of normal type with intercom facility.
4. Each receiver shall have equal access to outside lines. Each internal receiver shall
enable caller to dial each others receiver.
5. The executive telephone set shall be able to make international calls.

B. Engineers Representative offices telephones:
1. One (1) CO/MOC direct line and for DSL Internet use.
2. One (1) separate MOC line for fax machine.
3. Three (3) separate CO lines for local calls only shall be through EPABX having
exchange capacity for 30 extensions. EPABX to be inter-connected with the
Employers EPABX at site. Provide one (1) executive telephone set and other
telephone sets shall be of normal type with intercom facility.
5. Each receiver shall have equal access to outside lines. Each internal receiver shall
enable caller to dial each others receiver.
6. Provide one telephone instrument to kitchen and each office specified under Section
01521.

C. Running Costs
1. Pay costs of supply, installation, maintenance and removal of services.
2. Pay cost of annual telephone fees and calls throughout the contract duration.
3. Pay cost of international telephone calls/faxes required by the project.
4. Pay cost of DSL Internet provider charges.

D. In case the Contractor failed to provide telephone lines in time, supply six (6) mobile
telephones with line for the exclusive usage of the Employer and Engineers Representative
on temporary basis.

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit any relevant product data for approval by the Engineers Representative.

Amiri Diwan III-2/015160-2 Temporary Telephones
New Jahra Hospital
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Must be new and adequate for the purpose subject to approval by the Engineers
Representative.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Products locally used or specialty devices compatible with Ministry of Communications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install service at time of site mobilization.

B. Modify and extend service as Work progresses.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain system to provide uninterrupted service.

3.03 REMOVAL

A. Remove temporary system after obtaining Engineers Representative approval.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/015210-1 Project Offices and Sheds
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015210

PROJECT OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Adequate air conditioned/heated and furnished office accommodation for
the use of the Employer and Engineers Representative, work includes:
1. Temporary Field Office
2. Maintenance and Cleaning until Removal.
3. Removal upon completion.

1. Section 011100 - Summary of the Work
2. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
3. Section 015160 - Temporary Telephones


A. Design, supply and erect in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the
Engineers Representative the project field offices and sheds.

B. Obtain approvals from Local Authorities having jurisdiction, pay fees and provide guarantees
as required.

C. All services as described hereunder shall be provided for the project duration plus three (3)
months after the Substantial Completion.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Data: Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit for information only,
copies of manufacturers specifications for the office and equipment substantiating that
products comply with the requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Prior to procurement Contractor shall submit layout plans for all field office
to Engineers Representative for review and approval.

1.04 MAINTENANCE OF SITE ACCOMMODATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide full maintenance for all items to be provided under these
requirements in accordance with the Project Design and Construction Schedule. This shall
include, but not be limited to, normal and preventative maintenance, remedial maintenance,
replacements, spares and consumables.

B. The Contractor shall provide six (6) full time office boys (two (2) for the offices of Employer
and four (4) for Engineers Representative). The said office boys shall be employed by the
Contractor in accordance with the Project Design and Construction Schedule.

C. The office boys mentioned in Article 1.04.B shall be available at all times in accordance with
the project Design and Construction Schedule or such extended periods as may be
instructed by the Engineers Representative. In the event that any of the said office boys is
not available then the Contractor shall pay a penalty in the sum of KD. 15/- (Kuwaiti Dinars
Fifteen) per person, per day or part thereof for each period of non-availability, such period to
be determined by the Engineers Representative.

D. The Contractor shall provide five (5) full time tea boys two (2) for the offices of Employer and
three (3) for Engineers Representative. The said tea boys shall be employed by the
Contractor in accordance with the Project Design and Construction Schedule.
New Jahra Hospital
E. The tea boys mentioned in Article 1.04.D shall be available at all times in accordance with the
project Design and Construction Schedule or such extended periods as may be instructed
by the Engineers Representative. In the event that any of the said tea boys is not available
then the Contractor shall pay a penalty in the sum of KD. 15/- (Kuwaiti Dinars Fifteen) per
person, per day or part thereof for each period of non-availability, such period to be
determined by the Engineers Representative.

F. Provide all necessary consumables, i.e. various teas, coffees, fresh milk, sugar etc., cleaning
materials for offices, kitchen and toilets, toilet paper, hand towels, etc., in connection with
kitchen, toilet, Employers and Engineers Representatives staff and janitorial services in
accordance with the Project Design and Construction Schedule. Provide boxed tissues for all
office personnel.

G. Provide bottled mineral water (500 ml bottles) for complete Employers and Engineers
Representatives offices in accordance with the Project Design and Construction Schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. New, adequate for required purpose.

B. Prefabricated building units, or buildings constructed at site with floors raised above ground,
securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors including provisions
for equipment.

C. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage
spaces. Maintain during progress of Work and until removal is authorised.

D. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with
occupancy and storage requirements.

E. Exterior Materials: Weather-resistant, and heat insulated finished in one colour acceptable to

F. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat and sound
insulated pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases. Provide false ceiling and
recessed type light fittings in all rooms.

G. Lighting for Offices: Fluorescent to all rooms, 500 Lux at desktop height, exterior lighting at
entrance doors.

H. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office area and each storage
area.

I. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage
of products.

J. Interior Flooring: Carpeting in all rooms including corridors. Sheet vinyl to wash rooms and
kitchens.

K. Windows: Minimum of size approx. 10% of floor area with operable sash and insect screens.
Locate according to approved shop drawings to provide views of construction area wherever
practical. All windows shall be provided with venetian blinds or vertical slat fabric blinds.

L. Electrical Distribution Panel: MCB and number of ways as required.

M. Minimum four, 13A, 240 volt single convenience outlets, one on each wall of each room.

New Jahra Hospital
N. Telephone: As specified in Section 015160 one telephone instrument per member of staff
(30 No. for the Employer, 70 No. for the Engineers Representative), one in each conference
room and one in each kitchen.

O. Sanitary and Kitchen Facilities: as specified.

P. Furniture and equipment: New quality furniture from approved manufacturer as specified
including maintenance.

Q. Ceiling Height: Minimum 2500mm

2.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfortable
conditions of 20 C heating and 23 C cooling by A/C system with built-in heating element.

B. Storage Spaces: Ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract
Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products.

C. Exhaust fan with automatic shutter, one per W.C. (fitting) and kitchen.

2.03 EMPLOYERS AND ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE STAFF OFFICES

A. Within seven (7) days of the "Date of Enterprise" provide a new air-conditioned "Portacabin"
as initial accommodation for 48 personnel. Each "Portacabin" shall have four rooms
suitably furnished to the approval of the Engineer; in addition it shall have suitable toilet and
kitchenette facilities. On completion of the main site office accommodation remove
"Portacabins" from the site.
Failure to provide this temporary accommodation within the specified time shall incur a
penalty of KD. 100/- per day.

B. Within 45 days of the "Date of Enterprise" provide and fully maintain throughout the Contract
period, fully furnished, fully serviced air conditioned final accommodation for the use of all
the staff of the Employer and the Engineer's Representatives all as approved by the
Engineer. The offices of the Employer and of the Engineers Representative shall be discreet
and self-contained, but shall be in close juxta position. Both offices shall be supplied by
mains electricity (either temporary or permanent connections), rather than by generator
power. The office accommodation shall be constructed of new materials throughout and all
furniture and furnishings shall be new and of executive/good/site quality and approved by
the Engineer. Provide vertical sun blinds to all windows. The size of rooms are indicative only
and may change as per the furniture. Complete office accommodation, office equipment,
telephones, cars, transport, consumables etc. etc. shall be provided for the duration of
contract plus three months and shall become the property of the Contractor after the
completion of the Contract. Furnish to the following requirements.

C. All accommodation listed hereunder is subject to the Engineers Approval. Provide offices for
thirty (30) staff members of the Employer and for seventy(70) Staff members of the

Employers Office Room Furniture and Equipment Requirements
Designation (30 persons)

Three Offices
1. The Senior Management Offices 1 No. Executive type Office desk with side
(Size 8.00 x 5.00m) return
Arm Chair
Visitors chairs (4 No)
3 Seat sofa (2 No)
Single seat sofa (2 No)
Coffee tables (1 No medium, 1 No Large)
Glass fronted cupboard units (2 No)
Heavy duty fire proof metal storage cabinet
with lock (2 No.)
New Jahra Hospital

Drawing table Size 2.00 x 1.00m)
Mobile drawings hanging racks
Circular Conference table with 4 chairs
Pin boards, Size 2.4 x 1.2m (3 No)
Refrigerator Japanese make and capacity
6 cuft
Coat Hanger
Plants (3 No)
Bin (1 No)
3 tier filing trays (2 sets)
Credenza

2. ThreeToilets : Executive 1 No. WC Suite and flexible hose
(Attached to the Wash hand basin
Senior Management Offices) Toilet paper holder
(Size 1.6 x 2.25m) Mirror
Soap dispenser
Towel dispenser/waste unit
Cupboard unit
Coat Hanger on Door
Towel Rack

3. Executive Meeting Room Meeting table with 30 No. chairs
(Size - 12.00 x 6.00m) Low height lockable cabinets (4 No)
Multi media projector
Model MT1060 (NEC) or equivalent
Ceiling mounted screen with motor
Model : 10 NTSC (Draper) or equivalent
Pin Board, Size 2.4 x 1.2m (3 No)
Writing Board with stand 1.00m x 1.00,
(1 No)
Manual laser pointer (2 No)

4. Fifteen Single Offices Office desk with side return
(Size 5.00 x 4.00m) Chair
Glass fronted cupboard units (2 No)
Drawings table - size 2.00 x 1.00m
Mobile drawings hanging rack
Small Coffee Table (1 No)
Coat Hanger
3-tier filing trays (2 sets)
Bin (1 No)

5. Five Twin Offices Each Office For each person provide
for two persons Office desk with side return
(Size - 4.50 x 4.00m) Arm Chair
Cupboard units (2 No)
Drawings Table - Size 2.00 x 1.00m
Mobile drawing hanging rack
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No)

New Jahra Hospital

6. Two Secretarys Secretary's Desk with side return
Office + Waiting Area for 3 Chair
Persons Single sofa (3 No)
(Size - 4.50 x 4.50m) Executive filing cabinets (3 No)
Non fire-rated metal cupboards (2 No)
Heavy duty fireproof metal lockable cupboard
(1 No)
Open fronted shelving units (2 No)
Pin Board, Size 2.4 x 1.2m (1 No)
Plants
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No)

7. Toilet : Male 3 No. WC Suite and flexible hoses
(Size 5.5 x 2.25m) 3 No. Wash hand basin with hot & cold water
3 No. Toilet paper holder
3 No. Mirror
3 No. Soap dispenser
3 No. Towel dispenser/waste unit
Cupboard unit
3 No. Coat Hanger on Door
Ablution Area
3 No. Extract fans to suit.

8. Toilet : Female 2 No. WC Suite and flexible hoses
(Size - 3.50 x 2.25m) 2 No. Wash hand basin with hot & cold water
2 No. Mirror
Cupboard unit
Ablution Area

9. Two Archive/Photocopy Rooms 34 MR of floor mounted open metal shelving
(Size - 4.00 x 4.50m) each with 5 shelves (some as island units)

10. One Sample Room A room of about 40 m size, with about 28MR
(Size - 10.00 x 4.00m) of floor mounted open metal shelving each
with 5 shelves.
A label preparation machine to label the
samples.
Aluminium ladder (1 No.)

11. One Prayer Room Carpet with lines for worshippers
(Size - 5.00 x 4.00m) Clock 1 No.
Coat Hooks 6 No.
Shelving of face width 1.00m x height 0.60m,
depth 0.30m with 2 shelves.

12. One Dining Room Table 1 No.
(Size - 4.00 x 4.00m) Chair 8 No.
New Jahra Hospital

13. One Contract Documents Room A secure room with heavy duty door (no
(Size - 4.00 x 4.00m) window) of about 16 m size with adequate
floor mounted open shelving, to be advised
by the Engineer/Engineers Representative.
Drawing Record Card Filing Boxes

14. Kitchen Sink Unit;
(Size - 3.50 x 4.50m) 4.50 LM of wall cupboards and 7.00 LM of
base units including work top; Refrigerator
Japanese make and capacity to be 300 litres,
gas rings or hot plates as required by the
Engineer; hot and cold (filtered) water supplies;
dish washer, two microwave extract fan,
telephone set, heavy duty vacuum cleaner,
preparation counter, crockery, cutlery,
glassware for coffee and tea preparation and
serving, water filter all to be sufficient for the
number of personnel.

Engineers Representatives Office Furniture and Equipment Requirements
Rooms Designation (70 persons)

1. One Office Office desk with side return
(Size - 6.00 x 4.50m) Executive Chair
(Engineers Representative) Visitors chairs (2 No)
Drawing table - size 2.00 x 1.00m
Rectangular Conference Table with Eight (8)
chairs
Glass fronted cupboard units full height (2 No)
Heavy duty fire proof metal storage cabinet
with lock
Pin boards (3 No.) - Size 2.4 x 1.2m
Refrigerator - Japanese make and capacity
6 cuft
Mobile drawing hanging rack
Plants (2 No)
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No)

2. Two Offices Office desk with side return
(Size 4.00 x 4.50m) Executive Chair
(Contract Administrator & Visitors chairs (4 No)
Deputy Engineers Representative) Pin boards, Size 2.40 x 1.2m (3 No)
Metal cupboard 1200mm wide x 1800mm high
(1 No)
Metal shelving unit, 5 shelves high, 1200mm
wide, (3 No)
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No)

New Jahra Hospital
Room Designation (70 persons)

3. Three Toilet for the above 3 1 No. WC Suite and Flexible hose
offices staff (Size 3.00 x 2.00m) Wash Hand Basin (1 No)
Toilet Paper Holder
Mirror
Soap Dispenser
Towel Dispenser / Waste Unit
Cupboard Unit
Coat Hanger on Door
Ablution Area

4. One Single Office Secretary's desk and chair (1No)
(Size 4.50 x 4.50m) Typist/Telephone Operator - Desk & One
for one person Chair
(Executive Secretary) Single seat sofa (3 No)
Computer print-out storage racks (1 No)
Table for one fax machine
Open fronted shelving with 5 shelves (1 No)
4-drawer metal filing cabinets (2 No)
Metal cupboards: 1x2m high, 2 No. to begin
with & additional to be provided as required for
record keeping upto a max. of 5 No.
(1 No)
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No)

5. One Twin office of size 8.00 x Provide for each of the person
4.50m for two persons Secretary's desk and chair (1No)
(Two Secretaries) Single seat sofa (1 No)
Computer print-out storage racks (1 No)
Open fronted shelving with 5 shelves (1 No)
4-drawer metal filing cabinets (2 No)
Metal cupboards: 1x2m high, 2 No. to begin
with & additional to be provided as required for
record keeping up to a max. of 5 No.
(1 No)
Coat Hanger
Bin (1 No.)

6. Fourteen Single offices for Office desk with side return (1 No)
one person (Size 4.00 x 4.00m) Chair (1 No)
(1 No)
Metal shelving unit, 5 shelves, 1200mm wide x
1800mm high (1 No)
Drawing Table size 2.00 x 1.00 m (1 No)
Mobile drawing hanging rack (1 No)
Pin boards, Size 2.4 x 1.2m high(1 No)
3-tier filing trays (1 set)
Bin (1 No)
New Jahra Hospital

7. Twenty Five Twin Offices for For each office provide
two persons (Size 6.00 x 4.00m) Office desk with side return (2 No.)
Chair (2 No.)
(2 No)
Metal shelving unit, 5 shelves, 1200mm wide x
1800mm high (2 No)
Drawing Table size 2.00 x 1.00 m (1 No)
Mobile drawing hanging rack (2 No)
Pin boards, Size 2.4 x 1.2m high(2 No)
Bin (2 No)

8. Site Meeting Room Fully furnished meeting room to provide
seating
(Size - 20.00 x 6.00m) for 50 persons around a meeting table plus
second line of twenty additional seating
Low height lockable cabinets (4 No)
Slide projector
Overhead (ceiling mounted) projector
Ceiling mounted screen
White writing board with pens and erasers
Manual and laser pointer
System suitable for hanging presentation
boards on walls.
Pin boards 2.4 x 1.2m high (3 No)
Telephone Table (1 No)
Bins (4 No)

9. Two Small Site Meeting Provide for each meeting room
Rooms (Size 8.00 x 4.00m) Meeting table with 12 no. chairs
Pin boards 2.4 x 1.2m high (2 No)
Two waste bins
Low height lockable cabinets (2 No)
Location shall be approved by the Engineers
Representative.

10. Three Sample Rooms Provide for each Sample Room
(Size - 10.00 x 4.00m) A room of about 40m2 size, with about 28MR
of floor mounted open metal shelving each
with 5 shelves.
A label preparation machine to label the
samples.
Aluminium ladder (1 No)

11. Four Archive/Photocopy Rooms Provide for each Archive Room
(Size - 4.00 x 4.50m) 34 MR of floor mounted open metal shelving
each with 5 shelves (some as island units)

12. One Prayer Room Carpet with lines for worshippers
(Size - 8.00 x 4.00m) Clock 1 No
Coat Hooks 16 No
Shelving of face width 2.00m x height 0.60m,
depth 0.30m with 2 shelves.

New Jahra Hospital

13. One Dining Room Table 1 No
(Size - 4.00 x 8.00m) Chairs 16 No

14. One Contract Documents Room A secure room with heavy duty door
(Size - 4.00 x 4.00m) (no window) of about 16m size with adequate
floor mounted open shelving, to be advised
by the Engineer/Engineers Representative.
Drawing Record Card Filing Boxes

15. Two Toilets: Male Provide for each Toilet
(Size 5.00 x 3.00m) 3 No. WC Suite and flexible hoses
3 No. Wash hand basin with hot & cold water
3 No. Mirror
Cupboard unit
Ablution Area

16. One Toilet: Female 3 No. WC Suite and flexible hoses
(Size 5.5 x 2.25m) 3 No. Wash hand basin with hot & cold water
3 No. Mirror
Cupboard unit
Ablution Area

17. Two Kitchens Provide for each Kitchen
(Size - 3.50 x 4.50m) Sink Unit;
4.50 LM of wall cupboards and 7.00 LM of base
units including work top. Refrigerator
Japanese make and capacity to be 300 litres,
gas rings or hot plates as required by the
Engineer; hot and cold (filtered) water supplies;
dish washer, two microwave extract fan,
telephone set, heavy duty vacuum cleaner,
preparation counter, crockery, cutlery,
glassware for coffee and tea preparation and
serving, water filter all to be sufficient for the
number of personnel.

The distribution of the offices as detailed above are indicative only. The Contractor shall
submit the Layout/Drawings of the offices for Engineers approval, and shall include for all
circulation spaces such as Corridor, Entrances, Staircase areas etc. Engineer has right to
change the size of the offices in order to accommodate the specified Furniture, equipment
etc. including re-distribution of the required spaces.

D. Prepare and submit for approval to the Engineer, shop drawings with details of site office
accommodation of sufficiently large scale to indicate complete furniture layout, equipment,
services and all other items and requirements covered by this Sub-clause. Submit brochures
and catalogue cuts of proposed furniture and equipment for approval. In addition, one
directory plaque shall be provided at the entrance of the office and toilet/door signs shall
also be provided.
New Jahra Hospital

E. Following is the minimum standard of quality of material and finishes for the furniture in the
above offices. The Contractor shall provide the specified furniture or equal approved.

F. Furniture items not specified below, shall nevertheless be provided, and be of executive,
good or site quality, be of quality compatible with the quality of specified furniture pieces in
the same room or area;

G. All the furniture and offices shall become the property of the Contractor after the substantial
completion date plus three months.

1. Definitions
a. Desk or Executive Desk shall include side return, modesty
with side return panels, drawer units, locks and keys
b. High Cabinets shall include all shelves, doors, locks
and keys.
c. Low Cabinets shall include all shelves, doors, locks
and keys.

2. Furniture specifications; all subject to the above definitions shall be as follows:

a. Employers Senior Management Office

Desk Estel, CONCORD series C-
6004 or C-6006

Chair Estel, MAXIMA series, high
back on castors, swivel, tilt, etc.
leather

Visitors Chairs Estel, MAXIMA series, low
back, on castors, leather

Sofa Steel cast ETUDE series,
leather

Corner Coffee Table Estel, to match desk finish

Cupboard Estel, CONCORD C-6004 or C-
6006 (behind desk)

b. All other Employers Offices

Desk with side return Estel, SINCRO-M EBF9,
E-0006 wood vaneer

Desk chair Estel, REFLEX high back,
swivel, tilt, castors, fabric

Visitors Chairs Estel, REFLEX low back,
castors, fabric

Cabinets/Cupboard Unit Estel, SINCRO size
100x45x130(H), finish to
match SINCRO-M desk

New Jahra Hospital
c. Employers Meeting Room

Executive Meeting Room Estel, LEADER V-1269 (two
Table units combined to become one
table) finish to match Estel
Concord desk

Meeting Room Chairs Estel, MAXIMA series, low
back, legs frame, leather

Meeting Room Cabinets Estel, LEADER series, low
cabinets V-1054

d. Engineers Representatives, Contract Administrators and
Deputy Engineers Representatives Offices

Desk Estel, SINCRO-M EBF9, E-
0007 finish wood vaneer, with
Extension

Chair Estel, REFLEX on castors, high
back, swivel, tilt, fabric

Visitors Chairs Estel, REFLEX on castor, low
back, fabric

Cabinets/Cupboard Unit Estel, SINCRO size
100x45.8x130(H), finish to match
SINCRO-M desk

e. All other Engineers Representatives Offices

Desk, with return Estel, SINCRO-M G-90,
melamine finish (grey)

Desk chair Estel, ATHENA series,
castors, swivel, fabric

Visitors Chairs Estel, ATHENA series on
legs, fabric

Cabinets (high/low) Estel, SINCRO series,
melamine finish

f. The Engineers Representatives Meeting Rooms

Table, complete Estel, SINCRO-M E-7820,
size 550x171x74 wood
vaneer finish, to match
SINCRO-M EBF9 desks, 2
No to make one complete
table.

Chairs Estel, REFLEX low back,
tubular legs, fabric

H. A waste bin, and two desktop 3-tier filing trays shall be provided at each desk station.

I. Telephone lines & fax machines for Site Offices Refer to Section 015160.

J. Car Sheds Refer Section 015000.
New Jahra Hospital

K. Each office shall be provided with adequate lighting (minimum 500 lux for office areas and
200 lux for corridors) in addition to openable sliding windows with blinds and fly screens. All
rooms shall be air - conditioned with mini - split air conditioning units or ducted split system
(heating and cooling).

L. The above Site Office Accommodation shall be two discreet wholes in close juxta position
with corridors, lobbies etc.; constructed of new approved materials. Provide the
accommodation with adequate security and fire fighting facilities and suitable means of
escape in case of fire all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Fire extinguisher(s) and other
means of fire fighting shall be regularly serviced and maintained in good working order by an
independent agency; copies of service reports, invoices, receipt of payments etc., shall be
submitted to the Engineer on a monthly basis as evidence that such servicing is being done.

M. Provide 2 No. wall mounted directories in the locations approved by the Engineer.

2.04 EMPLOYERS AND ENGINEERS REPRESENTATIVE COMPUTER EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Contract plus three months
the following new computer systems of the latest technology and specifications at the time
of placing the order to be installed at the site offices as directed. Details provided in this
Clause are for guidance only. The complete computer system shall remain the property of
the Contractor after the completion of the above period.

1. Employers Offices 30 No
2. Engineers Representatives Offices 70 No

All Equipment, Workstations and Computer systems etc. shall be of the latest specifications
subject to the approval of the Engineer, which comprises but not limited to the followings:

Networks for All parties
All network cabling must meet CAT6 standards as minimum.
All patch panels must be labeled.
All cabling must be labeled.
All cabling must terminate at a patch panel before being connected to network
switches or equipment. 10% excess capacity must remain for all endpoints.
Communications cabling must be consolidated in appropriate cabling cabinet.
All server components shall be housed in a 24U half height data equipment cabinet
with cooling and ventilation (for A/E only) with two access points for the Employer and
the Engineers Representative.
All power supplied to IT equipment shall be supported by a UPS
Wireless access to the internet to be provided for each room including but not limited
to meeting rooms, dining rooms, sample room etc.
Each room for staff use to have a minimum one hardwired internet connection point.
Any other necessary items for the purpose of network installation and operation.

Server Specifications (Three servers):
Intel Xeon Quad Core 2.8 GHz Dual Processors (6MB Cache 1333 MHz bus)
32 GB DDRII ECC RAM
4 x 600 GB SATA or SAS disks (Expandable disk storage as needed), with RAID 5
DVD Writer
Windows 2003 Small Business Server or Windows 2008 R2 Enterprise (which should
work with Primavera Contract Manager 13) AND Microsoft Exchange 2007 Standard
2 x 100/1000 NIC 3COM or equivalent
2 x 835W AC Standard PSU
17 LCD Monitor
1 x 2 Tera External USB Storage Hard Disk

Approved Products:
IBM x3650
Dell PowerEdge R710

New Jahra Hospital
Backup Specifications:
On-site backup shall be provided by a NAS device with the following specifications:
4TB on-line backup on disk
Supports Continuous Data Protection
Supports live off-site backup
Supports bare metal restore
Support SQL Backup
Approved Products:
Sonicwall CDP 5040
IBM Tivoli CDP + IBM DS3200
Seagate BlackArmor NAS 440

Additional 2 computers are required one for Employer and 1 for Engineers Representative
which should be 2 Tera hard disk with online back-up software.

Communications:

DSL Connections of latest specifications as per the Engineer s approval.

Approved Products:
3COM 5500
HP ProCurve 2910
Cisco Catalyst 2960 series

Workstation (100 No)- Provide latest technology and specifications as per the Engineers
approval at the time of placing the order of PCS

Approved Products:
Dell OptiPlex 780
HP dc5800
IBM ThinkCentre M Series

Laptop Provide these of latest technology and specifications as per the Engineers
approval at the time of placing the order:

Provide total (10 No) laptops i.e. (4 No) for the Employer, and (6 No) for the Engineers
Representative.

Approved Products:
IBM Thinkpad T-series.
Dell Latitude Series.

Software:

All software must be original and the Contractor must provide all the software and licences
complying with Kuwait Copyright Law No. 5 for the year 1999.
All software used will be legally licensed for the duration of the contract plus 90 days.

Provide all the Software which shall be of latest versions and as per Engineers approval.

Server:
60 Client Access Licenses (CAL) for Windows Server 2003 Small Business Edition
licenses OR 60 CAL for Windows Server 2008 Enterprise and 30 CAL for Microsoft
Exchange 2007.
Antivirus with on-demand scan, on-access scan and USB mass storage support
(server license).
Symantec Back-up Software for Data and SQL.
Real time Back-up Software.

New Jahra Hospital
Workstations, including Laptops:
Windows 7 64bit OR Windows Vista (100 licenses).
Microsoft Office 2007 Pro (100 licenses).
AutoCAD 2010 64bit (10 Licenses).
Primavera P6 (5 Licenses) Latest Release.
Antivirus with on-demand scan, on-access scan and USB mass storage support (100
licenses).
Antivirus for Server and;
Primavera Contract Manager -release 13 (100 Licenses) with support from a local
(Kuwait) approved Oracle provider for the duration of the Project plus three additional
months.

Miscellaneous:
Provide Primavera Contract Manager (V13) (All Licences to be purchased having
Engineers Name).
All Servers and Software licences to be owned by the Employer.
All systems supplied will be provided with clear and complete documentation in
English and Arabic; including instructions and media (as required) to restore the
system to the factory state.
The Contractor is to provide full 24 hour support service to the existing PCM system
that is running on the Engineers site offices. The support should be provided in
accordance with PCM legality available from approved provider.
The Contractor is to have for himself adequate number of PCM licenses for his own
operation.
The Contractor to provide the following staff members:
i) Two IT Junior with minimum 5 years experience with server maintenance &
operation system of latest specifications (MS-Sever 2003) & IT troubleshooting
including network setup, to work under the Engineers office and directions.
ii) Two data entry clerk for the purpose of PCM to work in either the Employers or
the Engineers office.

Uptime and SLA:

Contractor shall ensure that systems remain in operating order, including HVAC systems
used in support of IT hardware. A framework shall be established to track support requests.
Supports requests must be corrected within 12 hours of request initiation by the Engineers
Representative.

If any component is non operational for longer than 36 hours, the Contractor shall replace the
malfunctioning component with a new unit or provide a temporary equivalent substitute
system.

B. Maintenance:
Provide necessary replacement parts and labour for the duration of the Contract to maintain
the systems in good working order. The Contractor must respond to notification from the
Engineer's Representative to correct any part of the malfunctioning system within 12 hours.
If any part of the system is not able to function for longer than 36 hours the Contractor shall
replace the malfunctioning component with a new component or provide a temporary
equivalent substitute system. Failure to correct the malfunction within 36 hours from receipt
of the Engineer's Representative written notice shall be cause for a penalty of KD 50/- per
day of delay to be deducted from the Contract amount.

C. Consumable supplies:
The following supplies shall be supplied by the Contractor for the duration of the Contract
plus three (3) months:
1. Rewriteable CDs/DVD
2. Laser jet printer and colour printer paper, toner/cartridges etc. as required. If due to
any reason the supplier repeatedly fails to meet these contractual requirements and
is so notified in writing, the Engineers Representative may procure the required item
or service from another source and deduct the amount plus 15% for overhead costs;
from the Contract.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Toner Cartridges, Consumables and all accessories for the smooth functioning of the
photocopiers (including colour copier).
4. Back-up LTO Cartridges.
5. 3 No. External/Portable Iomega CD-RW 52X24X52X USB 2.0 32650 (or equal)
6. 5 No. 4 GB Scandisk Flash Memory Cards
7. 2 No. PC Toolkit
8. 1 No. Brother PT-1180 Label Maker

D. Server: All servers and software licenses to be owned by the Engineer.

2.05 OTHER EQUIPMENT

A. Photocopier:
1. Provide and maintain three black and white and two colour automatic digital fast feed
photocopier with full options, A4 to A3 sizes with 20 bin sorter as selected by the
Engineer for the Office of the Engineer and the other for the use of Engineers
Representatives offices.

These machines shall be provided with a facility of printing from each and every work
station; these should be connected to the network.

Specifications: a) 75 pages per minute
b) Full options including Document feeder, scanning,
duplexing.
Make: a) Xerox
b) Konica Minolta
c) Toshiba
d) Canon
e) Ricoh

Provide and maintain three full colour digital laser photocopiers as selected by the
Engineer one for the Office of the Engineer and the other for the office of the

Specifications: a) Minimum 35 pages per minute A4 Colour Copies
b) Multi-function colour display Editor Board
c) 3 front loading paper drawers/cassettes (A4/A3/Universal) +
bypass facilities
d) Copier should have all facilities like zoom magnification
0.250-4.000 or above (in 1% increments) and scanning and
duplexing.
Make: a) Xerox
b) Konica Minolta
c) Toshiba Estudio 210C
d) Toshiba Estudio 25X
e) Canon, CLC 1100, 1130, IR 2800 and 3300
f) Ricoh

B. Colour Plotter: HP Z6100 Design jet of Howlet & Packard or equivalent (2 No)

C. Shredder: Dahle 20506 of Dahle or equivalent (3 No)

D. Binding Machine: Model 16 Master of IBICOAG or equivalent (3 No)

E. Camera: Provide ten number cameras, as selected and approved by the Engineer from the
list provided below:
1. Nikon Coolplx 8700 with 512x2MB SD Card and carry bag.
2. Sony DSC F717 with 512x2MB SD Card and Case

F. Lamination machine (A4/A3 compatible), 2 No.

G. Heavy duty stapler (Rexel Giant), 3 No.

New Jahra Hospital
H. Automatic Fax Machine RICOH 3700 or Pana fax UF-590 or latest model of Panasonic or
equal approved (3 No)

I. Presentation projector latest model 3M (X75) or latest (2 No)

J. A0 copier (RICOH FW780) or equal approved (1 No).

K. Wall mounted remote controlled screen 84x84 3M or equivalent. (2 No)

L. Color Laser Jet Printer, 10 nos. manufacturer HP min 75 pages per minute, A3 & A4 size.

2.06 CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES

A. Provide all office accessories and stationery including but not limited to photocopy papers
(A4 & A3), pens, pencils, erasers, mechanical pencils, note pads (various sizes), staplers,
staples, punches, box files and other files and clips (various types), white pens, commercial
and scientific calculators etc. suiting the requirements of Engineer and all the other complete
staff throughout the period of contract plus three months free of cost.

2.07 CLEANING AND ATTENDANCE FOR THE SITE OFFICE ACCOMMODATION

A. Provide for the period of contract plus three (3) months, daily cleaning and full time
attendance for the Site Office including providing minimum five (5) (two for the Employer, and
three the Engineers Representative) cleaners/general helpers to attend upon the
requirements of the staff of the above. The cost of cleaning equipment and consumable
stores such as, cleaning materials, paper towels, soaps, paper tissues, toilet rolls, air
freshners etc., shall be paid for by the Contractor.

2.08 MESSENGERS

A. Contractor to provide on-site 2 messengers with for messenger services, for use by the
Employer, Engineers Representative on & off-site to carry out all duties during the execution
of works such as supervision, inspection, testing etc. These services shall be provided for
the duration of the Contracts plus three months.

2.09 VEHCILES

A. Provide ten (10 No.) new Japanese 4x4 vehicles for the full duration of the contract plus three
(3) months. 4 No. for the Employers use, and 6 No. for the Engineers Representatives use.
5 No. of these vehicles shall be restricted to site use only and shall be coloured silver. 5 No.
of these vehicles shall be for site and public highway use and shall be coloured white. The
vehicles shall be fully insured for their designated use for any driver authorized to use by
either the Employers or the Engineers Representative. The vehicles shall be Mitsubishi
Nativas or equal and approved. Each vehicle shall have 100mm high vinyl numbers applied
to the wind shield, rear screen, and one window on each side.

Vehicle 01 White Employers use
Vehicle 02 White Employers use
Vehicle 03 Silver Employers use
Vehicle 04 Silver Employers use
Vehicle 05 White Engineers Representatives use
Vehicle 08 Silver Engineers Representatives use

B. Regularly service and fully maintain all vehicles, including all consumables, tyres, parts,
lubricants, etc. (apart from fuel). Only one vehicle may be removed for servicing at any time.

New Jahra Hospital
C. The vehicles shall always be in the Contractors ownership. The Employers and the
Engineers Representative shall record allocation/use of the white vehicles so that traffic
offences and fines shall be paid by the personnel involved. Any costs and/or losses
associated with traffic accidents/damages shall borne by the Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy in accordance with Project Design and
Construction Schedule.

B. Erect project field offices and sheds at designated and approved locations as approved on
site layout organization chart submitted by Contractor.

3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING DURING CONTRACT PERIOD

A. Attendance: Provide power, water, and clean and maintain offices and sheds daily.

B. Daily janitorial services for offices and sanitary facilities and daily cleaning and maintenance
for office and storage areas.

C. Maintain and clean etc. offices including equipment and furnishings in accordance with
Project Construction Schedule.

D. Maintain approach walks free of mud and water.

3.04 REMOVAL

A. The project field offices and sheds shall be removed after obtaining the Engineers
Representatives approval. The project field offices must not remain on site longer than is
reasonably required, and the Contractor must remove the same when instructed.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/015220-1 The Engineers Site Supervision Fees
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015220

THE ENGINEERS SITE SUPERVISION FEES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Include the cost of supervision services of Pace, the Design and Supervision Consultant for
the project, in the priced Bill of Quantities which shall be equivalent to 3% of the total tender
sum for the duration of 24 months. This amount shall be paid directly by Amiri Diwan in to
the designated bank account of Pace, in the form of 24 monthly payments based on
consultants supervision staff approved and present on site during the 24 month
construction period. Such fees shall not attract a mark up for overheads and profits, (nor any
other mark up).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/015600-1 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015600

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provision of safety fence and gates around all work areas, work includes
the following:
1. Installation
2. Maintenance.
3. Removal.


A. Safety fence and gates 2.50 m high of braced construction with fully closed panel
construction to completely enclose the site and prevent unauthorised persons violating the
works site area.

B. The safety fence and gates should be positioned to comply with the following requirements:
1. To fully enclose the works around the limit of the contract and as approved by the
Engineer.
2. To provide sufficient and secure access gates as necessary.
3. To make any adjustments as necessary to suit the various phases of the works, and
to suit the Contractors approved Construction Schedule.
4. To fully enclose the Project Field Offices and sheds.
5. To comply with any instructions of the Engineer or Engineers Representative in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineers Representative shop drawings under provisions of Section 013330.

B. Show layout, details of construction, foundations, sizes, and grades of members.

C. Obtain Engineers Representative approval and approvals of Authorities.


A. Design in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the Engineers
Representative.

B. Design fence and gates to withstand Kuwait applicable wind load pressure but not less than
75 Kg/m.

C. Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials and products specified herein shall take precedence over the safety programme
Section 015000.

B. Post and Gate Construction: Galvanised steel and structurally sound.

C. Fence Panels: 2.50 m high galvanised steel sheets 24 gauge factory painted finish colour to
be approved by Engineers Representative.
Amiri Diwan III-2/015600-2 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
New Jahra Hospital
D. Gate Hardware: Secure locks and bolts to all gates.

E. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. Colours designated by Engineers
Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety fence and gates complete before areas of work may commence.

B. Erect safety fence and gates in approved location as approved on Site Layout Organization
Chart submitted by Contractor in accordance with Section 013300.

C. Erect fence/gate posts and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist
wind loadings.

D. Install safety fence surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.

E. Paint sight-exposed surfaces of safety fence, posts and gates.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain safety fence and gates including cleaning and repairing deterioration and damages
as required by the Engineers Representative at no extra cost.

B. Repaint as necessary and whenever instructed by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.

3.03 REMOVAL

A. Remove safety fence and gates at completion of project after getting permission from the
Engineer or Engineers Representative.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/015800-1 Project Identification
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 015800

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Project identification sign Two (2) only required, with each in both English
and Arabic or as directed by the Engineers Representative.
1. Installation
2. Maintenance.
3. Removal.


A. Project identification sign board shall of sufficient size and construction to incorporate all
name plates and three dimensional view. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
complete design, graphics, foundations, and structural support.

B. Project identification sign board shall be illuminated.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineers Representative shop drawings under provisions of Section 013330.

B. Show content, layout, lettering, colours, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members.

C. Obtain approval and approvals of Authorities including Ministry of Education.


A. Design in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the Engineers
Representative.

B. Design sign and structure to withstand Kuwait applicable wind load pressure but not less
than 75 Kg/m.

C. Sign Painter: Engaged as professional sign painter with not less than five years experience in
similar kind of work.

D. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of
project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New metal, structurally adequate.

B. Sign Surfaces: 0.5mm Thick metal plate.

C. Rough Hardware: Steel.

D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. Colours designated by Engineers
Representative.

E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colours designated by the Engineers
Representative. Languages: Arabic and English.
Amiri Diwan III-2/015800-2 Project Identification
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification signs within 45 days of Date of Enterprise.

B. Erect at designated and approved locations as approved on Site Layout Organization Chart
submitted by Contractor.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind
loadings.

D. Install sign surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.

E. Paint sight-exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

F. Provide required level of illumination including all connections and power supply.

3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. Two (2) painted signs of construction, design, content and location shown on approved Shop
Drawings.

B. Content of each sign:
1. Project title, logos and name of Employer and logos as shown on Contract
Documents.
2. Name of Consultant(s) and logo.
3. Name of Main Contractor and major subcontractor(s).
4. Panel of approved size with three-dimensional view of buildings with acrytext
system.

C. Graphic Design, Colours, Style of Lettering: Designated by the Engineers Representative.

3.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports, clean and repair where deterioration or damages have occurred
to the satisfaction of the Engineers Representative at no additional cost.

B. Repaint as necessary.

3.04 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at completion of project, and restore the
area.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/016100-1 Basic Product Requirements
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 016100

BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for use of Products on this project, work includes:
1. Products
2. Transportation, delivery, receiving and handling.
3. Storage and protection.
4. Product acceptances.
5. Products List.

2. Section 014500 - Quality Control
3. Section 014220 - Reference Standards
4. Section 016300 - Product Substitution Procedures

1.02 PRODUCTS

A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems
forming the Works. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.

B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packed and protected to prevent
damage during transportation and handling.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage.

C. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.

D. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the
Specification Sections.

1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store products in accordance with manufacturers instructions, with seals and labels intact
and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within
temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturers instructions.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover
products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.

C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well drained area; prevent mixing with
foreign matter.

D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are
undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.

Amiri Diwan III-2/016100-2 Basic Product Requirements
New Jahra Hospital
1.05 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,
erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective manufactures, unless
more stringent requirements are specified.

1.06 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS

A. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed surfaces of
manufactured items installed in finished spaces.

1.07 PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

A. The term product shall include material, equipment, assembly methods, manufacturer,
brand, trade name, or other description.

B. References to approved equal approved alternative or similar terms mean that approval
of the Engineer is required. Refer to Section 016300 Product Substitution Procedures.

C. Products with exposed finishes require the Engineers Representative approval prior to
incorporation in the Works.

D. The sum named in the accepted Tender shall be deemed to include the materials described
by proprietary designation. Materials described in the Specification by proprietary
designation shall be provided as specified subject to the provisions of the Conditions of
Contract.

E. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product complies
with British Standards, Kuwaiti Standards, (U.S.) Federal Specification, ASTM Designation,
ANSI Specification or other Government or association standard, the Contractor shall
present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith.
Where requested or specified, submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

1.08 TESTING OF MATERIALS

A. Refer to Clause 1.14 of Section 014500 - Quality Control.

1.09 PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 30 days after date of enterprise, transmit four (4) copies of a list of all products which
are proposed for the Works, including name of manufacturer.

B. Be responsible to ensure that the listed products comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.

C. Tabulate products by Specifications section number, title, and Article number.

D. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalogue designation, and reference standards.

E. Engineers Representative will reply in writing within (21) working days stating whether there
is reasonable objection to listed items. Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute a
waiver of the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/016300-1 Product Substitution
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 016300

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
alternatives and substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1. Section 014220 - Reference Standards specifies the applicability of industry
standards to products specified.
2. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures specifies requirements for submitting the
Contractors Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
3. Section 016100 - Basic Product Requirement specifies requirements governing the
Contractors selection of products and product options.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The term product shall mean any material including proprietary goods, equipment and
manufactured items.

B. Alternative products: References herein to approved equal or similar terms shall mean that
the approval of the Engineer is required to any alternative product proposed by the
Contractor. The Contractors freedom, however, to propose alternatives for the Engineers
review and approval shall not be limited to those products in respect of which the term
approved equal or similar has been used in the Contract Documents except where it is
specifically stated otherwise in individual specification sections. The Contractor in
accordance with the above may propose alternatives to any specified products provided
such alternatives are equal or better in all respects to the quality, durability and performance
characteristics of the specified product.

C. Substitute products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the specified product in spite of his
best endeavours, and if he is unable to find and propose a suitable equal or better alternative
he may propose a substitute for the Engineers review and approval, which substitute shall
be similar to, and as near as possible equal or better than the quality, durability and
performance characteristics of the specified product. A substitute product will only be
considered if the Contractor has proved to the Engineers reasonable satisfaction that the
specified product is unobtainable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Alternative and Substitution Submittals:
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for alternative and substitutions for consideration.
2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each
request. Include related specification section and drawing numbers.
3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for
alternatives and substitutions and the following information, as appropriate:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Employer and
separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed
alternative or substitution.
b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed alternative or
substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include
elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability and visual effect.
c. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication
and installation procedures.
Amiri Diwan III-2/016300-2 Product Substitution
New Jahra Hospital
d. Samples, where applicable or requested.
e. A statement indicating the alternatives and substitutions effect on the
Contractors Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval
of the alternative or substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed alternative
of substitution on overall Contract Time.
f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net reduction, if any in the Contract
Sum. Additional costs are not accepted. This should be substantiated by
comparative quotations (CIF) with complete rate breakdown for both the
proposed alternative/substitute item and the specified item.
g. The Contractors waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the alternative and
substitution to perform adequately.
h. Warranty: Reimbursement for review and redesign services.

B. Engineers approval of alternatives and substitutes: The approval of any alternative or
substitute product shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer and such approval shall in
no way relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and obligations under the Contract. The
burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as to the suitability of any proposed alternative or
substitute product shall rest with the Contractor, and the Engineer may request and the
Contractor shall provide such supporting data, carryout such tests, etc., as the Engineer may
reasonably require in order to satisfy himself as to such suitability. Any delays or extra costs
suffered by the Contractor because of his failure to propose alternatives in a timely manner
so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or because of rejection of alternatives
or substitutes found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and he shall not be entitled to additional payment nor extra time for completion in
this respect.

C. Cost effect in approving alternatives and substitutes: Should any alternative or substitute
product be approved by the Engineer, any net increase in cost over and above the specified
product shall be borne by the Contractor and, any net saving in cost shall be to the benefit of
the Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ALTERNATIVE AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue number,
etc., shall not act to relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to meet other
specification requirements, or from his responsibility to make material submittals for
approval.

B. Alternative or substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the
Engineers designed space requirements. Any such alternative or substitute product that
does not meet such space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the
Contractors expense and any modification of replaced systems thereby arising shall also be
made at his expense.


END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017220-1 Field Engineering
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017220

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for field Engineering Services
in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Work includes:
1. Land survey work.
2. Civil engineering services.
3. Structural engineering services.

1. Section 011100 - Summary of Works
3. Section 013330 - Shop, Record, As-Built Drawings, Product Data and Samples
4. Section 017880 - Project Record Documents

1.02 REFERENCES

A. British Standards Institute:
1. BS 5606 - Code of Practice for Accuracy in building.
2. Or approved other reference.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name and resume with qualifications for Land Surveyor before starting survey work.

B. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.

C. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and a declaration signed by the Land Surveyor that
the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.


A. Qualified Land Surveyor with ten (10) years experience and in compliance with requirements
of Contract Document.

B. Regulatory Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Kuwait
Municipality to identify the site control points, bench marks and related approvals.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey
showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

C. Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 013300 Submittal Procedures.


New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, verify all measurements and be responsible
for their correctness. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of
difference between actual measurements and the dimensions given in the Contract
Documents. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing
for consideration before proceeding with the works.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Site Bench Marks shall be accurately and safely established, protected, maintained and
cleared away upon completion of works or when no longer required all to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Such Bench Marks shall be related to the nearest permanent Bench mark fixed
by the Municipality.

B. Prepare a plan detailing the location of the Bench Marks and keep up to date throughout the
operational period of the Contract. Reproducible copies of the plan so prepared shall be
supplied to the Engineer, as and when he may require.

C. The Engineer reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time considered necessary
for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the works.

D. Before the works or any parts thereof are commenced the Contractor and the Engineer shall
together survey and take levels of the Site of the works and agree upon all particulars on
which setting out of the works shall be based.

E. Such levels shall be related to the Bench marks of aforesaid and plotted by the Contractor
and after agreement of the drawings shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor, and
shall form the basis of setting out of the Works.

F. Failing such surveys and agreements being prepared and/or signed by the Contractor, the
surveys of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon both parties.

G. The Contractor shall plot these levels and after they have been signed by the Engineer and
the Contractor, the original with three (3) copies of it will be submitted to the Engineer and
the Contractor shall bear the cost.

3.03 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction. Make no changes without prior written notice to Engineer.

B. Promptly report to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation
required because of changes in grades or other reasons. Replace dislocated survey control
points based on original survey control.

3.04 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish, if required by Engineer, other permanent bench marks on site, referenced to
establish control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project
Record Documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means:
1. Site improvements, including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil
placement and utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundations, column locations, ground floor elevations, and the like.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

D. The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineer and his staff, all necessary survey
instruments, including a modern theodolite and stand, modern level, level staff, load lines, 30
metre steel tapes and other equipment and labour and attendance which the Engineer may
require for checking and setting out and marking the Works. The survey instruments shall
remain the property of the Contractor.

E. Coordinates for all completed as-built construction shall be KUDAMS coordinated, registered
and filed.

3.05 LAYING OUT

A. Lay out the Works using methods and necessary instruments described in BS 5606 Code of
Practice for Accuracy in Building section 5 and within the following permissible deviations:
1. Linear dimensions: Plus or Minus 5mm (1/15,000).
2. Angular dimensions: Plus or Minus 5mm (+ or -2 seconds).
3. Verticality: Storey height: Plus or minus 5mm Building height: Plus or minus 20mm
4. Levels: Top of foundations: Plus 5mm or minus 20mm
Floor slabs to datum: Plus or minus 10mm
Floor slabs to 5M straight edge Plus or minus 5mm

B. Obtain the true and accurate building lines from the Municipality and lay out the Works as
shown on the Drawings.

C. Submit details of methods and equipment to be used in laying out the Works.

D. Check the levels and dimensions of the Site against those shown on the Drawings and
record the results on a copy of the Drawings. Notify the Engineer in writing of any
discrepancies and obtain instructions before proceeding.

E. Inform the Engineer when overall laying out is complete.

F. Arrange the setting out, erection, juxta-position of components and application of finishes
(working within the practical limits of the design and Specification) to ensure that there is a
satisfactory fit at junctions and that the finished work has a well aligned, true and regular
appearance.

G. Wherever satisfactory accuracy, fit and/or appearance of the work are likely to be critical or
difficult to achieve, obtain approval of proposals or of the appearance of the relevant aspects
of the partially finished work as early as possible.

H. Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy must not be rectified without
approval.

I. Submit proposals for such rectification and meet all costs arising, including effects on other
work.

J. Allow for the possibility that approval will not be given, necessitating removal and
replacement of the work.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017310-1 Cutting and Patching
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017310

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance
of the time cutting and patching will be performed for the Engineers Representative
approval before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following
information, as applicable, in the proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed
and indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the
building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service.
Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements,
submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement
with the original structure.
7. Engineers Representatives approval to proceed with cutting and patching does not
waive the Engineer's Representatives right to later require complete removal and
replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following structural elements:
a. Foundation construction.
b. Bearing and retaining walls.
c. Structural concrete.
d. Structural steel.
e. Lintels.
f. Timber and primary wood framing.
g. Structural decking.
h. Stair systems.
i. Miscellaneous structural metals.
j. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
k. Equipment supports.
l. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
m. Structural systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components
in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut
and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following operating elements or safety related systems:
New Jahra Hospital
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.
b. Air or smoke barriers.
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
d. Membranes and flashings.
e. Fire protection systems.
f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
g. Control systems.
h. Communication systems.
i. Conveying systems.
j. Electrical wiring systems.
k. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Engineer's Representative opinion, reduce
the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that
would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction
cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by
methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or
existing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials
are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or
surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching
is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered,
take corrective action before proceeding.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and
patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts
before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might
be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.

D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.

New Jahra Hospital
3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained
or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original
Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible,
neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum
saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and
patching requires excavating and backfilling.
5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility
services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or
partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe
or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing
and cutting.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and
repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform
color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with
new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat
over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received
primer and second coat.
4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.

D. Plaster Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and install thickness and
coats as indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 3-coat work.
2. Finish gypsum plaster to match existing adjacent surfaces. Sand lightly to remove
trowel marks and arrises.
3. Cut, patch, point-up, and repair plaster to accommodate other construction.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar
features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering
to its original condition.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017410-1 Final Cleaning
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017410

FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Final cleaning of the project works.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Execute final cleaning immediately prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of the
works.


A. Final cleaning shall be under taken only by an industrial cleaning specialist subcontractor
with five (5) years experience in similar types of work.

B. The final cleaning shall be in accordance with Hospital Disinfection Procedure. Refer Centre
for Disease Controls (CDC) Guidelines for Environmental Infection Control in Health Care
Facilities, Joint Commission on the Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO)
standard EC.1.7 (intent statements b, k, l) as well as standard EC 3.2.1 (Proactive risk
assessment during construction).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage
surfaces.

B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned.
Submit to Engineers Representative for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

Cleaning operations shall include, but not be limited to the following:

A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning operations specified in other sections, clean
interior and exterior exposed-to-view surfaces.

B. Remove temporary protection, wrappings, markings and labels not required to remain.

C. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films, paint and mortar splashes and other foreign
substances.

D. Clean transparent and glossy materials inside and out to a polished condition; remove
foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.

E. Clean, scrub, damp mop or wax and polish resilient and hard surfaced floors as specified.

F. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.

G. Clean and polish plumbing fixtures and equipment to a sanitary condition.

Amiri Diwan III-2/017410-2 Final Cleaning
New Jahra Hospital

H. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when units
have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and coils when
units have been operated without filters during construction.

I. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

J. Cleaning shall be continued till the handing over of the project to the Employer.

K. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, area ways, and drainage
systems.

L. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains, spills,
and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other exterior
surfaces.

3.02 DEEP CLEANING

Just prior to handover execute a full professional deep clean of the whole project.

A. Must be executed to Ministry of Health standard and guidelines.

B. Must be executed by a professional deep cleaning specialist subcontractor with a minimum
of 5 years experience of executing hospital deep cleans.

C. The specialist subcontractor must be approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017420-1 Progress Cleaning
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017420

PROGRESS CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Daily cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during
construction

1. Section 017410 - Final Cleaning.
2. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for Product or Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide covered containers and chutes for deposit and disposal of waste materials, debris,
and rubbish and include in the Site Layout Organization Plan required by Section 013300
Submittal Procedures.

B. Cleaning materials for products to be cleaned shall be according to the manufacturer of the
product and as approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLEANING

A. Maintain areas and buildings under Contractors control free of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish at all times. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition and as required by the

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other
closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space.

C. Clean interior areas and all floors/building daily to provide suitable conditions for work.

D. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on an as-
needed basis.

E. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet or
newly coated surfaces.

F. The Contractor must keep all working areas clear of obstructions, surplus materials, unused
plant and debris that are unsightly, obstructive and/or hazardous to the safety of all persons
expected to be on the premises at any time.

G. The Contractor is advised that a clean and organized site is advantageous to his costs and
timely progress. This reflects on his management efforts to minimize waste material,
improve safety and achieve a smooth flow of labour and materials on Site with minimum
obstructions.

Amiri Diwan III-2/017420-2 Progress Cleaning
New Jahra Hospital

3.02 DISPOSAL

A. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at most, weekly and dispose of off
site.

B. Comply with regulations of the local Authorities.

C. Provide sufficient number of 12m containers as may be deemed necessary, place and
relocate at site as directed by the Engineers Representative. Such containers must be
regularly emptied, either to the centralized waste facility(s), or removed directly from site.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017500-1 Starting and Adjusting
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017500

STARTING AND ADJUSTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating
construction operations including but not necessary limited to the following:
1. Starting systems
2. Demonstration and instructions.
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1. Section 014500 Quality Control
2. Section 017700 Closeout Procedures.
3. Section 018100 General Commissioning Requirements
4. Section 018300 Operation and Maintenance Data
5. Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

1.02 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Provide all electrical power etc., required for starting of systems and operation in accordance
with the approved Construction Schedule.

C. Notify Engineers Representative and Employer seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

D. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage.

E. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractors personnel in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.

H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or
system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.

I. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 014500 that equipment or system has
been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.03 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Employers personnel two weeks
prior to date of Substantial Completion unless specified otherwise in particular sections.

B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of
manual with Employers personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and
maintenance.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at equipment location.
Amiri Diwan III-2/017500-2 Starting and Adjusting
New Jahra Hospital

D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when needed for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that
specified in individual sections.

1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. Contractor shall appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform
testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services as specified and as directed by the Engineers
Representative.

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer and Contractor, in
triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017700-1 Closeout Procedures
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Closeout procedures.
a. Substantial Completion.
b. Closeout Submittals.
c. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts.
d. Contractors Obligations.
2. Final Cleaning
3. Adjusting
4. Spare parts and Maintenance Materials
5. Warranties

1. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
3. Section 017410 - Final Cleaning
4. Section 017880 - Project Record Document

1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Substantial Completion
1. When Contractor considers work is substantially complete, submit written notice with
list of items to be completed or corrected.
2. Should Engineers inspection find work is not substantially complete, he will promptly
notify Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies and send a second written notice of
substantial completion.
4. When Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a certificate of
substantial completion in accordance with provisions of Clause 48(1) of the
Conditions of Contract Document II.

B. Closeout Submittals: Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing authorities
including Governing authority for Hospital Functioning and as requested by the Engineers
Representative and not limited to the following:
1. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 017880.
2. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
3. Keys and Keying Schedule.
4. Evidence of Payment: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
5. Certificates of Insurance for products and completed operations: In accordance with
Conditions of Contract.

C. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts:
1. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating:
a. Original Contract Sum.
b. Previous variations.
c. Deductions for uncorrected work.
d. Deductions against Advance Payment if any.
e. Deductions for delays penalties.
f. Deductions for Engineers fees.
g. Other adjustments to Contract Sum.
h. Total Contract Sum as adjusted.
i. Previous payments.
j. Sum remaining due.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Engineer will issue a final Variation reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum
not previously made by variations, for Employer Authorization.

D. Contractors Obligations During the Defects Liability Period:
1. Make good all damage consequent upon the work.
2. Touch up minor faults in newly painted/re-painted work, carefully matching colour,
and brushing out edges. Repaint badly marked areas back to suitable breaks or
junctions.
3. Adjust, ease and lubricate moving parts of new work as necessary to ensure easy
and efficient operation, including doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances,
operable partitions and controls.
4. Leave the works secure with all accesses locked. Account for and adequately label
all keys and hand over to the Employer with itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate
schedule signed by the Employer as a receipt.
5. Make arrangements with the Employers Representative and give reasonable notice
of the precise dates of access to the various parts of the works for purposes of
making good defects. Inform the Engineer when remedial works to the various parts
of the Works are completed.

1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Description
1. Execute final cleaning in accordance with Section 017410 Final Cleaning.

1.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Description:
1. Execute warranty and bond requirements in accordance with Section 017870
Product Warranties.

1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Products Required:
1. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance
materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Employer, in addition to
that required for completion of Work.
2. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original
purchase from supplier or manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.

B. Storage, Maintenance:
1. Store products with products to be installed in the Work, under provisions of Section
016100 - Basic Product Requirements.
2. After delivery of products to site, maintain spare products in same space and
condition as products to be installed in the Work.
3. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining
conditions required for storage and not required for Contract work or storage, spare
products may be stored in available space.
4. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until
delivery to Employer.

C. Delivery:
1. Coordinate with Employer: Deliver and unload spare products to Employer at Project
site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.

New Jahra Hospital

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017870-1 Product Warranties
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017870

PRODUCT WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by
the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and
special project warranties.

1. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures specifies contract closeout procedures.
2. Division 2 through 16 sections for specific requirements for warranties on products
and installations specified to be warranted.

C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturers disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the
products. Manufacturers disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve
suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special project
warranties with the Contractor.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
the Employer.

B. Special project warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide
greater rights for the Employer.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must
be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
work regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the work through a
portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Employers Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time
in which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to
limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the
Contract Documents.

New Jahra Hospital
E. Where the Contract Documents require a special project warranty, or similar commitment on
the work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the work,
until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such
commitments are willing to do so.

F. The Contractor is referred to Document III-7-2 Volume 4 of 5 Room Data Sheets Page 5
Section 7 (Warranties) for further information on the administration and procedural
requirements of the Warranties/Guarantees.

1.04 REMEDY ON CONTRACTORS DEFAULT OF WARRANTY/GUARANTEE OBLIGATIONS

A. If by reason of any accident or failure or other event occurring to or in connection with the
Warranties/Guarantees either during the execution of the Works or during the Period of
Maintenance or any extended periods any remedial or other work or repair shall in the
opinion of the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative be urgently necessary for safety the
Contractor shall do such work or repair immediately otherwise the Employer may by his own
or other workmen do such work or repair.

B. If the work or repair so done by the Employer is work which in the opinion of the Engineer the
Contractor was liable to do at his own expense under the Warranties/Guarantees all costs
and charges properly incurred by the Employer in so doing shall be paid by the Contractor to
the Employer or shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due to the Contractor
including the overhead charges.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Engineers Representative prior to the date certified for
Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a
commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the
work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the
1. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the
Employer by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,
submit properly executed warranties to the Engineers Representative within 15 days
of completion of that designated portion of the work.

B. Warranties: All items and their accessories will need to include two years of manufacturers
warranty and a further three years of additional warranty from the effective date of
commissioning and acceptance by Client. All warranties should include the following
parameters:
1. Parts all inclusive warranty for all parts that an item would require and subject to
the inclusion of shipping and handling charges.
2. Labour warranty to include all labour charges for moving, relocating, returning, or
fixing.
3. Upgrades warranty to include all upgrades released during the warranty period
whether that upgrade is software related or hardware (accessories) related.
4. Stock items, response time, and down time the maximum number of hours that a
particular item is permitted to be categorized as down during the warranty period
will be 48 hours during workdays and 72 hours during weekends and holidays.
Equivalent temporary replacement equipment, at no capital or other cost or expense
to the Client, will need to be arranged if downtime is expected to extend beyond that
period.
5. Non-Medical Items: All non-medical items recorded in the room data sheets will
need to meet the respective standards, specifications, and subject to the supply by
manufacturers detailed in the Particular Specifications and Tender Documents. The
verification of final item specification and quantities are at all times subject to the
written approval of the Ministry of Health.

New Jahra Hospital
C. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a Sub-
contractor supplier or manufacturer to execute a special project warranty, prepare a written
document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the
required parties. Submit a draft to the Engineers Representative for approval prior to final
execution.

D. List of special warranties and form formats for special project warranties are included at the
end of this section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for
execution by the Contractor.
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special project warranties.

E. Form of Submittal: At Substantial Completion compile three (3) copies of each required
warranty properly executed by the Contractor. Organize the warranty documents into an
orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

F. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable vinyl-covered loose-
leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive A4
paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address
and telephone number of the Installer.
2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
Warranties, Project title or name and name of the Contractor.
3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each
required manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LIST OF WARRANTIES

A. Refer to respective sections for warranty requirements.

New Jahra Hospital
3.02 WARRANTY FORM

A. The Contractor shall submit warranty forms in the format shown:

CONTRACTOR LETTER HEAD

Special Project Warranty

Date :

Contract Ref. No. :

Name of Project :

Employer :

Contractor :

Warranted
System :

Validity :

Commencement Date :

Expiry Date :

We the undersigned (insert full name and address of company):

Contractor :.

Installer :.

Manufacturer :.

Agree to provide the special project warranty of the .(description

and location of product/system) ..

agreeing to repair or replace subject to the warranty requirements below and conditions stated

in the contract documents during the period of ..(state period)

from the above mentioned commencement date at our own complete cost and expense to the

full satisfaction of the Employer or his approved Representative.
New Jahra Hospital
Warranty Requirements:

1. ..(describe nature of warranty responsibility)..

.

2. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

3. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

4. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
work regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the work through a portion
of its anticipated useful service life.

5. Employers Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in
which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
a. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.

6. Where the Contract Documents require a special project warranty, or similar commitment on
the work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the work, until
the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are
willing to do so.

Signatures Date

Contractor . .

Installer . .

Manufacturer .

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/017880-1 Project Record Documents
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 017880

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Maintenance and submittal of Record Documents and Samples.

2. Section 013330 - Shop, Record, As-built Drawings, Product Data and Samples

1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

A. Maintain at the site for the Employer and the Engineer one record copy of:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda
4. Variation Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Site test records.
7. Inspection certificates and checklists.
8. Manufacturers certificates.
9. Manufacturers instructions for assembly, installation and adjusting.

B. Store Record Documents and samples in Site Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples.

C. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Divisions and Section
number listings according to Index of Document III-2: Particular Specifications. Label each
document Project Record in neat, large, printed letters.

D. Maintain record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record
Documents for construction purposes.

E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Engineer.

1.03 RECORDING

A. Record daily as -built information on a set of blue or black line opaque drawings, and in a
copy of the Particular Specifications.

B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for
recording information.

C. Record daily information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work
until required information is recorded.

D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
1. Measured depths of elements of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations and sizes of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface elements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
4. Site changes of dimension and detail.
New Jahra Hospital
5. Changes made by Modifications.
6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
7. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed,
particularly optional items and substitute items.
2. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
3. Product Alternatives and Substitutions utilized.

F. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturers instruction manuals and certifications, inspection
certifications, filed test records, and other Documents required by individual Specifications
sections.

G. Plant Record: Provide a daily record to the Engineers Representative in a format to be
approved by the Engineer, showing the type, model and capacity of all mechanical and
power operated plant employed on the works. The Contractor will not be permitted to
remove any plant or material unless written approval is obtained from the Engineers
Representative. This record shall be incorporated in to the Daily Construction Report in
Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

H. Labour Record: Provide a daily record to the Engineers Representative in a format to be
approved by the Engineer showing the number and description of craftsmen, labourers and
other persons employed on or in connection with the works, including those employed by
sub-contractors. This record shall be incorporated in to the Daily Construction Report in
Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

I. Visitors Record: Maintain a record of visitors to the Site and submit at monthly intervals to
the Engineers Representative.

J. Weather Records:
1. Keep an accurate record of:
a. Daily maximum and minimum air temperatures (including overnight).
b. Number of hours per day in which work is prevented by inclement weather.
2. Provide at least two maximum and minimum thermometers at agreed locations
inside a building.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. As-Built Drawings:
1. Within 45 days from the Date of Substantial Completion submit compact discs, two
original sepia prints (one regular and one reduced size) and three printed sets
drawing copies reduced to size 600 x 400 mm. Obtain approval of size of drawings,
quality of transparency of drawing from the Engineer.

B. Record Documents:
1. Within 45 days from the date of Substantial Completion submit the following
documents in 3 copies (one original + 2 copies):
a. Manufacturers Instruction Manuals and Certificates.
b. Inspection Certificates.
c. Field Test Records.
d. Warranties.

C. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractors name, address, telephone and fax number.
4. Number and title of each Record Document arranged in correct sequence.

New Jahra Hospital
D. Submit As-Built drawings in hard boxes suitable for A4 size. Fold layer drawings to size A4
and place in the boxes into related consistent grouping. Stick the list showing the text as
specified in Clause 1.04 C above, on each boxes for their content.

E. Submit As-Built original sepia prints in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps
suitable for the printing. Mark the end cap of each container with suitable identifications.

F. Submit As-Built compact discs in durable CD Containers with lock and key and with
suitable identifications.



END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/018100-1 General Commissioning Requirements
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 018100

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Tender and Construction documents, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning
without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.
1. Division 1 Section 01815 HVAC Commissioning Requirements for specific
requirements for commissioning HVAC systems.
2. Division 14 Conveying Systems
3. Division 15 All other Mechanical Systems
4. Division 16 All Electrical System

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and
product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements,
standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of
individual items that support the design process.
B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements
of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include
Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success
criteria, and supporting information.
E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used
together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and
components.

1.04 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Members/Commissioning Team Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the
authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to
implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning
team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including
Contractors Project Manager, MEP Engineers, subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and
specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
B. Members Appointed by Engineer:
1. Engineers Representative.
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel from
the Ministry of Health.
New Jahra Hospital

1.05 ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.
B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in
commissioning team activities.
C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Engineers Representative and approved by
Engineer, to the CxA and Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan,
systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and
shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with
entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective
action.
2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.
3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a weekly basis.
4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction
schedule.
5. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA.
6. Complete construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the
Commissioning Authority on a daily basis.
7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the
Commissioning Authority.
8. Complete commissioning process test procedures.
9. Arrange and provide all Temporary Power, water, Drain, and Air Conditioning
required for Testing and Commissioning.

1.07 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Organize and lead the commissioning team.
B. Provide commissioning plan.
C. Convene commissioning team meetings.
D. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test
procedures.
E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The
sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to,
equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data,
tests, and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not
meet the requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.
G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.
H. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.
I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual
and commissioning process report.
New Jahra Hospital

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/018300-1 Operational Maintenance Data
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 018300

OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

1. Format and content of manuals.
2. Instruction of Employers personnel.
3. Schedule of submittals.

3. Section 016100 - Basic Product Requirements
5. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operational
maintenance data.


A. Prepare instructions and data by approved personnel experienced in operational
maintenance of described products.

1.03 FORMAT

A. Prepare data in the form of an instruction manual.

B. Binders: Commercial quality, size A4 three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic
covers; 50mm maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into
related consistent groupings.

C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title Operational Maintenance
Instructions: list title of Project and identify subject matter of contents.

D. Arrange content by systems under division and section numbers and sequence according to
Index of Document III-2 - Particular Specifications.

E. Provide tabbed flyleaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.

F. Text: Manufacturers printed data, or typewritten data.

G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.

1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME

A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and
systems, indexed to content of the volume.

B. For Each Product or system: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts,
and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
New Jahra Hospital

D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment
and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.

E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.

G. Operational Maintenance Manual should include:
1. Register/Contents
2. Description of each system
3. Schedule of Material
4. Factory Inspection and Test Certificates
5. Testing & Commissioning Reports
6. Guarantees/Warrantees
7. Operation Instruction/System Startup and Shutdown Procedure
8. Maintenance Instructions/Planned Preventive Maintenance Instruction and Program
9. Break Down Maintenance Procedure
10. Spare Parts
11. As Built Drawings

1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-
ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturers recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual specifications sections.

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed flysheet and space for
insertion of data.

1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT, MEDICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Each item of equipment, medical equipment and each system: Include description of unit or
system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

B. Panel board circuit directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.

C. Include as-installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions
and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut down, and emergency
instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

New Jahra Hospital
E. Maintenance requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassemble instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and
checking instructions. Provide maintenance instruction/planned preventive maintenance
instruction, program and breakdown maintenance procedure.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

G. Include manufacturers printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

I. Provide original manufacturers parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.

J. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

K. Provide Contractors coordination drawings, with as installed colour coded piping diagrams.

L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow
and control diagrams.

M. Provide list of original manufacturers spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.

N. Include description of each system.

O. Include test, balancing and commissioning eport.

P. Include factory inspection and test certificate.

Q. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.

R. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.

S. Photocopies of Warranties.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.

B. For equipment or medical equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service
during construction and operated by Employer, submit documents within ten days after
acceptance.

C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to request for Substantial
Completion. Copy will be returned after Substantial Completion with Engineers
comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.

D. Submit four copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after Substantial
Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used.

END OF SECTION

New Jahra Hospital

Amiri Diwan III-2/018500-1 Two Years Operational
New Jahra Hospital Maintenance Period Duties
SECTION 018500

TWO YEARS OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD DUTIES
(EXCEPT MEDICAL AND LABORATORY EQUIPMENT)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Operational, Preventive Maintenance, Running Maintenance and Guaranteed Maintenance of
all the works of the building, equipment and external works within the boundary of the
Project Design, Construction, Equipment, Furniture and Operational Maintenance, Tested
and Commissioned by the Contractor as per the requirements of the Contract. The
Operational and Maintenance Duties/Works shall be carried out by the Contractor for 24
hours per day; 7 days a week for a period of two years starting from the date/s the works are
certified as substantially complete comprising but not limited to the followings:
1. Administrative, logistical and supervisory requirements for co-ordinating activities
during the said 2 years period.
2. Operational, Preventive Running and Guaranteed Maintenance as per the respective
manufacturers recommendation, including all materials, Tools and Selective Spare
Parts (List approved by the Engineer) required as per the respective manufacturers
recommendation.
3. Operational Maintenance of Electrical systems shall be including but not limited to
the followings: All types of lighting, power, distribution network, electrical panels and
switchboards, motor control centers, lighting controls, cabling, raceways, conduits,
ATS, emergency diesel generators, UPS, fire alarm system, telecommunication
system, IT and data transfer systems, video and audio-visual systems, paging and
public address systems central clock system, security control and monitoring
system, nurse call system and all other Low Voltage Electrical Equipment.
4. Operational Maintenance of the Mechanical systems shall be including but not
limited to the followings: HVAC systems including air handling units, chillers, pumps,
cooling towers, fans, ducting, dampers, air terminals, heaters, special laboratories
exhaust, smoke exhaust and drainage system, hydronic piping, valves, fittings and
control devices, fire fighting systems sprinklers, hose reel, FM 200 and foam
systems, fire pumps etc, pneumatic piping system, complete plumbing systems
including water supply and drainage system, water heaters, pumps, water filters and
treatment equipment, grease interceptors, oil and sand separators, fuel oil piping,
diesel exhaust and cooling systems, irrigation water system, automatic control of all
mechanical engineering services, cold rooms, DX units.
5. Operational Maintenance of the Special systems shall be including but not limited to
the followings: LPG system, Steam generation and distribution system, Compressed
Air System, Medical Gas System and Pneumatic System, Special HVAC system for
labs, Clean and Environmental rooms etc. (if any)
6. Operational maintenance of Medical and Laboratory Equipment and other active
components.
7. Operational Maintenance of Building Fabrics, Internal finishes, Doors and Windows,
Furniture and Furnishings, all Caseworks, Counters etc.
8. Operational Maintenance of all other systems shall be including but not limited to the
followings: Conveying system Passenger, Patient and Service Elevators,
Escalators, Window Cleaning system, Building Management System etc.
9. Carry out activities related to the performance of routine, preventive, predictive,
scheduled actions aimed at preventing equipment to prevent failure or decline in
efficiency, reliability and safety of the systems.
10. Provide spare parts as required under each section of the specifications. The
Contractor may use the spare parts during 2 year Operational Maintenance period
but shall replenish with new one as soon as possible. The Contractor may use the
remaining Spare parts in the extended Operational Maintenance period otherwise he
shall hand over the spare parts as per list at the End of O & M period.
11. Maintain an inventory of all the consumable/serviceable parts which need periodic
replacement or those items where the fault is likely to occur. Store sufficient
inventory to react to the immediate need on site.
12. Provide a comprehensive maintenance schedule for preventive and predictive
maintenance work listing all equipments need to be maintained or serviced
daily/weekly/monthly/ quarterly/semiannually/annually.
13. Be responsible for Documenting, Tracking and Reporting Requirements such as
providing log cards, service sheets.
14. Provide comprehensive service plan containing equipment list, operating and
maintaining tasks for each system or equipment. Also provide list of test to be
performed.
15. Carry out periodic calibration of instruments by authorized agency.
16. Keep plant rooms and areas of work clean and tidy from the uncleanliness resulting
from the Contractors activities.

B. Replanting of seasonal flowers six times during the said two year period.

C. All operational maintenance period duties mentioned anywhere else in the Tender/Contract.

D. The faultless operational maintenance of the following will be considered as duties of
utmost urgent importance Air-conditioning, Power, Medical and Laboratory Equipment,
Elevators and Escalators.

The faultless operational maintenance of the rest will also be considered as duties of utmost
importance but of urgency as determined on a case to case basis by the Employer/Engineer.

1.02 EMPLOYERS RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Employer will supply all kinds of water, free of cost to the Contractor, during the
operational maintenance period for operation and preventive maintenance activities
excluding breakdown maintenance activities. For Breakdown Maintenance the Employer may
choose at his discretion.

B. Similarly, the Employer will supply all power needs free of cost to the Contractor, during the

C. The Employer shall provide free of cost the offices space and stores space for the
Contractor's operational maintenance period staff.

1.03 RELATED WORK(S)

A. Section 014500 - Quality Control

B. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures

C. Section 018300 - Operation and Maintenance Data

D. All other sections where maintenance period duties and staff etc. are mentioned.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE), UK., ASHRAE (US)


A. Operational and maintenance manuals shall be used as the basis for maintenance.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval operational maintenance manuals with
respect to each and every work system, sub system or equipment, medical and laboratory
equipment requiring such a manual, listing or maintenance program, method, tools,
consumables, spares etc.

Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum three months before the
Substantial Completion Date.

B. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval the CVs of the staff proposed for the
maintenance works.

Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum by a month before the Substantial
Completion Date

1.07 REMEDY OF CONTRACTORS FAILURE

A. At the end of the maintenance period, or soon thereafter, and provided either that all works
during that period had been attended to promptly and satisfactorily by the Contractor or that
the Employer/Engineer is satisfied that the costs of the works that the Employer had to carry
out, consequent upon the failure of the Contractor to attend to them, shall not reasonably
exceed the retention amount, the Employer may release the retention amount to the
Contractor as per provision of the contract.

B. However, if the Employer in his sole discretion, had already released the amount Part A
against a bank guarantee then the Contractor shall be at liberty to allow the said bank
guarantee to lapse at the end of its validity unless he receives a written communication from
the Employer within the said validity period, instructing the Contractor to extend the said
bank guarantee for the reason that works that had arisen during the maintenance period &
which were being carried out by the Employer for reasons hereinabove, were expected to
cost an amount exceeding the retention.

C. The Employer shall then be at liberty, to encash the said bank guarantee, spend the
necessary and certified amounts as detailed hereinabove and pay the residue to the
Contractor promptly upon the completion of the relevant works.

D. The attention and diligence that the Contractor shall bestow on calls from the Employer
and/or the Engineer shall be as follows:
1. First visit by the Contractor to site and meetings with the Engineer
a. Within a reasonable period, or
b. Maximum, within one calendar day of the Employer's call to the Contractor.
2. Completion of work
b. Maximum, within the time agreed with the Engineer when the first visit was
paid by the Contractor.
The Engineer shall be free to consider that the Contractor had defaulted on his obligations if
the time designated in 1 and/or 2 above elapses and the first visit is not made and/or the
work is still not completed satisfactorily.

1.08 CONTRACTORS STAFF DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide the following staff and such additional staff as mentioned
elsewhere in the Tender/Contract, throughout the maintenance period of two years:

Should any of the position holders be absent or not carryout the duty/ies expected of them,
the Employer shall charge the following penalties per day:

Position Qualification Penalty KD/Day

Administrative/Other Staff (Normal Working Hour)

Maintenance Manager (One) Mech. / Elec. Degree Engineer
over 15 years experiences.
50
Secretary (1 No.) 8 years experience. 30
Civil Supervisor (1 No) Diploma & over 10 Years
experience
35
Bio Medical Supervisor Diploma in Biomedical Engineering
with 15 years experience
35
Storekeeper (1 No.) 6 years experience. 30
Driver (1) 6 year experience. 20

First Shift 06:00 to 14:00

Mech. Supervisor (2 No.) Diploma, 15 years experience. 30
Elec. Supervisor (1 No.) Diploma, 15 years experience. 30
HVAC Tech. (1 No.) Trade Cert,15 years experience. 25
Elect. Tech. (1 No.) (Medium+H V) over 15 years
experience
25
Elect. Tech. (1 Nos.) Low-voltage over 15 years
experiences.
25
BAS Tech. (1 No.) Over 10 years experience 25
Plumbing Tech. (1 Nos.) Plumbing over 15 years experiences. 25
BAS Operator. (1 No.) 10 years experience. 25
Jr. Mech. Tech (2 No.) 8 years experience. 20
Jr. Elect. Tech. (2 No.) 8 years experience 20

Second Shift 14:00 to 22:00

Mech. Supervisor (2 No.) 15 years experience.
Elec. Supervisor (1 No.) 15 years experience.
HVAC Tech. (1 Nos.) over 15 years experience.
Elect. Tech. (1 Nos.) (Medium+H V) over 15 years
experience .

experience.

Plumbing Tech. (1 Nos.) Plumbing over 15 years experience.
BAS Operator (1 No.) 10 years experience.
Jr. Mech. Tech. (1 No.) 8 years experience.
Jr. Elect. Tech. (1 No.) 8 years experience

Third Shift 22:00 to 06:00

HVAC Tech. (1 No.) over 15 years experiences.
experiences.

Jr. Mech. Tech. (1No.) 8 years experience.


B. The penalty noted above will be levied if, in the knowledge/opinion of the Employer/Engineer:
1. The staff is absent, or
2. The staff fails to perform his duty in spite of being present.
3. Penalties for the Second and Third shifts shall be as per the First shift.

C. It will be the Contractors responsibility to provide all their maintenance period staff with all
their other requirements such as furniture, mobile telephones, tools, instruments, stationery,
etc. complete.

D. The above positions and their hours of work are the minimum from which the actual number
of employees/staff/personnel shall be calculated and provided. Additional hours or additional
staff will have to be provided without additional cost if it becomes necessary in the opinion of
the Employer.

1.09 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE PARTS

A. List of the manufacturers recommended spare parts shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval where list of parts shall include manufacturers model numbers, serial numbers,
parts numbers, or any other identification required for the ordering of spare parts by the
Contractor.

Furnish spare parts list as recommended by the Manufacturer but not limited to the
followings as listed below. It is the Contractors responsibility to procure adequate spare
parts of all works as described. All required Spare parts shall be available at Contractors
store for its prompt use during Operational and maintenance period.

Equipment Parts Required

Pumps Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list
acceptable to the Engineer

Air Conditioning Units 1 set of belts for each unit, 1 adjustable sheave
for each unit; 20 % filter replacement.

Air Conditioning Control Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All Motors Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All variable speed drives Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All starters, Contractors and relays 2 set contacts, each type; 2 magnetic coils, each
type; 2% heater replacement; 10 % pilot light
replacement.

All hand-operated shut-off
valves
10% complete valves, each size and type; 20%
Complete repacking, reseating kits, each type.

Insulation (Pipe and Duct) 5% replacement, each type and size.

Medical and Laboratory
Equipment
Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely
equipment starting sequences, operation, maintenance, automatic control, pumps, and air
compressors, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Employer. Three sets of
lubricating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall be furnished to Employer.

B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names, contact Information of local representatives) in
order to expedite ordering of replacement parts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

Following activities shall be allowed for by the Contractor, on a 24 hours per day, 7 days per
week schedule; all as stated in Clauses 3.02, 3.03 and 3.04 below:

A. Operation
1. Contractor shall operate works, systems, sub-systems and equipment, as stipulated
in respective clauses.
2. Specified and required number of qualified personnel shall be posted at the project
site.

B. Preventive Maintenance
1. Preventive maintenance as recommended by the Engineer and Manufacturers,
inclusive of replacement of parts and consumable(s).
2. Replacement of parts necessitated due to wear and tear of equipment; in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and provision of spare parts
thereof.
3. Changing of oils, grease etc. and provision of consumable(s) thereof and disposal of
used spares and consumable(s).
4. Preventive maintenance schedules shall be incorporated into the Building
Management System.

C. Guaranteed Maintenance
1. Repair/replacement of works, systems, sub-systems, equipment or components
which may prove defective due to design, manufacture, installation, testing,
commissioning and where stipulated, then due to operation.

D. Soft Landscaping
1. The Contractor shall replant seasonal flowers six times during the said two year
period.
2. The Contractor shall carryout all other works detailed in the relevant section or
required in the opinion of the Engineer to maintain the soft landscaping in a lush
green and tidy, well-pruned, one hundred percent live manner.

E. Maintenance of Records
1. Log-books, log-sheets, maintenance job cards, etc. shall be maintained at site by
the Contractor.
2. A written report, including dates, parts replaced etc., detailing the maintenance work
performed, shall be provided to the Employer, at the end of the maintenance period.

F. Participation of Employers Maintenance Personnel
1. Employer's maintenance personnel, if and when appointed by the Employer for
respective activities, shall be allowed to witness or participate (without damaging
interference) in operation and various kinds of maintenance activities.

3.02 OPERATION

A. After the Substantial Completion Date, the Employer will take the responsibility only for the
following functions :
1. Cleaning through personnel and using window cleaning equipment
2. Security through personnel only
3. General housekeeping
The Employer shall not provide any personnel, equipment, and material for operating any
other aspect of the building.

B. The Contractor shall, therefore, operate the building in all its aspects for all the Works
designed, constructed and installed by him and as mentioned in the Part I, General - Work
included in this section of specification, however, the following indicative list provided for
guidance:
1. HVAC Systems
2. Pumps and all other rotating systems
3. Electrical and low voltage system such as fire alarm system, data communication
system, access control system, CCTV system, public address system, audio visual
system, TV and satellite system and telecommunication system etc. etc.
4. Medical Equipment and all active components.
5. Building management system
6. All other works, systems and equipment.
7. Test runs Diesel Generator once every 15 days with his own diesel for 30 minutes.
8. Relamp all luminaries as and when needed.

C. Conduct reliability tests for the HVAC system in accordance with specification Section
155000.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/018510-1 Three Years Extended Operational
SECTION 018510

THREE YEARS EXTENDED OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD DUTIES
(EXCEPT MEDICAL AND LABORATORY EQUIPMENT)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Operational, Preventive Maintenance, Running Maintenance and Guaranteed Maintenance of
all the works of the building, equipment and external works within the boundary of the
Project Design, Construction, Equipment, Furniture and Operational Maintenance after expiry
of the 2 years operational maintenance period by the Contractor. The Operational and
Maintenance Duties/Works shall be carried out by the Contractor for 24 hours per day; 7
days a week for a period of three (3) years starting from the date of final completion i.e.
issuance of final maintenance certificate comprising but not limited to the followings:
1. Administrative, logistical and supervisory requirements for co-ordinating activities
during the said three (3) years extended Operational and maintenance period.
manufacturers recommendation, including all materials, Tools and Selective Spare
Parts (List approved by the Engineer) required as per the respective manufacturers
recommendation.
3. Operational & Maintenance of Electrical systems shall be including but not limited to
the followings: All types of lighting, power, distribution network, electrical panels and
switchboards, motor control centers, lighting controls, cabling, raceways, conduits,
ATS, emergency diesel generators, UPS, fire alarm system, telecommunication
system, IT and data transfer systems, video and audio-visual systems, paging and
public address systems central clock system, security control and monitoring
system, nurse call system and all other Low Voltage Electrical Equipment.
4. Operational & Maintenance of the Mechanical systems shall be including but not
limited to the followings: HVAC systems including air handling units, chillers, pumps,
cooling towers, fans, ducting, dampers, air terminals, heaters, special laboratories
exhaust, smoke exhaust and drainage system, hydronic piping, valves, fittings and
control devices, fire fighting systems sprinklers, hose reel, FM 200 and foam
systems, fire pumps etc, pneumatic piping system, complete plumbing systems
including water supply and drainage system, water heaters, pumps, water filters and
treatment equipment, grease interceptors, oil and sand separators, fuel oil piping,
diesel exhaust and cooling systems, irrigation water system, automatic control of all
mechanical engineering services, cold rooms, DX units,
5. Operational & Maintenance of the Special systems shall be including but not limited
to the followings: LPG system, Steam generation and distribution system,
Compressed Air System, Medical Gas System and Pneumatic System, Special
HVAC system for labs, Clean and Environmental rooms etc. (if any).
6. Operational and maintenance of Medical and Laboratory Equipment and other active
components.
7. Operational and Maintenance of Building Fabrics, Internal finishes, Doors and
Windows, Furniture and Furnishings, all Caseworks, Counters etc.
8. Operational & Maintenance of all other systems shall be including but not limited to
the followings: Conveying system Passenger, Patient and Service Elevators,
Escalators, Window Cleaning system, Building Management System etc.
scheduled actions aimed at preventing equipment to prevent failure or decline in
efficiency, reliability and safety of the systems.
10. Replace any machinery, equipment, system/s in case of breakdown or faulty
operation in a situation of un-repairable condition.
11. Provide spare parts as required for the above works for the extended Operational
and Maintenance period. The Contractor shall use the spare parts during three (3)
years extended O & M period but shall replenish with new one as soon as possible.
The Contractor shall hand over the remaining spare parts as per list at the End of
extended O & M period.

replacement or those items where the fault is likely to occur. Store sufficient
inventory to react to the immediate need on site.
maintenance work listing all equipments need to be maintained or serviced
daily/weekly/monthly/ quarterly/semiannually/annually.
14. Be responsible for Documenting, Tracking and Reporting Requirements such as
maintaining tasks for each system or equipment. Also provide list of test to be
performed.
17. Keep plant rooms and areas of work clean and tidy from the uncleanliness resulting
from the Contractors activities.

B. Replanting of seasonal flowers three times each year during the said three year period.

C. All operational maintenance period duties mentioned anywhere else in the Tender/Contract.

D. The faultless Operational maintenance of the following will be considered as duties of
utmost urgent importance Air-conditioning, Power, Medical and Laboratory Equipment,
Elevators and Escalators.

The faultless Operational maintenance of the rest will also be considered as duties of utmost
importance but of urgency as determined on a case to case basis by the Employer/Engineer.

1.02 EMPLOYERS RESPONSIBILITIES





A. Section 014500 - Quality Control

B. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures

C. Section 018300 - Operation and Maintenance Data

D. All other sections where maintenance period duties and staff etc. are mentioned.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE), UK.


A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be used as the basis for maintenance.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval operational and maintenance manuals
with respect to each and every work system, sub system or equipment requiring such a
manual, listing or maintenance program, method, tools, consumables, spares etc.

Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum three months before the end of
two (2) years Defects Liability Period.

maintenance works.

Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum by a month before the end of two
(2) years.

C. Begin to submit to the Employer the following one (1) year before the end of three (3) years
maintenance period.
1. Tools and Spare parts lists (for use by the Employer after the 3 years maintenance
period is over) for the Employer to approve, order and receive before the end of the 3
years maintenance period.
2. Documentation such as Maintenance Manuals etc.
3. Complete these submittals minimum 30 days before the end of the extended
maintenance period.

1.07 REMEDY OF CONTRACTORS FAILURE

A. The attention and diligence that the Contractor shall bestow on calls from the Employer
and/or the Engineer shall be as follows:
1. First visit by the Contractor to site and meetings with the Engineer
b. Maximum, within one calendar day of the Employer's call to the Contractor.
2. Completion of work
b. Maximum, within the time agreed with the Engineer when the first visit was
paid by the Contractor.
The Engineer shall be free to consider that the Contractor had defaulted on his obligations if
the time designated in 1 and/or 2 above elapses and the first visit is not made and/or the
work is still not completed satisfactorily.

B. If the Contractor is in default and works are not satisfactorily attended and completed within
reasonable time, the Employer shall be at liberty, to carry out the essential works. The
expenditure incurred thereof by the Employer shall be deducted from the Performance Bond,
and the residue shall be released to the Contractor after the expiry of the three (3) years
extended maintenance period.

1.08 CONTRACTORS STAFF DURING EXTENDED MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide the following staff and such additional staff as mentioned
elsewhere in the Tender/Contract, throughout the extended maintenance period of three
years:

Should any of the position holders be absent or not carryout the duty/ies expected of them,
the Employer shall charge the following penalties per day:



Maintenance Manager (One) Mech. / Elec. Degree Engineer
over 15 years experiences.
50
Secretary (1 No.) 8 years experience. 30
Civil Supervisor (1 No) Diploma & over 10 Years
experience
35
Storekeeper (1 No.) 6 years experience. 30
Driver (1) 6 year experience. 20

First Shift 06:00 to 14:00

Mech. Supervisor (2 No.) Diploma, 15 years experience. 30
Elec. Supervisor (1 No.) Diploma, 15 years experience. 30
HVAC Tech. (1 No.) Trade Cert,15 years experience. 25
experience
25
experiences.
25
BAS Tech. (1 No.) Over 10 years experience 25
Plumbing Tech. (1 Nos.) Plumbing over 15 years
experiences.
25
BAS Operator. (1 No.) 10 years experience. 25
Jr. Mech. Tech (2 No.) 8 years experience. 20
Jr. Elect. Tech. (2 No.) 8 years experience 20

Second Shift 14:00 to 22:00

Mech. Supervisor (2 No.) 15 years experience.
Elec. Supervisor (1 No.) 15 years experience.
HVAC Tech. (1 Nos.) over 15 years experience.
Elect. Tech. (1 Nos.) (Medium+H V) over 15 years
experience .

experience.

Plumbing Tech. (1 Nos.) Plumbing over 15 years
experience.

Jr. Mech. Tech. (1 No.) 8 years experience.

Third Shift 22:00 to 06:00

HVAC Tech. (1 No.) over 15 years experiences.
experiences.

Jr. Mech. Tech. (1No.) 8 years experience.

B. The penalty noted above will be levied if, in the knowledge/opinion of the Employer/Engineer:
3. Penalties for the Second and Third shifts shall be as per the First shift.
C. It will be the Contractors responsibility to provide all their maintenance period staff with all
etc. complete.

of employees/staff/personnel shall be calculated and provided. Additional hours or additional
staff will have to be provided without additional cost if it becomes necessary in the opinion of
the Employer.


A. List of the spare parts shall be as per the BOQ and as per approval of the Engineer with
respect to the contract documents to be handed over to the Employer at the time of handing
over the facility to the Client. The list of parts shall include manufacturers model numbers,
serial numbers, parts numbers, or any other identification required for the ordering of spare
parts by the Contractor.

followings as listed below. It is the Contractors responsibility to procure adequate spare
parts of all works as described. All required Spare parts shall be available at Contractors
store for its prompt use during Operational and maintenance period.


Pumps Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

Air Conditioning Units 1 set of belts for each unit, 1 adjustable sheave
for each unit; 20 % filter replacement.

Air Conditioning Control Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All Motors Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All variable speed drives Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

All starters, Contractors and relays 2 set contacts, each type; 2 magnetic coils, each
type; 2% heater replacement; 10 % pilot light
replacement.

All hand-operated shut-off
valves
10% complete valves, each size and type; 20%
Complete repacking, reseating kits, each type.

Insulation (Pipe and Duct) 5% replacement, each type and size.

Medical and Laboratory
Equipment
Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list

B. The above spare parts approved by the Engineer shall be procured, stored and used during 2
years maintenance period (See Section 018500). The remaining spare parts may be used by
the Contractor during 3 years Maintenance period including replenish with new one as soon
as possible. All remaining spare parts shall be handed over to the Employer before issuance
of 3 years Operational & Maintenance completion certificate.

1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely
equipment starting sequences, operation, maintenance, automatic control, pumps, and air
compressors, and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Employer. Three sets of
lubricating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall be furnished to Employer.

B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names, contact Information of local representatives) in
order to expedite ordering of replacement parts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

week schedule; all as stated in Clauses 3.02, 3.03 and 3.04 below:

A. Operation
1. Contractor shall operate works, systems, sub-systems and equipment, as stipulated
in respective clauses.
2. Specified and required number of qualified personnel shall be posted at the project
site.

1. Preventive maintenance as recommended by the Engineer and Manufacturers,
inclusive of replacement of parts and consumable(s).
2. Replacement of parts necessitated due to wear and tear of equipment; in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and provision of spare parts
thereof.
4. Preventive maintenance schedules shall be incorporated into the Building
Management System.

1. Repair/replacement of works, systems, sub-systems, equipment or components
which may prove defective due to design, manufacture, installation, testing,
commissioning and where stipulated, then due to operation.

D. Soft Landscaping
1. The Contractor shall replant seasonal flowers nine times during the said three years
period.
2. The Contractor shall carryout all other works detailed in the relevant section or
required in the opinion of the Engineer to maintain the soft landscaping in a lush
green and tidy, well-pruned, one hundred percent live manner.

1. Log-books, log-sheets, maintenance job cards, etc. shall be maintained at site by
the Contractor.
2. A written report, including dates, parts replaced etc., detailing the maintenance work

F. Participation of Employers Maintenance Personnel
interference) in operation and various kinds of maintenance activities.

3.02 OPERATION

A. The Contractor shall, operate and maintain the building in all its aspects for all the Works as
mentioned in the Part I, General Work included in this section of specification, however,
the following indicative list provided for guidance:
1. HVAC Systems
2. Pumps and all other rotating systems
3. Electrical and low voltage system such as fire alarm system, data communication
system, access control system, CCTV system, public address system, audio visual
system, TV and satellite system and telecommunication system etc.
4. Medical Equipment and all active components.
5. Building management system.
6. Plumbing and fire protection system.
7. Medical gas services
8. All other works, systems and equipment.
7. Test runs Diesel Generator once every 15 days with his own diesel for 30 minutes.
8. Relamp all luminaries as and when needed.

B. Conduct reliability tests for the HVAC system in accordance with specification Section
155000.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/018520-1 Five Years Operational Maintenance Period
New Jahra Hospital Duties for Medical & Laboratory Equipment
SECTION 018520

FIVE YEARS OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD
DUTIES FOR MEDICAL AND LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PART1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Operational, Guaranteed Successful Operation, Running Maintenance and Guaranteed
Maintenance of all the works of Medical and Laboratory equipment, supplied, installed,
Tested and Commissioned by the Contractor as per the requirements of the Contract. The
Operational Maintenance Duties/Works shall be carried out by the Contractor for 24 hours
per day; 7 days a week for a period of five (5) years starting from the date/s the works are
certified as substantially complete comprising but not limited to the following:
1. Administrative, logistical and associated supervisory requirements for coordinating
activities during the said 5 years period.
manufacturer's recommendation, including all materials, Tools and Selective Spare
Parts (List approved by the Engineer), consumables required as per the respective
manufacturer's recommendation.
scheduled actions aimed at preventing all equipment and to prevent failure or decline
in efficiency, reliability and safety of the systems.
4. Provide spare parts as required for each Laboratory and Medical Equipment.
replacement or those items where the fault is likely to occur. Store sufficient inventory
to react to the immediate need on site.
maintenance work listing all Medical and Laboratory equipment, need to be
maintained or serviced daily/weekly/monthly/ quarterly/ semiannually/annually.
7. Be responsible for "Documenting, Tracking and Reporting Requirements" such as
maintaining tasks for each system or all types of Medical and Laboratory equipment.
Also provide list of tests to be performed.
10. Replace and upgrade all necessary software periodically, which will require to run the
system in every twelve (12) months as minimum.
11. Replace all Medical and Laboratory Equipment and Accessories which has gone out of
order or broken down due to faulty design and installation.
1.02 EMPLOYER'S RESPONSIBILITIES




A. Related Sections
4. Section 018300 Operation and Maintenance Data
5. Section 018500 -Two Years Operational Maintenance Period Duties (Except Medical &
Laboratory Equipment)
6. Section 018510 -Three Years Extended Operational Maintenance Period Duties
(Except Medical & Laboratory Equipment)
7. All other sections where maintenance period duties and staff etc. are mentioned.
1.04 REFERENCES

A. Maintenance, repair and replacement of all Medical and Laboratory Equipment shall be done
as per Manufacturers Maintenance Manual and International Maintenance (Medical
Equipment) codes standards.

A. Operational Maintenance manuals shall be used as the basis for maintenance of all Medical
and Laboratory Equipment.
1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval operational maintenance manuals with
respect to each and every work system, sub system, equipment, requiring such a manual,
listing or maintenance program, method, tools, consumables, spares etc.
Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum three months before the
Substantial Completion Date.

maintenance works.
Begin this submittal process so as to complete it minimum by a month before the Substantial
Completion Date.
1.07 GUARANTEE FOR MEDICAL EQUIPMENT DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor will be required to provide an Unconditional Bank Guarantee in the name of
the Employer equal to Five Percent (5%) of the value of the Medical Equipment in the
Contract. The Guarantee is to be valid for the full term of the operational maintenance period
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work and will remain in force
until the issue of the Final completion Certificate and the conclusion of the Operational
Maintenance Period.

B. Should the Contractor default in any of the Terms and Conditions of his obligations during
the Operational Maintenance Period the Employer shall be at liberty to encash the said Bank
Guarantee, spend the necessary amount as required to the complete the defaulted works.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S STAFF DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide staff: Well trained Bio-Medical Engineer (1 No.), Software
Engineer (1 No.), and Technicians (2 Nos.) throughout the maintenance period of five years:

The Employer shall charge the following Penalties per day/person as follow:



1. Biomedical Engineer Over 15 years experience. 50

2. Software Engineer Over 15 years experience 50

3. Technicians Over 10 years experience. 30

B. The penalty noted above will be levied if, in the knowiedge/opinion of the Employer/Engineer:

C. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to provide all their maintenance period staff with all
etc. complete.

of employees/staff/personnel shall be calculated and provided. Additional hours or
additional staff will have to be provided without additional cost if it becomes necessary in the
opinion of the Employer.


A. List of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval where fist of parts shall include manufacturer's model numbers, serial numbers,
parts numbers, or any other identification required for the ordering of spare parts by the
Contractor.

followings as listed below. It is the Contractor's responsibility to procure adequate spare
parts of all works as described. All required Spare parts shall be available at Contractor's
store for its prompt use during Operational Maintenance period.


Medical and Laboratory Manufacturers recommended Spare parts list
Equipment acceptable to the Engineer

1.10 OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Three sets of operating and maintenance instruction manuals, covering completely all types
of Medical and Laboratory equipment starting sequences, Operational maintenance,
automatic control, software and listing of all spare parts, shall be furnished to Employer.
Three sets of lubricating and calibrating charts and manuals for each item of equipment shall
be furnished to Employer.

B. Furnish a list of manufacturers (with names, contact Information including phone numbers
and addresses of local representatives) in order to expedite ordering of replacement parts.

C. Maintenance shall include all consumable and non consumable spare parts, including
replacement of equipment and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

week schedule; all as stated in Clauses below:

A. Operation
1. Contractor shall operate works, systems, sub-systems, equipment as stipulated in
respective clauses.
2. Specified and required number of qualified personnel shall be posted at the project site.

1. Preventive maintenance as recommended by the Engineer and Manufacturers, inclusive
of replacement of parts and consumable(s).
2. Replacement of parts necessitated due to wear and tear of equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendation and provision of spare parts thereof.

1. Repair/replacement of works, systems, sub-systems, equipment or components which
may prove defective due to design, manufacture, installation, testing, commissioning
and where stipulated, then due to operation.

D. Replacement
1. Replace all faulty equipment along with the accessories. The Equipment which ceased
operation either through normal working procedure or wear and tear shall be replaced.
2. The Contractor shall carryout all other works detailed in this section or required in the
opinion of the Engineer to maintain all the Medical and Laboratory equipment so that
they are all in working condition.

1. Log-books, log-sheets, maintenance job cards, etc. shall be maintained at site by the
Contractor.
2A written report, including dates, parts replaced etc., detailing the maintenance work

F. Participation of Employer's Maintenance Personnel
interference) in operational and various kinds of maintenance activities.

3.02 OPERATION

A After the Substantial Completion Date, the Employer will take the responsibility only for the
following functions :
1. Cleaning through personnel
2. Security through personnel only
3 General housekeeping

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/024116-1 Structure Demolition
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 024116

STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition of existing asphalt paving, kerb stones, pavers and other site facilities (if
any).
2. Demolition, removal and rerouting of existing services.
3. Demolish the existing construction only to the extent required by the new construction
and as indicated.

B. Related Sections: The following Section contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 312000 - Earth Moving for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,
salvaged, or to remain the Employer's property.

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Employer's
property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify
contents of containers and deliver to Employer's designated storage area which shall be
within 50km off site.

C. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during demolition. When permitted by the Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations.

1.03 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to
remain the Employer's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's
property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's
option.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article in accordance with the requirements of Contract
Documents, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Proposed dust-control measures.

C. Proposed noise-control measures.

D. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following:
1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity.
2. Dates for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.

F. Inventory of items to be removed by Employer.
New Jahra Hospital
G. Photographs, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations.

H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, or mechanical conditions.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed
demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation
conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving".
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when sufficient satisfactory soil
materials are not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.

D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition
activities.

3.02 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when
authorized in writing by Employer and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Employer
and to governing authorities.
a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Employer if shutdown of service is
required during changeover.

B. Utility Requirements: Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing
have been completed and verified in writing.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, acids,
flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings
and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area.
1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.

3.04 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.

3.05 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust
and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.

B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level.

C. Clean adjacent buildings and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition.

3.06 DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish the existing construction only to the extend required by new construction
and as indicated.

B. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials except those indicated to be salvaged or
reinstalled. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Employer's property and legally dispose of
them.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Provide, erect and maintain all, lights, barriers, warning signs and all other items as required
for the proper protection of the workman engaged in the demolition operations.

B. Do not close or obstruct any services or public utilities without permission. Conduct
operations with minimum traffic interference.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/031500-1 Concrete Accessories
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 031500

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete accessories complete in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. PVC or rubber water stops, conventional type.
2. Fixing.

1. Section 033000 - Cast-in Place Concrete

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 572-81 Method for Chemical Analysis of Chrome-Containing
Refractories and Chrome Ore.
2. ASTM D 638-82a Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
3. ASTM D 746-79 Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact.
4. ASTM D 747-83 Test Method for Stiffness of Plastics by means of a
Cantilever Beam.

B. Corps of Engineers (CRD)
1. CRD-C 513 Rubber Water Stops.


A. PVC Water Stops
1. To be manufactured from PVC or other approved which shall not contain recycled or
filler material.
2. Minimum tensile strength 13.7 N/mm.
3. Elongation at break: Minimum 285%.

B. Rubber Water Stops
1. To be manufactured from Rubber to comply with US Federal Specification 22R-601a.
2. Minimum tensile strength: 20.7 N/mm.
3. Elongation at break: Minimum 45%.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineers Representative for review the manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions for water stops including certified laboratory test
reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the contract documents.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineers Representative in accordance with the
requirements of the contract documents, shop drawings showing details (Scale 1:5) of
location of items of work, joining details, fixing method etc.

C. Sample: Submit to the Engineers Representative in accordance with the requirements of the
contract documents, sample of Water Stops specified. Provide at least three (3) samples of
proposed types, including prefabricated joints and junctions.


A. Installer Qualification: Water Stops shall be installed in place by an approved installer having
qualifications/experience which meet the requirements specified in Documents I and II.
New Jahra Hospital
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly indicating
manufacturer's name, type, size and other identifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage,
deterioration and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been damaged
or are otherwise unfit for use, as directed by Engineers Representative.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this
section of the Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURES

A. Water Stops
1. W.R. Meadows of N. CA.
865 Teal Drive
P.O. Box 907
Benicia, CA 94510
(707) 745-6666
2. Grace Construction Products Waterproofing Systems
W.R. Grace Limited Ajax Avenue Slough
Berkshire SL1 4BH United Kingdom
Tel : 0044 1754 692929
Fax : 0044 1763 691623
3. Speciality Engineering Chemicals
P.O. Box 61347
Dubai United Arab Emirates
Tel: 971-4-8836662
Fax: 971-4-8837696
4. Polybit
P.O. Box 48539
Sharjah - United Arab Emirates
Tel: 971-6-5340007
Fax: 971-6-534-9675
5. Chem Rex Inc. USA
889 Valley Park Drive
Shakopee, MN 55379
U.S.A.
Tel: 952 496 6000
Fax: 952 496 6063

B. The products and manufacturers specified herein are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those
specified, will be acceptable subject to the Engineers approval. The decision of acceptability
shall rest with the Engineer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Water Stops
1. Type: Extruded pre-formed molded PVC / Rubber
2. Joints: Heat sealed or as recommended by manufacturers
3. Size: 240 mm wide unless noted otherwise
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction on the conditions under which work is to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Fix water stops in basement, water tanks, construction joints (external type), and to locations
indicated on drawings.

B. Install to give a continuous diaphragm in each joint.

C. Pre-moulded water stop shall be in maximum possible length to minimize the number of end
joints.

D. Make joints at ends and intersections in the manner most appropriate to the material used
and according to manufacturer recommendations.

E. Joints shall:
1. Fully develop effective water tightness, equal to that of the continuous water stops
material;
2. Permanently develop not less than 50% of the mechanical strength of the parent
section;
3. Permanently retain their flexibility.

F. Do not fix with nails or ties through the web of water stop.

G. Replace damaged water stops before concreting.

H. Fabricate field joints in water stops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Support and protect exposed water stops during progress of work.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/033000-1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All cast-in-place concrete work shown on the drawings or inferable
therefrom and/or as specified in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Work includes but is not limited to following:
1. Foundation
2. Foundation wall
3. Slab on grade
4. Slab
5. Building frame members
6. Formworks.
7. Reinforcing materials.
8. All general concrete works and related finishes.
9. Light-weight concrete.
10. Testing.

1. Section 033500 - Concrete Finishes
2. Section 035300 - Concrete Toppings
3. Section 036000 - Grouting
4. Section 071300 - Sheet Waterproofing
5. Section 071416 - Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing
6. Section 071113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
7. Section 079000 - Joint Protection
8. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A 82/A 82M-07: Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
2. ASTM A 184/A 184M-06: Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats
for Concrete Reinforcement
3. ASTM A 185/A 185M-07: Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain, for Concrete
4. ASTM A 496/A 496M-07: Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
5. ASTM A 497/A 497M-07: Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete
6. ASTM A 615/A 615M-08: Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
7. ASTM A 706/A 706M-06a: Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain
8. ASTM A 767/A 767M-05: Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
9. ASTM A 775/A 775M-07b: Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing
Bars
10. ASTM A 780-01 (Reapproved 2006): Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated
Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
11. ASTM A 820/A 820M-06: Specification for Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced
Concrete
12. ASTM A 884/A 884M-06: Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and
Welded Wire Reinforcement
13. ASTM A 934/A 934M-07: Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars
New Jahra Hospital
14. ASTM A 955/A 955M-07a: Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel
15. ASTM C 31/C 31M-06: Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field
16. ASTM C 33-07: Specification for Concrete Aggregates
17. ASTM C 39/C 39M-05: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
18. ASTM C 42/C 42M-04: Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
and Sawed Beams of Concrete
19. ASTM C 94/C 94M-07: Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
20. ASTM C 109/C 109M-07: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens)
21. ASTM C 143/C 143M-08: Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement
Concrete
22. ASTM C 150-07: Specification for Portland Cement
23. ASTM C 171-07: Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
24. ASTM C 172-07a: Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
25. ASTM C 173/C 173M-08: Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method
26. ASTM C 219-07a: Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement
27. ASTM C 231-08: Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method
28. ASTM C 260-06: Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
29. ASTM C 309-07: Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete
30. ASTM C 330-05: Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete
31. ASTM C 494/C 494M-08: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
32. ASTM C 567-05a: Test Method for Determining Density of Structural
Lightweight Concrete
33. ASTM C 595-08: Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
34. ASTM C 618-05: Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
35. ASTM C 881/C 881M-02: Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding
Systems for Concrete
36. ASTM C 979-05: Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete
37. ASTM C 989-06: Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace
Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars
38. ASTM C 1017/C 1017M-07: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete
39. ASTM C 1059/C 1059M-99 (Reapproved 2008): Specification for Latex Agents for
Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete
40. ASTM C 1064/C 1064M-05: Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
41. ASTM C 1077-07a: Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and
Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and
Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
42. ASTM C 1116/C 1116M-08: Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
43. ASTM C 1240-05: Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious
Mixtures
44. ASTM C 1315-08: Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing
and Sealing Concrete
45. ASTM D 448-03a: Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and
Bridge Construction
46. ASTM D 1751-04: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
New Jahra Hospital
47. ASTM D 1752-04a: Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork,
and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
48. ASTM D 2240-05: Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer
Hardness
49. ASTM D 3963/D 3963M-01 (Reapproved 2007): Specification for Fabrication and
Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing
Bars
50. ASTM D 4397-02: Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
51. ASTM E 154-08: Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls,
or as Ground Cover
52. ASTM E 329-07a: Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing
53. ASTM E 1155-96 (Reapproved 2008): Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness
and FL Floor Levelness Numbers
54. ASTM E 1155M-96 (Reapproved 2008): Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness
and FL Floor Levelness Numbers [Metric]
55. ASTM E 1643-98 (Reapproved 2005): Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under
Concrete Slabs
56. ASTM E 1745-97 (Reapproved 2004): Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete
Slabs

B. British Standards Institute (BSI)
1. BS 12 Portland Cement.
2. BS 410 Test Sieves.
3. BS 882 Aggregates from Natural Sources.
4. BS 1204 Synthetic Resin Adhesives (Phenolic and Amino plastic) for
wood.
5. BS 1305 Batch Type Concrete Mixers.
6. BS 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete.
7. BS 3148 Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
8. BS 3797 Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete.
9. BS 4027 Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement.
10. BS 4449 Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete.
11. BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of
concrete.
12. BS 4483 Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete.
13. BS 4550 Methods of Testing Cement.
14. BS 4757 Nineteen-wire steel strands for prestressed Concrete.
15. BS 5075 Concrete Admixtures.
16. BS 5328 Concrete.
17. BS 5606 Guide to Accuracy in Building.
18. BS 5975 Code of Practice for Falsework.
19. BS 8110 PART 1 : 1985 Code of Practice for the Structural Use
of Concrete.

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 117-2006: Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials
2. ACI 301-2005: Specifications for Structural Concrete
3. ACI 302.1R-2004: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
4. ACI 305R-1999: Hot Weather Concreting
5. ACI 306.1-1990 (Reapproved 2002): Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
6. ACI 318-2008: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
7. ACI 318M-2005: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete [Metric]
8. ACI CP-1-2008: Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field
Testing Technician - Grade I
New Jahra Hospital
D. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications, codes and specifications
shall apply throughout the cast-in-place concrete works:
1. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars.
3. ASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
4. ASHTO M182-94 Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf.
5. K.S.S. 36 Ordinary and Quick-Solidifying Portland Cement.
6. K.S.S. 39 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement.
7. K.S.S.100 Testing Techniques for Portland Cement Properties.
8. FHWA-RD-77-85 Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride
Ion in Concrete.
9. CIRA Data Sheet Concrete Pressure on Formwork (Concrete Society Technical
Report No.13).
10. MNL-116-85 Manual for Quality for Plants and Production of Precast and
Prestressed Concrete Products.
11. MNL-120-92 PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete.
12. MNL-127-85 Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete.


A. Performance:
1. This Specification Section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the
complete project except where more stringent or specialised requirements are
indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the entire project homogeneous
concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials, durability, and
weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or other structural defects, and free
of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offsets of plane and other
defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or
damage in the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the costs of
remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the
Contract Documents.

B. Design Requirements:
1. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract
Documents. No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the
Drawings will be permitted unless otherwise specified.
2. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and be
responsible for the complete manufacturing process for all concrete work. All
methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and manufactured
concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to execution of the concrete work.
3. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall
be properly selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained during
shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and techniques shall be properly
selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the
complete concrete construction phase. Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional
components and repair facilities shall be available for all tools and equipment.
4. Regardless of reviews and approvals by the Engineer be responsible for all materials,
methods and the work, and if any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents,
implement removal, replacement or remedial work and revise procedures or materials
to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Employer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and
reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement techniques and
requirements.
1. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which shall have
been shown on shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to assure that difficulties in execution of the
work in the field are minimised.
New Jahra Hospital
3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations,
sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include
on the shop drawings, schedules and diagrams to indicate bends, sizes and lengths of
all reinforcing steel bars.
4. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations, shall
show all floor openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall openings and
sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be coordinated with the
respective trades and shown on these shop drawings in accordance with the criteria
indicated on the Contract Drawings and contained in the various applicable Sections
of the Specification.
5. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and approved
by the Engineer (with corrections and resubmittals as required by the Contract
Documents). After review and approval by the Engineer, furnish all copies needed for
fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.
6. Be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materials called for or required by
the Contract Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the
reviewed shop drawings.
7. Submit shop drawings for all formwork showing locations of joints, tie bolts, cones,
dummy cones, openings, chamfers, inserts, fittings and accessories for the approval of
the Engineer before fabrication of formwork.
8. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 4, Para. 4.2,
wherever required for the supporting system of the formwork along with the shop
drawings for the supporting system, for approval of the Engineer.

B. Samples
1. Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or
evaluation by an approved Testing Agency, selected in accordance with the
requirements of Contract Documents. The independent Test Agency shall be
responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each report whether
or not the test specimens comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents and
shall specifically note any deviation therefrom. The Contractor shall not fabricate any
reinforcing bars prior to the approval of the Engineer.
2. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories of every type proposed for
use including component parts of prefabricated formwork systems and manufacturers
technical literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and carry out such tests on
the proposed prefabricated formwork systems as may be required by the Engineer in
order that he may be satisfied as to the systems suitability.
3. Furnish reinforcement and accessories for sample panels and mocked-up portions of
the structure as required using all materials and techniques as they will be used in
actual construction.

C. Mill Tests: Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, steel
reinforcement, welded wire fabric and prestressing strands.

D. Certifications for Admixtures: As specified under admixtures.

E. Test Reports: Submit preliminary test results for the Engineers approval at least three
weeks prior to the beginning of the work. In addition to the test reports specified under
Quality Control, submit the following directly to the Engineer:
1. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6).
2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88).
3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641).
4. Air Entrainment Test Reports (ASTM C260).


A. In compliance with Document I and II submit proposed name of independent Testing Agency
for the approval of the Engineer. Employ at no extra cost to the owner the approved
Testing Agency to perform all tests and submit reports specified in this section. Approval
may be withdrawn at the discretion of the Engineer and an alternative Testing Agency
approved.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Preliminary Tests (Trial Tests)
1. Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the required minimum
cement content and mean strength greater than the required characteristic strength by
at least the current margin. The current margin shall be taken as the lesser of:
a. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches
of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced
over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar
supervision, but not less than one sixth (1/6) of the characteristic strength for
concrete of grade 140 or not less than 37.50 kg/cm2 for concrete of grade 200
or above.
b. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches
of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced
over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant
under similar supervision, but not less than one third (1/3) of the characteristic
strength for concrete of grade 140 or not less than 75 kg/cm2 for concrete of
grade 200 or above.
If enough data is not available to satisfy the requirements of either (a) or (b) above
mentioned, the margin shall be taken as two-thirds (2/3) of the characteristic strength
for concrete of grade 140 or 100 kg/cm2 for concrete of grade 200 or above. When
required characteristic strength approaches maximum possible strength of concrete a
smaller margin but not less than 75 kg/cm2 shall be permitted. Evidence shall be
submitted to the Engineer for each grade of concrete showing that at the intended
workability, the proposed mixed proportions and manufacturing method will produce
concrete of required quality. Declare any change in source of material and any
change in cement content, nature and source of each material, full details of tests on
trial mixes, proposed quantities of each ingredient per cubic metre of fully compacted
concrete.
2. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, unless specified
otherwise, make preliminary tests and prepare design mixes, in accordance with
ACI-301, Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.8, Method 1 or Method 2, in a design laboratory
acceptable to the Engineer.
3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make one test
for each design mix to verify that the total Chloride (Cl) ion content and the total
Sulphate (SO3) content of each mix is within the specified limits. Perform Chloride
tests in accordance with Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride
Ion in Concrete as contained in Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration. Perform Sulfate
(SO3) tests in accordance with ASTM C114.
4. Trial Mixes
a. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three separate batches of
concrete shall be made using materials likely to be typical of the proposed
supply and preferably under full scale production conditions.
b. Sampling and testing shall be strictly in accordance with B.S.1881. The
workability of each batch of concrete shall be determined and three (3) cubes
made from each batch of concrete for test at 28 days. A further three (3) cubes
from each batch shall be made for test at earlier age. The trial mix proportions
shall be approved by the Engineer if the average strength of nine (9) cubes
tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the
appropriate margin or if nine (9) cubes tested at an earlier age indicate that it is
likely to be exceeded by this amount. The appropriate margin is the margin as
given in Clause 1.05.B.1 herein for concrete of nominally similar proportions and
of similar materials to the trial mix. For this purpose if the trial mix does not
differ by more than 30 kg/m3 of cement from a reference mix of similar
workability, then the proportions may be regarded as nominally similar and the
current margin for the reference mix can be taken as the appropriate margin for
the trial mix. If trial mixes are required to demonstrate that the maximum free
water/cement ratio is not exceeded, two batches shall be made in a laboratory
with cement and saturated sand surface dry aggregate known from past records
of the suppliers of the materials to be typical. The proposed mix proportions
shall be accepted only if both batches have the correct cement content and free
water/cement ratio below the maximum specified value at the proposed degree
of workability.
New Jahra Hospital
5. Have a representative present when the preliminary tests are made. Whenever a
change of brand or source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs, additional
preliminary tests will be required and the cost of these additional tests shall also be
borne by the Contractor.

C. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection
1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests at the plant and in the
field. Notify the Engineer one day in advance of concrete work. Inspection, field
tests and sampling of concrete taken from the job will be carried out under the
direction of the Engineer. Likewise the conducting of tests carried out by the
Contractor shall be under the direction of the Engineer.
2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with BS 5328. BS 5328 requires that tests
are made on the constituent materials in accordance with the relevant British
Standard, (refer to Part 2 of this Section), and that control tests are made on concrete
to ensure compliance with the specified requirements.
3. When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified in BS
5328, ie.:
a. characteristic compressive strength;
b. specified mix proportions;
c. minimum or maximum cement content;
d. maximum free-water/cement ratio;
e. workability;
f. air content of concrete;
g. temperature of fresh concrete;
h. density of fully compacted concrete.
4. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or as directed by the Engineer.
The cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
5. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labour and material as required. Notify the
Engineer when reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any inspection he
deems necessary. Submit checking sheets before placing concrete. Do not place
concrete until these inspections have been completed and all deficiencies reported by
the Engineer have been corrected to the Engineers satisfaction.
6.. Supply all moulds required for tests as described below, using moulds of the same
type and manufacture for making all test specimens. If field tests show excessive
slumps or other violations of the Contract Documents, the entire batch of concrete
from which the sample in question was taken will be rejected and shall be removed
from the site at the Contractors expense. The Engineer will inspect all concrete
operations in the plant and in the field.
7. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be
accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to checking by the Engineer at
the plant and which shall contain the following information:
a. The strength of the mix of concrete being delivered.
b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the delivery
truck. If upon reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed within the time
limits stated, or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, the Engineer will
reject the load and it shall be removed from the site at the Contractors expense.
c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.
8. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens
of each class of concrete from different locations on the job as follows:
a. At least twelve (12) specimens for each 40 cubic metres or fraction thereof of
each class of concrete and in any case not less than twelve (12) specimens for
any one days operations.
b. Test specimens will be taken at pouring locations to give a fair average of the
concrete in the part of the construction indicated.
c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with B.S.1881.
d. At least two slump tests: ASTM C143.
e. Testing shall conform to B.S. 1881 in making, curing and subsequently handling
test specimens, except as modified herein. Cubes shall be engraved with the
date of placing and the serial number of the cubes (1 to 12) plus a universal
serial number representing the number of the pour.
New Jahra Hospital
f. The cubes shall be placed in laboratory storage on Site under moist curing
conditions at approximately 21`C within 24 hours after moulding and maintained
therein until ready for testing at the Site Laboratory. Three cube specimens will
be tested at seven days, and if the seven day strength is deficient, the
Contractor will be notified. Three cubes will then be tested at 14 days, three
cubes at 28 days, and the remaining 3 cubes will be tested as directed by the
Engineer having been cured with curing compound for 28 days.
g. Two unit weight and yield tests: ASTM C138.
9. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens
of each class of concrete, and an independent Testing Agency, approved by the
Engineer will perform one test for each 100 cubic metres to verify that the total
Chloride ion content and the total Sulphate content are each within the specified limits.
As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in no event more than 24 hours after
placement, the Testing Agency will perform tests in accordance with the procedures
herein specified under Paragraph 1.05.B.3.
10. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a proforma approved by
the Engineer. Such records shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer.

D. Change of Current Margin: When the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show
that the previously established margin has significantly varied, a change in the current margin
used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic strength may be appropriate.
Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out as before, but the adoption of recalculated
value will not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18% when based on
tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on tests on 100 separate
batches, or less than 5% when based on tests on 500 separate batches. This recalculated
margin if adopted becomes the current margin for the judgment of compliance with the
specified characteristic strength of concrete.

E. Testing Plan:
1. Each 3 cubes shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly selected
batch of concrete. The sample shall be taken from the point of discharge from the
delivery vehicle. The characteristic strength of concrete shall comply with the
following requirements:
a. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive sets of test
cubes exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.3 times
the current margin.
b. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified strength.
The current margin shall be taken as given in Paragraph 1.04.A. If only one
cube result fails to meet the second requirement mentioned above, that result
may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which
that cube was taken, provided the average strength of the group satisfied the
first requirement. If more than one cube fails to meet the second requirement
or if the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fail to
meet the second requirement, then all the concrete in all the batches
represented by all such cubes shall be deemed not to comply with the strength
requirements.
2. Enforcement: When the average strength of four consecutive test cubes fail to meet
the first requirement mentioned in the testing plan, the mix proportions of subsequent
batches of concrete shall be modified to increase the strength. The Engineer shall
decide as to what action may be taken for test cubes that fail to meet the requirements
mentioned. In estimating the quality of the sub-standard concrete and in determining
the action to be taken the following shall be considered:
a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen sampling and testing
have been carried out in accordance with B.S. 1881. Concrete shall be judged
by the strength of specified characteristic strength, together with the cement
content, in comparison with the specified minimum cement content.
b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under investigation.
c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test cubes.
d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the strength and
durability of this section of structure.
New Jahra Hospital
The Engineer may require tests to be carried out on the hardened concrete in the
structure, apart from other tests mentioned in the Contract Documents. The cost of
all such tests and making good will be borne by the Contractor irrespective of the test
results. Where tests show that concrete is below specified strength, remove all, or a
part of, the concrete in all of the batches deemed not to comply with the strength
requirement as directed by the Engineer. Full cost of removal of low strength
concrete and its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength shall be borne
by the Contractor, without any additional cost to the Employer.
3. Strength: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by
tests made on cubes at an age of 28 days. Not more than 5% of the cube test
results shall be allowed to fall below the characteristic strength of concrete.

F. Lightweight Concrete
1. Mix Design: Design lightweight insulating concrete mix to produce the following
physical properties taking into consideration the actual site conditions (i.e. location,
temperature, pumping heights, etc.):
a. Oven-Dry Density: 600 - 700 Kg/m3.
b. Minimum Compressive Strength: 25 Kg/cm2.
c. Use minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
d. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by the relevant standard
and/or aggregate manufacturer.
2. Testing: Minimum of 5 Nos. samples of the proposed mix design are to be prepared
and tested in accordance with ASTM C495 for approval by the Engineer prior to
proceeding with the work. The minimum oven-dry density of all the samples shall not
be less than 600 Kg/m3 and the maximum density shall not be more than 700 Kg/m3.
The minimum compressive strength of all samples shall not be less than 25 kg/cm2.

G. Product Handling:
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.

H. Environmental Conditions:
1. Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 STANDARDS. (ACI 105).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. The products and manufacturers specified herein are specified for the purpose of

B. Cement
1. Alkali Content For All Types of Cement: Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide
(Na2O) (ASTM C227).
2. Ordinary Cement: B.S.12 or ASTM C150, Type I or K.S.S.36, non-staining.
3. Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement: B.S.4027 or ASTM C150, Type V.
4. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used as directed by the Engineer in all work below
the ground floor level which is in contact with soil or waterproofing or protection board
or vapour barrier.
5. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to the Engineer
and shall be delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall be used for
each type of cement. When received at the batch plant, all bags shall be intact and
cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed to moisture or wetting of any kind
during shipment or storage shall not be used on the job.
6. Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
7. All cement stored at site shall be kept thoroughly dry and shall be stored in water tight
sheds on a floor raised at least 200mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have
labels indicating dates of manufacture and arrival at the storage site. A maximum of
fifteen bags shall be stacked if the storage period is not more than four weeks and
eight bags if the storage period is over four weeks but not more than three months.
Any cement stored for more than three months shall not be used without the explicit
written permission of the Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital

8. When tests performed on field samples, subsequent to the original approval tests,
show that the cement does not comply with the Specifications, the entire consignment
from which the sample was taken shall be rejected. Rejected cement shall not be
permitted in storage areas or on the Site and shall be removed within twenty four
hours.
9. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to sun. Cement temperature shall
not exceed 50 C.
10. All Type V Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content not exceeding five percent
(5%).

C. Aggregate
1. In general, aggregate shall comply with B.S. 882, Concrete Aggregates from Natural
Sources, or ASTM C33, and shall be graded in accordance with these requirements,
irrespective of whether concrete is mixed on site or elsewhere. The contractor shall
nominate the source of supply and shall provide grading curves of aggregate for
approval.
2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone, crushed
rock or gravel. Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of coarse
aggregate gradation shall be used. Each aggregate type shall be from a single
consistent source.
3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has good
drainage. Stockpiles shall have walls separating adjacent materials and shall be
covered to preclude segregation or intrusion of foreign materials and to preserve the
gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to assure placement of concrete at
the necessary rate. Use properly constructed sheds to protect aggregates from
direct sun radiation and from blowing sands.
4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and dust and
when directed by the Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to remove deleterious
substances.
5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal, mica,
shale or similar particles which may reduce the strength or durability of the concrete.
Aggregates shall not contain any material that may be chemically active with
reinforcement or that may react to cause efflorescence or that may be alkali reactive.
6. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as Dolomitic shall not be used.
7. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources of supply
shall be determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests shall be reported
to the Engineer and shall be used to check whether the gradings are similar to those of
the samples used in the establishment of batch weight used.
8. Suppliers certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source of
aggregate.
9. Aggregate for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for colour as
approved by the Engineer and shall come from a single source.
10. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less than the following
maximum salt contents as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The table also
shows the maximum salt content allowed in the mixed concrete.

Aggregates for coloured concrete must be approved by the Engineer prior to use.

Chlorides Sulphate

Percent of weight of
fine aggregate 0.06
Percent of weight of
course aggregate 0.03
Total percent in concrete as
percent by weight of cement 0.1 (OPC)
0.2 (SRPC)

0.4

0.4

4.0

New Jahra Hospital
11. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed gravel sand and shall comply
with ASTM C33 or BS 882 Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources having hard
and durable particles or other inert materials having similar characteristics conforming
to the following requirements:
a. Fineness Modulus: 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C125.
b. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in establishing
mix proportions. If greater deviation, the use of such aggregates shall be
discontinued until suitable adjustments in mix proportions can be made and
reviewed.
c. Magnesium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
d. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C289.
e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of Sieve Opening
(Square Openings)
Percentage by Weight
Passing - ASTM C33, C117

3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
No. 4 (4.75 mm)
No. 8 (2.36 mm)
No. 16 (1.18 mm)
No. 30 (0.60 mm)
No. 50 (0.30 mm)
No. 100 (0.15 mm)
No. 200 (0.075 mm)

100
95-100
80-100
50-85
25-60
15-30
3-10
0-5

Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon
submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.
g. Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and other foreign
matter.
12. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone. The
crushing shall be regulated so that the material retained on the No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve,
at least 90 percent by weight shall consist of pieces with at least one fractured face
and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist of material with at least two fractured
faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
a. Magnesium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 5% loss. ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
b. Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289.
c. Abrasion: Max. 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 revolutions.
d. Flat and Elongated Particles: 3:1 max. 30% ASTM C125 5:1 max. 10%.
e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 0.5% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Shale: Max. 2% by weight.
g. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min. 2.58 ASTM C125.
h. Gradation requirements as follows:

Size of Sieve Opening
(Square Opening)
Percentage by Weight
Passing ASTM C33

2 inch (50.0 mm)
1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm)
1 inch (25.4 mm)
inch (19.0 mm)
inch (12.7 mm)
3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
No. 4 (4.75 mm)
No. 8 (2.36 mm)

1inch 1 inch inch
(37.5mm) (25.4mm) (19.0mm)
Size Size Size
100 - -
95-100 100 -
60-85 95-100 100
35-70 60-85 95-100
20-50 25-60 60-75
10-30 15-45 20-55
0-5 0-10 0-10
- 0-5 0-6

Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon
submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital
i. The maximum size of aggregates shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) for columns, walls
and basement slabs, and inch (19.0 mm) for slabs and beams. In addition, the
maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 20 percent of the narrowest member
that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75 percent of the clear spacing
between adjacent steel reinforcement or between reinforcement and adjacent
formwork.
13. Lightweight Aggregates for insulating concrete shall comply with ASTM C332.

D. Water
1. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean, fresh and free
of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or
organic matter. Water shall be filtered to remove any colour or residues present due
to contamination from water piping or transportation or storage methods.
2. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328.
3. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.

E. Admixtures
1. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be incorporated in the
concrete only with the prior written approval of the Engineer:
a. Water reducing set retarders.
b. Set retarders.
c. Water reducing agents.
d. Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.
2. The Engineer shall be advised in advance of the following data:
a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.
b. Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.
c. Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at
manufacturers recommended dosage.
d. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the cement,
nitrates, calcium chloride, sulphides and sulphates shall not be used.
e. Admixtures submitted for Engineers approval shall be certified in writing by the
manufacturer to be in compliance with B.S. 5075 OR ASTM C494.
f. Air-entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with ASTM C260
or B.S. 5075 : PART (2).
g. The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above mentioned
standards must be to the approval of the Engineer. All admixtures must be
mutually compatible.
h. Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufacturers whose
products have previously been used successfully in Kuwait or on other
international projects in countries having similar climate to Kuwait.
i. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions and recommendations and shall be certified by the manufacturer to
be suitable for use during hot weather extremes. Admixtures shall be stored
safe from adverse temperatures in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions or recommendations.
j. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the Engineer,
shall be verified by trial mixes with the cements, aggregates and other materials
to be used in the works before final approval is given.
k. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of admixture he proposes to use.
l. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufacturers
recommended dispensers - no adding of admixture by hand is allowed.
m. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled sources
of individual components such that the total mix meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Unless specified otherwise, the total Chloride (Cl) ion
content in the entire mix shall not exceed 0.20 percent of the weight of cement
when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC is used. The total
water-soluble Sulfate (S03) content in the entire mix shall not exceed 4 percent
SO3 of the weight of cement in the mix. The total Calcium Chloride (Ca Cl2)
content in the total mix shall not exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.
New Jahra Hospital
n. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na2O equivalent shall not exceed
3 Kg/m3. All sources of alkali shall be taken into account for calculating the
total alkali content. In particular the contribution of Sodium Chloride whether
from aggregate or from mixing water must be included.

F. Reinforcement
1. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with BS 4449 type 2 deformation
having a characteristic strength (fy) not less than 4200 kg/cm2 (420 N/mm2) or
complying with ASTM A615 grade 60 steel. Dowels projecting from typical flow beams
to be rebent into concrete topping shall be Grade 40 (ASTM) Grade 50 (BS) hot rolled
mild steel having a characteristic strength (fy) not less than 2500 kg/cm2.
2. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall conform to BS 4483 OR to ASTM A185.
3. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with BS 4466.
4. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the
temperature of the steel is below 5`C, special precautions may be necessary such as
reducing the speed of bending or, with the Engineers approval, increasing the radius
of bending.
5. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be
taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in BS 4466.
6. Where it is necessary to reshape mild steel bars previously bent, this should only be
done with the Engineers approval and each bar should be inspected for signs of
fracture.
7. No welding of reinforcement shall be carried out without the Engineers approval.
Welding shall be in compliance with ACI 318 or BS 8110.
8. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting,
transporting, storing and placing at the Site.
9. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar bending
schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar number as shown
on the relevant Bar Bending Schedule.

G. Bar Supports
1. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the Engineer
for support of the bottom layer of reinforcing in the raft foundation slab only. The
blocks shall be of minimum size and made from cement sand small aggregate mix to
match surrounding concrete strength, appearance and durability.
2. Other support devices and spacers shall be of such materials and of adequate
strength and approved design as to be durable and so as to prevent displacement and
corrosion of reinforcing steel and prevent discoloration and spalling of concrete cover.
The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following:
a. High density plastic.
b. Hot-dipped galvanised bar supports with plastic feet.
c. Stainless steel.
3. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of a type to suit the various
conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting a 140 Kg (1.37 KN)
concentrated load without measurable permanent deformation of the reinforcement or
indentation of the supporting surface.

H. Testing of Reinforcement Steel
1. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be carried
out in strict accordance with the provisions of the above British Standards. (BS 4449,
4757 and 4483).
2. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain
curve will be required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also
be required of cross-sectional area and deformation/bond characteristics of deformed
bars.
3. The Contractor is to allow for four tensile and four bond tests, at his own cost, for each
size of bar to be used in the concrete construction.
4. One set of test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3)
weeks before concrete work commences on Site. Remaining tests will be carried out
at the discretion of the Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital
5. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes in
which case the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When any
test results do not conform to the above standard the reinforcement steel shall be
removed from the Site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial work shall
be borne by the Contractor.

I. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum 0.15 mm thick of approved manufacturer in
accordance with ASTM E96 and E154.

J. Curing Materials:
1. Liquid Membrane Compound: AASHTO M148 OR ASTM C309, Type 1-D with
fugitive dye and Type 2; formulated to disintegrate after 28 days, and guaranteed not
to affect the bond of applied finishes.
2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 0.25MM thick, opaque black.
3. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, opaque.
4. Burlap: AASHTO M182.
5. Water: B.S. 5328 and B.S.3148.
6. Methods for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance
with ASTM C156.
7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of curing compound he proposes to use.

K. Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Section 079000, Joint Protection for expansion joint
fillers.

L. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200, Joint Sealants for joint sealants.

M. Formwork:
1. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use Exterior Type Douglas Fir plywood,
complying with BS 1204 Part 1(4) type BR, minimum 19 mm thick. Before reusing
forms, withdraw nails and thoroughly clean surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
2. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use special exterior Type Douglas Fir,
complying with BS 1204 Part 1 (4) type to BP, minimum 19 mm thick OR high density
(60-60) overlay plyform, Class 1 EXT-APA, sanded grade trade marked by the
Engineered Wood Association having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre overlay on both
sides, minimum 19mm thick and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight,
smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges, or depressions. Keep joints between
plywood sections to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed so that adjoining
edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not be permitted. Cover
joints on exposed surfaces with smooth-faced fibre reinforced tape as approved by
the Engineer.
3. Location of joints must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
4. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the
manufacturers printed instructions and recommendations are followed and the system
has been approved by the Engineer. Joints between sections of prefabricated forms
shall be taped unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and provided
always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and mortar-tight to
the Engineers satisfaction.

N. Form Coating: Form wax of a type which does not import any stain to concrete nor
interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, waterproofing material applied to any
concrete surface and must be approved by the Engineer.

O. Form Ties: For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work, use tie
screws with removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or
Series 300 stainless steel snap ties. For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used.
Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is closer than 40 mm from the
finished concrete surface.

New Jahra Hospital
P. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Non-Metallic: One of the following:
a. Sono Grout (Sonneborn - Contech).
b. Five Star Grout (U.S. Grout Corp.).
c. Masterflow 713 (Master Builders Company).
d. Euco NS (The Euclid Chemical Company).
e. The Quikrete Companies, Atlanta GA30305, U.S.A.

Q. Hardware and Sealer: Refer Section 033500 "Concrete Finishes".

2.02 MIXES

A. Proportioning of Concrete
1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, OR BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4. Assume full
responsibility for the strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of
concrete. Cement, fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be
measured by weight.
2. Water/Cement Ratio: Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4, OR ACI 301,
Chapter 3, Para. 3.8, Method 1 or 2. The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete
shall not exceed the specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value. If a
maximum water/cement ratio has been determined the ability to comply with that
requirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes.
Maximum water/cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by
the Engineer.
3. Cement Content: The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than
the specified minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified
maximum value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may be determined from
samples representative of any batch of concrete provided suitable test is
used to measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of + 5% of the
actual value with a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of
BS 8110 :
Part 1 : 1985 gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of
aggregate in a Portland cement concrete, to provide acceptable durability under
appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced minimum cement contents shall
only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with a maximum free
water/cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular condition can be
consistently produced and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting.
The Engineer shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix design.
4. Requirements for Fresh Concrete: Workability of concrete shall be such that the
concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction
it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. Workability shall be
assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An acceptable value
for the mean slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with the Engineer and a
value of 65 mm can be taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of
concrete for these tests:

Slump 25mm or CF

.03 where required value is
0.9 or more.

.04 where the required value is
less than 0.9 but more than 0.8.

.05 where required value is 0.8
or less.

New Jahra Hospital
The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights
of aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for a moisture content typical of the
aggregates being used. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within
3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregates being measured and within
5% of the quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring equipment shall be
maintained in a clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the
requirements of B.S. 1305 or B.S. 4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall be
not less than that used by the manufacturer in assessing the mixer performance.
5. Adjustment to Mix Proportions: During production adjust-ments of mix proportions
will be made in order to minimise the variability of strength and to approach more
closely the target mean strength as approved by the Engineer. Such adjustments are
regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified limits of
minimum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained.
Such adjustments to mix proportions shall not be taken to imply any change to the
current margin.

B. Classes of Concrete
1. Schedule of Concrete Types

CHARACTERISTIC CUBE
STRENGTH (28 DAYS)

TYPE AND USE

16N/mm

16N/mm

40N/mm

40N/mm

50N/mm

50N/mm

50N/mm

60N/mm

50N/mm

25 kg/cm (700 kg/m)

Blinding Concrete

Protective Screed

Plain concrete in steps general
filling and toppings.

Cast-in-place reinforced concrete
in raft foundations, foundations,
slabs and beams.

Precast Structural Concrete

Prestressed precast structural
concrete

Precast architectural concrete.

Cast-in-place reinforced concrete
in column and walls.

All other structural elements unless
otherwise noted.

Light Weight Concrete

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK

A. General
1. The responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest
entirely with the Contractor. Coordinate the work of all other trades affecting or
affected by work of this Section.
2. Except when they are varied by the requirements of these Specifications, the
requirements of the British Standard BS 8110 Section 6 shall form a binding part of
these Specifications.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Give 24 hours minimum notice to the Engineer as to when formwork will be ready for
inspection and allow sufficient time for inspection and adjustment.
4. Any work showing signs of damage through premature loading shall be demolished
and reconstructed at the Contractors expense.

B. Workmanship
1. Reference shall be made to BS 5975 and appendix C of the Concrete Society
Technical Report No. 13, Formwork and the CIRIA Data Sheet Concrete Pressure on
Formwork.
2. Except for areas having suspended false ceiling within the project, most of the
structure is either exposed or receiving applied finish. Tolerances specified under
this part are more stringent than those specified in BS 5606 or ACI 301.
3. Provide cambers as specified on drawings.
4. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true, water and mortar tight, sufficiently rigid
and strong to prevent sagging between supports and to maintain true position and
shape during and after placing of concrete without bowing and distortion.
5. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and
other defects.
6. Only workmen experienced in formwork shall be used for this work.
7. Supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight and
other loads including formwork, reinforcement, wet concrete, construction and wind
loads together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by placing vibrating and
compacting of concrete.
8. Deflection: The maximum permissible deflection under all loads shall not exceed 2
mm or 1/600 of the free span, whichever is less.
9. Forms for beams and girders shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side
without shock to the partially set concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion of
the forms or its supports.
10. Prefabricated formwork shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions and approved shop drawings.
11. Provide 15 x 15 mm wrought hardwood fillet or other suitable material in the angles of
the formwork as shown on Drawings or as required by the Engineer to provide
chamfers in columns and beams and walls.
12. Anchor bolts, plates, sleeves, pipes, inserts, fixtures, electrical boxes, reinforcing steel,
duct openings, conduits, etc., shall be installed as per Drawings. Ample time shall be
allowed for the proper installation of such items. All steel items (other than
reinforcement) embedded in concrete shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
13. Form Cleaning: All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete
and suitable temporary openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials
from the interior without disturbing the whole formwork. All surfaces in contact with
concrete shall be wetted or treated with an approved form releasing agent before
placing of reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old concrete
or other deposit before re-use.
14. During concreting, formwork and supports shall be inspected by experienced
workmen and any portion showing signs of sagging or displacement shall be rectified.
15. All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. This approval,
however, does not relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and responsibilities
under the Contract.
16. The Contractor must allow in his Tender for cost of testing the type of form releasing
agent he proposes to use.

3.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with B.S. 4449; B.S. 4461; B.S. 4482; B.S. 4483 OR ACI 301, Chapter 5,
Paragraph 5.1, and ASTM A775.

B. Fixing
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, Para. 7.3 OR ACI Standard 301, Chapter 5, Para. 5.5.
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement outside the specified limits
unless specified otherwise:
New Jahra Hospital
a. Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a
straight bar in a slab) the actual concrete cover shall not be more than the
required cover shown on the Drawings plus:
(i) 5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.
(ii) 10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm size.
(iii) 15mm on bars over 25mm size.
2. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on Shop Drawings, together with such other
supports as may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its
correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links,
spacers between the links and formwork shall be of the same dimension as the
nominal cover.
3. Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with
steel wire or tying devices. Care should be taken to ensure that the projection ends
of ties or clips do not encroach into the concrete cover.
4. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting,
particular attention being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever
sections. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after the placement of the
reinforcement the Engineer may require the Contractor to restore the reinforcement to
a satisfactory condition and may require protection of same from further corrosion.
5. Surface Condition of Reinforcement: Concrete shall not be placed unless
reinforcement is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose rust, loose mill scale, grease
or any other substance. Badly rusted or pitted reinforcement will be rejected.
Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning steel bars.
6. All reinforcement shall be stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground,
moisture, dust and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper
storage will be sufficient cause for rejection of reinforcement.
7. Laps and Joints of Reinforcement: Laps and joints shall only be made by methods
specified and at the positions shown on the Drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.
8. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings, be in conformity with the following:
a. Deformed bars (60 x diameter) 600mm minimum.
b. Fabric (175mm minimum, but overlap measured between
outermost wires of each sheet not less than pitch of
secondary reinforcement wires).
c. Spliced bars are to be securely tied together.
9. Splices to be staggered to the approval of the Engineer and the fabric is to be securely
tied layer to layer.
10. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place
to prevent displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure that the protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings is
obtained by the use of approved plastic tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement and
cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be securely tied together at
every alternate intersection, or as approved by the Engineer.
11. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be
painted with a heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to
continuation of concreting.
12. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the allowable
tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 8110.
13. Tie wire shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 16 gauge or approved fasteners,
unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
14. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be reused in the
work.
15. Welding of Reinforcement: Welding on site shall be avoided if possible, but where
suitable safeguards and techniques are employed and provided that the types of steel
(including high yield steel to B.S. 4449 and B.S. 4461) have the required welding
proportions, it may be undertaken. Generally, however, all welding shall be carried
out under controlled conditions in a factory or workshop. The competence of the
operators shall be demonstrated prior to and periodically during the welding
operations.
New Jahra Hospital
16. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in
accordance with B.S. 4466. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially
constant curvature. Where the temperature of the steel is below 5`C, special
precautions may be necessary such as reducing the speed of bending or, with the
Engineers approval, increasing the radius of bending. Where it is necessary to bend
reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be taken to ensure that the radius
of bend is not less than that specified in B.S. 4466. The Engineers written approval
shall be obtained before cutting or heating any reinforcement detailed on the drawings.
All reinforcement bars, coated and uncoated, shall be bent cold unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent,
this shall only be done with the Engineers approval and each bar shall be inspected
for signs of fracture.
17. Reinforcement (particularly grade 410/425) should not be subjected to mechanical
damage or shock loading prior to embedment. It is permissible to bend grade 250
reinforcement projecting from concrete provided that care is taken to ensure that the
radius of bend is not less than that specified in BS 4466. Grade 410/425 bars should
not be rebent or straightened without the Engineers approval.

3.03 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Ready Mixed Concrete
1. Comply with ASTM C94.
2. Add mixing water only at the Site.
3. Discharge the concrete completely at the Site within one hour after the introduction of
the water to the aggregates. In hot weather reduce this time limit so that no stiffening
of the concrete shall occur until after it has been placed.
4. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been
intermingled with the aggregates.

B. Batch Mixing at Site (if permitted by Governmental authority having jurisdiction)
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, OR ACI 301, Chapter 7, Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5.
2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency
will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency which can be readily placed
without segregation.
3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and
dispensing the admixture.

C. Hand Mixed Concrete: This is not permitted.

3.04 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Construction and Control Joints
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12, OR ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph
6.1 and B.S. 5337.
2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept to a
minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and design
consideration. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to locations of
construction joints.
3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be
given to their exact location. The location of construction joints shall be subject to
agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor before any work commences.
Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the member and
shall take due account of shear and other stresses.
4. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of
concrete shall be level and reasonably flat unless design considerations make this
undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the
finished work.
5. Kickers (i.e. a starter stub) shall be at least 150 mm high and carefully constructed and
shall be cast along with the main concrete.
New Jahra Hospital
6. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the
concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall
be roughened to the extent that the largest aggregate is exposed but not disturbed.
Care shall be taken that the joint surface is cleaned immediately before the fresh
concrete is placed against it.
7. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of 1:1
cement-sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial set.
Clean horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar over joints in
walls to a depth of 25 mm before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space
construction joints more than 15 metres apart, unless otherwise shown.
8. Care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint. This
concrete shall be well compacted and vibrated.
9. Control joints for control of thermal cracking should be formed using crack inducers or
waterstops having built-in inducers. Control joints shall be placed in
slabs-on-grades, tanking walls and retaining walls at spacings indicated on structural
drawings. Control joints in concrete topping to PC beams at typical floors and at
other locations in slabs and cast-in-place beams shall be formed in accordance with
the details shown on structural drawings. Fill with joint sealant type (2-PUMS) as
specified in Section 079200 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

B. Embedded Items
1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraphs 6.4 and 6.5.
2. Set anchorage devices by line and transit, and coordinate the locating of all anchorage
devices to be set for the accommodation of the work of other trades.
3. Locate anchor bolts and/or threaded type inserts and bars as shown on the Drawings
and on shop drawings. Obtain necessary templates from the mechanical trades as
required for the setting of anchor bolts and other items for mechanical equipment, as
required.
4. Assist other trades in the installation of piping, pipe sleeves, conduit and similar items
where such items are to be installed in concrete. Provide frames to securely hold
anchor bolts and anchorage devices in place during construction, and take care that
no displacement occurs during the placing of concrete. Under this Section furnish
and set items not furnished by other trades using approved standard type items
suitable for their intended purpose.

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para. 8.1 for preparation before placing and with
BS 8110, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer 24 hours before each
placement so that the forms and reinforcement may be examined. Do not place concrete
until inspection has been made or waived.

B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature below 2C on a rising
thermometer, or at a shade air temperature below 3C on a falling thermometer. When the
shade air temperature is 32C and rising, special precautions shall be taken during concrete
operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cooling of the mixing
water or other methods approved by the Engineer so that the temperature of the concrete
when placed shall not exceed 30C. The temperature of the concrete can be reduced by
cooling the water and the aggregate.

C. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun
to the satisfaction of the Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be mixed and
placed when the shade air temperature is 38C or above.

D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened concrete
and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure reinforcement
sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water and all debris.
Sprinkle with water any semi-porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water shall be
removed from excavation before depositing concrete, such water shall not be allowed to
wash over newly formed concrete.
New Jahra Hospital
E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete shall
be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods which
will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the required
workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without addition of water. Care
shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork and
damage to faces of formwork.

F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing the
forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie tubes only
equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of variable lengths so
that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one metre and a sufficient
number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is approximately level at all times.
Where alternative provisions can be made, which are acceptable to the Engineer, then low
slump concrete can be dropped vertically through greater heights than one metre.

G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means during
the operation of placing and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded
fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids and which will
have required surface finish when formwork is removed. Vibration shall be applied
continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has
practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the
vibrator is not used any closer than 75 mm from the formed surface. Where permanent
precast concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy absorption should be taken
into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be used and the Engineers prior
approval shall be obtained in respect thereof.

H. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall not be
placed in the forms.

I. Concrete topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and brushed
over with a coat of neat cement grout. The topping shall be placed before the grout has
started to set.

J. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on Drawings.

3.06 CURING

A. General
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301, Chapter 12.
2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distortion,
be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage, undue cracking
in the structure. Insulate the concrete so that it is maintained at a suitable temperature
and prevent excessive moisture loss from the concrete. Curing shall be appropriate to
different members and products. Where necessary special care shall be taken to
ensure that similar components are cured under the same conditions.
3. Curing shall be promptly commenced, be total in coverage and continued without
interruption.

B. Curing Methods
1. Ponding with Water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall not be more than
11C (52F) cooler than the concrete and shall be free of substances that may stain or
discolour concrete.
2. Saturated Material: Saturated material shall be held in close contact with concrete
surfaces and maintained in moist condition so that a film of water remains on the
concrete surface throughout the curing period. Saturated materials shall be kept wet
for a minimum of seven days after stripping.
3. Intermittent Spraying with Water: Care shall be taken that newly finished concrete is
not damaged by water erosion. If spraying is done at intervals, concrete surfaces
shall not dry out between applications of water.
New Jahra Hospital
4. Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon as formwork is
loosened water curing shall be applied to sides of columns and walls, and shall
continue uninterupted for a minimum of seven days.
5. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured by flooding. Flat concrete surfaces shall be
covered immediately after concrete is placed, tamped and levelled, with polyethelene
sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial hardening of concrete occurs.
Covering surface shall follow progress of concrete placement until the whole surface is
covered and flooded. Polyethelene sheet may be removed after 24 hours and regular
flooding maintained for a minimum of 7 days.
6. Use special thermometers of sufficient length of stem to monitor the concrete
temperature of the raft foundation slab as soon as concrete is placed to the required
level. Monitor temperature of concrete for 7 days and provide the Engineer with daily
records.
7. Curing Compounds
a. Where there is lack of adequate supplies of clean water, curing membrane
solution shall be applied at the coverage rate recommended by the
manufacturer (two coats, one at right angles to the other), immediately after
placing concrete.
b. Concrete surfaces shall be damp when the coating is applied. Curing
compounds shall not be used if bond is necessary such as in base slab of two
course floor.
c. Conventional curing compounds shall not be used if a special finish is to be
applied. In such cases, special resin solutions that do not affect adhesion of
finishes may be used as approved by the Engineer.

C. Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for all cast-in-place concrete.
At the discretion of the Engineer the curing period may be extended.

3.07 STRIKING OF FORMWORK

A. Comply with BS 8110:85, Section 6, Para. 6.9.3 OR ACI 301, Chapter 4, Para. 4.5.

B. Do not remove forms or supports until the concrete has thoroughly hardened and has
attained sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be
placed thereon, without damage to the structure. Do not disturb forms or supports until the
concrete has attained at least 40% of design strength for side forms and 80% of design
strength for bottom forms. Be responsible for proper form removal and replace any work
damaged due to inadequate maintenance or improper or premature form removal.

C. The following shall be the minimum periods before striking formwork, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer:
1. Vertical formwork to columns,
walls and large beams ... 24 Hours
2. Beam sides ... 24 Hours
3. Beam soffits formwork ... 15 days
4. Props to beams ... 21 days
5. Soffit formwork to slab ... 6 days
6. Props to slab ... 15 days

D. The removal time may be decreased with the Engineers approval where surface temperature
of concrete is 16C and above; refer to Table 6.6, Section 6 of BS 8110, Part 1.

E. Protect the newly placed concrete from high and low temperatures using suitable means of
insulation for the duration of the curing.

F. Care shall be exercised in form removal to prevent chipping of corners and other damage.
Experienced foremen shall supervise form removal.

G. Removal of bottom form linings may be permitted, provided the removal is planned
sequentially so that props are replaced as each lining is removed, and work is carried out
during the presence of Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital
H. No new permanent structure shall be constructed on any part of the erected structure while
the latter is still supported by formwork unless walls are built above another wall carried on a
properly supported base. This requirement does not prohibit the use of props to take the
load of more than one level of framing.

3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Comply with B.S. 5606 OR ASTM E1155, Standard test method for determining floor flatness
and levelness, unless noted117-81, Part 5, unless noted otherwise.

3.09 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Efflorescence, stains, oils, grease or any unsightly accumulation of foreign materials that are
visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished concrete, shall be removed.
Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when irregular lapping can be avoided, only
such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly appearances. No such remedial
action shall be taken without the approval of the Engineer.

3.10 PATCHING

A. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 9.

3.11 FINISHING

A General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic
slabs true and level within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 metres and measured with a 3 metre
straight edge placed in any direction at any location.

B. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding,
and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and
fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of
the disc type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second
troweling after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge of the
trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to a maximum
tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to receive the
following:
1. Hardener and Sealer.

C. Motor Float Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding, and
preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine
material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the
disc type. Leave floors/ roofs with a smooth finish and true to a maximum tolerance of
3mm in 3 metres. Motor float finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:
1. Membrane Waterproofing.

D. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away from
the surface, then screed with straight edges to produce a reasonably true and uniform
surface. Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:
1. Floor beds.

E. Wood Float Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force aggregate away from the
surface, then screed with straight edges to bring surfaces to the required lines. While the
concrete is still green, wood float to a true and uniform plane to a 3mm in 3m tolerance with
no coarse aggregate visible and apply a medium stiff broom finish striated uniformly at right
angles to traffic pattern and in the direction indicated. Apply hardener and sealer to the
following:
1. Driveway, Ramps and Parking.
New Jahra Hospital
F. Fair Face Finish: Interior Exposed Concrete Surfaces of Slab, Beams, Columns and Walls.
Unless otherwise shown, leave a smooth fair face finish, even-textured and free of
blemishes. Repair or replace defective areas, as directed. As soon as the face forms are
removed, remove all fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind where
necessary. Repairing, replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to the Engineers
satisfaction. Patch as specified under paragraph Patching. Refer to architectural
drawings to determine surfaces scheduled to receive paint.

3.12 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

A. Place lightweight concrete in accordance with manufacturers instructions, using equipment
and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air content. Maintain thickness and
slopes as shown on Drawings. Leave top surfaces in acceptable condition to receive
subsequent application.

B. Cure lightweight concrete as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.13 FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE

A. Examine condition of porous fill and remedy any unsatisfactory portions prior to applying
vapour barrier.

B. Cover porous fill with vapour barrier of polyethylene sheeting. Do not lay sheeting until
immediately prior to placing of reinforcing mesh and concrete. Seal seams as recommended
by the manufacturer.

C. Do not place concrete over vapour barrier until all breaks have been patched and sealed.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/033500-1 Concrete Finishes
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 033500

CONCRETE FINISHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete surface preparation and finishes shown on the drawings or
inferable there from and / or as specified in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Vertical surfaces after removal of work.
2. Horizontal surfaces cast-in-place.
3. Non-toxic solvent free high build protective epoxy resin coating (Type EPY-1).
4. Multi-component solvent free epoxy coating (Type EPY-2).
5. Multi-component water based epoxy coating (Type EPY-3).
6. Multi-compound water based epoxy coating (Type EPY-4).

1. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Section 035300 - Concrete Topping

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 304 : Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete.
2. ACI 305 : Hot Weather Concreting.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 156 : Test method for water retention by concrete curing
materials.
2. ASTM C 171 : Specification for sheet materials for curing concrete.
3. ASTM C 309 : Specification for liquid membrane - forming compounds for
curing concrete.

C. British Standards Institute (BSI):
1. BS 12 : Portland Cement.
2. BS 410 : Test Sieves.
3. BS 882 : Aggregate from Natural Sources.
4. BS 1881 : Methods of Testing Concrete.
5. BS 3148 : Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
6. BS 4550 : Methods of Testing Cement.


A. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be
properly selected, reviewed with the Engineers Representative before use and maintained
during shipment, storage and use.

B. Regardless of reviews by the Engineers Representative, the Contractor shall be responsible
for all materials, methods and the work. If any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents,
implement the removal, replacement or remedial work and revise procedures or materials to
prevent recurrence of unacceptable work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Samples: Submit to the Engineers Representative in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Document samples of concrete accessories of every type to be
used.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Mill Tests: Furnish the Engineers Representative with certified mill test reports for cement.

C. Pre-installation meeting: Four weeks prior to pouring of finished concrete slabs, arrange for
an on site pre-installation meeting of the manufacturers of the concrete curing compound,
seal and hardener manufacturer, together with Contractor and Engineers Representative to
finalise application procedure and site conditions.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Flooring finishes shall be executed by trained and qualified
workman. Applicator qualifications/experience should meet the requirements specified in
Document I and Document II.


A. Deliver all packaged materials to the site in original unopened containers clearly indicating
manufacturers name, brand name and other identifying information.

B. Store materials is a dry, well ventilated location, off the ground and in such manner as to
prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. All materials which in the opinion of the
Engineers Representative, have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery
or storage shall be replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Concrete Slab Finish:
1. MBT Middle East
P.O. Box 5558, Sharjah, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-6594922
Fax: 971-6595604
P.O. Box 61347
Dubai United Arab Emirates
Tel: 971-4-8836662
Fax: 971-4-8837696
3. Carlisle Syntec Incorporated
900 Hensley Lane
Wylie, Texas 75098
U.S.A.
Tel: 972-442-6545
Fax: 972-442-0076
4. Polybit
P.O.Box 48539 Sharjah
United Arab Emirates
Tel: 971-6-534007
Fax: 971-6-534967
5. W.R. Meadows of N. CA.
865 Teal Drive
P.O. Box 907
Benicia, CA 94510
(707) 745-6666

New Jahra Hospital
2.02 PRODUCTS

A. Curing Materials:
1. Liquid Membrane Compound: AASHTO M148 or AST C309, Type 1-D with fugitive
dye and Type 2: formulated to disintegrate after 28 days, and guaranteed not to
affect the bond of applied finishes.
2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 0.25mm thick, opaque black.
3. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, Opaque.
4. Burlap: AASHTO M182.
5. Water: B.S. 5328 and B.S. 3148.
6. Methods for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance
with ASTM C156.
7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of curing compound he proposes to use.

B. Concrete Slab Finish:
1. Type EPY-1: Epoxy resin coating:
a. Material : Non-toxic solvent free high build protective epoxy resin
coating.
b. Application : Two coats of 240 microns by a approved manufacturers
applicator. Apply kg sand for every one meter square area.
c. Location : Driveway, Parking Bay, Walkways and Island.
d. Properties : i) Mixed density : 1.6 gm/cm at 25 C
ii) Pot life at : 30 minutes 30 C
iii) Flexural strength : 19 N/mm
iv) Tensile strength : 15 N/mm
v) Slip resistance : 104
2. Type EPY-2: Epoxy coating:
a. Material : Multi-component solvent free epoxy coating for concrete floor.
b. Application : One coat application of 0.5mm thick (500 microns) by
approved Manufacturers applicator. Apply 1 kg of sand for
every one meter square area.
c. Location : Store, mechanical area, shelter, substation, electrical room.
Closet and workshop.
d. Properties : i. Mixed density at 25 C : 1.556
ii. Compressive strength 14 day : 79.4
iii. Flexural strength : 19 N/mm
iv. Tensile strength : 15 N/mm
v. Slip resistance : 104
3. Type EPY-3: Multi-component water based epoxy coating:
a. Material : Multi-component water based epoxy floor coating system.
b. Application : i. Thickness: Single coat of 0.5mm (500 micron) by
approved manufacturers applicator.
c. Properties : i. Abrasion resistance : 110-130
ii. Density : 1.51
d. Location : Staircase, passage and corridor.
4. Type EPY-4: Multi-component water based epoxy coating:
a. Material: Multi-component water based epoxy floor coating system.
b. Application: i. Thickness: Single coat of 0.5mm (500 micron) by
approved manufacturers applicator.
c. Properties: i. Abrasion resistance: 110-130
ii. Density: 1.51
d. Location: Ramp.
5. Dust Proof Coating:
a. Material: Colourless styrene acrylic co-polymer resin in fast drying
solvent.
b. Coating: Minimum of two coats.
c. Location: All areas which are fitting with a raised floor system.
New Jahra Hospital
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Patching and Surfacing Compound:
1. Five Star concrete patch, U.S. Grout Corp.
2. Speed Crete Tamms Industries.
3. Poly-Patch The Euclid Chemical Co.
4. W.R. Meadows, U.S.A.
5. Greenstreak, U.S.A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrate, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the work is to
be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Clean the substrates to remove grease, Latinate and other substances which may adversely
affect the adhesion of the work. Use dilute solution of monistic acid, chipping of the surface,
or any other method of cleaning required including light grit blasting surface grinding like
similar methods. Leave the surfaces thoroughly clean and wet with as much water as it will
absorb.

B. Keep the substrates wet continuously overnight, but in no case for less than 6 hours, before
work is applied.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Curing Compound and Surface Sealer.
1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
2. Spray apply as evenly as possible to the freshly placed concrete.
3. Apply as soon as the initial surface sleeve has disappeared from the concrete
surface.
4. Apply at a rate determined at pre-installation conference basically 4.5 to 5.5 square
meter/litre.

B. Floor Finishes (EPY-1, 2, 3 & 4):
1. Apply primer as per manufacturers recommendation.
2. Apply at the rate specified by the manufacturers recommendation.
3. Do not apply when the humidity exceeds 90%.
4. Apply by roller, trowel or air less spray.

C. Stair platforms, landings and treads without finish covering shall be made non-slip by using
1.2 kg of a fine abrasive aggregate for each square metre of area. Abrasive aggregate shall
consist of a vitreous ceramic grit containing 60% to 70% aluminium oxide abrasive.

3.04 FINISHING

A. General:
1. Consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds or roller screeds.
2. Power float and hand float after water sheen has disappeared to push down
aggregate, raise mortar and level.
3. Power trowel and hand trowel as soon as surface can be worked without cement
base clinging to blades.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Finishes:
1 Hand trowelled.
a. Trowel to class A tolerance free of trowel marks and other defects until a
ringing sound is produced.
b. Moist cure with hardener and sealer.
2. Non-Slip Finishes
a. Float to Class A tolerance and let set.
b. Straight uniformly at right angles to traffic pattern with medium stiff broom
c. Moist cure with hardener and sealer.
3. Colour: As selected by the Engineers Representative.

3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Work may be cured in lieu of moist spraying by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene
sheeting or other approved opaque waterproof covering for at least 7 days after finishing.

B. After curing keep the work covered to protect it from damage during the progress of other
work.

3.06 DUSTPROOFING

A. When the work is cured and dry apply two (2) coats of dustproofer in accordance with
manufacturers instruction.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/034100-1 Plant-Precast Structural Concrete
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 034100

PLANT-PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Structural precast concrete work in accordance with the requirements of
1. Engineering and system design from specialist Subcontractor for prestressed precast
units.


1.02 REFERENCES

A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the standards and codes listed in Clause 1.02
of Section 03300 and also the PCI Manual for Quality Control of Plants and Products of
Precast and Prestressed Concrete Producers. (PCI Manual - 116 (1985).


A. This Specification Section shall govern all structural precast concrete work for the project
except where more stringent or specialised requirements are indicated. All work shall be
performed to secure for the project homogeneous concrete having the required strength,
surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of weakness
or other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offset of
plane and other defacements of concrete. Be fully responsible for any defects or damage in
the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the costs of remedial measures
in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the Contract Documents.

B. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the structural precast concrete construction process
and be responsible for the complete manufacturing process. All methods of manufacture
and practices of handling raw materials and manufactured concrete shall be reviewed by the
Engineers Representative prior to execution of the structural precast concrete work.

D. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be
selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineers Representative before use, and
maintained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and techniques shall
be selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineers Representative before use, and
maintained throughout the complete structural precast concrete construction phase.
Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be
available for all tools and equipment.

E. Be responsible for all materials, methods of structural precast concrete work, and if any work
does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement removal, replacement or remedial work
and revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work at no
additional cost to the Employer.

F. Design computations to indicate the minimum force required; the specified prestressing
losses; the loss of stress due to yield in the anchorage and for slip when the strand is
wedged after tensioning and the final working stress. Forces shown on the Drawings are
effective after all losses have been taken.

G. Provide precast structural concrete units and connection capable of withstanding design
loads within limits.
New Jahra Hospital
1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineers Representative in accordance with
requirements of the Contract Documents, copies of manufacturers specifications and
installation instructions for each item of proprietary material used, showing compliance with
these Specifications.

B. Design Mixes: Submit to the Engineers Representative copies of mix designs with support
material, as described under Paragraph MIX DESIGN.

C. Mill Certificates: Submit to the Engineers Representative copies of manufacturers
certificate of mill tests of all cement, reinforcing steel, prestressing tendons, bearing pads
and admixtures.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineers Representative in the manner prescribed in the
Contract Documents, layout plans and detailed fabrication and placement drawings for each
structural precast element. The shop drawings are to include the following information:
1. Structural calculations.
2. Size, grade, profile and dimensions of all materials used.
3. Connection and anchorage details.
4. Lifting devices, locations and handling limitations.
5. Steel reinforcement details.
6. Tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons in horizontal plane at all points.
Detail horizontal curvatures of tendons at block-outs and anchorages.
7. Tendon profiles showing any required placement support devices. Show clearly the
location of each tendon and the method of tendon support.
8. Provide structural calculations and written descriptions of procedures covering the
following items:
a. Jacking force and jacking pressure.
b. Maximum temporary jacking force and jacking pressure.
c. Certified jack calibrations and method of identification. Submit certificates of
calibration from an acceptable testing laboratory to the Engineers
Representative for all jacks used.
d. Sequence of tendon jacking for each different tendon layout.
e. Method of determining tendon slack, if any.
f. Method of determining anchor force, or force remaining in tendons after
anchorage is complete.
g. Method of sealing tendons.
9. Identification marks.

E. Erection Procedures: Submit to the Engineers Representative a detailed outline of sequence
and methods of erection.

F. Test Reports: Submit to the Engineers Representative copies of all testing and inspection
reports required under Paragraph TESTING.

G. Calculations: Submit to the Engineers Representative detailed calculations as requested or
required to substantiate proposed framing elements and connections.

H. Pretensioning tendon placement shall be reviewed by the Engineers Representative after it is
placed within the forms and concrete pours shall not be made until acceptance of the
placement of said pretensioning tendons. Sufficient notice, minimum three (3) days, shall be
given by the Contractor prior to concrete pours to allow for the review of the work.

J. A record shall be kept for every piece of precast element produced showing the following:
1. Type and No.
2. Date of pour.
3. Concrete test results.
4. Ref. Shop drawing No.
5. Type and duration of curing.
6. Date of delivery to site.
7. Date of fixing in position.
New Jahra Hospital
K. Samples:
1. Submit sample for each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast
structural concrete units.
2. Samples of bearing pads.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The specialist Contractors and their Supervisory personnel
engaged in the work of this section must have successful experience with work comparable
to that shown and specified including organized quality control and testing procedures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Structural precast concrete work shall be executed by a specialist
Sub-Contractor with minimum five (5) years experience unless the Contractor can satisfy the
Engineers Representative that he (the Contractor) has sufficient experience and expertise in
this field to execute this work himself in which case his tradesmen and their supervisory
personnel engaged in such work must have successful experience with work comparable to
that shown and specified including organized quality control and testing procedures.

C. Testing:
1. Concrete shall be tested. Refer to Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Clause
1.06 Quality Control for testing requirements.
2. Conduct load tests in accordance with ACI 318 before erection and also after
erection and casting of topping slab to substantiate the performance characteristics
of structural precast elements so designated by the Engineers Representative.
a. Review itinerary with the Engineers Representative prior to testing.
b. Provide calibrated instrumentation for measuring and recording loads,
deflections, stresses and strains.
3. The Engineers Representative will evaluate the adequacy of the Contractors quality
control. In addition to the requirements hereinafter specified under Paragraph MIX
DESIGN, the Contractor shall:
a. Furnish labour required to facilitate testing.
b. Inform the Engineers Representative with at least one days advance notice
when concrete is to be placed.
c. Provide storage facilities for concrete test cubes.
d. Provide material samples and access to materials as required for testing.
4. Be responsible for the expense of testing or inspection resulting as a consequence
to the following:
a. Work not in compliance with this Specification.
b. Additional testing such as additional cubes for early breaks, etc., for
construction purposes.
c. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, without
proper supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice.
d. Providing additional tests as specified in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
5. The Engineers Representative may station a qualified inspector at the batch plant
during the entire time of batching, and shall test, inspect, and report on the following:
a. The batching equipment and procedures.
b. The conformance of the materials (cement, aggregates, water and
admixtures) to the approved materials.
c. The proportioning of the concrete.
d. Mix transport equipment.
e. The Contractor shall supply office space, acceptable to the Engineers
Representative, for exclusive use by the Inspector.
6. The Engineers Representative will station a qualified inspector at the casting site to
test, inspect and report on the following:
a. For each forty cu. m. of each different concrete type or portion thereof cast
per day, the following tests will be performed in accordance with the
applicable standards.
(i). Six strength tests using 150 x 150 x 150 mm cubes per B.S. 1881,
made from a mix selected at random. Break 3 cubes at age 7 days
and three cubes at age 28 days. Additional test specimens may be
cast for construction progress control purposes.
New Jahra Hospital
(ii) Two Slump Tests: ASTM C143.
(iii) Two Temperature Tests: Use thermometer calibrated to +/- 0.5%
accuracy. Immerse the thermometer probe into concrete batches
selected at random at time of placement. Stabilized temperature of
concrete shall be less than the specified 30C limit.
b. Check all reinforcing installations to verify conformance with Contract
Documents and approved shop drawings.
c. Check all embedded items to verify conformance with Contract Documents
and approved shop drawings.
d. Check all formwork to verify conformance with Contract Documents and
approved shop drawings.
e. Check all openings and provisions for co-ordination with all trades as shown
on approved shop drawings.
7. All tests specified herein should be carried out by an independent testing agency
selected in accordance with the requirements of Section 031200 Clause 3.03 A.
Comply with B.S. 1881.
8. All welding of steel supports, anchorages, connections and attachments will be
visually inspected and measured by the Engineers Representative.

D. Quality Control:
1. The Contractor shall prepare and provide his quality control programme for structural
precast concrete work with particular attention to details, prechecking processes,
procedures and close supervision.
2. The Contractor shall arrange for the training of his quality control personnel who will
perform quality control of structural precast concrete work. Training shall include but
is not limited to materials, evaluation, special mix design techniques, mix placement,
vibrator selection and use, form-work details, formwork protection and release agent
use, reinforcing steel, inserts and finishing equipment and techniques, corrective
procedures and protection of completed work.
3. The Contractors quality control personnel shall be responsible for verifying all details
necessary to produce the final structural design objectives. The Contractors quality
control personnel shall also verify the quality of the structural precast concrete work
and guide the production of results which will be within acceptable physical
tolerances.

E. Pre-Construction Meeting:
1. Within one week prior to commencement of structural precast concrete work, the
Contractor shall schedule a pre-construction meeting at a mutually agreeable time
with the Engineers Representative and his designated Representatives, to discuss
design, materials, methods of work and forming systems for structural precast
concrete work.
2. Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineers Representative all
pertinent information including written procedural outlines, description of forming
systems, brochures of proposed equipment, sources of all materials and
characteristics of all materials. The above information shall be received by the
Engineers Representative at least 30 days prior to the pre-construction meeting.
3. During the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall present an outline plan for
all concrete work to be accomplished and indicating special procedures relative to
the structural precast concrete work. The outline shall include reviews of sources of
materials, commentary on source, source variations during the course of the work,
storage and use of materials, description of all equipment necessary for batching,
mixing, conveying, placing, forming, reinforcing, compacting, and finishing of
structural precast concrete.

F. Mock-Up: The Contractor shall produce one sample mock-up as directed by the Engineers
Representative. If the first mock-up is not accepted by the Engineers Representative
(visually and/or structurally), the Contractor shall provide further mock-ups until the
Engineers Representatives approval is given.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Transport, store and handle structural precast units in a manner to avoid undue strains, hair
cracks, staining, or other damage. Deliver units from casting site to project site in
accordance with schedule and setting sequence. Store structural precast units clear of the
ground and protected from wind or rain. Cover and protect the units from dust, dirt or other
staining materials.

B. During fabrication, construction and after erection, protect all precast units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Obtain cement, aggregates and water from single source, sufficient to complete the
entire structural precast prestressed concrete work and to assure regularity of appearance
and uniformity of colour. All materials shall meet requirements of Section Cast-In-Place
Concrete.

B. Reinforcing Bars: B.S. 4449 or ASTM A 615, Grade 60 in general and as required. Grade 40
where welding is utilized. When concrete cover, measured from matrix, is less than 19mm,
zinc coat bars in accordance with ASTM A 123.

C. Prestressing Tendons
1. Strand: Strands used in pretensioning tendons shall be 7 wire, 270 ksi, 15.24mm
diameter strands having a nominal cross section of 142mm and specified
characteristic strength of 270 KN. Strands shall conform to ASTM A 416/A, 416M
Specification for Uncoated Seven-Wire Low-Relaxation Strand for Prestressed
Concrete Grade 270, OR to BS 5896 Specification for High Tensile Steel Wire and
Strand.
2. Anchorage: The anchorages of tendons shall develop 100% of the minimum specified
ultimate strength of the prestressing steel.
3. Coating: Unbonded parts of tendons shall have the prestressing steel for that part
permanently protected against corrosion by a properly applied coating of epoxy
material. The coating shall remain ductile and free from cracks and shall not become
fluid over the entire operating or anticipated range of temperatures. The coating shall
be chemically stable and be non-reactive to material used for sheathing. The coating
material shall adhere to and be continuous over the entire tendon length to be
unbonded.
4. Sheathing: The sheathing for unbonded tendons shall have sufficient tensile strength
and water-resistance to resist unrepairable damage and deterioration during transport,
storage and installation. The sheathing shall be continuous over the tendon length to
be unbonded. The sheathing shall prevent the intrusion of cement paste and the
escape of any coating material.

2.02 INSERTS, EMBEDMENTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Proprietary as required for compliance with performance characteristics are as follows:
1. All prestressing steel shall be secured at the ends by acceptable anchoring devices
which shall be of such nature that wires will not kink, break down, or otherwise be
damaged.
2. Anchorage devices shall hold the prestressing steel without slip of more than 3mm at a
load equal to the applied load on the wire at prestressing.
3. Distribution plates shall consist of welded steel or cast steel bearing assemblies that
will permanently support and distribute the load from the anchoring devices as follows:
a. The maximum concentrated bearing stress in the concrete shall not exceed that
permitted by ACI 318.
New Jahra Hospital
b. Bending stresses in the plates induced by the pull of the prestressing steel shall
not exceed 1400 kg/cm for structural steel and 1050 kg/cm for cast steel,
except if acceptable test data indicates that higher stresses are satisfactory. For
high strength steel, correspondingly higher stresses may be permitted.
c. Materials shall meet requirements of ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, or ASTM A
148 for cast steel, or higher quality materials as required to meet stress
requirements.
d. Design, fabrication and erection shall meet the latest AISC Standards, Welding
AWS Standards including Qualification Test of Welders.
e. Bolts and nuts shall be high-tensile steel and shall conform to ASTM A 325.
f. Distribution plates may be omitted, if the bearing area of any anchoring device is
sufficiently large so that the local concentrated bearing compressive stresses do
not exceed the stresses permitted above or cause local failure.

2.03 CONCRETE

A. Comply in all applicable requirements specified in Section Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2.04 MIX DESIGN

A. Prestressed Precast Beams:
1. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mix (mixes) as required to obtain the strength
specified.
a. Compressive Strength: 500 kg/sq.cm (50 N/mm)
Characteristic cube strength at 28 days and 375 kg/sq. cm (37.5 N/mm) at
transfer.
b. Slump: 50 mm +/- 12mm.
c. Air Entertainment: 3% minimum, 5% maximum.

B. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mixes as required to obtain the strength specified.
1. Compressive Strength
a. Structural Precast Concrete
(i) Floor Planks, Lintels and Other Members unless stated otherwise: 400
Kg/cm characteristic cube strength minimum at 28 days and 330
Kg/cm at the time of stripping.

2.05 FORMWORK

A. ACI 347: As required to consistently maintain dimensional and surface finish controls
specified in Paragraph Tolerances. Formed surfaces of the structural precast prestressed
elements are to be at least as smooth, flat and joint free as 19mm plywood formed finish.

2.06 FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Quick drying, non-staining type. Obtain manufacturers supplied solvent for cleaning
prestressing strands and rebars.

2.07 BEARING PADS

A. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M21 plain vinyl carried 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene)
elastomer, moulded to size or cut from a sheet, 50 to 70 Store A durometer, minimum tensile
strength 2250 PSI (15.5 Mpa) as per ASTM D412.

B. Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass-fibre reinforced, bonded to mild steel plate of
type required for in-service stress.

2.08 CONNECTING STEEL

A. ASTM A36
1. Galvanize loose stock for welding after fabrication.
2. Prime with zinc chromate exposed surfaces of embedments and loose stock for
welding.
New Jahra Hospital
2.09 GROUT

A. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-shrink, non-metalic grout.

B. Epoxy Grout: One of the following or other equal and approved.
1. Expocrete GP (Expandite Ltd).
2. Hypol Epoxy Grout (HBM Polymer Products Ltd).
3. Sikadur 42 (Sika Ltd).

C. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement ASTM C150 Type 1 and clean, natural sand ASTM
C144, mix at ratio of 1 part cement 2 parts sand by volume with minimum water required
for placement and hydration.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Formwork: Accurately construct forms, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand
pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for
pretensioning and detensioning operations. Maintain formwork to provide completed
precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication
tolerances.
1. Coat surfaces of forms with bond-breaking compound before reinforcement is
placed. Provide commercial-formula, form-coating compounds that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion. Apply in compliance
with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Unless forms for precast, prestressed concrete units are stripped before
detensioning, design forms so stresses are not induced in precast concrete units
because of deformation or movement of concrete during detensioning.

B. Built-in Anchorages: Accurately position built-in anchorage devices and secure to formwork.
Locate anchorages where they do not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete
placement. Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless approved by Engineers
Representative.

C. Cast-in openings larger than 250 mm in diameter or 250 mm square according to Shop
Drawings. Smaller holes may be field cut by trades requiring them, as approved by

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for
fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that
reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by
formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support
reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
3. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position while placing concrete. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-
tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.
1. Delay detensioning until concrete has reached at least 70 percent of its compressive
strength as established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as
concrete.
2. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to
avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
3. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by
heat-cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced
loading.
New Jahra Hospital
F. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 116 and requirements in this Section. After concrete
batching, no additional water may be added.

G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from
forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 for measuring,
mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating
or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying
with PCI MNL 116.

I. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.

J. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement.

K. Identify pickup points of precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent
markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint casting date on
each precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without
heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and
moisture.

M. Product Tolerances: Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and
shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with
PCI MNL 116 product tolerances.

N. Finish formed surfaces of precast structural concrete as indicated for each type of unit, and
as follows:
1. Standard Finish: Normal plant-run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth
finish to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal color
variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. Major or
unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted.
2. Grade A Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter
with sand-cement paste matching color of precast concrete. Grind smooth form
offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Float-apply a neat cement-paste coating
to exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap to remove loose particles.

O. Screed finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds
to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections.

P. Smooth steel trowel finish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level
with straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish.
1. Apply scratch finish to precast concrete units that will receive concrete topping after
installation. After initial strikeoff, transversely scarify surface to provide ridges
approximately 6 mm deep.

Q. Recess prestressing tendons a minimum of 13 mm, fill recesses with grout, and apply a sack
finish to vertical ends of precast concrete units.

2.11 LONG-SPAN UNITS

A. Type: Plant-fabricated, precast, prestressed concrete long-span units.

B. Furnish units free of voids and honeycombs.

C. Provide standard finish to precast concrete units, unless otherwise indicated.
1. If designed as composite members, broom or rake top finish of precast concrete
units for bonding with concrete floor topping.
2. If used as roof members, provide smooth, float top finish to precast concrete units.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Reinforce units to resist transportation and erection stresses.

E. Include cast-in weld plates where required.

F. Coordinate with other trades for installation of cast-in items.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Employ an independent testing agency to evaluate precast structural concrete fabricator's
quality-control and testing methods.

B. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 116
requirements.

C. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with PCI
MNL 116 requirements, including the following:
1. Units fail to comply with compressive-strength test requirements.
2. Reinforcement and prestressed tendons of units do not comply with fabrication
requirements.
3. Concrete curing and protection of units against extremes in temperature fail to
comply with requirements.
4. Units are damaged during handling and erecting.

D. Testing: If there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or
may not comply with PCI MNL 116 requirements, Owner will employ an independent testing
agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine
compressive strength according to ASTM C 42.
1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength,
from locations directed by Engineers Representative.
2. Cores will be tested, after immersion in water, in a wet condition per ACI 301 if units
will be wet under service conditions.
3. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition per ACI 301 if units will be dry under
service conditions.
4. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if the
average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of the 28-day design
compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the 28-day
design compressive strength.
5. Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are performed, with
copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will
include the following:
a. Project identification name and number.
b. Date when tests were performed.
c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
d. Name of concrete testing agency.
e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit or units
represented by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break;
compressive strength at break, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and
direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as
placed.

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with
requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mix that
has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

F. Dimensional Tolerances: Units with dimensions smaller or larger than required and not
complying with tolerance limits may be subject to additional testing.
1. Precast concrete units with dimensions larger than required will be rejected if the
appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected or if larger dimensions
interfere with other construction. Repair or remove and replace rejected units, as
required, to comply with construction conditions.
New Jahra Hospital
G. Defective Work: Precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including
strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes, are unacceptable. Replace with precast
concrete units that comply with requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMING

A. General: Forms and casting beds are to be seated so as not to deflect or be displaced under
concreting. Correct for thermally induced strains or forces.
1. For member penetrations larger than 150 mm, coring or field cutting is not permitted
unless prearranged with and approved by the Engineer.
2. Clean and coat forms with release agent prior to installation or reinforcing or
embedments.

B. Refer to Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete for materials and other requirements of
formwork.

C. Tolerances: Comply with tolerances outlined in PCI Manual 116, summarized and/or
modified as follows:
1. Dimensions
a. Length : 5mm.
b. Width : 3mm.
c. Thickness : Stem 3mm; flange 2.0mm.
d. Embedment or Penetration Location: +/- 0.20%.
2. Straightness : 3mm.
3. End Squareness : 3mm.

3.02 STEEL PLACEMENT

A. Place mild steel in accordance with placement drawings.

B. Embedments, inserts and lifting devices are to be anchored to resist misplacement during
concreting.

C. Tolerances: Maximum permissible deviation from detailed placement.
1. Mild Steel Reinforcing: Surface clearance +/- 6 mm.
2. Embedments
a. In Plane : +/- 1/200.
b. In Position : +/- 6 mm.

D. See Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete for additional requirements for all reinforcing
bars.

E. Broken strands and strands showing severe fabrication defects shall be removed and
replaced.

F. Unbonded part of tendons shall be coated with rust preventive, lubricating mastic and
enclosed in a sheath that will permit the tendons for that part to return to their natural length.

G. Each tendon shall be marked and clearly identified for its location in the job. Tendons may be
handled mechanically or manually. Care should be exercised in unloading and handling the
tendons. Belt or webbed slings are recommended when tendons are handled mechanically.

H. Tendon placement shall not vary more than 3mm vertically from the points dimensioned.
Tendons may be moved laterally to clear openings and/or sleeves at specific fixed locations
as indicated on shop drawings. Horizontal plane deviations should have radius of curvature
of not less than 6.4m.
New Jahra Hospital
J. Concrete between tendons and openings in slabs shall be at least 150mm. Reinforcing steel
shall be required at corners of all openings.

K. Profiles are maintained by tying tendons to reinforcing steel, clips or other supports with wire
ties. Tendons should be supported at a maximum spacing of 1.2m center to center.

L. When welding or burning near tendons, care should be exercised to prevent tendon from
over-heating, or molten slag coming in contact with the tendon. Grounding of welding
equipment to tendon will not be allowed.

3.03 TENSIONING THE TENDONS

A. Pretensioning: When pretensioning, the tension shall be fully maintained by some positive
means during the period between tensioning and transfer. The transfer of stress shall take
place slowly to minimize shock which will adversely affect the transmission length.
1. Straight Tendons
a. In the long-line method of pretensioning, sufficient locator plates should be
distributed throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the wires or strands
are maintained in their proper position during concreting. Where a number of
units are made in line, they should be free to slide in the direction of their length
and thus permit transfer of the prestressing force to the concrete along the
whole line.
b. In the individual mould system, the moulds should be sufficiently rigid to provide
the reaction to the prestressing force without distortion.
2. Deflected Tendons
a. Where possible, the mechanisms for holding-down or holding-up tendons
should ensure that the part in contact with the tendon is free to move in the line
of the tendon so that frictional losses are nullified. If, however, a system is used
which develops a frictional force, this force should be determined by test and
due allowance has to be made.
b. For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon should have a radius
of not less than five (5) times the tendon diameter for wire or ten (10) times the
tendon diameter for a strand and the total angle of deflection should not exceed
15.
c. The transfer of the prestressing force to the concrete should be affected in
conjunction with the release of hold-down and hold-up forces, so that any
tensile stresses in the concrete resulting during the process do not exceed
permissible limits.

B. All tendons shall be stressed by means of hydraulic jacks, equipped with accurate reading
calibrated hydraulic pressure gauges to permit the stress in the prestressing steel to be
computed at any time. A certified calibrated curve from a recognized testing laboratory shall
accompany each jack. If inconsistencies between the measured elongation and the jack
gauge reading occur, the jack gauges shall immediately be recalibrated.

C. Tendon force measured by gauge pressure must agree within 5% with the tendon force
calculated by elongation measurement.

D. All individual tendon elongations shall be within 5% of that calculated. The total tendon
elongation sum of any structural member or system shall be equal to the average calculated
elongation of all tendons required by the member or system +/- 2%. The Contractor shall be
solely responsible for retensioning of all elements until such criteria is satisfied.

E. In no case shall the steel be tensioned above 80% of the ultimate strength of the strand. The
anchor force shall not exceed 70% of the ultimate strength of the strand.

F. No prestressing tendon shall be cut until reviewed by the Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital
3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

A. Batch, transport, deposit, consolidate and strike off the concrete to produce dense
homogeneous concrete elements.

B. Curing: Comply with B.S. 8110 Section 6.
1. Membrane forming curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to which
topping is to be bonded.
2. Steam Curing:
a. Do not apply steam until concrete undergoes initial set (2 to 4 hours).
b. Heat Gain in Enclosure: Maximum 4C per hour.
c. Maximum Heat in Enclosure: 65C.

3.05 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION

A. Remove the structural precast from the form without damaging and store or place for
transportation on a stable bed that will not allow further distortion of the member. Separate
stacked members with suitable battens and bracings.

B. Coat all exposed metal inserts with rust preventive paint.

C. Mark each member with an identifying reference or piece mark, and the date of casting. All
piece marks are to be correlated with test reports and plan layouts or erection drawings.

D. Transport the structural precast with sufficient battens, bracing, and supports so as not to
overstress by vibration or impact loadings.

3.06 SURFACE TREATMENT AND REPAIR

A. General: Minor cracks and spalls not affecting the structural integrity of the element shall be
patched with epoxy type bonding agents and patching compounds:
1. Cracks and honeycomb, in anchorages, bearings or otherwise critical zones will be
unacceptable unless repair can be affected and substantiating testing performed.
2. Do not attempt any repair without the Engineers knowledge and approval.

3.07 INSTALLATION

A. General: Erection responsibilities include the safe placing, aligning, and levelling of the
structural precast and precast prestressed elements on the accepted bearing surfaces and
affecting their proper securement.

B. Survey: Before placement of structural precast elements, survey the base structure to
confirm line and grade and bearing surface conditions.

C. Guying, Bracing, and Shoring: Install in proper sequence and maintain all temporary
supports shown or required to control alignment, deflection, and stress levels. Retain
temporary supports until framing elements braced thereby have attained integral stability in
accordance with the design.

C. Adjustment and Correction: Compensate and correct for misaligning affect of temperature,
draw from welding, bolting or erection sequence or grouting.

E. Erection Tolerances: Comply with the following erection tolerances:
1. Variations From Plumb: 6mm in any 6m run; 12mm total in any 12m or longer run.
2. Variation From Level or Elevation: 6mm in any 6m run; 12mm in any 12m run; total
12mm at any location.
3. Variation From Position in Plan: +/- 12mm maximum at any location.
4. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members at Any Joint: 1.5mm in any 3m run;
6mm maximum.
New Jahra Hospital
F. Welding: In accordance with AWS recommendations:
1. Do not weld until all adjacent elements to be connected have been aligned, firmly
seated and braced.
2. Spalled or heat damaged concrete around weldments is not acceptable.

G. Grouting: Complete joints, gaps and connections by filling with grout as shown on shop
drawings and as approved by the Engineer.

3.08 FIELD CUTTING

A. Field cutting of holes may be done only with the Engineers concurrence, and only with
power saws or core drills.
1. Maximum hole size is 150 mm diameter or as limited by member size.
2. Cracks, spalls and sharp corners created by field cutting shall be ground, eased, and
patched with epoxy type bonding and patching compounds.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/034500-1 Architectural Precast Concrete
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 034500

ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Architectural precast panels for building exterior cladding, including beams, copings
and caps, in configuration as required and/or drawn.
2. Anchors, clips, hangers, hardware, lifting devices, accessories and materials for
structural attachment, support, erection, and installation.
3. Design and structural engineering of panels, panel connections, structural members
and supporting hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete; installation of products to be
embedded, as furnished under this Section.
2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" for furnishing and installing connections
attached to structural-steel framing.
3. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing; for back-up wall construction.
4. Division 07 Section Firestopping and Smoke Seals; firestopping at floors behind
precast to structural-steel framing.
5. Division 07 Section Joint Sealants: sealing precast to precast, precast to metal
panel and precast to curtain wall.
6. Division 08 Section Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls for coordination of polysert
concrete inserts to receive curtain wall anchor fasteners.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design precast architectural concrete cladding, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections
capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions
indicated:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on Cladding Wind Load Study and ASCE 7-05.
2. Seismic Performance: Precast panels, including attachments to other construction,
shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7-
05, incorporating the following values indicated on the Structural Drawings

C. Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual
ambient temperature changes of 120 deg F.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturers specifications, installation instructions, and other data needed to
demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and
water-absorption tests.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.
Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Include attachment
to supporting construction. Indicate details at building corners.
New Jahra Hospital

1. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections,
and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish indicated, provide sample sets for
initial selection by Architect; approximately 3-inch by 3-inch.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of
architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and
texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches.
F. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Reinforcing materials.
3. Admixtures.
4. Bearing pads.

A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's
Certificate of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load-bearing
members.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural
precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility
includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer.
1. Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified
plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units.
C. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120,
"PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of
architectural precast concrete units indicated.
D. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-
control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply
with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural
Precast Concrete Products."
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F. Range Samples: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast
concrete units, produce a minimum of 3 sets of samples, approximately 16 sq. ft. in area,
representing anticipated range of each color and texture on Project's units. Following
range sample, maintain one set of samples at Project site and remaining sample sets at
manufacturer's plant as color and texture approval reference.
G. Mockups: After range sample approval but before production of architectural precast
concrete units, construct full-sized mockups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Build mockup as indicated on Drawings including aluminum framing, glass, sealants,
and architectural precast concrete complete with anchors, connections, flashings,
and joint fillers.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
New Jahra Hospital

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit
unloading units temporarily on the ground.
B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.
C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with
soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical
damage.
D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.
E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to
avoid excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.
F. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.

1.06 SEQUENCING
A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to
other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN

A. Design and engineering of precast concrete, connections, and embedded items in the
building structure are the responsibility of the precast manufacturer. The design intent for
connections is shown on the Drawings.
B. Modification:
1. Provide complete design, calculations, and drawings, as called for above under
Submittals.
2. Maintain the general design concept as shown, without decreasing or increasing
sizes of members and without altering profiles and alignment, except as approved
by the Architect.
3. Make necessary provisions in the design to accommodate stresses calculated to be
encountered in the fabrication, transportation and erection.

2.02 FORMWORK, REINFORCING AND ATTACHMENT DEVICES
A. Formwork: Provide forms which can produce the intended appearance, indicated sizes,
and specified tolerances. Formwork is fabricator's option.
1. Provide custom forms to create a high quality architectural finish.
2. Forms shall be of a type, which will produce the required finish with no joint marks,
scratches, or dimples, free from rust, wood grain or other marks and absolutely free
from stain. Only one type of form may be used in any given area.
3. Formwork shall be true and accurate to produce members fully complying with the
specified dimensional tolerances after curing. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned
after each use and prior to re-use. Tighten forms at each usage.
4. All reinforcement, dowels, anchorage and connections shall be securely and
accurately placed. All connection hardware shall be rigidly attached to the forms, or
otherwise positively prevented from moving in any direction. Means of supports shall
be subject to the approval of the Architect.
5. In general, forms may be designed with a draft of 1/8 inch in 12 inches, and all forms
may have 1/8 inch radius corners to facilitate removal and reduce breakage.
New Jahra Hospital
6. Forms shall be constructed in accordance with the principles described in ACI
Publication SP-4, "Formwork for Concrete".
B. Reinforcing:
1. Reinforcing bars shall be newly rolled billet steel conforming to ASTM A615, for plain
and deformed billet steel, Grade 40 for ties, Grade 60 for all other bars. Bars shall be
bent cold. Deformed steel wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A496 . Plain steel wire
shall conform to ASTM A 82.
a. All reinforcing shall be hot dipped galvanized to withstand a 10 cycle Preece
test. Provide a minimum of one ounce zinc per square foot of steel surface.
b. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM 185, and be hot dipped galvanized
after fabrication in a bath of molten zinc by an approved galvanizing shop to
comply with ASTM A-90. Provide one ounce of zinc coating per square foot. A
notarized certificate of compliance shall be required from the galvanizer.
c. Welded Wire Fabric: Provide in flat sheets only, not rolls.
2. The finished panel shall assure coverage of not less than 3/4 inch over any
reinforcing steel.
3. Reinforcement shall be engineered and designed by the manufacturer to
accommodate all stresses due to gravity and wind loads, seismic loads, temperature
changes and shrinkage to which the units will be subject in both the permanent
condition and due to handling. Anchorage zones shall be carefully designed to avoid
over-stressing of concrete, reinforcement and inserts. Reinforcement indicated on
the drawings or specified herein shall be considered as the minimum required and
shall be increased as necessary in accordance with design calculations. Provide two
layers of reinforcement around anchorage zones in all panels.
4. Reinforcement supports shall include all spacers, ties, clips, and other devices for
properly assembling, placing, spacing, supporting, hanging and fastening the
reinforcement. Tie wire shall be annealed wire of sufficient strength for the intended
purpose, but not less then 18 gauge. Metal supports shall be of such a type as not to
penetrate the surface of the formwork and show through the surface of the concrete.
No reinforcing chairs will be allowed. All reinforcing shall be hung from the back.
5. Detailing of Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing bars shall be detailed in accordance with
requirements of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures (ACI
315).
C. Attachment Devices and Hardware:
1. Structural sections, plates, angles and all other connecting hardware shall be of steel
conforming to ASTM A 36 or stainless steel, as specified
2. All (non-stainless) steel connecting hardware including, but not limited to cast-in
lifting devices and steel furnished by this Section for embedding in concrete frame,
or steel furnished by this Section for connection to steel structure, shall be hot
dipped galvanized; provide a minimum of two ounces zinc per square foot of steel
surface.
a. Do not hot-dip galvanize steel to be welded. Use shop applied zinc-rich
primer, to be restored after welding on site.
b. Use cadmium plated lock washers, bolts and nuts, except hot-dip galvanize
Nuts after welding to connection steel, in preparation for casting.
3. Connecting hardware shall be engineered and designed by the fabricator to
accommodate all loads to which it will be subject both in the permanent condition
and due to handling. Connection details indicated on the drawings shall be
considered minimum required and shall be strengthened as necessary in accordance
with design calculations.
4. Threaded inserts when fully engaged with the thread on the bolts, shall have suitable
physical properties to fully develop the minimum guaranteed ultimate strength of the
bolt in tension and shear. Inserts shall be N.C. threaded. Plug ferule threads of
embedded plates. Provide weep holes near embedded studs of plates larger than 24
square inches.
5. Anchor bolts embedded in precast shall comply with ASTM A 307.
New Jahra Hospital
6. Shims at connections subject to thermal movement or other movement shall be
separated with friction reducing pads. Pads shall have minimum 0.125 inch
thickness, shall sufficiently reduce friction to permit movement, shall resist wear, and
shall be positively retained in position (open ended slots are not acceptable). Pads
shall not be subject to heat damage from welding or cutting, or excessive pressure
from over-tightening of bolts.
7. Connection Anchors: Coordinated placement with curtain wall manufacturer.
Anchors shall be heavy duty plastic material, Polysert or approved equal.

2.03 CONCRETE AND RELATED MATERIALS
A. Design mixes:
1. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required, and obtain the Architect's
approval of the proposed design mix. Provide cement and aggregate control to
provide two uniform colors of precast concrete.
2. Pay costs for obtaining the design mix. Have mixes prepared either by the testing
agency selected in accordance with Section 01 45 29 of these Specifications, or by
qualified precast concrete manufacturing personnel approved by the Architect.
3. Proportion mixes either by laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using
materials to be employed on the Work for each type of concrete required, and
complying with ACI 211.1.
B. Concrete: Provide separate back-up and facing mixes or only face mix at fabricator's
option. Provide normal weight, 28 day 5,000 psi minimum compressive strength concrete
with 4% to 6% total air content. Concrete slump shall be 3" to 4". No calcium chloride will
be permitted in mix.
1. Portland Cement: Provide ASTM C150 Type III. Use only one brand throughout
project.
a. Primary Color: Provide white cement as needed to match approved samples
and mock-ups.
b. Secondary Color: Provide standard gray cement for the secondary color, as
indicated, and as needed to match approved samples and mock-ups.
2. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260 as approved by Architect.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, unless otherwise approved by
Architect.
4. Water: Provide clean potable water free from substances harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
5. Sand Blast: Visually exposed precast, and edges to receive sealant, shall receive a
light sand blast to obtain desired texture and appearance.
6. Avoid the use of Coloring agents, using judicious selection of aggregate as required
to match design reference sample.
7. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or
colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
a. Color: As approved by Architect to match design reference sample.

C. Aggregates:
1. Fine Aggregate: Washed, inert, sand of with color characteristics which when
combined with other constituents will produce concrete of specified color. Fine
aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33.
2. Coarse Aggregate: Provide aggregate conforming to ASTM C 33. Hard, durable,
carefully selected and graded; free of material causing staining or reacting with
cement. 3/8" and 3/4" stone of color, type and size gradation to match design
reference panel.
3. Or at fabricators option:
a. Fine Aggregates: Washed, inert, manufactured sand material with color
characteristics which when combined with other constituents will produce
concrete of specified colors; select material of colors, type and size gradation
to match panel in Architect's Office. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM
C33, with the further restriction that only half the ASTM C-33 tolerance for
organic content will be allowed. Provide each carefully selected and well
New Jahra Hospital
graded; free of material, such as iron oxides, or chloride salts, causing staining
or reacting with cement.
D. Weep Hole Filters: Weep hole filters shall be 45 pore per inch PVC coated open cell
urethane foam, compressed 30 to 50 percent.
E. Sealants: Sealants required for this section shall be as specified in Division 07 Section
Joint Sealants.

2.04 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate the work of this Section to the sizes and shapes indicated, and of texture
matching the design reference samples.
2. Provide finished units which are straight, true to size and shape, and within the
specified casting tolerances.
3. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete
units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
4. Make exposed edges sharp, straight, and square. Make flat surfaces into a true
plane.
5. Warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective units will not be
acceptable.
6. Place and secure in the forms all anchors, clips, stud bolts, inserts, lifting devices,
shear ties, and other devices required for handling and installing the precast units
and for attachment of subsequent items as indicated or specified.
B. Curing:
1. Form cure the work of this Section for a minimum of 20 hours.
2. Keep continuously wet for not less than six days after being removed from the forms.
3. Following the curing period, allow the units to air dry for at least four days before
being erected.
C. Allowable Casting Tolerances:
1. Length and width of precast units measured at face adjacent to mold:
a. Units 10' or under shall not vary more than 1/16" from the dimensions
indicated.
b. Units 10' to 30' shall not vary more than 1/8' + and 1/4" - from the dimensions
indicated.
c. Each additional 10 feet: 1/16" per 10 feet.
2. Angular deviation of plane of side mold shall be 1/32" per 3" depth or 1/16" total,
whichever is greater.
3. Thickness of units shall not vary more than 1/4" + and 1/8" - from the dimensions
indicated.
4. Units shall not be out of square more than 1/4" total, ( where "Out of square" is the
difference in length of 2 diagonal measurements).
5. Locate all embedded items; inserts, bolts and pipe sleeves not more than 1/4" for
locating dimensions from the position shown on approved Shop Drawings.
6. Locate flashing reglets not more than 1/4" from the position shown on approved
Shop Drawings.
7. The horizontal and vertical dimensions of openings for windows and louvers shall not
vary more than 1/4 inch plus or minus. Maintain tighter tolerances if necessary to
allow thermal movement and tolerances of windows and louvers. Coordinate with
window and louver sections.
D. Allowable Erection Tolerances:
1. Joint dimensions shall not vary more than 3/16" from nominal dimensions indicated
on the drawings.
2. Joint Taper Tolerance: Panel edges at a joint shall be cut off parallel not over 1/40"
per foot length, with a maximum length of tapering in one direction of 10 feet.
3. Edge Alignment Tolerance: A jog in alignment of panel edges shall not exceed 1/8".
New Jahra Hospital
4. Panel Face Offset Tolerance: Faces of adjacent panels shall be offset not over 1/8
inch. Panels that are bowed (within allowable bowing tolerances) shall be arranged
so the offset between adjacent panels caused by the bowing does not exceed this
offset tolerance.
E. Manufacture and install panels so that each panel after erection complies with the following
dimensional requirements:
1. Bowing, concave or convex of a flat surface: not over L/360 with a maximum of 3/4"
up to 30'.
2. Warpage: Maximum permissible warpage of one corner out of plane of the other
three: the greater of 1/16 inch/foot distance from the nearest corner or 1/8".

2.05 PRECAST PANEL FINISHES
A. Finish shall be acid etched. Surfaces shall consist of white cement and white sand.
Aggregates to be selected based on regional availability.
B. Form Liners: Provide a form liner membrane to create a permanent pattern and finish onto
precast concrete panels.
1. Manufacturer: Graphic Concrete Ltd, Helsinki, Finland.;
2. Website: info@graphicconcrete.com
3. Pattern: Architect to chose from full range of GC Collection patterns available

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to
PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast
concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.
1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production
equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's
testing agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be
requested for additional testing and evaluation.
C. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with
ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength. Submit cylinder strength test
results to Special Inspection Coordinator.
D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or
may not comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an
independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened
concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.
1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength,
from locations directed by Architect.
2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if
average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design
compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design
compressive strength.
4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies
to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include
the following:
a. Project identification name and number.
b. Date when tests were performed.
c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
d. Name of concrete testing agency.
New Jahra Hospital
e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by
core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength
at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to
core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with
requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture
that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural
framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel
or other structure is complete.

3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting
architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable
tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected.
1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete
units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from
separating.
2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices
flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch.
D. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers
as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.
New Jahra Hospital
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to
prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For
friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at
random by calibrated torque wrench.
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in
place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping
until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with
adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after
initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes
or hardens.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment
without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the
following special inspections and prepare reports:
1. Erection of precast concrete members.

B. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.

3.06 REPAIRS
A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves
the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation
between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a
distance of 20 feet.
C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780.
D. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not
E. Horizontal precast shelves as indicated on drawings shall be sealed after cleaning with
TWR 255 Water Repellent Penetrant silicone solution as manufactured by G E Silicones. A
test patch shall be done prior to application to test for color enhancement. Should
darkening of substrate occur, the TWR 255 may be diluted as recommended by the
manufacturer. Do not apply material to the face of precast panels.
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/035300-1 Concrete Toppings
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 035300

CONCRETE TOPPINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete topping and accessories in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents, work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. As required.

B. Related Section:
1. Section 033500 - Concrete Finishes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. British Standards Institute (BSI):
1. BS 12 Portland Cement.
2. BS 410 Test Sieves.
3. BS 882 Aggregate from Natural Sources.
4. BS 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete.
5. BS 3148 Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
6. BS 4550 Methods of Testing Cement.
7. BS 4483 Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete.
8. BS 5328 Methods for Specifying Concrete, Including Ready-Mixed
Concrete.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C94 Ready Mixed Concrete.
4. ASTM C150 Portland Cement.
5. ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
6. ASTM C979 Specification for Pigments for Integral Coloured Concrete.

C. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications, codes and specifications
shall apply throughout the concrete finishes works:
1. AASH to M182 Burlap cloth made from Jute or Kenaf.
2. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing Concrete.
3. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.

D. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be
selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use and maintained during shipment, storage
and use.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, methods and the work, and if any work
does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement removal, replacement or remedial work
and revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, samples of concrete accessories of every type to be used.

B. Mill Tests: Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Deliver all packaged materials to the site in original unopened containers, indicating
manufacturers name, brand name and other identifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated location, off the ground and in such manner as to
prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. All materials which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery or storage shall
be replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: BS 12 or ASTM C150, Type I, non-staining or KSS 36. Use only one
brand of cement from one mill throughout the work, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

B. Coarse Aggregate: BS 882 or ASTM C33, evenly graded gravel, crushed gravel or stone, or
a combination thereof passing a 9.5mm sieve and retained on a 4.5mm sieve.

C. Fine Aggregate: BS 882 or ASTM C33, natural sand.

D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage,
deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall conform to BS 5328 and shall be tested
in accordance with BS 3148.

E. Curing Material
1. Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM C171, 0.10mm thick, opaque black.
2. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, opaque.
3. Burlap: AASHTO M 182.

F. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
1. Superior concrete bonder, Dayton Superior Corp.
2. Sonnocrete, Sonneborn Chemrex
3. Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.

G. Mixes
1. Grout: 1 Part cement to 1 part sand, with sufficient water to make a stiff slurry.
2. Bond Coat: 1 Part cement to 1parts sand to 2 parts coarse aggregate mixed with
bonding agent as approved by the Engineer. The amount of water shall not exceed 19
litres per 50 Kg bag of cement or as recommended by manufacturers.
3. Top Coat: Same mix as specified for the bond coat.
4. Class of Concrete: Grade 350 Kg/cm characteristic cube strength (28 days) as
specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete to produce heavy-duty topping
material.

H. Mesh Reinforcement: Shall conform to BS 4483 or to ASTM A185.

2.02 MIXING

A. Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site. Equip batch
mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and a water measuring device.
Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into a uniform
mix within specified time and of discharging mix without segregation.

B. Ready mix topping may be used when acceptable to Engineer. When acceptable, furnish
ready-mixed topping complying with requirements of ASTM C94.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrate, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the work is to
corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean the substrates to remove grease, laitance and other substances which may adversely
affect the adhesion of the work. Use diluted solution of muniatic acid, chipping of the
surface, or any other method of cleaning required. Leave the surfaces clean and wet with as
much water as will be absorbed.

B. Keep the substrates wet continuously overnight, but in no case for less than 6 hours, before
work is applied.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Cover the wet substrate surfaces with grout, applied with force and brushed in to assure full
coverage.

B. Apply bond coat not less than 16 mm thick immediately after application of grout and bring
to true lines, levels and profiles. Compact and roughen the bond coat to form a key for the
top coat.

C. Before the bond coat has set, apply the top coat to such thickness that the total of the work
measured from substrate to finished surface will be as shown, less only thickness of finish
covering.

D. Reinforcement in accordance with requirements of Section 033000 Cast in place Concrete.

3.04 FINISHING

A General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic
slabs true and level within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 metres and measured with a 3 metre
straight edge placed in any direction at any location.

B. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding,
and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and
fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of
the disc type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second
troweling after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge of the
trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to a maximum
tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to receive hardener
and sealer as specified in Section 03350 "Concrete Finishes".

3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Work shall be cured by covering with polyethylene sheeting and flooding for at least 7 days
after finishing.

B. After curing keep the work covered to protect it from damage during the progress of other
work.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/036000-1 Grouting
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 036000

GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grout in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Pre-mixed and packaged non-shrinking grout.
2. Site mixed grout/concrete containing an expanding additive.
3. Grouts used for packing, filling pockets, joints and the like.

2. Section 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry

1.02 REFERENCES

1. C 109-80 : Test method for compressive strength of hydraulic mortars.
2. C 307-94 : Test method for tensile strength of chemical- resistant mortar.
3. C 404-94 : Aggregate for masonry grout.
4. C 476-95 : Grout for masonry
5. C 827-82 : Test method for early volume change of cementitions mixtures.

B. Corps of Engineers CRD.
1. CRD- C621-80 : Non Shrink grout.


A. Control Sample: Complete a sample of the premixed and site mixed work in an approved
location and obtain Engineers approval before proceeding. Additive manufacturers
representative to be present to supervise control sample.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit samples of any proposed additives and premixed grout before delivery of
material.

B. Product Data
1. Submit name of manufacturer of premixed grout and additives and specific brand
name.
2. Submit manufacturers technical data.
3. Submit manufacturers recommended mixing and placing instructions.

C. Methods
1. Prior to commencing work submit details of methods and techniques proposed for the
design and execution of the work.


A. Delivery:
1. Cement: As specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Premixed grout and additive: Materials to be delivered to site in manufacturers
unopened containers, the labels of which shall bear the date of manufacture. Shelf life
shall not exceed one year.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Storage:
1. Cement: As specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Aggregates: As specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete..
3. Premixed Grout and additives: In accordance with manufacturers recommendation.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Temperature: As specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete., and to

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PREMIXED GROUT

A. Non shrink non metallic grout formulated to comply with U.S Corps of Engineers
Specification CRD-C-566 and indicating no decrease in volume change when tested under
conditions of ASTM C827. Change in height at early ages of cylindrical specimens from
Cementitious Mixtures.

B. Curing compound (for application to exposed surfaces of grout) conforming to ASTM C-309.
Type 1 (clear).

C. Non-shrink grout from one of the following:
1. Five star grout (US Grout Corp.)
2. Master flow 713 (Master Builders & Company).
3. Expocrete GP (Expandite Ltd.).
4. Hypol Epoxy Grant (HBM Polymer Products Ltd.).
5. Sikadar 42 (Sika Ltd.).

2.02 CEMENT

A. Cement Generally
1. Portland Cement as specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.03 AGGREGATES

A. Generally
1. As specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Selected to reduce bleeding to a minimum.

B. Fine Aggregate
1. Washed dry sand.

C. Course Aggregate
1. Rounded and evenly graded, 10mm nominal size except where pumping is employed
when 6mm nominal size to be used.
2. Percentage passing No.16 sieve not to exceed 5%.

D. Additives
1. To the approval of the Engineer.

E. Water
1. As specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.04 MIXES

A. Select the mix proportions and workability for each type of grout to produce the required
performance.
New Jahra Hospital
B. The minimum characteristic strength of the grout shall be 210 kg/cm2 at 28 days: or equal to
the strength of concrete, whichever is less.

C. Site mixed grout for filling uncongested areas over 50mm wide:
1. Mix proportions -1:1.25:1.75 (cement/fine aggregate/course aggregate) by weight. or
adjusted to meet B above.
2. Workability - slump 100-200mm.

D. Site mixed or pre-mixed grout for filling narrow areas less than 50mm wide:
1. Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement/fine aggregate) by weight.
2. Workability - slump to be kept to a minimum to allow placing.

E. Site mixed dry packing for area over 75mm wide:
1. Mix proportions - 1:1:2 (cement/fine aggregate/course aggregate 10mm nominal size)
by weight.
2. Workability - slump not to exceed 5mm.

F. Site mixed or pre-mixed dry packing for areas less than 75mm wide:
1. Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement/fine aggregate) by weight.
2. Workability - slump not to exceed 5mm.

G. Alternative mixes incorporating additives to be used with the Engineers prior approval.

H. Pre-mixed grout to voids of small widths and apertures of limited accessibility.

2.05 FORMWORK

A. As specified in section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. For smaller areas to manufacturers instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the work of this section is to be applied to ensure
that they are adequate to provide a satisfactory application.

B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Make concrete surfaces rough to provide key.

B. Ensure spaces to receive grout are clean and free from debris.

C. Thoroughly wet surfaces and allow free water to disperse prior to application of grout.

3.03 FORMWORK

A. Fix edge formwork where necessary.

B. Edge formwork to baseplates to be to the level of the plate. Clearance between formwork
and plate normally 75mm.

C. Strike formwork within 24 hours of filling.

3.04 APPLICATION - PREMIXED GROUT

A. Mix non shrink grout in accordance with manufacturers instructions in relationship to
temperature and workability conditions.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Basically in all conditions, materials shall be applied in a plastic or trowable workable
condition, firmly pressed, rodded into place or hand trowelled. Should conditions be such
that flowable condition be considered more practical, obtain Engineers prior approval.
Flowable application must allow for high points to be adequately vented to allow entrapped
air to escape, and an approved method of containing grout until set.

C. Strike edges clean and compress to conditions as indicated on the drawings.

D. Materials shall be applied in position within one hour of mixing (unless manufacturers
literature states otherwise). After half an hour discard any grout mix that shows signs of
stiffening.

E. As soon as grout sets, cure exposed surfaces with curing compound applied in strict
accordance with manufacturers instructions.

3.05 APPLICATION-SITE MIXED GROUT

A. Mixing
1. Mix grout by mechanical mixer (colloidal type) for large quantities or by hand for small
quantities (one quarter of cubic metre or less) on a clean, level banker board.
2. Thoroughly mix grout so that all individual constituents are incorporated early.
3. Do not overmix.
4. Use grout as soon as possible after mixing, maximum period 1 hour.
5. Do not use grout after commencement of initial set.
6. Do not re-mix or re-temper grout after commencement of initial set.

B. Generally
1. Pour grout into recesses or formwork and work into position to completely fill the void.
2. Ram dry packing to ensure optimum compaction.
3. Work from one side to avoid formation of air pockets or voids.
4. Preferably bolt pockets shall be filled at same time as packing to baseplates. If
separate operation, fill bolt pockets to within 50mm of the level of the foundation
before main filling.
5. Do not vibrate grout.
6. Form neat chamfered edge to packing under plates.
7. Do not place grout when concrete temperature is less than 5 deg. C. or more than 35
deg. C.
8. Cure grout by covering with moist hessian for not less than 5 days.

3.06 CLEAN UP

A. Promptly, as the work proceeds and upon completion, scrape off and remove all grout
materials from adjacent surfaces. Clean up and remove any surplus material and rubbish
resulting from the work of this section.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/042200-1 Concrete Unit Masonry
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 042200

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General requirement Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section Includes: Unit masonry, walls and partitions in accordance with the requirements of
1. Use solid non-load bearing concrete blocks as specified herein for all external
envelope conditions, for internal conditions where stone wall facing is applied, and in
all locations.
2. Light weight block for the specified area.
3. Cavity wall.

C. Related Sections:
1. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
2. Section 078100 - Applied Fireproofing
3. Section 079000 - Joint Protection
5. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frame

1.02 REFERENCES

A. British Standards Institution (BSI):
1. BS 12 : Portland Cement
2. BS 729 : Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel
articles
3. BS 882 : Aggregates from natural stone
4. BS 890 : Specification for Building Limes
5. BS 4482 : Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the
reinforcement of concrete
6. BS 6073 : Precast Concrete Masonry Units

B. Americal Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 153 : Specification for zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel
hardware
2. ASTM A 615/ : Deformed and Plain fillet-steel bars for concrete
A615M-94 reinforcement
3. ASTM C 33 : Concrete aggregates
4. ASTM C 90-946: Specification for hollow load bearing concrete masonry
units
5. ASTM C 144 : Specification for aggregate for masonry
6. ASTM C 150 : Portland Cement
7. ASTM C 207 : Specification for finishing hydrated lime
8. ASTM C 476 : Specification for mortar for unit masonry
9. ASTM C 476 : Specification for grout for reinforced and nonreinforced
masonry

C. The applicable provisions of the following standards, publications and codes shall apply
throughout the masonry work:
1. ACI 530-95 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-95/ASCE
S-95/TMS 402-95).
2. ACI 530-1-95 - Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-1-95/ASCE 6-95/TMS
602-95).
3. TEK Information Series, Published by the National Concrete Masonry Association
(NCMA).
New Jahra Hospital
D. Comply with the manufacturers instructions for the installation of each type of masonry
product, unless otherwise shown or specified.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineer, for information only, copies of
manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for each product required by this
Section.

B. Manufacturers Data: Submit to the Engineer, for information only, copies of manufacturers
certification that the following comply with the requirements specified:
1. Portland Cements.
2. Mortar Aggregates.
3. Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified).
4. Reinforcing Bars.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and following the submittal of manufacturers literature and data, samples of
each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be reviewed for colour and texture only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
Samples to be submitted are as follows:
1. Concrete Masonry Units - Normal Weight solid block three (3) of each size.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating details of reinforcement, anchors, inserts,
joints, connections to adjoining work or materials. Also include elevations indicating setting
out and placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs, etc.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Requirements for fire-rated or lateral support conditions are to be regulated in
compliance with local building codes and are not necessarily fully defined on the
Drawings.
2. Whenever a fire-rating is shown for a wall (4-hour, 3-hour, etc.) use masonry units in
that wall complying with the requirements established by local governing authorities.

B. Mock-Up:
1. Prior to the installation of unit masonry work, and preceding pre-installation
conference, provide a sample wall mock-up for each type of unit masonry work.
2. Provide each sample wall panel using materials, together with bond and joint tooling,
shown or specified for final work.
3. Build each sample wall panel mock-up at the site, as directed, of full thickness and
approximately 1 metre high x 1.5 metre long, unless otherwise shown, indicating the
proposed texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work.
4. Obtain Engineers acceptance of visual qualities of each sample panel before
proceeding with the final work.
5. Retain each sample panel mock-up during construction period as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work
is completed.
C. Pre-Installation Coordination:
1. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the start of masonry work, meet at the site and
review the installation procedures and coordination with other work. Meeting shall
include Contractor, Engineer and major material manufacturers as well as others
whose work must be coordinated with the masonry work.
2. Coordination with Inserts: Ensure coordination between masonry work and concrete
work such that all inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper installation of
masonry work, are correctly pre-installed.
3. Pre-Installation Inspection: Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the
conditions under which the masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer
in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the course of the
work.

B. Deliver masonry materials, other than bulk materials, to project site in manufacturers
unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard packaging devices; fully identified
with name, type, grade and size.

C. Protect all masonry material during shipment, storage and construction against wetting and
soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.

D. Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that will reduce or
destroy bond.

E. Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms off the
ground in dry locations.


1. When the ambient air temperature is more than 30C in the shade, and the relative
humidity is less than 50%, protect the masonry from direct exposure to wind and
sun for 48 hours after installation.
2. Do not lay masonry units having a film of water on their surfaces.
3. Do not mix mortar or lay units while shade temperature is above 40C on a rising
thermometer or above 43C on a falling thermometer.
4. Do not allow temperature of fresh mixed mortar to exceed 32C. Take suitable
measures to ensure this.

B. Protection:
1. Protect partially completed masonry walls against weather when work is not in
progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane.
Extend membrane at least 600 mm down both sides of walls and anchor securely in
place ensuring that there is free air flow sufficient to prevent heat build-up.
2. Normal weathering of exposed work during construction is permitted, provided other
activities and conditions do not interfere and result in an unacceptable condition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. The National Industries Co.
Kuwait
Tel: 24837095
2. Kuwait Building Material Manufacturer
Kuwait
Tel: 24674260
3. Al Atiqi
Kuwait
Tel: 24749065
4. Aziz Block
Kuwait
Tel: 24571999

B. Anchors and Reinforcement:
1. Expamet Building Products
U.K.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Ancon, U.K.
Local Agent: Kuwait Maritime & Mercantile Co.
Tel: 2434752
3. K-Steel
Kuwait
Tel: 24824707
4. Dayton Supply & Trol Company, U.S.A.
5. Cemex Inc., U.S.A.

C. Plasticizer:
1. MBT Middle East
Kuwait
Tel: 24814815
2. Construction Material Chemical Industries
Saudi Arabia
Tel: 38574955
3. Fosroc
Boodai, Kuwait
Tel: 24817618
4. Keith Ceramic Material Ltd., U.K.
5. United Mineral and Chemical Corporation, U.S.A.

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I or B.S. 12 or K.S.S. 36,
ordinary, non-staining, without air-entrainment, natural colour or white as required to
produce the required colour of mortar or grout.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S or BS 890.

C. Mortar Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200, except for joints less than 6 mm, use
aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm).

D. Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials, salts, etc. which would impair the work.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES, LOAD-BEARING MASONRY

A. Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that proportions are controlled and accurately
maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition. Use mechanical
mixing as mentioned in ACI 530-95.

B. Mortar: Comply with the proportions and physical requirements of ASTM C270 for the
following type:
1. Type S.

C. Grout: Comply with the proportion requirements of ASTM C476 for the following types, as
applicable:
1. Fine Grout.
2. Coarse Grout.

D. Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 1hours have elapsed
after initial mixing.

E. Do not add plasticisers or other admixtures to mortar or grout materials specified.

F. Light Weight Block: General purpose low density building block manufactured from a blend
of naturally occurring low density aggregates suitable for wide range of applications in load
bearing and non-load bearing constructions.
New Jahra Hospital
2.04 MORTAR MIXES, NON LOAD-BEARING MASONRY

A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 270, except limited to the mix materials hereinbefore
specified and the following cement/ lime ratios by volume; wherein sand (in damp condition)
equals 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and refer 3.04 (A) of this section for the
location where to use the type of mortar:
1. Type M: Not more than part lime per part Portland cement.
2. Type S: Not more than part lime per part Portland cement.
3. Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland cement.

B. Cure blocks in a moisture-controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal temperature
and pressure, and limit moisture absorption to 35% of saturation at time of delivery and until
time of installation. Comply with ASTM Type I classification.

C. Standard Finish: Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the manufacturers
standard colour and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.

2.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (BLOCKS)

A. General: Provide blocks as shown, complying with type classifications, weights, grades and
cure requirements as hereinafter specified and the following general requirements:
1. Do not use blocks which have chips, cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or other
substances which might stain finishes where faces or ends will be exposed.
2. Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture
and colour, for each type required, for each continuous area and visually related
areas.
3. Face Dimensions: Manufacturers standard, nominal 400 mm long x 200 mm high,
unless otherwise shown.
4. Provide special shapes wherever shown and wherever required using concrete grade
400 to build corners, wallcaps, sills, lintels, jambs, control joints and expansion joints,
and for other uses where necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance
with the highest standard of workmanship.

B. Solid Concrete Blocks: ASTM C90-94b or BS 6073 Part 1, using concrete aggregates
complying with ASTM C33 or BS 882, with dry net concrete weight of not less than 2000
kg/cu. m. (125 lb. per cu. ft.) Type 1 or the equivalent grade of BS 6073, Parts 1 and 2.

2.06 METAL TIES, ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: Truss type welded wire units of 3m lengths with prefabricated
corner and tee units. Fabricate from ASTM A 82 or BS 4482 cold drawn steel wire with
deformed side rods and plain 9 gauge truss rods. Provide width of between 37 mm and 50
mm less than wall thickness.
1. Fabricate with 9 gauge (3.7 mm) side rods, unless otherwise shown.
2. Provide units with a single pair of side rods, unless otherwise shown.
3. For use in interior partition walls, fabricate from mill galvanized wire.
4. For use in exterior walls, hot dip galvanize after fabrication, with 458 g/sq m, zinc
coating; ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729, Table 1.

B. Concrete Inserts
1. Unit Type: Furnish unit type inserts of the type and size shown, of cast iron or
malleable iron, or fabricated from not less than 12 gauge (2.6 mm) steel with 458 g/sq
m hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication (ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729 Table 1).
2. Dovetail Strap Type: Furnish dovetail slots with 50 mm wide x 150mm flat bar
anchors formed from (2 mm) galvanized steel, with 6 mm upturned end or 12 mm
diameter hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to extend to within 37 mm of face
of masonry units.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Anchoring Devices: Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size shown, but
fabricated from not less than 16 gauge (1.5 mm) sheet metal or 9 mm diameter rod stock
unless otherwise shown.
1. Fabricate devices from steel with mill galvanized or hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars, complying with ASTM A 615, intermediate grade,
size as shown or specified herein, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits.

E. Lateral Support for Wall Heads: Provide 100 x 50 x 3mm thick hot-dip galvanised steel
angles 500mm long on both sides at 900mm centres, as wall head lateral support wherever
applicable and as directed by the Engineer.


A. Wall Control Joint Filler: Provide compressible control joint filler of closed cell PVC, SBR or
Neoprene, either solid or tube type, of proper dimension to serve as back-up for joint sealant
at face of masonry.
1. Provide solid rubber key section in control joint filler (60 to 80 Shore A durometer
hardness) designed to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.

B. Joint Fillers: See Section 079000, Joint Protection.

C. Sealants: See Section 079200, Joint Sealants.

D. Fire Safing Insulation: Use similar material to that Specified in Section 07910 Joint Fillers
and Gaskets or equal approved..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Surfaces: Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are satisfactory for work
to proceed as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer and do not
proceed until rectified to satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Preparation of Surfaces: Where structural steel has received protective paint and fire
protective materials prior to this work commencing remove fire protection material for correct
fixing of metal ties over an area confined to immediate contact area of item to be fixed plus
10mm. Removal is not to damage steel and is to be effected using tools and methods
approved by the Engineer. Saws must be fitted with depth gauges to prevent damage to
steel.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP, GENERAL

A. Manufacturers Recommendations: Comply with the manufacturers printed instructions and
recommendations for the installation of each type of masonry product, unless otherwise
shown or specified.

B. Thicknesses: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except for single skin
masonry walls which may be built to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness shown.

C. Chases: Build chases and recesses as shown and as may be required for the work of other
trades. Do not cut horizontal or diagonal chases in load bearing work. Provide not less than
200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent
chases and recesses.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Construction Openings: Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to be installed
at later date. Complete masonry work after equipment is in place using materials identical
with those immediately adjacent to the opening.

E. Construction Joints: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; toothing will not be
permitted. Before new work is started clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove
loose blocks units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Cutting Blocks: Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp corners. Cut
blocks as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full blocks
without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of less than half size blocks at corners,
jambs and any other locations. Do not use chipped or broken blocks.

3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Mortar Types, General: Except as otherwise shown or specified use Type S mortar for
exterior masonry work and Type N mortar for interior masonry work.
1. Use Type M mortar for special structural requirements where shown, and for grouting
reinforcing steel in masonry lintels unless concrete is shown.

B. Bond: Use running bond for all single-skin masonry walls unless otherwise shown. In
multiple-skin walls, bond skins together with header blocks wherever possible, unless
otherwise shown. Where skins cannot be masonry bonded, use wire ties of the type and
spacing shown, unless horizontal joint reinforcing provides the tie between skins. Where type
and spacing of wire ties is not shown provide either continuous or individual type ties,
installed so that double wires will be spaced not more than 600 mm o.c. horizontally.

C. Laying Procedure for Walls
1. Do not wet the concrete block units.
2. Shove block units into place with a full bed of mortar in both horizontal and vertical
joints.
2. Lay-up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and
coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more than 1/800
in any direction are unacceptable.
3. Build bearing plates, masonry anchors, flashings, sleeves, and other miscellaneous
items into masonry as work progresses. Fill-in solid with masonry around built-in
items.
5. Delay filling between top of non-bearing walls and structural beams or slabs above
until structure has been fully loaded with the major items of dead load to be
supported thereon, so as to cause deflections nearly equal to the final condition.
6. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown, or of standard type if none is shown.
Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members. Space anchors 600 mm
centres at vertical and overhead support locations, and 600 mm centres both ways
behind masonry veneer work, unless otherwise shown.
7. Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain bond alignment.
Parge back-up masonry with a minimum of 12 mm mortar while laying face blocks.
Except for cavity wall construction leave no voids between blocks. Slush and grout
back joints against other work as blocks are shoved into place.
8. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered with other
materials except applied rendering, unless otherwise shown.
9. Rake out joints of masonry walls which are to receive applied rendering or similar
formless material.
10. Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown.
11. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement in all masonry walls, unless specifically noted
or specified to be omitted. Space reinforcement 600 mm centres vertically unless
otherwise shown or specified. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150 mm at ends and
do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement except at wall
openings. Use matching prefabricated T and L sections of reinforcement at
corners and wall intersections to provide continuity. Center reinforcement in wall to
provide a minimum mortar cover of 15 mm at side rods.
New Jahra Hospital
a. At all openings of more than 300 mm width provide joint reinforcement in 2
horizontal joints, approximately 200 mm apart, both immediately above the
lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend the reinforcing a minimum of
600 mm beyond the opening, bridging control joints, if any.

D. Block Lintel: Provide block lintels wherever shown, and wherever openings in the blockwork
of more than 300 mm are shown without concrete, structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Unless otherwise shown provide one reinforcing bar for each 100 mm thickness of wall, and
use bars of adequate size in relation to opening width. Provide minimum lintel bearing at
each jamb of 100 mm for openings which do not exceed 1.8 m width, and 200 mm for
openings in excess of 1.8 m width.

E. Tie Beams: If the height of any masonry wall exceeds 4 meters, provide an RCC tie beam (K-
200 concrete) having 20 cm height and width equal to that of the masonry wall. Provide 1%
reinforcement in the tie beams as directed by the Engineer.

F. Control Joints: Install control joints in masonry walls where shown or in accordance with sub-
clause G. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of sealant.

G. Control Joint Spacing: If control joint locations are not shown, place joints vertically, spaced
at each structural column or joint between bays of the building but in no case spaced more
than 9 m o.c. Also, place vertical joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work,
including the following locations:
1. Above and below major openings, at one jamb if opening is less than 1.0 m wide and
at both jambs if opening is over1.0 m wide.
2. At vertical chases, recesses and other points of reduction in wall thickness.
3. At locations where masonry wall height changes by more than 20%.
4. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
5. Where end of masonry wall butts against supporting structure.

3.05 LAYING EXTERIOR WALLS

A. General: In addition to requirements hereinbefore specified the following shall apply to the
installation of exterior masonry walls:
1. Space horizontal joint reinforcing 400 mm o.c. vertically in exterior walls, unless
otherwise shown.
2. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built
into masonry work.
3. Provide flashing in masonry work as shown and extend details to corners and
intersections to provide complete waterproofing.
4. Provide weep holes in the exterior skin of masonry work, located immediately above
flashing, shelf angles, lintels and other structural elements supporting the masonry.
Space weeps 600mm centres unless otherwise shown. Place a length of 8mm
cotton sash cord in each weep as the work progresses, and withdraw cord to clear
the hole after the work has been completed.
5. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings in cavity wall construction. Strike mortar
joints flush as the work progresses.

3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Replace blocks which are chipped, broken, stained or do not match adjoining units as
intended, or are damaged otherwise, provide new blocks promptly to match adjoining
blocks, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Where exposed masonry wall is to receive paint finish, the joints shall be neatly pointed
horizontally and vertically to show lines not exceeding 2 mm in width and depth. A mock-up
is to be prepared for approval.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Cleaning: During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints, enlarge any
voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and
adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance, properly prepared for the application
of sealant compounds and other work to follow. Clean the exposed masonry surfaces as
follows:
1. All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning shall not be done
until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.
2. Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood scraper, or, if
necessary, by means of chisel or wire brush.
3. Pre-soak the wall, saturating the masonry with clean water, and flush off all loose
mortar and dirt.
4. Using a stiff fibre brush only, scrub down the wall with a solution of 0.25 litre
household detergent and 0.25 litre of trisodium phosphate dissolved in 4 litres of
clean water.
5. Thoroughly wash off all cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean
pressurised water.
6. If after this cleaning procedure is completed, the wall or portion of the wall is not
clean, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor shall clean with an acid
solution by means and methods acceptable to the Engineer. If cleaned with an acid
solution, all sash, metal lintels (if any) and other material shall be thoroughly
protected.
7. Particular care shall be taken to prevent smearing mortar on surfaces of concrete
masonry units. If mortar smearing occurs, it shall be removed while soft, when
possible; if dry and hard, it shall be removed by rubbing with a small piece of
concrete masonry. All mortar smears, drippings, etc., on exposed faces of concrete
masonry units shall be removed.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/051200-1 Structural Steel Framing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Structural metal framing in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. All structural steel works not limited to the following:
a. Structural framing (If applicable)
b. Miscellaneous structural steel
2. Fabrication
3. Installation
4. Grouting
5. Shop painting, protective coating and finish paint
6. Testing

C. Related Sections :
1. Section 053000 - Metal Deck
2. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrication
3. Section 099000 - Painting

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A 6/A 6M-05a: Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural
Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
2. ASTM A 36/A 36M-05: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
3. ASTM A 53/A 53M-06: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless
4. ASTM A 108-03: Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, Cold-Finished
5. ASTM A 123/A 123M-02: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products
6. ASTM A 153/A 153M-05: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
7. ASTM A 193/A 193M-06a: Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-
Temperature or High Pressure Service and other Special
Purpose Applications
8. ASTM A 216/A 216M-04: Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion
Welding, for High-Temperature Service
9. ASTM A 325M-05: Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
[Metric]
10. ASTM A 325-06: Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
11. ASTM A 354-04: Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts,
Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
12. ASTM A 449-04b: Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel,
Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use
13. ASTM A 490-06: Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
14. ASTM A 490M-04a: Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and
10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]
New Jahra Hospital
15. ASTM A 500-03a: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
16. ASTM A 529/A 529M-05: Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality
17. ASTM A 563-04a: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
18. ASTM A 563M-06: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]
19. ASTM A 572/A 572M-06: Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel
20. ASTM A 588/A 588M-05: Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. (100 mm)
Thick
21. ASTM A 668/A 668M-04: Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for
General Industrial Use
22. ASTM A 780-01: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
23. ASTM A 847/A 847M-05: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High-
Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
24. ASTM A 913/A 913M-04: Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of
Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-
Tempering Process (QST)
25. ASTM A 992/A 992M-06a: Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
26. ASTM B 695-04: Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on
Iron and Steel
27. ASTM C 1107-05: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink)
28. ASTM E 94-04: Guide for Radiographic Examination
29. ASTM E 119-05a: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
30. ASTM E 164-03: Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments
31. ASTM E 165-02: Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
32. ASTM E 709-01: Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
33. ASTM F 436-04: Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
34. ASTM F 436M-04: Specification for Hardened Steel Washers [Metric]
35. ASTM F 959-06: Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
36. ASTM F 959M-04: Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners [Metric]
37. ASTM F 1554-04: Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
Strength
38. ASTM F 1852-05: Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural
Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength

B. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications, codes and specifications
shall apply throughout the structural steel work:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-2006: Structural Welding Code - Steel
2. AWS D1.8/D1.8M-2005: Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement
3. AISC 303-2005: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
(available at www.aisc.org)
4. AISC 341-2005 and AISC 341s1-2005: Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings Including Supplement No. 1 (available at www.aisc.org)
5. AISC 360-2005: Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (available at
www.aisc.org)
6. SSPC-PA 1 2000 (Revised 2004): Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop,
Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel
7. SSPC-Paint 20 2002 (Revised 2004): Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Primers
(Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic")
8. SSPC-Paint 25 1997 (Revised 2004): Paint Specification No. 25 Zinc Oxide, Alkyd,
Linseed Oil Primer for Use over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I
and Type II
New Jahra Hospital
9. SSPC-Paint 25 BCS 1997 (Revised 2004): Paint Specification No. 25 BCS Zinc Oxide,
Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use over Blast Cleaned Steel
10. SSPC-PS Guide 7.00 1982 (Revised 2004): Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for
Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems
11. SSPC-QP 3 2000 (Revised 2004): Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of
Shop Painting Applicators
12. SSPC-SP 1 1982 (Revised 2004): Surface Preparation Specification No. 1: Solvent
Cleaning
13. SSPC-SP 2 1982 (Revised 2004): Surface Preparation Specification No. 2: Hand Tool
Cleaning
14. SSPC-SP 3 1982 (Revised 2004): Surface Preparation Specification No. 3: Power Tool
Cleaning
15. SSPC-SP 8 1982 (Revised 2004): Surface Preparation Specification No. 8: Pickling

C. Comply with the manufacturers instructions for the installation of structural steelwork, unless
otherwise shown or specified.


A. Provide all structural frames capable of withstanding design load within limits and conditions
indicated. Fabricators shall be responsible for selecting and completing details of structural
steel connection required to withstand specified design loads.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer for approval shop drawings for all structural steel
components all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents showing the
following:
1. Shop fabrication drawings which show type of material, size and weight of members
and other information necessary for the fabrication of each member and for shop
assembly of members of the structure. The drawings shall include the type, size,
location and extent of all welds and bolts. The drawings shall distinguish between
shop and field, bolts and welds.
2. Field assembly and erection drawings which show all field assembly prior to erection
and after erection. The drawings shall indicate all details, schedules, procedures and
diagrams showing field assembly and sequence of erection. The information shall
indicate locations of shoring and how shoring is stabilized and controlled. The
drawings shall indicate elevations of shored points and splice locations. The
procedures shall indicate step by step erection sequences including intermediate
surveys and allowances for temperature. Diagrams shall indicate erection equipment
size and weight and additional elements which may be required to support or stabilize
elements during erection.
3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written procedures for
fabrication of the steel work. The procedure shall describe the complete welding
process including machine, current, voltage, preheat, filler metal, welding system
(manual, semi-automatic or automatic), positions of welding, number of passes for
each weld size, preparation of surfaces prior to welding, etc. These procedures shall
indicate the Contractors quality control measures, monitoring and repair procedures.

B. Manufacturers Literature
1. Submit to the Engineer manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
the following products, including laboratory test reports and such other data to show
compliance with these Specifications (including specified standards):
a. Structural steel, (each type) including certified copies of mill reports covering the
chemical and physical properties, country and rolling mill of origin, and
including a statement indicating that the steel is new billet steel and that testing
has been performed in accordance with ASTM or equivalent standards.
b. High strength bolts (each type) including nuts and washers.
c. Welding electrodes (each type).
d. Shop coat primer paint, field touch-up paint.
e. Coal tar epoxy paint.
f. Bearing materials or assemblies.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Testing Reports
1. The following reports shall be submitted in triplicate directly to the Engineer by the
Testing Agency, with copy to the Contractor.
a. Shop Welders Certification.
b. Field Welders Certification.
c. Magnetic particle tests, shop welds and field welds.
d. Ultra-sonic tests, shop welds and field welds.
e. High strength bolted connection tests, shop and field.


A. Specialist Subcontractor for the works shall meet the requirements as specified in the
Documents I and II.

B. Quality Control:
1. The Contractor shall engage, at his own expense, an independent Testing Agency
approved by the Engineer to inspect high strength bolted connections and welds, and
to perform all tests and submit test reports to the Engineer as herein specified.
2. The Contractor shall submit prequalification details regarding qualification of the
proposed Testing Agency.
3. The Contractor shall provide the Testing Agency with the following:
a. A complete set of shop fabrication and erection drawings.
b. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills and mill test reports.
Provide certified copies of mill test reports of bolts, nuts and washers, including
names and locations of mills and shops and analyses of chemical and physical
properties.
c. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to
shops.
d. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
f. Facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoists, etc., for
inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
4. Bolted connections shall be inspected by the Testing Agency in accordance with AISC
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325, ASTM 325M and ASTM 490 or
ASTM 490M.
5. Certify all welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 and make inspections and tests as
required. Record types and locations of all defects found in the work, and measures
required and performed to correct such defects.
6. The Testing Agency shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests,
shall state in each report whether or not the test specimens conform to all
requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall specifically note any deviations
therefrom.

C. Substitutions:
1. The Contractor shall fabricate and erect the structural steelworks as shown on the
Drawings and as required in the Specifications.
2. No substitutions to the structural system shown nor member sizes or steel strengths
will be permitted without an explanation which must be approved by the Engineer
before implementation.
3. No substitutions of rolled sections with welded plate sections will be permitted or
considered.


A. Do not handle structural steel until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be exercised to
avoid abrasions and other damage.

B. Stack material above ground out of mud and dirt and provide for proper drainage. Protect
from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Do not deliver material to the project site until the proposed method and sequence of
erection has been reviewed by the Engineer. Method and sequence shall be planned so as
to avoid delay or damage to the work of other trades.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Storage of fabricated steel at the job site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Material stored at the job site shall not exceed design loads on existing or newly-constructed
structures so that members will not be distorted or otherwise damaged; and shall be
protected against corrosion or deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 Grade 50 (minimum yield strength 36000 psi
or 2,500 Kg/sq.cm) unless noted otherwise.

B. All detailing of steel, fabrication and erection shall conform to AISC and AWS latest editions.

2.02 BOLTS

A. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A490 and A325. All
bolts shall be cold-forged with rolled threads.

2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES

A. All welding electrodes shall be E70XX and shall comply with the provisions of AWS
Specifications A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20.

B. All welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds using not less than the minimum size
based on thickness of the thicker part jointed.
1. Thickness to 12mm - min. size 4mm
2. Over 12mm to 20mm - min. size 6mm

2.04 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's
[Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings].
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including
tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes
including pitting, rust, scale,[ seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,] and
roughness.
2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.

C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, by mechanically thermal cut for standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.

E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning.

G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-
opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform,
square, and true members in completed wall framing.

I. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld
exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames.
Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws,
uniformly spaced not more than 250 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

J. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of
other work through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces and do not thermally cut bolt
holes or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other
work.

2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Pretensioned.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld
show-through on exposed steel surfaces.
a. Grind butt welds flush.
b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

2.07 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 50 mm.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00,
"Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to
provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.08 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.
2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, attached to structural-steel frame and located in
exterior.


A. The Agency shall perform the required duties in such a way that fabrication and erection are
not unnecessarily delayed or impeded, and as follows:
1. The Testing Agency shall make all tests and inspections as required by Structural
Welding Code AWS D1.1.
2. The edges of material to be welded shall be ultrasonically examined for evidence of
laminations, inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to which such defects are
permitted and the extent of repair permitted shall be determined by the Testing
Agency and made in accordance with ASTM A6, Paragraph 9. Repairs made by
welding shall be done in compliance with the requirements of AWS D1.1.
3. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove welds made from
both sides, after back gouging or chipping, shall be examined by magnetic particle
inspection (or dye penetration if magnetic particle inspection is not feasible).
4. All shop and field welds shall be listed as stated on the Drawings.
5. The technique of radiographic inspection will be in accordance with the requirements
of AWS D1.1. A double film technique will be used. One copy of each film will be sent
to the Engineers Representative, the other will be retained by the Testing Agency.
6. Where inspection reveals defects, the extent of inspection will be increased as much
as necessary to ensure that the full extent of the defects in a joint has been found and
to ensure that the same defects are not present in welds made on similar parts or
under similar circumstances.
7. Work which is judged not acceptable by the Testing Agency will be designated as
Repair or Reject.
8. Before shipment of structural steel all shop welding shall be inspected prior to
painting.
9. The Testing Agency will maintain a daily record of the work it has inspected. Reports
of tests will be made in the form prescribed in AWS D1.1. One copy of each of the
reports will be submitted to the Engineers Representative immediately.
10. The Testing Agency will make all tests and inspections of high strength bolt
connections as required by AISC S314.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with
requirements.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-
in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.03 BENCH MARKS

A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a qualified surveyor/Engineers Representative
approved by the Engineers Representative, in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, who shall establish permanent bench marks, field check all elevations
of concrete on which structural steel is to be placed and locations of anchor bolts, reporting
any discrepancies to the Engineers Representative and obtaining the Engineers
Representatives approval before the work proceeds.

3.04 ERECTION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting and levelling of all bearing plates or
setting plates. Bearing plates or setting plates shall be levelled on steel wedges or shims or
as otherwise detailed. Bearing and setting plates shall be grouted as specified.

B. Furnish templates for setting of all anchor bolts. Furnish shim plates or developed fills where
required to obtain proper fit and alignment.

C. Oxygen cutting of structural steel in excess of 3 mm for fitting-up purposes shall not be
done except with the prior approval of the Engineers Representative.

D. The use of an oxygen cutting torch for correcting fabrication errors will be permitted only
when the member is not under load, and only after prior written approval of the Engineers
Representative to the procedures to be followed in the event corrective work is necessary.

3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all structural members and for
the elevation and alignment of the finished structure. Any adjustments necessary in the steel
work because of discrepancies in elevations and alignment shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.

3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. No welding or bolting shall be done until as much of the structure as will be stiffened by the
welding or bolting has been aligned.

B. Drift pins shall not be used to enlarge unfair holes in main material. Holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed. Burning and drifting may be used to align unfair
holes in secondary bracing members only, when acceptable to the Engineers
Representative.
New Jahra Hospital
C. When high strength bolts or high strength bearing bolts are used, the AISC and Code of
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges specifications shall apply including values as noted
therein, and installed by either turn of nut tightening or with torque wrenches. In using
manual torque wrenches, the required torque can be read from the wrench dial. The wrench
shall be calibrated. Nuts shall be in motion when torque is measured. In using power
wrenches, the recommendations of the wrench manufacturer shall be followed. Use
Hardened washer under bolt head or nut whichever is turned in tightening, unless the
specified standards require hardened washer under both head and nut.

All bolts shall be kept in dry storage until needed for installation. ASTM A325 bolts 1-1/8
inch (28mm) and 1-1/4 inch (32mm) diameter and A490 bolts 1 inch (25mm) diameter and
over shall first have Johnsons Stick Wax No. 140 or equal applied to their threads before
being assembled in the work. If bolts have been left out and have become rusty before use,
they shall be rejected and shall not be used until they have been cleaned and waxed with
Johnsons Stick Wax No. 140 or equal.

D. Bolted connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para. 1.04 Quality
Assurance and as shown on the Drawings.

E. Welded connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para. 1.04
Quality Assurance and as indicated on the Drawings.

3.07 SURVEY

A. Make an accurate survey of actual locations of steel members immediately upon the
completion of erection of steel.

B. Survey the final erected structural steel frame prior to the application of any other work,
reporting any discrepancies from Contract requirements to the Engineers Representative.

3.08 FIRE RETARDANT PAINTS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all approval from the local authorities like
KFB, including preparing shop drawings to the authorities.

B. Follow strictly manufacturers instructions for application and surface preparation.


A. Site Tests:
1. Visual inspection, magnetic particle and ultra-sonic inspection shall be made of all
welds indicated on the Drawings. Magnetic particle inspection shall be made on the
root pass and finished weld.
2. The method of magnetic particle inspection shall be in accordance with ASTM E 109.
Any crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration is not acceptable.
3. Ultra-sonic inspection shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
4. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all
shop and field connections shall be identified.

B. Inspection
1. Access to places where material for this Contract is being fabricated or produced
shall be provided to the Engineers Representative and the Testing Agency for the
purpose of inspection and testing.
2. The Engineers Representative and the Testing Agency may inspect structural steel
at the plant before shipment; however, the Engineers Representative reserves the
right to reject any material, at any time before final acceptance, which does not
conform to all of the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
3. The Testing Agency shall perform the specified tests and submit reports to the
Engineers Representative. Corrective measures, including additional and more
complete testing, which may result from these tests shall be the Contractors
responsibility; all costs of which shall be paid for by the Contractor.
New Jahra Hospital
4. The Contractor shall coordinate and allow for time for the Testing Agency to
complete all testing and inspections prior to shop painting.
5. The Testing Agency shall prepare test specimen from steel samples cut from
delivered material and shall conduct tension tests in accordance with ASTM A6. The
Contractor shall mill order 1.0 metre extra length for the members noted on the
Drawings to provide the steel for testing.

3.10 LOCATIONS

A. For location refer to Engineers drawings. (Almost all floors.)

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/054000-1 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 054000

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Design, engineering, furnishing and installation of metal framing and support system
for the following applications:
a. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
b. Framing for exterior soffits and ceilings.
2. All connections, bracing, bridging and accessories.

1. Division 05 Section Structural Steel Framing for structural building framing.
2. Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for wood blocking and
curbing.
3. Division 06 Section Sheathing for exterior wall sheathing.
4. Division 09 Section Non-Structural Metal Framing for interior partition framing.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
B. International Building Code, 2009 Edition, referred to herein as IBC 2009.
C. ASCE/SEI 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, referred to
herein as ASCE/SEI 7-05.
D. ASTM Standards:
1. A123 - Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
2. A645 - Steel Sheet, Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially
Heat Treated.
3. A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
4. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
5. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members; 2001.
6. A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability
7. A1011/A1011M - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
8. B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 1998.
9. C954-04 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to
0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.
10. C-955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Track) and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and
Metal Plaster Base.
11. C-1007 Standard Specification for the Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and
Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.
12. C1513 Standard Specification For Steel Tapping Screws For Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
C. ANSI - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
New Jahra Hospital
D. AWCI: Specifications Guide for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

E. AWS A 2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
F. AWS D 1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code.
G. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual.
H. ML/SFA: Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing.
I. AISC - LRFD Manual of Steel Construction; third edition.
J. AISI - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; 1996.

A. Structural performance: Design, engineer and provide a complete metal framing and
support system having deflection limits as specified herein under the full inward and
outward lateral load as indicated herein and in all cases not less than as prescribed by
applicable codes for this project location. Deflection and structural calculations shall not
include any structural benefit from the faade systems; metal framing alone shall carry the
loads. Where a member supports more than one finish, the most restrictive deflection shall
govern.
1. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure
of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to
seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
2. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building
structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
3. Deflection limits: Stud spacing shall be 16 inches maximum on center unless
indicated otherwise.
a. Deflection limit for exterior metal panel systems: L/175 where L is the length of
the steel member.
b. Deflection limit for curtain wall systems: L/175 where L is the length of the
clear span

A. Delegated Engineering and Design: Provide the services of a Specialty Structural Engineer
(SSE) who shall be a Professional Engineer, and who shall design, engineer, and certify that
the work of this section meets or exceeds the requirements specified in this section. The
SSE shall assume professional responsibility for the design of all cold formed metal framing
components and their connections including connections to the base building structure.
Design decisions which effect visual characteristics shall be subject to the approval and
modifications of the Architect.
B. Loads: Design cold formed metal framing and connections to support total loads including
dead loads, live loads, earthquake loads, thermal loads, wind loads and other loads as
prescribed by the governing building code by reference standards, and as described
herein.
1. Pressures and loads used for design shall satisfy the Design Performance
Requirements listed herein. Loads shall be combinded per the requirements of ASCE
7-05. Single loads, shall not to be reduced. An allowable stress increase of one third,
or any other value, shall not be used in conjunction with any load combination.
2. Wind pressures shall be assumed to act perpendicular to flat surfaces supported by
cold formed metal framing, regardless of the surface orientation. Wind pressures
shall be assumed to act perpendicular to tangents of curved surfaces. At corners
and other changes in plane, both surfaces shall be assumed to experience their
inward design pressures simultaneously, and their outward design pressures
simultaneously. Design for simultaneous occurrence of inward design pressure on
one surface, and outward design pressure on the adjoining surface, is not required
New Jahra Hospital
except at parapet conditions where the requirements of ASCE 7-05 must be
followed.
New Jahra Hospital

3. Cold formed metal framing must also carry dead, wind and earthquake loads and live
loads from work specified in other sections supported by cold formed metal framing.
C. Structural Performance: Cold-formed metal framing to receive exterior cladding and
components shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. Wind pressures shall be considered
to act normal to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Seismic Performance: Cold-formed metal framing to receive exterior cladding and
components, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7-05.
E. Allowable Connection Points: Connect cold formed metal framing to building structure only
at locations approved by Structural Engineer of Record (SER) and as indicated on the
approved shop drawings.
F. Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal
movement due to expansion and contraction for a material temperature range of -20F to
+180F (-29C to +82C). Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners,
failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement will not be
permitted.
G. Provide movable joints to accommodate the full range of manufacturing tolerances, field
tolerances, thermal movement, wind and seismic movement, floor and beam deflections
and column settlement. Joints shall accommodate the worst possible combination of
effects so as to prevent internal stress, failure, deterioration or failure of weather seals.
1. Allow for the following movement: Typical superstructure members are designed to
deflect L/360 for live loads, L/240 for the combined effects of dead and live loads,
and no more than 1/2-inch. Superstructure members supporting masonry are
designed to deflect the lesser of L/600.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following product data:
1. List of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to demonstrate compliance
with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show materials, shop coatings, steel thickness, details of fabrication, details of
attachment to adjoining work, size, location and spacing of fasteners for attaching
framing to itself, location, size and spacing of attachment to the structure,
accessories and their installation, and critical installation procedures. Include plans,
elevations, sections and details. All shop drawings shall bear the signature and
stamp of the registered Professional Engineer who designed the framing system and
oversaw the production of the Shop Drawings.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer.
C. Certifications:
1. Certifications shall be statements from the manufacturer certifying that the materials
conform to the appropriate requirements as outlined in the Contract Documents.
2. Submit certification confirming that all welders to be employed on the work have
passed American Welding Society Standard B3.0. Welders shall have passed the
qualification tests within the preceding 12 month period from date of submission of
certificates.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Calculations:
1. Submit engineering calculations or data for typical and special conditions for exterior
wall components and connections.
2. Engineering calculations or data shall be submitted verifying the framing assembly's
ability to meet or exceed the specified design requirements and the requirements of
governing codes and authorities. In the event of a conflict between these
requirements, the more stringent requirements shall govern, as determined by the
Architect. These calculations shall include, but not be limited to the following items:
1. Steel Framing, including built-up framing supporting windows against lateral
and gravity loads.
2. All connections (member to member, and member to structure) shall be
thoroughly examined and designed.
3. Wall bridging shall be designed to provide resistance to minor axis bending
and rotation of wall studs. Bridging spacing shall not exceed 6 feet. Provide
bridging wherever masonry, including stone, is located in conjunction with
cold formed metal framing, and elsewhere as required by design requirements.
4. Wall framing that does not have continuous sheathing applied to one side shall
be checked for compression in the unsheathed flanges and compression
flange bracing shall be added as required.
5. Calculations shall be performed by a Professional Engineer. The submitted
calculations shall be affixed with the Engineer's registration stamp and
signature.
E. Descriptive Literature:
1. Manufacturer's literature containing product and installation specifications and
details.

A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI, MF/SLA and
AWS D l.3 requirements.
B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods necessary for proper performance of the work of this Section.
C. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
D. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill,
shop, or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by the Owner.
E. However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract
requirements, nor shall inspectors acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later
rejection of same by the Owner or Architect if defects are discovered.
F. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect
and shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection.
G. Single Source Responsibility: In order to provide total systems, all materials shall be the
products of one of the manufacturers specified herein.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum 3 years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating
previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product
manufacturer.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be signed and
sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

A. Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Products shall be protected from conditions that may cause any physical damage.
C. Materials shall be stored on a flat plane.
D. Any damaged materials shall be removed from the job site immediately.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing
interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such
trades for the installation of their work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, drawings
and specifications are based on products by the following listed manufacturers or a
comparable product with characteristics that meet or exceed the requirements specified
herein as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with requirements.
B. Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for cold-formed metal
framing include the following:
1. Marino\WARE.
2. Clark/Dietrich Building Systems.
3. Superior Steel Studs, Inc.
4. The Steel Network, Inc.
C. Studs shall be based on:
1. Marino/Ware Type SW
2. Clark/Dietrich Type CSJ
3. Superior Type SSJ
4. Steel Network Type SG and JS
D. Studs, runners (track), bracing and bridging shall be manufactured per ASTM Specification
C-955.
1. Stud gage: As required by design criteria, but minimum 18 gage.
2. Track gage: As required by design criteria, but minimum 18 gage.
3. Bridging gage: As required by design criteria, but minimum 16 gage. (Dietrich "U"
channel, or equal.)
E. Sheet Materials:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated
otherwise.
F. All galvanized studs and accessories, 16 gage or heavier, shall be formed from steel with a
minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and as set forth in Section A3.1 of the AISI "Specification
for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition.
New Jahra Hospital
G. All galvanized studs and accessories, 18 gage, shall be formed from steel with a minimum
yield strength of 33 ksi and as set forth in Section A3.1 of the AISI " North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition.
H. All galvanized studs and accessories shall have a minimum G-60 coating.
I. Physical properties and allowable load capabilities of members shall be developed in
accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural
Members", latest edition.
J. In accordance with AISI Section D4, rigid collateral facing materials may be considered as
adequate support of members against rotation.
K. Provide color coding or other marking designation to distinguish the installation of various
gages of studs. Markings shall be applied along the full length of the member.
L. Slotted Deflection Track: Manufacturers single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track: punched
with vertical slots in both legs. Steel Sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Dietrich Metal Framing, SLP-
TRK Slotted Deflection Track by Brady Innovations or equivalent.
M. Channel Bridging or Bracing: U-Channel Assembly; Base metal thickness of .0538 inch
(1.37mm) and minimum inch (12.7mm) wide flanges.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2. Dietrich Metal Framing: Spazzer 5400 Bridging and Bracing Bar (SPZS)] [Spazzer
Bar Guard (SPBG)].
3. U-Channel Assembly: [3/4 inches] [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches]
a. Dietrich Metal Framing; EasyClip U-Series Clip Angle or equivalent
N. Vertical Deflection Clips (non-gravity load-bearing framing): Manufacturer's standard
bypass and head clips as required, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and
downward vertical displacement of primary structure using mechanical fasteners.
1. VertiClip
including step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw

attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical
movement. Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50 (340), Class 1 50 ksi (340
MPa)_ minimum yield strength, 65 ksi (450 MPa) minimum tensile strength, G-90
(Z275) hot-dipped galvanized coating for Exterior Framing and G-60 (Z180) hot-
dipped galvanized coating for Interior Framing. 68 mils (14 gauge) minimum
thickness for Exterior and 33 mil (20 gauge) for Interior. Provide clips with attached
bushing and screw of the series, size and configuration as required by the structural
design calculations, Approved Manufacturer: The Steel Network, Inc. (TSN) or
approved equal.
a. TSN product VertiClip SL: Exterior head of wall.
b. TSN product VertiClip SLD: Interior head of wall.
c. TSN product VertiTrack VTX: Exterior head of wall pre-assembled with track.
d. TSN product VertiTrack VTD: Interior head of wall pre-assembled with track.
e. TSN product VertiClip SLS: By-pass structure.
O. Drift Clips (non-load-bearing framing): If so required by project requirements and as
indicated on approved shop drawings: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head of wall
clips (as required), capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical
displacement and lateral drift of primary structure using mechanical fasteners.
1. DriftClip including step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw
attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical and lateral
movement. Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50 (340), Class 1 50 ksi (340
MPa)_ minimum yield strength, 65 ksi (450 MPa) minimum tensile strength, G-90
(Z275) hot-dipped galvanized coating for Exterior Framing and G-60 (Z180) hot-
dipped galvanized coating for Interior Framing. 68 mils (14 gauge) minimum
thickness for Exterior and 33 mil (20 gauge) for Interior. Provide clips with attached
New Jahra Hospital
bushing and screw of the series, size and configuration as required by the structural
design calculations. Approved Manufacturer: The Steel Network, Inc. (TSN) or
approved equal.
a. TSN product DriftClip DSL: Exterior head of wall.
b. TSN product DriftClip DSLD: Interior head of wall.
c. TSN product DriftClip DSLB: By-pass structural pour stop at floor slab.
d. TSN product DriftClip DSLS: By-pass structure.

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Liquid zinc coating containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight
in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-21035A for repair of
hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements. Acceptable products include:
1. ZRC Worldwide Inc., Marshfield MA, product: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound.
2. Duncan Galvanizing, Everett MA, product: ZIRP.
3. American Polywater Corp., Stillwater, MN, CG Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing.
P. Compressible Filler:
1. Compressible filler shall be "Ceramar" flexible foam expansion joint filler
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Elgin, IL (800) 342-5976 or approved equal,
conforming to ASTM D 1752.
a. Size: As detailed on the Drawings.

2.03 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems : Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners:
1. Screws shall be manufactured by HILTI with "Kwik Seal" coating, or as approved
equal.
2. Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
3. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.04 PRE-ERECTION FABRICATION
A. Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting. Fabricate panels
square with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements;
attach components in a manner to prevent racking.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect previous work, related work, and conditions under which this work is to be
performed and notify Contractor in writing of all deficiencies and conditions detrimental to
the proper completion of this work.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrates, previous work and
conditions.

3.02 ERECTION - GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
requirements in this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as
indicated on approved Shop Drawings, or where not indicated, as standard with
fabricator. Wire tying or clip fasteners of framing members is not permitted.
a. Where welding is indicated or required on approved Shop Drawings: Comply
with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to approved Shop
Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three
exposed screw threads.
D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for
track or tension members.
E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and
permanent connections to framing are secured.
F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
standard punched openings.
H. Accurately align and attach runners in strict compliance with manufacturers
recommendations and approved shop drawings. Allow for main structure deflection at top
runner to avoid transferring load stud system. Allow for a minimum of movement between
deflection track, or deflection clip system and framing as indicated above, unless otherwise
required or indicated
1. Frame wall openings with additional framing members at perimeter of openings in
accordance with engineering requirements.
a. Provide steel box headers formed from manufacturers standard C-shapes
over wall openings as indicated and required to transfer load to supporting
studs.
2. Align holes in framing members to facilitate electrical conduit and piping work.
3. Provide all connections and accessories to accomplish a complete structural
system.
4. Provide all needed members for proper fastening interior gypsum wallboard.
New Jahra Hospital
I. Bracing:
1. Provide continuous 1-1/2 inch cold- formed channel horizontal bracing within 10 to
12 inches of tops of stud.
2. Connect bracing to each stud as indicated on approved shop drawings.
3. Provide additional bridging and bracing as recommended by manufacturer, as
necessary, and as indicated on approved shop drawings.
4. Provide kick-back bracing perpendicular to plane of framing system and securely
anchored to building structure needed to create a complete structural system
meeting specified performance requirements.

J. Touch-up damaged metal coatings, with galvanize repair paint.

3.03 ERECTION OF STUDDING
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers instructions and approved shop
drawings.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place as
indicated on approved engineered shop drawings, at maximum 16 inches on center.
C. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to
top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on approved shop drawings; not more
than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings.
D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and
window jambs.
1. Approved Alternate: In lieu of providing 2 CFMF members in a nested
configuration, provide JamStud by The Steel Network consisting of a 50ksi
minimum single member section. Properties must be Ixx effective > = 5.725 in^4 and
Ma >= 57.14 kips- in or stronger.
Note: Additional CFMF member abutting JamStud or nested configuration,
where indicated on the Drawings, is still required for either jamb framing
configuration.
C. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
D. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design
requirements.
E. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
F. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support. Install specified clip system for vertical deflection of
primary building structure in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
G. Building expansion joints:
1. Install foam compressible filler between vertical studs at building expansion joints.
H. Attach cross studs, furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to
prevent stud rotation.
J. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized and primed surfaces with primer.

3.04 ERECTION (WIND LOAD ONLY)
A. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause
distortion in any member.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the plans.
C. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common
structural element or they shall be butt-welded spliced together.
D. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both
upper and lower tracks.
E. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads,
at first standing stair rails, and elsewhere to furnish support and shall be securely attached
to supporting members.
1. Approved Alternate: StiffClip
HE by The Steel Network.

F. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows
shall be spaced according to the following schedule. Wall up to 10 foot height; one row at
mid-height. Wall exceeding 10 feet in height; bridging rows spaced not to exceed 5 feet on-
center. Install an additional row of horizontal bridging 12 inches beneath track.
1. Recommended Bridging Connection: BridgeClips by The Steel Network. Provide
attachment through stud punch-out clamping onto stud web and wrapping around
bridging channel. Provide holes for screw attachment to stud web and channel.

3.05 ERECTION (AXIAL LOAD-BEARING)
A. Handling and lifting of prefabricated frame panels shall be done in a manner as to not
cause distortion in any members.
B. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the plans, and
as designed and detailed on approved shop drawings.
C. Complete uniform and level bearing support shall be provided for the bottom track.
D. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common
structural element or they shall be butt welded or spliced together.
E. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both
upper and lower tracks.
F. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting studs as shown on the plans,
and as designed and detailed on approved shop drawings.
G. Jack studs shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at free
standing stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support and shall be securely attached to
supporting members.
H. Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed.
I. Wall stud bridging shall be installed in a manner to provide resistance to both minor axis
bending and rotation. Bridging rows shall be equally spaced not to exceed 4 feet on-
center.
1. Recommended Bridging Connection: BridgeClips by The Steel Network. Provide
attachment through stud punch-out clamping onto stud web and wrapping around
bridging channel. Provide holes for screw attachment to stud web and channel.
J. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as sheer walls for frame stability and
lateral load resistance. Such stud walls shall be braced as indicated on plans and
specifications.
K. Splices in axially loaded studs are not be permitted. Provide insulation equal to that
specified elsewhere in all doubled jamb studs and double header member which will not be
accessible to the insulation contractor.
New Jahra Hospital

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Vertical alignment (plumbness) of studs shall be within 1/960th (1/8" in 10'-0") of the span.
B. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of walls shall be within 1/960th (1/8" in 10'-0") of their
respective lengths.
C. Spacing of studs shall not be more than + 1/8" from the designed spacing providing that
the cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials.
D. Prefabricated panels shall not be more than 1/8" out of square within the length of that
panel.

A. Coordinate and cooperate with the Owners special testing inspector for installation
inspections in accordance with Structural Tests and Special Inspections program. Testing
and inspections performed by Owners special inspector may include, but are not
necessarily limited to inspection of the following:
1. All welding operations of elements of the seismic force-resisting system.
2. Screw attachment, bolting, anchoring, and other fastening of components within the
seismic force-resisting system including struts, braces, and hold-downs.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/055000-1 Metal Fabrications
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide miscellaneous metal work shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
1. Steel access ladders
2. Ladder safety cages
3. Structural steel door frames
4. Support angles for elevator door sills
5. Steel framing and supports for overhead coiling doors and grilles.
6. Equipment supports.
7. Safety nosings
8. Steel framing and support for mechanical and electrical equipment
9. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in
other Sections.
10. Miscellaneous framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are
not specified in other Sections
1. Division 05 Section Structural Steel for structural steel framing for elevator divider
beams and guide rail supports.
2. Division 05 Section Pipe and Tube Railings for interior and exterior steel pipe rails.
3. Division 05 Section Metal Gratings for steel gratings.
4. Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for wood blocking attached to
miscellaneous metals.
5. Division 09 Section Painting for field finishing of miscellaneous metal materials.
6. Division 11 Section Loading Dock Equipment for loading dock edge angles.

A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
manufacturers specifications, material descriptions, and other data needed to demonstrate
compliance with specified requirements for each factory-fabricated product including
brackets, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
2. Shop drawings and calculations for guardrails indicated to comply with certain
design loading, shall be prepared by and bear the stamp of a qualified structural
engineer.

New Jahra Hospital


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding
Society Code [AWS] "Standard Qualification Procedures."

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is experienced in
providing engineering services for systems of the kind indicated.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by taking accurate field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Allow for field cutting and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication
is not possible.
2. Do not field cut or fit items which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers written recommendations to ensure that shop primers
and topcoats are compatible with one another.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, limit materials to
those which are free from surface blemishes, pitting, rolled trade names, and roughness.

B. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 10.
3. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted.
5. Steel Tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A501.
6. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36 or
ASTM A283, Grade C or D.
7. Threaded Rod: ASTM A307, Grade C.
8. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
a. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.
b. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33,
with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.

C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular use.
Provide hot-dip galvanized fasteners for connecting to galvanized steel. Comply with the
following standards as pertinent.
1. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

New Jahra Hospital
2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
a. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item
being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
3. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
4. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
5. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
6. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
7. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
8. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
9. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
10. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless
otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable
iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed,
all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
11. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
a. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
12. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)
complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps
or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated
to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

D. Shop Paint: shall be Modified Alkyd primer equal to Tnemec No. 10-99G Green Metal
Primer, Dupont 681 FD Primer, or Architect approved substitute.
1. All steel members, except galvanized items, after they are prepared, shall be prime
painted before shipping. All surfaces shall be prime painted, except machined
surfaces, surfaces which are to be welded and surfaces to be encased in concrete.
Primer Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into
the joints and other open surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be
given two coats. Dry film thickness per coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4
mils.
2. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the specified
primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.

E. Galvanizing: For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality and performance,
provide factory-applied metal coatings as specified by Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA
02149, (617) 389-8440.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the
hot-dip process, Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing. Comply with ASTM A123 for
fabricated products and ASTM A153 for hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing
specified in referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc.

New Jahra Hospital

2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Grout: Pre-mixed, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-shrink, non-metallic cement based
grout complying with ASTM C1107 "Standard Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic
Grout - Non Shrink"; Five Star Grout or Architect approved substitute.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings, use materials
of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and durability in the
work of this Section.
B. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and levels.
Fabricate work with uniform, hairline tight joints. Form welded joints and seams
continuously and grind flush and smooth to be invisible after painting. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible, for exposed fasteners, use hex head bolts or Phillips head
machine screws. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
C. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Clearly label pieces in shop to facilitate
field assembly.
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove all burrs. Ease exposed edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces to comply with
NOMMAs Voluntary Joint Finish Standards for Type 2 welds: completely sanded
joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.

New Jahra Hospital
5. Utilize welded joints, prequalified by AWS for the procedure and position used for all
partial and complete joint penetration welds.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units
and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
J. Toilet partitions: Fabricate support system to carry the entire load of toilet partitions to the
structure above without transferring any horizontal or vertical load to ceiling system.
Provide frequently spaced holes for multiple adjustment. Provide diagonal braces. Unistrut
type members are acceptable.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous framing and supports and interior miscellaneous framing
and supports where indicated.
D. Prime interior miscellaneous framing and supports with specified primer where galvanizing
is not indicated.

2.05 LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Ladders, unless otherwise noted, shall be solid section continuous slide rails, 18 inches
apart with 1-inch diameter solid steel bar rungs spaced 12-inch on centers with ends
shouldered into side rails.
C. Provide side rails of steel bar 3/8- inch by 3- inches with eased edges. Extend at least 42-
inch above top rung and return to wall or structure. Securely anchor each ladder siderail
with clip angles at top, bottom and intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-0" on
center. Provide 7-inch clearance from walls to centerline of rungs, unless noted otherwise
within elevator pits.
D. Fit rungs in holes drilled in side rails. Plug weld and grind smooth to touch. Provide rungs
with non-slip top surface by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung.
E. Finish: Exterior ladders shall be hot dip galvanized. Interior ladders shall be primed in the
shop.

New Jahra Hospital
F. Provide ladder safety cage complying with OSHA 1910.27(d)(1). Fabricate hoops from 3 x
3/8 steel flat bar spaced 4-0 on center, and vertical bars of 2 x 3/8 steel flat bars
spaced as indicated. Assemble and fasten safety cage to ladder rails by welding.
G. Exterior ladders shall be hot dip galvanized with factory applied primer.

2.06 ELEVATOR SILL SUPPORT
A. Furnish and install steel angle sub sills for support of elevator sills at floor landings.
B. Fabricate angles to suit conditions. Provide straps for anchoring angles into concrete.

2.07 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Prime plates with specified primer, except galvanized plates left exposed to weather or
used in exterior walls.

2.08 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.09 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Fabricate structural-steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to
dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8-by-1-1/2-inch steel channel stops,
unless otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed
joints. Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws, uniformly
spaced at not more than 10 inches o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to
accept finish hardware.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into
adjoining concrete.
B. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames
for anchoring frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts.
C. Finish: Exterior steel frames shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

2.10 METAL TRENCH COVERS
A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Pattern: Checkered.
B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
C. Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
D. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.

2.11 METAL SAFETY NOSINGS
A. Safety Nosings for Exterior Cast-In-Place Stairs: Extruded aluminum base, 6063-T6 with
abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide and silicon carbide granules in an epoxy matrix.

New Jahra Hospital

1. Acceptable Product: Type FA311D as manufactured by American Safety Tread Co.,
Helena, AL 35080, (800) 245-4881.
2. Color: As selected by the Architect.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. C. Shop Paint: All steel members, except galvanized items, after they are prepared, shall be
prime painted before shipping. All surfaces shall be prime painted, except machined
surfaces, surfaces which are to be welded and surfaces to be encased in concrete. Primer
Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into the joints and
other open surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats. Dry
film thickness per coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4 mils.
1. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the specified
primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
D. Galvanizing: Galvanize materials in accordance with ASTM A 153 for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123 for other steel and iron products. Galvanizing shall provide
an acceptable substrate for applied coatings. The dry kettle process shall be used to
eliminate any flux inclusions on the surface of the galvanized material.
1. Prior to galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a pre flux solution (zinc
ammonium chloride.
2. The wet kettle process shall be prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.
B. Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack. Anchor firmly into
position. Comply with requirements, manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Where field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures of manual-
shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for methods to be used
in correcting welding work and the following:

New Jahra Hospital
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces to comply with
NOMMAs Voluntary Joint Finish Standards for Type 2 welds: completely sanded
joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.
5. Comply with AWS D1.1 specifications. Utilize prequalified welded joints appropriate
for processes and positions used for all full and partial joint penetration welds.
E. Fastening to In-place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded
fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag
screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
F. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.03 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for toilet partitions, cabinets, and equipment securely to and rigidly brace
from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on concrete, steel columns, or other structural steel supports. Secure
girders with anchor bolts embedded in concrete, with bolts through top plates of pipe
columns, or connect to structural steel supports by bolting or welding.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on
concrete, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
2. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.

3.04 INSTALLING SAFETY NOSINGS
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with
tread surfaces.

3.05 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the specified touch-up repair
primer by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.4-mil dry film thickness to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

New Jahra Hospital
B. Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds,
bolted connections and abraded areas.
1. For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements
of ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall
have 95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied
galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A
123 or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite
paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/055213-1 Pipe and Tube Railings
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 055213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Handrails, railings, and guardrail systems attached or adjacent to stairs.
2. Handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
3. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
1. Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete for concrete cast-in-place stairs.
2. Division 05 Section Decorative Metal Railings for custom stainless steel and glass
rail and guardrails.
3. Division 09 Section Painting for field finishing.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. "Structural Welding Code - Steel" of American Welding Society, AWS D1.1, latest edition,
with current supplements and addenda.
B. SSPC: The Society of Protective Coatings; Surface Preparation Specifications and
Practices.
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) minimum standards for
construction, proportions and dimensions of fixed metal stairs.

A. Structural Performance Requirements: Engineer, fabricate, and install railing systems to
withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working
stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to
produce the maximum stress in each component.
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction along the top.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
manufacturers specifications, installation procedures, and other data needed to
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Shop drawings and calculations for metal rails indicated to comply with certain
design loading, shall be prepared by and bear the stamp of a licensed structural
engineer.

New Jahra Hospital


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in engineering and producing steel fabrications
similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance
and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the
Work.
B. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble all items specified as work of this section to the greatest
extent possible to minimize field splicing. Disassemble units as required for shipping and
handling. Clearly mark units for reassembling in the field.
C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is experienced in
providing engineering services for metal rail systems of the kind indicated.
E. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs in NAAMM AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual, for commercial class of
stair, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.

1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal rails. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
C. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, directed by the Architect, or required by
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide materials complying with the following
minimum standards:
1. Steel Bars and Bar-Size Shapes: ASTM A36.
2. Steel Tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A501.

New Jahra Hospital
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted.
a. Steel pipe used for guardrail posts and handrail posts shall be Schedule 80.
4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or
required by structural loads.
b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
5. Shop Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer," "Rustoleum number 5769 Primer,"
Dupont 681 FD Primer; or equal as approved by the Architect.

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for exterior applications.
B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Comply with AWS specifications. Select according to
AWS specifications for type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended for
color match, strength and compatibility in the fabricated items.
C. Fasteners: Comply with ASTM A307, grade A. Types and sizes of bolts required for
anchoring rail and guard construction to concrete or steel shall be determined by load
requirements and surface construction to which stairs are to be anchored.
1. Concealed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners for the interconnection of
handrail and railing components, and for all other connections, except where
exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Provide anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint (Cold-applied asphaltic mastic).
F. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation.

2.03 STEEL TUBE HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. General: Fabricate railing and guardrail systems from steel tubing, to comply with
requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including
post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings and guardrails in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp elements,
and abrasive or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. Accurately cut, miter,
weld, and grind to achieve flush surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.

New Jahra Hospital
G. Connections: Fabricate railings and guardrails with welded connections, unless otherwise
indicated. Make joints flush, with concealed and seamless fittings. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around
at connections, including at fittings.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces to comply with NOMMAs
Voluntary Joint Finish Standards for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some
undercutting and pinholes okay.
5. Comply with AWS D1.1 specifications. Utilize prequalified welded joints, appropriate
for processes and positions utilized for all full and partial joint penetration welds.

H. Form changes in direction to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work
1. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of components.

I. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

J. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns and return to within 1/8 inch of wall.

K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing and guardrail members to other work, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Wall brackets:
a. Manufacturer: R & B Wagner, Inc., Butler, WI 53007 (414) 461-2111 (800-786-
2111), or as approved equal.
b. Type: Type P-3 malleable bracket with Style F-3, with anchor plate, (1) 7/16
inch diameter hole and (3) 1/4 inch diameter tapped holes with 1/4 inch round
head bolts. Dimension from wall to tubing centerline, 2-1/2 inches, unless

L. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and guardrails to
concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads
imposed by railings and guardrails. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
structure.

M. Stair Gates: Fabricate gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill
of 1/2-inch diameter vertical rods welded to channel frame top and bottom[1-1/2 -inch
square mesh]. Provide cam-type self-closing hinges, latch (operable from both sides),
overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite
egress, and all appurtenances required for a complete installation.

N. Finish:
1. Interior Steel Rails and Guards: Shop primed.

2.04 FINISHES
B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and other
foreign matter by wire brushing or scraping (power wire brushing if necessary). Grind
smooth any sharp projections. Oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent.
Thoroughly clean all steel of all loose mill scale as follows: Interior Steel Rails, and Guards:
SSPC SP3, Power Tool Cleaning.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Painting: All steel members, after they are prepared, shall be painted before shipping. All
surfaces shall be painted, except machined surfaces, surfaces which are to be welded, and
surfaces to be encased in concrete. Surfaces encased in concrete shall receive a coating
of bituminous paint. Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and
worked into the joints and other open surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall
be given two coats. Dry film thickness per coat of prime paint shall be not less than 2.4
mils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and
the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position.
1. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
2. Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and
guards, and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
B. Rails and Guardrail Systems: Set railings and guardrails accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings.
a. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
b. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
c. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
2. Railing Connections:
a. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting
railing components.
b. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther
apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint
internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal
sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.
3. Anchoring Posts:
a. At Steel Stairs: Weld to stringers.
b. At Cast-In-Place Concrete: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete for installing posts. Fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
3. Attaching Handrails to Walls: Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and anchor
plates in a manner required to meet code requirements.
a. Secure rails to walls with wall brackets and anchor plates. Provide brackets
with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall
surface.
b. Return handrail ends to within 1/8" of wall.
c. At metal stud walls install wall bracket anchor plate through wall to steel
reinforcing plate attached to studs with 3/8 inch toggle or molly bolts, except if
wood blocking is indicated secure anchor plate with 3/8 inch diameter round
head wood screw.

New Jahra Hospital
d. At masonry or concrete walls secure anchor plates with 3/8 inch expansion
bolts.
e. Secure wall brackets to anchor plates with (3) round head bolts into threaded
holes in anchor plate.
C. Upon completion of installation, touch-up field welds and abraded surfaces, using primer
specified for shop use.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Metal work shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines, angles, and arrisways.
Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines, and surfaces. Thickness of metal,
details of metal, details of assembly and support shall give ample strength and stiffness for
the intended purpose.
B. Conceal fastenings where practicable. For permanent connections, use welds where
possible. Welds exposed to view shall be ground and dressed smooth.
C. Provide lugs, clips, anchors, and miscellaneous fastenings necessary for complete
assembly and installation. Miter corners and angels of exposed moldings and frames.
D. Make trim in longest lengths possible, locate joints symmetrically. Fit adjacent pieces with
hairline joints and aligned surfaces. Space exposed screws evenly and symmetrically.
E. Bolted and Screwed Connections:
1. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades.
2. Use bolts for field connections only. Provide washers under heads and nuts bearing
on wood. Draw all nuts tight and nick threads of permanent connections. Use
beveled washers where bearing is on sloped surfaces.
3. Where screws must be used for permanent connections in ferrous metal, use flat
head type, countersunk, with screw slots filled and finished smooth and flush.

3.04 CLEANING, TOUCH UP, AND PROTECTION
A. Touch up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence
of repair. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace
work that cannot be successfully cleaned or repaired.
B. Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds,
bolted connections and abraded areas.
C. Primer: Apply the specified field touch-up primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.4
mils. Apply primer immediately after cleaning.
D. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time
of final acceptance. Remove protections and re-clean as necessary immediately before
final acceptance.
END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/055300-1 Metal Gratings
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 055300

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Metal bar gratings.
2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.
3. Steel stairs with metal grating treads and platforms.
1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components
and grating at areaways.
2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and
guardrails.

A. Delegated Design: Design stairs with metal grating treads and platforms, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Gratings, stairs with grating treads, stair platforms with gratings,
shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits
and under conditions indicated.
1. Stairs and stair platforms: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of not less than
100 lbf per sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf. with deflection of stringer not to
exceed 1/360 of span.
2. Limit deflection of gratings to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

C. Seismic Performance: Stair framing, including attachments to other construction, shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7-05.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
manufacturers specifications, installation procedures, and other data needed to
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings including plans, sections, details, and interface of
the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. Include calculations for the
design of stairs specified in this section.
1. Shop drawings and calculations for stairs platforms indicated to comply with certain
design loading, shall be prepared by and bear the stamp of a licensed structural
engineer.

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in engineering and producing steel fabrications
similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance
and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the
Work.
B. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble all items specified as work of this section to the greatest
extent possible to minimize field splicing. Disassemble units as required for shipping and
handling. Clearly mark units for reassembling in the field.

New Jahra Hospital
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is experienced in
providing engineering services for metal stair systems of the kind indicated.
D. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair
designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, support framing, and other
construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, stairs, and supports.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods, posts, and struts with other work so that they will not
encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or
ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.
D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510.

2.02 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

New Jahra Hospital
2. Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and
nuts, ASTM F594.
D. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
that is welded.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.04 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Welded Steel Grating:
1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inch o.c.
2. Bearing Bar Depth: As indicated.
3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As indicated.
4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches o.c.
5. Traffic Surface: Plain for interior gratings. Serrated for exterior gratings.
6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft.
of coated surface.
B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
1. Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section composed of
rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch or
more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars.
2. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
3. Alternatively, furnish galvanized malleable-iron flange clam with galvanized bolt for
securing grating to supports. Furnish as a system designed to be installed from
above grating by one person.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
i) Kee Industrial Products, Inc.; Grating Clip.
ii) Lindapter North America, Inc.; Grate-Fast.
C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit
grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.
1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of
same size and material as bearing bars.
D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.05 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS
A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware and similar items.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.
2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally
welded anchors.
B. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.

New Jahra Hospital

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed
to support indicated loads.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate
and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place
and to support indicated loads.
1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Toeplate Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
G. Metal Framed Stairs, Walkways, Equipment Platforms, and roof crossovers: Form treads,
walkways, platforms and crossovers to configurations shown from metal bar grating;
fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." Fabricate
stringers, walkway and platform frames of structural steel channels, angles, plates, or a
combination thereof.
1. Construct stair treads from welded steel grating supported at each end with carriage
angles welded to channel stringers.
2. Construct walkways, platforms and crossovers from welded steel grating supported
at each end with angles, channels or plates.
3. Anchor grating system to building structure by means of direct attachment to the
structural framing, imbedded concrete inserts or expansion bolts. Coordinate size,
spacing and location of supports with adjacent equipment to be accessed.
Adequately brace support framing to meet all seismic requirements.
H. Metal Bar-Grating Stair Fabrication:
1. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
a. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
b. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
c. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces
slope to drain.
2. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges
to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation
or otherwise impairing work.
5. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

New Jahra Hospital
6. Weld connections to comply with the following:
a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
e. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint,
some undercutting and pinholes okay.
7. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-
head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where
least conspicuous.
8. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
9. Stair Framing:
a. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
i) Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
b. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
c. Shop connections can be made by welding or bolting. Fabricate framing for
field-bolted connections.
d. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods,
posts, or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.
Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair
width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
10. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.
11. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from
metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating
Manual."
a. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with 1-1/2-by-3/16-
inch bearing bars at 1-3/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
b. Design stairs and platforms to limit grating spans to less than 5 feet, 3 inches
for interior gratings and 4 feet, 7 inches for exterior gratings.
c. Surface: Plain for interior gratings. Serrated for exterior gratings.
d. Finish: Galvanized.
e. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle
or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to
stringers with bolts.
f. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads.
Provide toeplates at open-sided edges of grating platforms.

2.07 STEEL FINISHES
B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

New Jahra Hospital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for
concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete or masonry.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that have been hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.
E. Attach toeplates to guardrail posts at locations indicated.
F. Stair Framing: Erect stair framing in accordance with approved shop drawings. Join
members by field bolting. Do not field weld galvanized framing.

3.02 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating
standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation
clearances and standard anchoring details.
B. Attach units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if
not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions
shown. Do not field weld galvanized grating.

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/057300-1 Decorative Metal Railings
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 057300

DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes decorative railings of the following type:
1. Post supported railings with glass infill and custom cap.

1. Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Division 05 Section Pipe and Tube Railings for guard rails fabricated from steel pipe
and tube.
3. Division 05 Section Decorative Metal.

A. Structural Performance Requirements: Engineer, fabricate, and install railings capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working
stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections.
1. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction along the top.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction along the top.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.
Samples need not be full height.
2. Provide samples of each distinctly different post fastening method.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing system through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the jurisdiction and who is experienced in providing engineering services for
railing systems of the kind indicated.

New Jahra Hospital
A. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Materials must be kept in original
packing until installation.
B. Store handrails and railing systems in clean dry location, away from uncured concrete and
masonry, protected against damage of any kind.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.

1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Custom, pre-engineered, mechanically fastened guardrail
systems shall be as manufactured by Livers Bronze Co., Kansas city, MO 64132, (816) 300-
2828, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements provide either the named product or a
comparable materials with characteristics that meet or exceed the requirements specified
herein, as approved by the Architect.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Rails and Tubular Components: Stainless steel grade AISI 316; tubes 1-1/2" diameter.
C. Posts and other Components: Stainless steel grade AISI 316.
1. Fittings: Component fittings including handrail attachment and mounting component
fittings to be in accordance with manufacturers standard design specifications.
D. Base: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B221.
E. Glass: Fully tempered safety glass with polished edges and dubbed (rounded) corners
complying with ASTM C1048. Kind FT (fully tempered), condition A (un-coated). Types 1
(transparent glass, flat), quality Q3 (glazing select), class, thickness and manufacturing
process as indicated below
1. Clear glass: Class 1 clear.
2. Thickness 1/2-inch.

New Jahra Hospital
F. Bolts: Fastening bolts to be stainless steel or other high strength material as determined by
engineering requirements.
G. Fasteners:
1. Anchors for two point side mounting shall be fabricated from stainless steel
materials with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety
factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E488.
2. Anchoring Cement: factory prepackaged, non-shirink, non-staining, hydraulic
controlled expansion cement formulation.

2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch stainless steel tubing cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
F. Glass: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite
on glazing panels.
1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces
2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square
edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete work.
Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.04 FINISHES

A. General:
1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

B. Stainless Steel Finish:
1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish indicated, free of cross
scratches.
a. Run grain of directionally textured finishes with long dimension of each piece.
3. Posts and Rails: Directional Satin Finish: No. 8 (320 grain/grit).
4. Fittings: Directional Satin Finish: No. 8 (320 grain/grit)[ Surface to be bead blasted
finish].

New Jahra Hospital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be limited to railing manufacturer or a qualified, authorized representative
of the manufacturer.
B. Installation must be in accordance with applicable details and instructions included on
installation shop drawings provided by the railing manufacturer.
C. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. Install components plumb and
in-line, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects and securely anchored to structure.
1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchors, plates, angles, and fasteners
where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place
construction.
2. Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood
blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
3. Any and all field welding shall be by a certified welder.
D. Form or core-drill holes not less than 6 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
E. After erection of posts and other railing components, set factory-cut glass panels. Do not
cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage.
F. Tolerances:
1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
2. Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50-foot of railing shall be 1/4-inch,
non-cummulative.

3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel and aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.
B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make
required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/057500-1 Decorative Formed Metal
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 057500

DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Beam rwraps.
2. Closures and trim.
3. Column covers.
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for non-decorative metal fabrications.
2. Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings."
3. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for items made of formed metal for parapets
and copings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch-
(150-mm-) square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
C. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in
other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing
penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped
together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before
they stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.

New Jahra Hospital

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other
construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete
or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that
wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the
effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL
A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and
with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.

A. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with
ASTM C 834; of type and grade required to seal joints in decorative formed metal; and as
recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
B. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength,
corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not cause
discoloration.
C. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and
for attaching them to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the
standard fastening method.
D. Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads, provide
powder-actuated fasteners of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and
installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Anchor Materials:
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.

New Jahra Hospital
F. Sound-Deadening Materials:
1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665,
Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.
2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
H. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal
to metal and that will prevent telegraphing and oil canning and is compatible with substrate
and noncombustible after curing.
I. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard bituminous paint.

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent
possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with
those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints
and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush
surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of
unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) wide hem on the concealed side, or
ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) and support with concealed
stiffeners.
D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both,
as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness
and sufficient strength for indicated use.
1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of
adjoining sheets in flush alignment.
E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to
adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and
support other construction.
F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and
accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.
G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind,
fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible
after finishing is completed.
1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration
of metal being joined.

2.04 BEAM WRAPS
A. Form beam wraps from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly
to adjoining construction.
1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.063 inch (1.60 mm), but not less than thickness required to
comply with performance requirements.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) but not less than thickness required to
a. Finish: No. 4.
B. Fabricate with calk stop angle to retain backer rod and sealant.

New Jahra Hospital

2.05 CLOSURES AND TRIM

A. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit
tightly to adjoining construction.
a. Finish: No. 4.
3. Closures and trim may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing
after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view and not
exposed to weather.

B. Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise, locate where they are as inconspicuous as
possible. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent
buckling or waviness in finished surfaces.

C. Drill and tap holes needed for securing closures and trim to other surfaces.

D. Incorporate gaskets where indicated or needed for concealed, continuous seal at abutting
surfaces.

E. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to form
tight joints.

2.06 COLUMN COVERS
A. Snap-Together Type: Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and
minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will
engage continuous mounting clips.
a. Finish: No. 4.
3. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing
after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view.
4. Form returns at vertical joints to provide hairline V-joints.
5. Fabricate column covers with hairline horizontal V-joints produced by forming returns
on mating ends of column cover sections. Locate horizontal joints as indicated.
6. Fabricate base ring to match column covers.
7. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring.
8. Apply manufacturer's recommended sound-deadening mastic to backs of column
covers.

2.07 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where
possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to
match sheet finish.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.

New Jahra Hospital

2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.09 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
decorative formed metal.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with
adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative
formed metal.
1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete
refinishing, or provide new units as required.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and
openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses, to
make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof as applicable to type
of fabrication indicated.
E. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on
concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate
materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material
or finish.

New Jahra Hospital


A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period.
Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/061053-1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 061053

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide rough carpentry work:
1. Wood blocking and backing in conjunction with gypsum board partitions for:
a. Door bumpers.
b. Casework and finishes.
c. Wall mounted items and equipment.
d. Wood blocking in conjunction with drywall partitions.
e. Other locations where indicated on the Drawings.
2. At perimeters of exterior curtain wall systems, exterior doors and louvers.
3. Plywood substools at windows.
4. Plywood backing panels at electrical and telecommunications closets.
5. Furnish and install wood sleepers and nailers in connection with roofing work.
6. Furnish and install wood spreaders at bottoms of door openings of steel door
frames.

1. Division 01 Section Temporary Facilities and Controls for construction of
temporary enclosures.
2. Division 06 Section Interior Finish Carpentry.
3. Division 06 Section Interior Architectural Woodwork.
4. Division 07 Section Protected Membrane Roofing.
5. Division 09 Section Non-Structural Metal Framing.
6. Division 10 Section Toilet Accessories

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority
3. RIS: Redwood inspection Service
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
B. FM Global
1. FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-49 (FM Global 1-49), Perimeter
Flashing, dated September 2009.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
compliance with specified requirements for each type of process, treatment and factory-
fabricated product.

New Jahra Hospital
B. Material Certificates:
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduce to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
4. Provide Research/Evaluation Reports showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project.

A. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-
retardant-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Preservative-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of
preservative-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer.

A. Deliver the materials to the job site and store in a safe area, out of the way of traffic, and
stored up off the ground surface. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each
grade separately from other grades.
B. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting, and breaking of
materials.
C. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for
air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Protect metals with adequate waterproof
outer wrapping.
D. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS20 American Softwood Lumber Standard and
applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide
lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board
of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
B. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1 U.S. Product Standard for
Construction and Industrial Plywood for plywood construction panels. Furnish
construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing
compliance with grade requirements.

New Jahra Hospital
C. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber and panels indicated for support or attachment of
other construction, as follows:
1. Grades of Lumber and Species:

Wood blocking
Wood roof sleepers
Eastern Spruce No. 2 common; Southern
Pine No. 2 common; Douglas Fir No. 2
common
Wood bucks, blocking
Eastern Spruce No. 2 common; Southern
Pine No. 2 common; Douglas Fir No. 2
common
Plywood substools
APA Rated Underlayment; Group 1, Exposure
1; 3/4 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted
Plywood panels for electrical and
telecommunications panels
APA Graded BD INT, (touch sanded), 3/4 inch
thick. (fire retardant treated)
Plywood for wall mounted equipment
APA Rated B-D, Group 2, Exposure 1,
thickness as required.
D. For items of dimension lumber size, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture
content.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber
to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.02 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood for all interior wood blocking, furring, framing
and elsewhere that fire retardant treatment is indicated on Contract Drawings. Comply with
applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-
retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber
Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Interior:
a. D-Blaze as manufactured by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC
28217, (800) 241-0240.
b. Dricon FRT as manufactured by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., Smyrna, GA
30080, (866) 873-3789.
c. Pyro-Guard as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.,
Thomson, GA 30824, (800) 832-9663.
C. Interior: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and
plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1. Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below
values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated
temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by
a qualified independent testing agency.
2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to
treatment.
3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.

New Jahra Hospital
2.03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIAL
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection
agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Preservative Treatment: Waterborne, alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ) preservative
system, containing no arsenic and no chromium.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. NatureWood Preservative as manufactured by Osmose, Inc., Griffin GA
30224, (800) 241-0240.
b. DuraGuard as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, inc.,
Thomson, GA 30824, (800) 832-9663.
C. Retention Rates:
1. Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum
retention of 0.25 lb./cu. ft.
D. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent, respectively. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with
requirements for untreated material.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on the Drawings and the following:
1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
F. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces.
1. Use material type acceptable to manufacturer of ACQ preservative.

G. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.

2.04 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified.
1. At exterior locations, or in area of high relative humidity, provide hot-dip galvanized
fasteners complying with ASTM A153.
2. Where carpentry is preservative-treated or fire-retardant-treated, provide fasteners of
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
B. Rough Hardware: Furnish and install all rough hardware such as threaded rods for support
of curtain cubicle tracks.
1. Steel Items: Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36.
2. Machine Bolts: Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A with ASTM A563 hex nuts and,
where indicated flat washers.
3. Lag Bolts: Comply with ASME B18.2.1.
4. Nails: Use common except as otherwise noted. Comply with ASTM F1667.
5. Screws: Comply with ASME B18.6.1
3. Threaded Rod: Comply with ASTM A-307, Grade C.

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by Contractor, subject to Architect's approval.

New Jahra Hospital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 COMPLIANCE
A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought
onto or stored at the job site.
B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the job site and replace with materials
meeting the requirements of this Section.
C. Comply with preservative treated material manufacturers product data, including product
technical bulletins, product catalog installation instruction and product carton instructions
for installation and disposal.
1. ACQ treated wood scraps and cut-offs should be disposed of in a non-hazardous
material lined landfill in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Produce joints which are tight, true, and well nailed, with members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
C. Selection of lumber pieces:
1. Carefully select the members.
2. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with
placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections.
3. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended
function.
4. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for
excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold; as well as for improper
cutting and fitting.
D. Prevent direct contact between ACQ preservative treated material and aluminum. Maintain
minimum of 1/4-inch space between treated wood and aluminum building components
using polyethylene or nylon spacers, or maintain separation using minimum 10-mil thick
polyethylene film.
E. Treat cut ends of preservative treated material with field-applied end coat prior to
installation.

3.04 GENERAL FRAMING

A. In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on the
Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of other trades.

3.05 ALIGNMENT
A. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not
more than 1/8-inch from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members.

New Jahra Hospital

3.06 FASTENING
A. Nailing:
1. Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimensions required. Provide
penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the
nail or spike; provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces
of 2-inch (nominal) thickness.
2. Nail without splitting wood. Prebore as required.
3. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
B. Bolting: Drill holes 1/16-inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used. Drill straight and
true from one side only. Do not bear bolt threads on wood, but use washers under head
and nut where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
C. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads,
enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.

3.07 INSTALLATION - ROOF NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Provide anchorage for nailers as required for roof and edging in accordance with the
requirements of Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Bulletin #1-49 and as indicated on
Contract Drawings.
B. Secure roof nailers and blocking as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ensure finished height of nailers is same as top surface of roof insulation within 1/4-inch,
plus or minus.

3.08 PLYWOOD SUBSTOOLS FOR EXTERIOR WINDOWS
A. Install plywood substools required for the installation of window stools. Install substools to
framing, using countersunk flathead screws for metal framing and common nails for wood
framing. Shim as required to assure a leveled top surface.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF WOOD SPREADERS AT DOOR FRAMES
A. During the installation of pressed metal door frames, after the steel spreader bar has been
removed, install 2 x 4 wood spreaders at door opening, carefully dimensioned to permit
square, true installation of door frames and doors.
B. Spreaders shall remain in place until doors are installed.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/061600-1 Sheathing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 061600

SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Wall sheathing.

B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 05 Section Cold-Formed Metal Framing for steel framing system for
exterior walls.
2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
3. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for air/vapor barrier applied over wall sheathing.

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119
by an independent testing agency, and with details on the Drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
compliance with specified requirements for each type of product.

B. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Air Barrier Conference: Participate in air barrier pre-installation conference, as
specified in Division 07 Section Air Barrier.

A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Exterior Sheathing Panels: Complying with ASTM C1177; noncombustible, moisture and
mold-resistant glass-mat sheathing panel with treated gypsum core encased in fiberglass
face and back for curtain wall construction. Provide Type X core at fire rated assemblies.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. GP Corporation; DensGlass
Gypsum Sheathing.
b. USG Corporation; Securock
Glass-Mat Sheathing.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond BRAND e
2
XP Extended Exposure
Gypsum Sheathing.
New Jahra Hospital

2. Thickness: Regular, 1/2-inch.
3. Edges: Square.
B. Exterior Sheathing Panels: For parapet wall construction to receive adhered membrane
roofing system shall be 5/8-inch thick, square edge, 48-inch by 96-inch glass mat faced
gypsum with non-asphaltic, highly filled coating on one side.
1. Product:
a. GP Corporation; DensDeck
Prime Roof Board.

2.02 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

B. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,
Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of
sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating
having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
1. Acceptable Product: Kwik-Pro S or SD, as required by manufacturer for gage of stud
to be used; by Hilti Corp., Tulsa, OK, (800) 879-8000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints
so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use steel drill screws unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.

3.02 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
3. Install boards with 1-inch gap to accommodate movement at expansion (deflection)
joints.
4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that
might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against and flush with face of sheathing. Do not
countersink or cut into facing.
C. Apply exterior sheathing over cold-formed metal framing. Use appropriate length material to
avoid end joints. Edge joints shall be parallel to and occur over framing members. End
joints, if required shall be staggered.
D. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws spaced 3/8 inch from
ends and edges, and a maximum 8-inch o.c. around the perimeter, and 8-inch o.c. on
framing members in the field of the panel.
1. Do not fasten gypsum sheathing panels to top runner of deflection track assembly.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/062023-1 Interior Finish Carpentry
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 062023

INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior wood frames for doors and windows.
1. Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
2. Division 06 Section Interior Architectural Woodwork for shop-fabricated interior
woodwork and interior woodwork not specified in this Section.
3. Division 09 Section Painting for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry,
and field applied finish coats.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, layout,
installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent
trades.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber Products: 50 square inches for lumber for each species and cut with one-
half of exposed surface finished.
2. Panel Products: 8 x 10 inches for panels for each species and cut with one-half of
exposed surface finished.
D. Test Reports: Submit test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards, Edition 1" for grades of interior finish carpentry indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Grade: Premium.

New Jahra Hospital
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Keep materials
under cover and dry. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between
each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks
and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, AND RELATED ITEMS
A. Interior trim, baseboard, chair rail, backbands, casings, handrails and related items shall be
of solid stock matching wood, Premium grade, unless otherwise specified. All stock shall
be free of wormholes, brash grain, checks or shakes.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish)::
1. Species and Grade
a. WDV: Quarter Sawn, Walnut.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
1. Species and Grade: Yellow Poplar, Plain Sawn, Grade II.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 12 percent.

2.02 INTERIOR DOOR AND SIDELIGHT FRAMES
A. Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from solid hardwood.
1. Species: Quarter Sawn, Walnut.

A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer
for general carpentry use.
1. Acceptable Product:
a. Wilsonart Greenguard Lokweld Wood Glue.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
a. Titebond PROvantage Construction Adhesive.

2.04 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at
relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
D. Complete fabrication, including finishing, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to
Project site. Provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting at job site.
E. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
1. Interior standing and running trim.

F. Fabricate standing and running trim in size, profile and finish as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Ease exposed edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take necessary field measurements in the field to assure proper dimensions for the work of
this Section.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
C. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity
in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended
by manufacturer.

A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective
surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining
interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-
inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
New Jahra Hospital

3.04 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. General: Perform installation in accordance Architectural Woodwork Standards, Premium
Grade.
B. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 48 inches long, except where
necessary.
C. Field Joints:
1. Select wood members so that the color of adjacent members is similar and nearly
uniform in appearance.
2. The grain figure or other natural character markings shall be similar in character and
appearance and shall match as closely as possible from one member to the other at
the butting joint.
3. Members with only flat grain shall not be permitted adjacent to members with only
vertical grain.
4. Members with mixed grain shall be permitted only adjacent to members with similar
grain at the adjacent edge.
5. Running finish shall be in long lengths and jointed only where solid fastenings can be
made. End-to-end joints shall be scarfed. Miter exterior corners and cope interior
angles unless otherwise detailed.
6. All joints shall be tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint
and formed to conceal shrinkage. Shop miters 4 inches or more from heel to point
shall be glued and locked. Make dowels and tenons a driving fit. Make shop joints of
interior work with waterproof glue or hot glue, under pressure.
D. All workmanship shall be of the best Cabinetmaker's work and all dressed smooth,
fasteners set, cleaned and fine sandpapered ready for Painter's finish.
E. Do all cutting, patching, jobbing, etc., for all trades doing work in the building, in
accordance with best building practice.
F. Do not bring inside finish into the buildings until the buildings are thoroughly dry, and set no
finish in place until it has been painted on the back.
G. The back of all interior wood finish and fittings where not exposed shall be painted one coat
of paint before erection.
H. Attach wood trim to wood blocking with countersunk finish nails, and to steel framing with
countersunk Type S trim head screws. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before
fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping.
Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
I. Install wood frames plumb and square complying with shop drawings.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements
and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or
soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
New Jahra Hospital

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/064023-1 Interior Architectural Woodwork
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 064023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Plastic laminate casework.
2. Wood veneer casework.
3. Plastic laminate countertops.
4. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing casework unless
concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
1. Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for wood furring, blocking, and
shims required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction
before woodwork installation.
2. Division 06 Section Interior Finish Carpentry for interior carpentry exposed to view
that is not specified in this Section.
3. Division 12 Section Manufactured Plastic-Laminated-Faced Casework for modular
stock design cabinets.
4. Division 12 Section Simulated Stone Countertops for countertops, transaction tops
and window stools fabricated from solid surfacing materials.
5. Division 12 Section Stone Countertops for countertops and transaction tops
fabricated from stone.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
compliance with specified requirements for each factory-fabricated product including
brackets, cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical devices and other items
installed in casework.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Plastic Laminate: 8-inch by 10-inch samples for each color and patterns.
2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface
finish, with edge banding on one edge.
3. Wood:
a. Lumber Products: 50 square inches for lumber for each species and cut with
one-half of exposed surface finished.
b. Panel Products: 8 x 10 inches for panels for each species and cut with one-
half of exposed surface finished.
4. If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as
requested of each type of exposed hardware.
D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.
New Jahra Hospital


A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork
Standards, Edition 1 for grades of interior finish carpentry indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Custom Casework: Premium Grade.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program.
C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Prior to start of casework fabrication, provide a cabinet sample(s) of each grade as
follows:
a. Complete base cabinet fabricated with wood veneer as directed by the
Architect.
b. Complete base cabinet fabricated with plastic laminate as directed by the
Architect.
c. Complete plastic laminate countertop with hardwood edging.
2. Sample shall show full construction of all joints in both casework and laminate.
3. Sample shall contain: countertop with back splash, door with specified hardware,
drawer with slide and specified hardware, back and side panels.
4. Samples not fully conforming to the referenced AWI Quality Standards and this
specification will be rejected by the Architect.
5. Once approved, the sample(s) shall become the standard for the remaining work. The
sample(s) may be incorporated into the final work with prior approval of the Architect.

A. Do not deliver casework until painting and similar operations that could damage casework
have been completed in installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with
requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by
field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported
and installed as indicated.
New Jahra Hospital

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Casework design shall conform to the flush overlay design as indicated in the AWI Quality
Standards. Horizontal and vertical reveals between all doors and drawers shall be 1/8-inch
unless otherwise detail.
B. High pressure laminates shall be adhered to cores with adhesives in such manner that
when tested in accordance with the Shear Strength Test set forth in the above mentioned
quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the shear strength shall be not
less than 200 pounds per square inch at room temperature and not less than 15 pounds per
square inch at 240 degrees.
C. Identification of Parts:
1. Plastic Laminate Casework: Conform to requirements of referenced AWI standards.
a. All surfaces, exterior or interior, of cabinets and cases exposed to view, and
doors and drawer fronts of same shall be veneered with high pressure
decorative laminate.
b. Exposed to view applies equally to tops and bottoms of cabinets and cases,
cabinet shelving and interior of cabinets and cases exposed when doors are
open for premium grade.
2. Wood Veneer Casework: Conform to requirements of AWI standards, Premium
Grade.
D. Backing sheets shall be used on all unexposed cabinet surfaces and on the underside of all
countertops.
E. Shop made joints in counter are allowed only when required length exceeds laminate length
obtainable. Such a joint shall touch throughout its length and be flush within a tolerance of
.005-inch. Joints between adjoining tops which must be field assembled shall be shop
prepared with bolt up type fasteners.
F. Provide all cutouts for sinks, fixtures and fittings located in plastic laminate casework. See
casework, plumbing, mechanical and electrical drawings.

2.02 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate (LP-):
1. High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) for casework and countertops, conforming
to NEMA LD3.1 General Purpose: Grade HGS, nominal 0.048-inch thickness.
2. Manufacturer:
a. LP-A: Lamin-Art, Inc., Schaumburg, IL 60173 (800) 323-7624.
B. Wood Veneer (WDV):
1. Species: Walnut.
2. Cut: Quarter sawn.
3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match.
C. Backing Sheets:
1. Casework and Countertops: Provide unfinished plastic laminate balancing (backer)
sheet, conforming to NEMA LD3 undecorated laminate, Grade BKL, 0.020-inch
nominal thickness.
New Jahra Hospital

2.03 CORES
A. Unless otherwise noted, all cores shall be of particleboard, except cores for countertops in
which sinks are located shall be marine grade plywood, suitable for receiving plastic
laminate. Cores for panel products shall be fire-retardant treated particle board, Class A
rated.
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, made with binder containing
no urea formaldehyde.
a. Product: Encore by Sierra Pine.
2. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made from softwood
particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less
per ASTM E 84.
a. Product: Encore FR by Sierra Pine, or equal
3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density particleboard
finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper. Provide
panels with glueable backer where plastic laminate is to be applied to one side.
a. Product:
1) LamMates; Nevamar Company, Tarboro, NC (800) 638-4380.
2) Panval; Uniboard Canada, Inc., Laval, Quebec (800) 263-5240.
b. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by the Architect.

B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, APA B-B Marine Grade, waterproof structural adhesive.
C. Fire-Retardant Treatment: ASTM E 84, Class A, where required by code or local authorities.
Vehicle for preservative compatible with finish.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Solid Stock Wood (WDV): Provide solid stock wood exposed to view complying with
requirements of Division 06 Section Interior Finish Carpentry.
1. Species: Walnut.
2. Cut: Quarter sawn.
B. Edge Banding: PVC tape, matching laminate in color pattern and finish; provide 3-mm at
solid color and 0.018-inch minimum thickness at wood grain.
1. Manufacturer: Doellken-Woodtape by Surteco Canada, Ltd., Brampton, ON L6T
1E9, (800) 461-0061.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
C. Metal Shapes, Plates and Angles:
1. Stainless Steel Trim: directional satin No. 4 finish; Julius Blum & Co., Inc., Carlstadt,
NJ, (800) 526-6293.
a. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 304.
b. Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304.
c. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304.

D. Hardboard: 1/4 inch thick tempered hardboard, smooth both sides, meeting or exceeding
Commercial Standards CS-251 and Federal Specifications LLL-B-00810, with radiused
exposed edges, painted all surfaces except radiused edges.
HARDWARE
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets:
B. Hinges: Frameless, concealed hinges (European type): 170 degrees of opening, self-
closing, for 3/4-inch full overlay doors.
1. Manufacturer: Blum, Inc.
2. Products: Clip Top hinges No. 71T6580; with No. 174H7100E mounting plate;
except provide No. 71T9580, with 95 degree opening at end cabinets which abut
walls; Nickel finish.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Number of Hinges: As recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls:
1. Standard Wire Pulls: Round bar type, 4-inch long wire pull with 1-5/16 -inch
projection, secured with machine screws from inside; brushed aluminum finish.
a. Product: Hafele
2. Decorative Pulls: Bar type, 4-3/4-inch (122-mm) long with 1-7/16-inch (36-mm)
projection; secured with machine screws from inside; satin stainless steel finish.
a. Product: Sugatsune XL-CU Series.
3. Recessed Pull: To be selected by Architect.

D. Locks: All doors and drawers where indicated on the drawings shall be provided with locks
and shall be keyed as directed.
1. Cylinder Locks: Cylinder type pin tumbler. Select locks to suit cabinet construction
for doors and drawers.
a. Products: Timberline Series by CompX Security Products.
2. At pairs of doors provide lock on one door and furniture bolts on second door.
a. Products: Hafele #252.02.644 and # 251.60.703 strike.

E. Slides: Full extension, ball-bearing slides with positive stop and rubber hold-in bumpers,
zinc-finish.
1. Products: Provide the following by Accuride International, Inc.
a. Drawers up to 24-inch wide: No. 7432
b. File drawers and drawers greater than 24-inch: No. 4032
c. Pencil drawers: No. 2006
F. Shelf Supports for Adjustable Shelving in Casework: Right-angle shelf rests, .060 inch steel;
1/2 inch wide by 1/2 inch high by 13/16 inch long, with hole to fasten to underside of shelf
with wood screw; Nickel finish.
1. Product: #X-73 by Selby, or approved equal.
a. Provide screw fasteners to fasten supports to underside of shelf with
psychiatric treatment areas.

G. Wire Management: One piece J-shaped wire trough,
1. Product: Model CWM15, by Outwater Plastic Industries, Inc.

H. Hanger Rod Tubing: Shall be K & V No. 750, 1-1/16 inch diameter, .075 wall thickness
polished chrome finish steel tubing, lengths as required. Flanges shall be K & V No. 734.
Provide K & V No. 1195 shelf and rod support for shelves over 4 feet in length.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2- inch OD, molded-plastic grommets
and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Product: "31 Series" by Outwater Plastic Industries, Inc.
J. Counter Support Brackets: Extruded aluminum, 2-inch by 2-inch T shaped surface
mounted support brackets with 5/8 inch opening rubber grommet installed in 7/8-inch hole.
1. Manufacturer: Rakks Rangine Corporation, Needham, MA (800) 826-6006.
2. Products:
New Jahra Hospital

a. Model EH-1212 for 16-inch counters, Model EH-1818 for 24-inch counters,
Model EH-1824 for 30-inch counters with not less than 450-lbs./bracket
capacity and Model EH-2430 for 36 inch counters with not less than 300-
lbs./bracket capacity.
3. Finish: Manufacturers standard powder coat.

K. Adjustable Shelf Standards: For wall mounting, shall be heavy-duty type, 14 gauge,
providing 1-1/4-inch adjustment, 1-inch wide by 11/16-inch high, complete with end caps
and heavy-duty 16 gauge steel brackets in sizes to suit shelving.
1. Product: KV #82ANO standards with #182 brackets by K&V.
L. Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide heavy duty magnetic catches, touch release/catch, clips,
supports, holders and other similar devices and accessories as standard with the casework
fabricator.
M. Hardware Finishes:
1. Exposed Hardware: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA
A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
a. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or branze base, BHMA 652 for
steel base.
b. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2. Concealed Hardware: For concealed hardware, provide manufacturers standard
finish that complies with product class requirement in BHMA A156.9.

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors.
Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior
walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Foam Tape: Closed cell, high density with acrylic adhesive on one side.
1. Product: 3M Vinyl Foam Tape No. 4504.
2. Thickness: 1/4-inch.
3. Color: Black.

2.07 FABRICATION
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural cabinets indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
B. Base and Wall Cabinets: Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated
on Contract Drawings. Construct to permit alignment of adjacent cabinets, of full variety of
types in one grouping.
1. Cabinet Style: Frameless, flush overlay design.
2. Casework shall have plastic laminate applied to all exposed surfaces, melamine clad
semi-concealed interior surfaces except interiors of open cabinets, and PVC
edgebanding. Install hardwood veneer where hardwood veneer casework is
indicated.
3. Recessed Toe Space: Toe space and all exposed to view surfaces shall be faced
with resilient base furnished and installed under other sections, as noted.
New Jahra Hospital

a. Construct toe space with 3/4-inch plywood or solid wood. Particle board or
any similar type materials are not permitted within 4 inches of the floor line.
C. Cabinet Tops, Bottoms, Ends and Backs: Shall be of 3/4 inch thick core minimum.
D. Drawers:
1. Drawer Body: 1/2-inch thick hardwood. Connections between backs, sides and front
of drawer body shall be regular multiple drawer dovetails with joints glued.
2. Drawer Bottoms: 1/2-inch core, melamine clad.
3. Drawer Fronts:
a. Cores: 3/4-inches.
b. Plastic laminate casework shall have plastic laminate applied to both inside
and outside of drawer fronts, with PVC edgebanding. Install hardwood veneer
where hardwood veneer casework is indicated.
4. Connection between drawer front and drawer body shall be with not less than 4
countersunk wood screws.
5. Drawers shall slide on metal drawer slides.
E. Doors:
1. All cabinet doors shall have a core of particleboard of 11/16-inch thickness minimum.
2. All surfaces of doors shall be laminated plastic, with PVC edgebanding. Install
hardwood veneer where hardwood veneer casework is indicated.
F. Shelves:
1. In cabinets shall be of 3/4-inch thick core minimum to 27-inches wide. One inch
shelving at 30 inch wide cabinet and over.
2. All removable or adjustable shelves shall have all surfaces veneered with laminated
plastic.
G. Countertops End Panel Supports:
1. Stand alone support panels shall be a minimum 1 inch thick core with exterior grade
plywood grade EWA C-C or solid wood to 4 inches above floor line.
H. Stainless Steel Accents: For use with casework shall be as detailed on the drawings, of
Type 304, 18-8 ornamental grade, of welded construction with all welds ground and
polished to matching finish.
1. Brake ends free of open texture or orange peel appearance. Where brake work mars
the finish of the materials, remove marks by grinding, polishing and finishing.
2. Shear edges free of burrs, projection or fins, and ease all exposed edges to eliminate
all danger of laceration.
3. Exercise care in grinding operations to avoid excessive heating of metal and
discoloration. Use iron-free abrasives, wheels and belts on stainless steel; provide a
uniform and smooth final polishing with a uni-direction grain for total length of
materials. Cross grains and random polishing will not be acceptable and shall be
cause for rejection.
4. Finish: Satin.
I. Provide access panels in casework where indicated, or where required to access
equipment or utilities. Use Selby propeller nuts with oval head screws and cup washers.
J. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical
work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
K. Scribes:
1. Walls: Provide scribes to allow 1-1/2-inch between the edge of the cabinets and
adjacent walls, and to trim the countertop backsplashes to walls.
2. Soffits: Provide scribes to allow 2-inches between the top edge of the wall cabinets
and the underside of the adjacent soffit.
New Jahra Hospital

L. Countertops and Splash Backs:
1. High pressure laminated plastic countertops and splash backs shall be of 1-1/8-inch
thick core minimum surfaced with plastic laminate, with backing sheet on the
underside of countertop, with PVC edge unless otherwise indicated.
2. Height of back splash shall be 4-inches unless otherwise indicated. Provide end
splashes wherever countertops abut end walls.
3. Wherever sinks occur in countertops, apply sealant at joint between backsplash and
countertop. Refer to Division 07 Section Joint Sealants.

2.08 FACTORY FINISHING OF HARDWOOD
A. Wood with Transparent Finish:
1. Factory finish with AWI, System-5 Conversion Varnish Finish System, with 2 top
coats.
a. Stain: As required to match Architects control sample.
b. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION, CASEWORK
A. General: Install casework in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards, with
requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of casework
involved.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C. Install all cabinets and casework level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Accurately trim and cut scribes of the base and wall cabinets, and countertops to the walls
and soffits. Refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to
provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items
as indicated.
F. Anchor cabinets to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure all casework
and all other wall mounted items to wall construction using with No. 10 wafer-head screws
sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging
strips.
G. Secure countertop wall brackets to internal wall reinforcing with 1/4-inch by 2-inch pan
head wood screws. Space brackets as indicated, but not more than 48-inches on center.
H. Attach countertops to wall brackets and base cabinets using appropriate length machine
screws.
I. Fasteners used to attach or assemble cabinets that would remain exposed to view after
installation within psychiatric treatment areas shall be of tamper-resistant design.
New Jahra Hospital
J. Provide grommets wherever the Owner's equipment wiring is required to penetrate
countertops.
K. Install hinge restriction clips wherever cabinet doors or door pulls will engage or hit abutting
wall surfaces.

A. Repair damaged and defective casework and paneling, where possible, to eliminate
functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace casework and panel.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces, and casework on exposed and semi-exposed
surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/064200-1 Wood Panelling
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 064200

WOOD PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Wood panelling as shown on the drawings or inferable therefrom and/or as
specified, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to
the following:
1. Wood veneer panelling.
2. Plastic laminated panelling
3. Back-up frame.
4. Installation.

1.02 REFERENCE

1. ASTM D 523-85 Test Method for Specular glass.
2. ASTM D 2898-81(86) Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-
Retardant - Treated Wood for Fire Testing.
3. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI A208.1-1987 Mat-Formed Wood Particle Board.
2. ANSI A208.2-1980 Medium Density Fiber Board for Interior Use.
3. ANSI/AHA A135.4-1982 Basic Hardboard.
4. ANSI/VOL. PS1-74 Prod. Std. Construction and Industrial Plywood.

C. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):
1. AWPA C20-84 Structural Lumber-Fire-Retardant Treatment by
Pressure Processors

D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
1. Fifth (1988) Edition: Architectural Wood Quality Standards Guide
Specifications and Quality Certification Program

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA LD 3-85 High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineers Representative manufacturers technical data for
each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated with items of
architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineers Representative shop drawings showing location of
each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and
other components.

C. Samples: Submit samples of the following for Verification Purposes.
1. Timber with or for transparent finish, 150 x 250mm, for each species and cut,
finished on one side and one edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent
finished woodwork.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Wood veneer faced panel products; with or for transparent finish, 200mm x 300mm,
for each species and cut with one half of exposed surface finished, with separate
samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
4. Factory-finished panels for transparent finish, consisting of veneer pieces cut from
selected flitch samples, laminated to panel product finishes, 200 x 300mm, for each
species and cut.

D. Certificate:
1. Fire-retardant - treatment data for material impregnated by pressure process to
reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials
2. Product certificate signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products
comply with specified requirements.

E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in paragraph Quality Assurance to
demonstrate their capabilities and experiences. Include list of completed projects with
project names, addresses, names of Consultant and Owners, and other information
specified.


Documents I and II.

B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms experienced in successfully producing panel work
similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing delay in the work.

C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of panel woodwork by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type
and quality to those required for this project.

D. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Materials, construction methods, tolerances, joining and assembly of panel
woodwork shall conform to the requirements of the above standard except that, in
case the requirements of the Drawings and the following Specifications are more
stringent and precise than above standards, the more stringent requirements shall
apply to this work.

E. Mock-Up: Before installation of panel woodwork, erect mock-ups for each form of panel
work, and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects (as well as qualities of materials and execution). Build mock-
ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of
work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if not indicated, directed
by the Engineers Representative.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Obtain Engineers Representatives acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit
of work.
4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging completed unit of work.


A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,
and deterioration.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Environmental Requirements: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturers and
Installers coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for
woodwork during its storage and installation. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineers
Representative, do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and
stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content
from date of installation through remainder of construction period.

B. Existing Conditions: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check
actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before
manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field
measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated.

B. Hardwood Plywood: AWS Section 200-3, Premium Grade; use white birch unless otherwise
noted.

C. Timber Species
1. American Walnut, quarter sawn

D. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each
voluntary standard, Medium Density Fibre Board (MDF).


A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication including assembly before shipment to project site to maximum extent
possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, and similar items.
Locate openings accurately and use template or roughing-in diagram to produce accurately
sized and shaped openings.

2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT - TREATED TIMBER

A. General: Where indicated or required by regulatory agency, pressure impregnate timber with
fire-retardant chemical of formulation indicated to produce materials with fire-performance
characteristic specified.

B. Fire-Retardant Chemical: Use chemical formulations specified that does not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colourants in solution to distinguish treated
timber from untreated timber.
1. Low Hygroscopic Formulation: Interior Type A per AWPA C20.

C. Mill timber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed fire-
performance characteristics, using a wood working plant certified by testing and inspecting
organization.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Kiln-dry woodwork after treatment to levels required for nontreated woodwork. Maintain
moisture content required by kiln drying before and after treatment.

E. Discard treated timber that does not comply with requirements of referenced wood working
standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discoloured, or otherwise damaged or
defective timber.

2.04 WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 and its Division 500A.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Wood Species: As indicated on the drawings.

D. Veneer Species: As indicated on the drawings.

E. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.

F. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match.

G. Panel Matching Method: Match panels to one another within each separate area by the
following method:
1. Sequence - matched panel sets.

H. Panel Core Construction: Medium Density Fibre Board (MDF).

I. Panel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings

J. Comply with Quality Standard referenced and details shown for fabrication and assembly of
panel work. Provide panel work of the thickness shown. Assemble by gluing and concealed
fasteners (no exposed nailing or other fasteners, except finish nailing permitted for quirk
corners or applied mouldings).

K. Acoustic Insulation: Semi rigid acoustical insulation shall be 20/25mm thick sound controlled
blanket with reinforced fibreglass wall.

2.05 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS

A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-
111 for applicable requirements.

B. Nails: Provide the following of type and size required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-
105 for applicable requirements.
1. Stainless steel nails/clips.
2. Aluminium nails/clips.

C. Anchors: Select materials, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanised anchors and inserts as required
for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-
place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry
work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrate well in
advance of time substrates are to be built.

C. Before installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including removal of packing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with requirements of AWI 1700, that refer to
types of woodwork specified in this Section and that apply to the same grade specified in
Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 3mm in 3 metre for plumb and level and with no
variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.

D. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store and install fire-retardant-treated wood in
compliance with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer including those for
adhesives where required for installation on woodwork.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrate. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.

F. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joint possible, using
full-length pieces (from maximum length of timber available) to the greatest extent possible.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and mitre at corners.

G. Paneling: Anchor panelwork to supporting substrate (walls) with concealed panel - by blind
nailing on backup strips, splined - connection strips, and similar trim and framing. Do not
face nail unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally
and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.

B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soil areas.

C. Complete the finishing work specified in this section, to whatever extent not completed at
factory or before installation of woodwork.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of
substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/071113-1 Bituminous Dampproofing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 071113

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: Cold applied bituminous waterproofing in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Work includes but shall not be limited to the
following:
1. Concrete footings, bases, columns, etc.
2. Sump pits and similar applications.

C. Related Sections
2. Section 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM D1187-82 : Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for use as
Protective Coatings for Metal.
2. ASTM D 1227-87 : Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a
Protective Coating for Roofing.
3. ASTM D 4479-93 : Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-
Free.

B. The applicable provisions of the following standards publications and codes shall apply
throughout the bituminous waterproofing :
1. NRCA : The National Roofing Contractor Association. The
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3rd edition 1989.


A. Performing Requirements: Cold-applied, emulsified asphalt covered by ASTM D1187 and
ASTM D1227, suitable for continuous exposure to the weather above grade and below
grade. (Type III Non-fiber).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturers technical product data, installation
instructions, and recommendations for the type of waterproofing material required. Include
data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

B. Before commencing work submit written statement signed by the Contractor, stating that the
Contract Documents for the Bituminous waterproofing system have been reviewed with
qualified representative of the waterproofing material manufacture and that he is in
agreement that the selected materials for waterproofing system are proper, compatible and
adequate for the application shown.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm which has specialized for not less than Five (5) years in the
installation of this type of waterproofing required for project and which is acceptable to
manufacturer of materials.

B. General: For each type of work, obtain materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent
possible.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Substrate: Proceed with waterproofing work only after substrate construction and
penetrating work have been completed.

B. Environmental Requirements: Proceed with waterproofing work only when existing and
forecast weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for products furnished under this
Section of the Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. 1. Owens Corning Trumbull Divisions
Toledo OH.
Tel: (800) 323-830
Fax (419) 248-8000
2. W.R. Meadows Inc.
P.O. Box 543
Elgin, IL 60121, U.S.A
(800) 342-5976
3. W.R. Grace & Co.
Construction Product Div.
62, Whittemore Ave.
Cambridge MA 02140, U.S.A
(800) 242-4476
4. MBT Middle East
Construction Product Div.
P.O. Box 5558
Sharjah U.A.E.
Tel: 971 6 5949 222
Fax: 971 6 595604
P.O. Box 61347
Dubai U.A.E
Tel: 971 4 836662
Fax: 971 4 837696


C. Products
1. Hydrocide 600 of Chem Rex.
2. Type 1 Spray Grade of W.R. Meadows.

2.02 BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide bituminous waterproofing materials which comply with the following
requirements, or provide other similar products which are certified in writing by manufacturer
of waterproofing materials to be superior in performance for application indicated.
1. Cold-Applied Emulsified Asphalt:
a. Manufacturers standard emulsified asphalt products meeting ASTM D1187 and
ASTM D1227 recommended for below-grade exterior applications to either
damp or dry substrates compounded to penetrate substrate and build to
moisture-resistant coating.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the work is to
corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with
recommendations of materials manufacturer.

B. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog
drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work, by
masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturers instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra
precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of work.

B. Apply coat of liquid asphalt emulsion waterproofing material by brushing or spraying at rate
of 1.5 to 2.5 gal. per. 100 sq. ft., depending upon substrate texture, as required to produce
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 15 mils. Apply in 2 coats if necessary to obtain
required thickness, allowing time for complete drying between coats.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/071354-1 Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 071354

THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

B. Section Includes: Membrane waterproofing below grade and associated work in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to the
following:
1. Vertical and horizontal waterproofing.
2. Protection board.
3. Vapour barrier.
4. Installation
5. Testing


1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C 67-08 : Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
2. ASTM C 140-08a : Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete and
Masonry Units and Related Units
3. ASTM C 578-08b : Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
4. ASTM D 570-98 (Reapproved 2005): Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
5. ASTM D 638-08 : Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
6. ASTM D 1004-07 : Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of
Plastic Film and Sheeting
7. ASTM D 1204-07 : Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated
Temperature
8. ASTM D 2136-02 (Reapproved 2007): Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low-
Temperature Bend Test
9. ASTM D 3045-92 (Reapproved 2003): Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics without Load
10. ASTM D 4258-05 : Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating
11. ASTM D 4263-83 (Reapproved 2005): Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete
by the Plastic Sheet Method
12. ASTM D 5635-04a : Test Method for Dynamic Puncture Resistance of
Roofing Membrane Specimens
13. ASTM D 5957-98 (Reapproved 2005): Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal
Waterproofing Installations

B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):
1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3rd Edition, NRCA 1990.
2. Waterproofing and Dampproofing Manual, NRCA 1990.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer for information only in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, manufacturers specifications and installation
instructions for the membrane waterproofing system and other data to show compliance with
the Contract Documents.
New Jahra Hospital

Documents I and II.

B. Manufacturer Qualification: The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the
specified materials have been successfully utilized on work of a similar scope to that shown
and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been completed and in
use for minimum two (2) years without any evidence of failure.

C. Installer Qualification: Membrane waterproofing shall be executed by an approved Specialist
Subcontractor with minimum of Ten (10) years experience in similar Projects.

D. Contractors Review: Before commencing work submit written statement signed by the
Contractor, stating that the Contract Documents for the membrane waterproofing system
have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the waterproofing materials
manufacturer and that he is in agreement that the selected materials for membrane
waterproofing system are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to the installation of membrane waterproofing, meet at the
Project Site to review the material selections, installation procedures and coordination of the
work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Contractor, the Engineer, the
Subcontractor, Manufacturers Representatives and any other Contractors/Subcontractors
whose work requires coordination with this work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers unopened containers identified with name, brand, type,
grade, class and all other qualifying information.

B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the name, type and
grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load (or furnish
manufacturers blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the Work.

C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign
matter. Conspicuously mark Rejected on materials which have once been wet or damaged
and remove from the job site.


A. Do not apply membrane waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is
outside the range recommended by the manufacturer.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Contractor and Installer
against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification of any leak
within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements including the
removal and replacement of work superimposed over the membrane waterproofing, at the
convenience of the Employer and to the complete works in accordance with Contract
Documents and approval of the Engineer.

B. The warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be Ten (10) years after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Works.

C. The warranty shall be supported by a bank guarantee of the same duration, obtained from a
bank approved by the Employer and shall be for a minimum amount of the value of the works
established by a final measurement of the same at the Unit Rates contained in the Bills of
Quantities.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Waterproofing Membrane
1. Bitumat Company Ltd.
P.O. Box 5869, Riyadh
11515 Saudi Arabia
Tel: 4770443
Fax: 4762318
2. DWI Dermabut Waterproofing Industries
P.O.Box 10308
Jubail 31961
Saudi Arabia
Tel: 03-341-0464
Fax: 03-341-0481
3. Imper Italia Spa.
Via Lanzo 131,
10/48 Totino,
Italy.
Tel: 39/11/2625544
Fax: 39/11/2625547
4. Siplast
12 rue de la Renaissance
Zip Code 92184
Tel: +33 140 96 3515
Fax: +33 140 96 3507
5. BASF Construction Chemicals LLC
Dubai Investment Park
Jabel Ali Industrial Area
P.O. Box 37127
Dubai U.A.E.
Tel: 971 4 8090800
Fax: 971 4 8851130


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Waterproofing Membrane: Flame bonded single-ply membrane, 4(+/-0.2) mm thick,
composed of asphalt or bitumen modified with thermoplastic resins and reinforced with non-
woven polyester fabric. Provide the following:
1. Paralon NT5 or 6; Imper, Italy.
2. Dermabit, 4170.
3. Bitmat
4. Parafer Solo FF by Siplast
5. Cintaflex 3000 by ESHA
6. Topgum by Novaglas
New Jahra Hospital
B. Technical Data

Properties Typical Values
Specific Weight of coating mixture 1.02 + 0.02 Kg/dam
Thickness 4mm
Softening point (R+B) of coating mixture Min. 161C
Penetration 25C of coating mixture 10 25 dmm
Water Absorption PBS Less than 0.15%
Shape stability at 120C or 248F No deformation
Creeping of the membrane applied on a 60
sloped surface at a Test Temperature of 100C
during 120 hours
No creeping
*Flexibility at low temperature (-2C to -10C) No cracking
Impermeability of the Membrane of water Absolutely impermeable
Service Ambient Temperature -20C to -100C
Impermeability of the welded seam of two
membranes to water
Absolutely impermeable
Reinforcement core of the membrane 200 grms/m Polyester
(non woven spunbond with continuous
thread)
Thickness tolerance ( 5%)
Tensile Strength Longitudinal
Transverse
1140 N/5 cm
750 N/5cm
Elongation Longitudinal
Transverse
54%
59%
Load Strain Product Longitudinal
Transverse
61560
41536
Lap Join Strength Longitudinal
Transverse
>1140 N/5 cm
>750 N/5 cm
Tear Strength Longitudinal
Transverse
193 N
200 N
Puncture Resistance Static
Dynamic
L4 (Not perforated 25 Kg, 10mm ball).
L4 (Not perforated at 9 Joules impact
energy, 5mm ball)
Resistance to Thermal Ageing No sign of deterioration after the test
Resistance to Ageing due to UV-Radiation No sign of deterioration after the test
Resistance to Thermal-Hydro Shock No sign of deterioration after the test
Adhesion strength of the membrane fully bonded
to a concrete deck, previously treated with
Dermaprimer.
0.8 Kg/cm
* Flexibility at low temperature can be altered depending on prevailing climatic conditions
or Clients request.

C. Primer for Bitumen Modified Sheet Roofing Membrane: Provide the following:
1. Impertene Primer; Imper, Italy.
2. Indemastic Primer; Index, Italy.
3. Marley Bitumen Primer; Marley Waterproofing Ltd.
4. Or as recommended by the manufacturer of bitumen sheet roofing membrane.

D. Protection Board: Premolded 3.5mm thick semi-rigid board consisting of mineral stabilized
core sandwiched between layers of asphalt saturated felt, surface coated with asphalt and
sealed to cove under heat and pressure and provide with polyethylene film facings.

E. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite
subsurface drainage panels consisting of a non-woven, needle-punched geotextile facing
with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21mm) sieve laminated to one side
with polymeric films bonded to other side of a studded nonbiodegrable, molded plastic sheet
drainage cove with a horizontal flow rate not less than 28 gpm/st (35 L/min per m).
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all surfaces to which the membrane waterproofing is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
approved by the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material which would impair the Work.

B. Do not proceed with membrane waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit, vents, ducts
and other projections through the substrate have been installed and protected.

C. Treat external and internal corners of substrate as shown and in accordance with

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install membrane of specified layers in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions
except as hereinafter specified.

B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

C. Follow the recommended technique of the membrane manufacturer for cleaning, seam, lap
and splice areas, for the method and sequence of forming field joints in the membrane.

D. Flash all pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other projections passing through membrane
waterproofing and provide tight construction throughout. Use prefabricated boots or field-
fabricated boots, fitted coverings, and other accessories as required.

E. Provide water cut-off in accordance with the approved membrane manufacturers
recommendations.

F. Install protection board in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

G. Upon completion of any portion of waterproofing, immediately cover that portion with
protective covering.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect membrane waterproofing from damage during construction period so that it will be
without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion or covering with other
materials.

B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials.
Repair and restore other work damaged during membrane waterproofing operations.

C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.

D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and
installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire
regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/071416-1 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 071416

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

B. General: Provide cold fluid applied waterproofing in accordance with the requirement of the
1. All wet areas and mechanical areas.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C 67-03a : Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
2. ASTM C 140-03 : Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete and
Masonry Units and Related Units
3. ASTM C 272-01 : Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for
Structural Sandwich Constructions
4. ASTM C 578-04a : Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
5. ASTM C 836-03 : Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-
Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use
with Separate Wearing Course
6. ASTM C 898-01 : Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-
Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with
Separate Wearing Course
7. ASTM C 920-02 : Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
8. ASTM C 1193-00 : Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
9. ASTM C 1471-00 : Guide for the Use of High Solids Content Cold Liquid-
Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane on
Vertical Surfaces
10. ASTM D 1621-04a : Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics
11. ASTM D 4258-83 (Reapproved 1999): Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating
12. ASTM D 4259-88 (Reapproved 1999): Practice for Abrading Concrete
13. ASTM D 4263-83 (Reapproved 1999): Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete
by the Plastic Sheet Method
14. ASTM D 5957-98 : Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing
Installations
15. ASTM D 6506-01 : Specification for Asphalt Based Protection Board for
Below-Grade Waterproofing

shall apply throughout the latex waterproofing :
1. NRCA : The National Roofing Contractors Association
The Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3rd edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturers specifications, installation
instructions and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Samples: Submit samples of cold fluid applied waterproofing. Samples shall be 300mm
square, on plywood.
New Jahra Hospital

Documents I and II.

B. Qualifications:
1. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials to be
used have been successfully utilized on work of similar scope to that shown and
specified for this Project. The waterproofing system examples cited shall have been
completed and in use for minimum two (2) years without evidence of failure.
2. Installer: Cold fluid applied waterproofing shall be executed by an approved specialist
Sub-Contractor having a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the installation
of the specified material. Employ only tradesmen experienced with the installation of
the materials specified.

C. Before commencing Work submit written statement signed by the Contractor, stating that
the Contract Documents for the cold fluid applied waterproofing system have been reviewed
with a qualified representative of the waterproofing materials manufacturer and that he is in
agreement that the selected materials for membrane waterproofing system are proper,
compatible and adequate for the application shown.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers standard unopened packaging, fully identified.

B. Store materials above grade and protected from the weather, soiling or damage. Store all
materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions.


A. Do not apply Waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is outside the
range recommended by manufacturer.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit written warranty executed by the Contractor and Installer
stating that waterproofing system installed will be waterproof and free from defects. Upon
notification of any leaks occurring within the period stipulated, the Contractor shall, at the
convenience of the Employer, effect all repairs and replacements necessary to remedy
defects the works in accordance with Contract Documents and the approval of the Engineer.

B. The warranty period for the cold fluid applied waterproofing shall be 10 years after
substantial completion of the works.

C. The warranty shall be supported by a bank guarantee of the same duration obtained from a
bank approved by the Employer and shall be for the minimum amount of the value of the
works established by a final measurement of the same at the Unit Rates contained in the Bills
of Quantities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fluid Applied Waterproofing
1. Specialty Engineering Chemicals
P.O. Box 61347
Dubai, U.A.E
Tel: 04 836662
Fax: 04 837696
New Jahra Hospital
2. MBT Middle East LLC
P.O. Box 3712
Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971 4 8818123
Fax: 971 4 8818701
3. Carlisle Syntec Incorporated
900 Hensley Lane
Wylie, Texas 75098
U.S.A.
Tel: 972-442-6545
Fax: 972-442-0076
4. Vandex
P.O. Box 1369
CH-3601 Thun, Switzerland
Tel: (033) 228857
Fax: (033) 228854
5. BASF Construction Chemicals LLC
Dubai Investment Park
Jabel Ali Industrial Area
P.O. Box 37127
Dubai U.A.E.
Tel: 971 4 8090800
Fax: 971 4 8851130


2.02 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide liquid applied waterproofing, and other required materials produced by one
manufacturer.

B. Waterproofing Membrane, Pitch Modified, High Polymer one part Polyurethane Elastomeric
Membrane Type: Trowel apply membrane at areas indicated on Drawings to receive
Waterproofing, consisting of a high polymer and polyurethane applied in multiple layers
forming a seamless waterproof membrane to a minimum thickness of 1.5mm.

C. The Physical properties of the membrane must satisfy the following criteria:
1. Specific Gravity: : 1.2
2. Solid Contents: : 92% minimum
3. Application Temperature : 5C to 45C
4. Cure Time : 4 - 6 hours
48 hours 1.5mm film thickness.
5. Store A hardness : 30 C
6. Tensile strength : 2.0 N/mm
7. Ultimate elongation : 680%
8. Accelerated weathering : 12000 Hours. No appreciable deterioration.

D. Sealer (For Substrate): As recommended by manufacturer.

E. Cant Strips: As recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is
to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
New Jahra Hospital
3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare the substrate in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Grind
and fill concrete surfaces as required to meet tolerances specified by the manufacturer.

B. Apply waterproofing to substrate in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

C. Coordinate the installation of waterproofing with floor drains, equipment bases and other
adjacent work. Mask adjacent work to prevent soil marks.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the waterproofing manufacturers directions for the mixing, placing, and
finishing.

B. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system occurs.

C. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses provide the services of the
manufacturers technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the
manufacturer to advise on all phases of this work.

D. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified.

E. Install cant strips where shown or recommended by the waterproofing materials
manufacturer.

F. Allow waterproofing to cure properly. During this period block off traffic and protect
waterproofing from physical damage.


A. Protect clean and leave waterproofing to receive subsequent construction.


A. Testing: Fill water in an area elected by the Engineer to a minimum depth of 100 mm. Plug
any drains in the area and maintain water level for a period of 48 hours.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/071600-1 Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 071600

CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Specification Sections, apply to this Section

B. Section Includes: Cementitious waterproofing in accordance with the Contract Documents,
work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Internal sides of water tanks.
2. Internal sides of fuel tank.
3. Surface preparation, primer and sealant.
4. Testing.


1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C267-77 : Chemical resistance of mortar.
2. ASTM C672-76 : Standard method for scaling resistance of concrete
surfaces exposed to de-king chemicals.

B. Kuwait National Petroleum Company (KNPC):
1. General design guidelines for petrol filling station - 1995.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers specifications and application instructions for
cementitious waterproofing and other data to show compliance with the Contract
Documents.

B. Contractors Review: Before commencing work submit a statement signed by Contractor
and the Waterproofing Applicator, stating that substrates are acceptable, and that the
representative of the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials agrees that the specified
waterproofing system is proper and adequate for the application shown. Indicate by
transmittal form that copy of statement has been sent to the manufacturer.


Documents I and II.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Cementitious waterproofing shall be executed by an approved
specialist Sub-Contractor having at least 5 years experience in this work on comparable
projects, and approved by the materials manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: The manufacturers shall provide certificate from the MEW for the
approval of the products including certificate from an independent testing agency.


A. Deliver manufactured materials to the site in original, unopened containers, clearly identifying
manufacturers name and product.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and to prevent damage. Replace damaged
or otherwise unsuitable materials.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply cementitious waterproofing during inclement
weather or when ambient temperature and surfaces are less than 0 deg. C. for a period of 48
hours before, during and after application.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Contractor and installer
stating that the cementitious waterproofing system installed will be waterproof and free from
defects. Upon notification of any leaks occurring within the stipulated period, the Contractor
shall, at the convenience of the Employer, effect all repairs and replacements necessary to
remedy defects all to the complete works in accordance with the Contract Documents and
approval of the Engineers Representative.

B. Warranty period for cementitious waterproofing shall be ten (10) years after date of
Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cementitious Waterproofing:
1. Vandex Concrete Protection and Waterproofing
P.O. Box 1369
CH-3601 Thun/Switzerland
Tel: (033) 228857; Fax: (033) 228854
2. Hempels Marine Paints (Kuwait)
P.O. Box 3400 Safat
13034 Kuwait
Tel: 4813366/4813902
Fax: 4843307
3. MBT Middle East
P.O. Box 5558
Sharjah, United Arab Emirates
Tel: 971-6594922
Fax: 971-6595604
P.O. Box 61346
Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-836662
Fax: 971-4-837696
5. Sika Corporation
201 Polito Ave.
Lyndhurst N.J.
U.S.A. 07071-3601
Tel: 201 933 8800
Fax: 201 933 6165


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Waterproofing for Water Tanks:
1. Product Name: Master Seal 501/502 or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Blend of moisture activated chemicals, high grade
silica aggregate and selected cement.
New Jahra Hospital
b. Water: Clean potable water.
2. Product Name: SPC Coat CRE200W or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Non-toxic moisture solvent-free epoxy resin coating.
3. Product Name: Vandex Super or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Blend of moisture activated chemicals, high grade
silica aggregate and selected cement.

B. Cementitious Waterproofing for Fuel Tank:
1. Product Name: Vandex super or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Rapid hardened cement, specially treated quartz sand
and fillers and a compound of active chemicals.
b. Water: Clean and free of deterious materials.
2. Product Name: Tapecrete-Hempel or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Powder mix with a maximum grain size 0.5mm and
water borne acrylic dispersion.
3. Product Name: Spectite CW100 or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Two component polymer modified cementitious coat
(powdered and liquid).
4. Product Name: Master Seal 550 or from one of the specified manufacturers.
a. Product Description: Two component acrylic modified cementitious coating.

2.03 MIXES

A. Proportion mixes for slurry consistency and mortar consistency in accordance with the
manufacturers printed instructions, and to suit the surface and joint conditions.

B. Slurry Mix: Proportions as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Thickness: Minimum 3 coats or as recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Test: Provide quality assurance certificate to comply with all specified requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the Work
is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, wax and other foreign materials. Do not treat
concrete surface with curing agents before applying waterproofing.
B. Prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions.

C. Cut out wire ties not less than 25 mm. Rake out holes, honeycombs, cracks, open joints and
porous areas. Make cuts square to a depth of at least 19 mm. At junction of horizontal and
vertical surfaces and at penetrations, cut continuous reglets at least 6 cm. square.

D. One day prior to application, thoroughly rinse with water all surfaces to be waterproofed.
Surfaces shall be moist, not wet, when coatings are applied.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply cementitious waterproofing to both horizontal and vertical surfaces as per
New Jahra Hospital
1. Surfaces: Uniformly apply waterproofing on vertical and horizontal surfaces in not
less than two slurry coatings at a rate as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Vertical Construction Joints: Apply two slurry coatings of waterproofing immediately
prior to placing contiguous concrete.
3. Cracks, Tie Holes and Honeycombs: Apply slurry coating and fill depressions with
waterproofing mortar in laminating layers.
4. Reglets, Wall and Slab Junctions: Fill reglets and joints with waterproofing mortar in
laminating layers.

B. Moisture cure all cementitious waterproofing for a minimum of two days as recommended by
manufacturer. After waterproofing has aged for at least two weeks, neutralize all
waterproofed surfaces that will remain exposed.

C. Form a continuous waterproof envelope which will prevent leakage. Take immediate
remedial measures to stop water infiltration during the construction and guarantee periods.


A. Water Test:
1. Block drain and any other apertures, and fill with water and maintain for 48 hours.
2. Repair any leakage and retest.


A. Clean and repair surfaces that are stained or damaged by work under this section. Leave
work in a clean and proper condition.

B. Protect waterproofing against premature drying and from subsequent building operations as
per manufacturers instructions.

3.06 TESTING

A. Fill water tank and maintain water level for a period of 72 hours. Any leak, take immediate
remedial measures to stop leakage under direction and supervision of Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/071900-1 Water Repellents
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 071900

WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section includes: Protective coating for stone cladding including all plant, labour equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with protective coating.


A. Performance Requirements:
1. The product shall provide protection to the stone cladding against atmospheric
pollution by repelling aggressive acid rain, dust, sand storm, etc. and shall be good
resistant to oil.
2. The product shall be solvent based fluorinated resin (Teflon) colourless, durable,
micro porous, silica free, UV resistant and help maintaining the treated surfaces
clean.

1.03 QUALITY ASSSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualification: The product shall be applied by an approved applicator who must
have at least 5 years experience in application of such products and shall be licensed by the
manufacturer.

B. Mock-up
1. Prepare using proposed method, a control sample to demonstrate the quality of work
including the use of plant material, workmanship, etc. After the Engineers' approval
carryout the work in accordance with this control sample.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions and other data as may be
required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.


A. Deliver manufactured materials to the site in original, unopened containers, clearly identifying
manufacturers name and product.

B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and to prevent damage. Replace damaged
or otherwise unsuitable materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. The material used for the protection to the stone cladding be BAT 420S, as manufactured by
Soft Applications S.A., Sablieres Str. 3 - C.P. 166- 1242 Satigny/Geneva Switzerland. Tel. No.
0041-21-341-6880.
Amiri Diwan III-2/071900-2 Water Repellents
New Jahra Hospital
2.02 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Base : Solvent
Physical State : Colourless Liquid
Odour : Characteristic of Solvent
Solubility : Miscible in butyl acetate or
Universal thinner, not miscible in water
: 0.846
PH : 6.00
VOC Content : 97% (Volatile Organic Compound)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Foreign materials that may inhibit penetration (such as curing compounds, sealers
and/or bond breakers, loose patching materials or surface oil) shall be removed.

B. Do not apply system to damp, frozen or dirty surfaces.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation/application instructions.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Submit a method statement to carry out the work based on the manufacturer's instructions.

B. The application may be carried out by an airless spray gun or with a roller depending on the
site constraints.

C. Two coats of the material shall be applied.

D. Allow at least 8 hours for the first coat to dry before applying the second coat depending on
the weather conditions.

E. Allow 24 hours for final drying time.

F. Clean the equipment with universal thinner immediately after use.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/072100-1 Thermal Insulation
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes building insulation of the following types:
1. Provide rigid foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Provide semi-rigid mineral-wool board insulation.
3. Provide semi-rigid fiberglass board insulation.
4. Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Semi-rigid spandrel insulation for installation under Division 08 Section Glazed
Aluminum Curtain Wall.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete for coordination of underslab and
foundation insulation board.
2. Division 07 Section Foamed In-Place Insulation for closed-cell polyurethane foam
insulating sealant for gaps.
3. Division 07 Section Air Barriers for coordination of air barrier system with
installation of semi-rigid cavity insulation.
4. Division 07 Section Protected Membrane Roofing for roof insulation in conjunction
with roofing system.
5. Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping for safing insulation at through-
penetrations.
6. Division 07 Section Fire-Resistive Joint Systems for curtain wall and safing
insulation at perimeter fire-resistive joint systems.
7. Division 09 Section Gypsum Board for acoustical insulation installed within interior
partitions.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM C612, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
C. ASTM C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

B. Air Barrier Pre-Installation Conference: participate in air barrier pre-installation conference,
as specified in Division 07 Section Air Barriers.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-
test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to
Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in
each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the
following manufacturers, as noted under each insulation type:
1. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI 48674; (800) 441-4369.
2. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH 43659; (800) 438-7465
3. Johns Manville Corp., Denver, CO 80217-5108; (800) 654-3103.
4. Roxul, Milton, ON L9T 3H3; (800) 265-6878.
5. Thermafiber, Inc., Wabash, IN 46992, (800) 294-7076.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Foam Plastic Board Insulation (Type A):
a. Styrofoam Square Edge (SE) as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co.
b. Foamular 250, Square Edge as manufactured by Owens Corning.
2. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, density 1.6 lb/cu. ft.,
min., compressive strength 25 psi, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
a. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 5 year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5.0 min.,
degree F/sq. ft.-h/BTU/inch at 40 degrees F and 75 degrees F respectively.
b. Water Absorption (ASTM C272): Max. 0.1% by volume.
c. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Rigid Foam Plastic Board Insulation (Type B):
d. Styrofoam Highload 60 as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co.
e. Foamular 600, Square Edge as manufactured by Owens Corning.
2. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type VII, density 1.6 lb/cu. ft.,
min., compressive strength 60 psi, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
New Jahra Hospital
a. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): 5 year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5.0 min.,
degree F/sq. ft.-h/BTU/inch at 40 degrees F and 75 degrees F respectively.
b. Water Absorption (ASTM C272): Max. 0.3% by volume.
c. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2.03 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION
A. Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Board Insulation (Type D):
a. Type 703 as manufactured by Owens Corning.
b. Type I/S 300 as manufactured by Johns Manville.
2. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB;
faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) vapor retarder, with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal density and
thermal resistivity:
a. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x
in. at 75 deg F.
b. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION
A. Semi-Rigid Mineral Fiber Board Insulation (Type F):
a. Curtainwall Insulation/CW 225 as manufactured by Owens Corning.
b. CW-40 as manufactured by Thermafiber LLC.
c. CurtainRock as manufactured by Roxul.
2. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612,
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 0, respectively;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal
density and thermal resistivity:
a. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft., Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x
h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
b. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings.
c. Fiber Color: Darkened.
B. Semi-Rigid Mineral Fiber Board Insulation (Type G):
a. CavityRock as manufactured by Roxul.
b. RainBarrier-45 as manufactured by Thermafiber LLC.
2. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612,
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 0 and 0, respectively;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; water repellent, and of the
following nominal density and thermal resistivity:
a. Nominal density of 4.4 lb/cu. ft., Type IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4.2 deg F
x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
b. Water absorption: Max. 0.03% by volume (ASTM C1104).
c. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings.
d. Fiber Color: Darkened.

C. Refer to Division 07 Sections Penetration Firestopping and Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
for semi-rigid insulation for through-penetration and perimeter fire-resistive systems.

2.05 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation (Type J):
a. Fiberglas Insulation as manufactured by Owens Corning.
b. JM Formaldehyde-Free Fiber Glass Insulation by Johns Manville.
New Jahra Hospital

2. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.06 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

2.07 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesive: Type as recommended by insulation manufacturer and compatible with
substrates.
1. Air Barrier Membrane: Synthetic rubber based insulation adhesive compatible with
air barrier system.
a. Product: Loctite PL300 Foamboard Adhesive by Henkel Corporation.
2. Concrete, Masonry: Synthetic rubber based insulation adhesive.
a. Product: Loctite PL300 Foamboard Adhesive by Henkel Corporation.

B. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking
washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.
c. Gemco; Spindle Type.
2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter;
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick
galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.
b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150.
c. Gemco; Dome-Cap.
d. Gemco; R-150.
e. Gemco; S-150.
2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Ceiling plenums.
b. Where indicated.

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive.
c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this
Section.

New Jahra Hospital

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed.
C. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections
capable of interfering with insulation attachment.

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
at any time to ice, rain, and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and
insulation encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation
units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required
to make up total thickness.
F. Install insulation in fire rated partitions in accordance with requirements indicated in UL Fire
Resistance Directory.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BELOW GRADE INSULATION
A. Horizontal Surfaces: Loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
B. Vertical Surfaces: Install rigid insulation on the interior face of exterior foundation walls.
Install insulation using adhesive or mastic as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY INSULATION
A. Application of Rigid Foam Plastic Insulation over Air Barrier Membrane: Install rigid
insulation in core of cavity walls, applying horizontally to exterior face of substrate over
which air barrier has been applied.
1. Attach insulation over air barrier membrane by applying 1/2-inch beads of adhesive
in continuous horizontal ribbons spaced approximately 12-inches apart.
2. Fit courses of insulation between with edges butted tightly in both directions.
3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with masonry wall
ties specified in Division 04 Section Brick Masonry at masonry veneers.
B. Application of Semi-Rigid Mineral Fiber Insulation over Air Barrier Membrane: Install semi-
rigid insulation in core of cavity walls, applying horizontally to exterior face of substrate
over which air barrier has been applied.
1. Attach insulation over air barrier membrane with insulation washers at metal and
phenolic panel wall cladding.
2. Fit courses of insulation between with edges butted tightly in both directions.
3. Supplement mechanical attachment of insulation by securing edge of boards with
furring members specified in Division 07 Sections for metal and phenolic wall panels.
New Jahra Hospital

3.06 INSTALLATION OF BELOW DECK INSULATION
A. Install semi-rigid insulation board on the underside of suspended concrete floors as
indicated.
B. Horizontal Surfaces: Install with insulation hangers and washers according to anchor
manufacturers written instructions.
1. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.
a. Install a test area to insure that the insulation hangers are compatible with
the surface to which they are to be adhered. Allow "test area" to remain for a
48 hour period, then pull down to test adhesion
2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position
over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking
care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
3. Install insulation with end joints staggered and all joints butted tightly. Cut around
electrical boxes, pipes and other protrusions, fitting insulation snuggly to object.
4. Where insulation will not be covered with subsequent construction, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.
C. Install insulation in multiple layers. Install faced insulation as first layer with vapor retarder
material on warm (inner) side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Install second
layer of unfaced insulation over the first with joints staggered from joints of first layer a
minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of
units.
B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by
applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are
shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Vapor Retarder-Faced Units:
1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling
flanges to flanges of metal studs.
E. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces
where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/072700-1 Air Barriers
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 072700

AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes vapor-permeable air barriers.
1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-
penetration treatments.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement
of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied
to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air
movement through the wall.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage
and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of
products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, transition membrane, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and
outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers
and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with
the barrier.

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program
and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.
New Jahra Hospital
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for
preconstruction testing.
1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m),
incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door
frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate
surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing
of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly.
a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing
agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
b. Include junction with roofing membrane and interface with curtain wall
system..
c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct
mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.

1.06 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on field mockups.
B. Mockup Testing: Air-barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements
indicated, as evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency.

A. Deliver materials to the job site in undamaged and original packaging indicating the name
of the manufacturer and product.
B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.
1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.
2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from
single source from single manufacturer.

A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air
barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental
condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of
accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints,
construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without
deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq.
ft. (0.2 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa), when tested according to ASTM E 283.
New Jahra Hospital

2.03 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER
A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane.
a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:
i) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP.
ii) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP.
iii) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31 or Air-Bloc 33.
iv) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
(0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms (580 ng/Pa x s x sq. m);
ASTM E 96/E 96M.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a
complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material
manufacturer.
C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet
consisting of 32 mils (0.8 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- (0.2-mm-) thick,
cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing.
D. Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, self-adhering;
polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release
liner backing.
E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
F. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
G. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive
adhesive tape.
H. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0250 inch (0.64 mm) thick, and
Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.
I. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place,
polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft (24- to 32-kg/cu. m) density; flame-spread
index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate
cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
J. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured
low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component,
neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to
substrates.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
c. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.
K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low
modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
New Jahra Hospital
L. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric
liquid; trowel grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
contaminants.
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
air-barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners
and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to
another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide
continuous support for air barrier.

3.03 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to
ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt
from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's
recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) along
each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material
and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with sealant according to
ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid
air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry.
Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.

New Jahra Hospital
3.04 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION
A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier
manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a
continuous air barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3
inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior
door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory
materials.
D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's
recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot
be applied within these temperature ranges.
E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply preformed silicone-sealant extrusion so that a minimum of 3
inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of
full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full
contact.
1. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to
walls, frame, and air-barrier material.
F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
G. Seal strips and transition strips around penetrations with termination mastic.
H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide,
counterflashing strip.
I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed
by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and
flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm)
beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.05 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to
achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature
ranges.
1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.
Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
3. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
New Jahra Hospital

B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates
according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around
protrusions such as masonry ties.
1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in
writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil
(1.0-mm) dry film thickness, applied in two equal coats.

C. Apply strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches (75 mm)
onto each surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for
compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope
with no gaps or holes.
2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.
3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions,
and mortar droppings.
4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
maintained.
5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.
7. Laps in sheet materials, strips and transition strips have complied with minimum
requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been
applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.
10. Compatible materials have been used.
11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been
provided.
12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with
requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support,
integrity, and continuity of seal.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of
air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or
depressurization.
2. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage
according to ASTM E 783.
3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier
adhesion of 16 lbf/sq. in. (110 kPa) according to ASTM D 4541.

D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction
period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days,
remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier
application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to
air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not
approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed
work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected
construction.
C. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/073200-1 Roof Tiles
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 073200

ROOF TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Precast concrete roof tiling in accordance with the requirements of the
1. Supply of roof tiles.
2. Accessories.
3. Installation.

1. Section 075552 - Modified Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing
2. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal, Flashing and Trim
3. Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
4. Section 033000 - Cast in Place Concrete

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM B 749-03 : Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet,
and Plate Products
2. ASTM C 270-05a : Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
3. ASTM C 920-05 : Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
4. ASTM C 979-05 : Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete
5. ASTM C 1167-03 : Specification for Clay Roof Tiles
6. ASTM C 1311-02 : Specification for Solvent Release Sealants
7. ASTM C 1492-03 : Specification for Concrete Roof Tile
8. ASTM D 226-05 : Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
9. ASTM D 312-00 : Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing
10. ASTM D 1079-05a : Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing
11. ASTM D 1970-01 : Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing
Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
12. ASTM D 2626-04 : Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated
Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing
13. ASTM D 4586-00 : Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-
Free
14. ASTM D 6380-03 : Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt)
15. ASTM E 108-05 : Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
16. ASTM E 1980-01 : Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of
Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces
17. ASTM F 1667-05 : Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and
Staples

B. Association Publications:
1. National Roofing Contractors Association. Steep-Slope Roofing Materials Guide.
Rosemont, IL: NRCA, (published every two years).
2. National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association/Western States Roofing Contractors
Association. Gillan, Leland E., and Terry Anderson. Concrete and Clay Tile Roof
Design Criteria Manual for Cold and Snow Regions. Eugene, OR/Burlingame, CA:
NTRMA/WSRCA.
New Jahra Hospital
3. U.S. Green Building Council. LEED-NC: Green Building Rating System for New
Construction & Major Renovations. Version 2.2. Washington, DC: USGBC, 2005.
(Available in PDF at www.usgbc.org).

C. Standard:
1. ACI 347 : Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product: Submit to the Engineer for information only in accordance with the requirements of
Contract Documents manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for each item
of proprietary material used, showing compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the following: profiles, slopes, low and
high points, dimensions, joints and arrangement of units, detail of special design or shapes;
details of joints, connections to adjoining work or materials and method of installation.
Indicate positions of service outlets including roof drains, vent pipes, exhaust fans, roof
hatches, skylights, etc., and co-ordinate with all other trades. Avoid small cuttings around
roof outlets and the like.

C. Design Mixes: Submit to the Engineer copies of mix designs with support material, for mixes
specified under Paragraph 2.02 MIX DESIGN.

D. Mill Certificates: Submit to the Engineer copies of manufacturers certificate of mill tests of
all cement.

E. Samples: Submit 500 x 500 x 50 mm (nominal) samples of precast concrete roof tiling and
coved skirting prior to fabrication of units. Sample acceptance will be for colour, appearance
and configuration of aggregate and depth of exposure only. Compliance with other
requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.


A. Contractors and their supervisory personnel engaged in the Work of this Section shall have
successful experience with work comparable to that shown and specified including
organized quality control and testing procedures.

B. The requirements of Section CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Paragraph Quality Control
apply to work under this Section.

C. Visual Mock-up: Provide mock-up (3 x 3 m bay) of full sized build-up. Mock-up shall be
representative of the finished work in all respects indicating joint conditions and all other
features as will be used in the final work. Mock-up assembly will be used as a standard for
judging acceptability of work on project and may be used in the finished work.


A. Transport, store and handle all materials in a manner to avoid undue strains, hair cracks,
staining, or other damage. Deliver units from plant to project site in accordance with
schedule and proper setting sequence. Store all materials, clear of the ground and protected
from mud or rain splashes. Cover units, secure covers firmly, and protect the units from
dust, dirt or other staining materials.


A. During construction, and after erection, protect unit tiles and skirtings subject to damage
until Substantial Completion of the Works.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Obtain cement, aggregates and water from single sources sufficient to complete
the entire work and to assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of colour.

B. Portland Cement: B.S. 12 or ASTM C 150, Type 1; Gray. Cement acceptance shall be
based on the manufacturers ability to produce a consistently uniform colour. All cement
used shall be from the same mill and manufacturer, and furnished to ensure cement of
uniform colour.
1. Mill certificate, including chemical analysis and results of physical tests, and colour
samples shall be submitted to the Engineer with each shipment of cement to the
concrete supplier.

C. Aggregate: Aggregate of concrete tiles/ pavers shall be clean, washed materials and shall
meet the requirements of B.S. 882 and ASTM C 33. The gradation and colour of the
aggregate must be consistent. Any batch of aggregate not meeting these requirements will
be rejected.

D. Water-Reducing and/or Retarding Densifier Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, Type D; as
required. Recommended architectural concrete dosages are in excess, normally by 50% of
those generally used for structural concrete.

E. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

F. Fly ash or calcium chloride or other accelerating admixture shall not be used.

G. Water: Potable clean water.

2.02 MIX DESIGN

A. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mix (mixes) as required to obtain the strength specified.
1. Compressive Strength: 300 kg/sq.cm characteristic cube strength minimum at 28
days.
2. Slump: 75 mm maximum.
3. Air Entrainment: 5% minimum, 7% maximum.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Factory cast units for maximum quality control.

B. Forms: Construct forms of non-staining metal, fiberglass reinforced polyester, concrete, or
other acceptable materials. Fabricate and reinforce for close control of dimensions and
details. Make forms sufficiently rigid so that precast units will meet the casting tolerances.
Construct forms tightly to prevent leakage of mortar or paste. Form joints will not be
permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. Correct for thermally induced
strains or forces.

C. Mixing and Placing: Mix concrete to distribute fine and coarse aggregate evenly throughout.
Place concrete so as to prevent segregation in the forms.

D. Curing: Cure by artificial means until concrete has achieved at least 70% of its design
strength.

E. Surface Treatment: Finish surfaces exposed to view to match accepted samples and mock-
up panels in all respects.
1. Smooth, hard finish, free of blemishes, honeycombing or other surface
imperfections; achieved by the use of disc-type motor driven float and/or steel trowelling.

F. Size: 500 x 500 x 50mm.
New Jahra Hospital
G. Tolerances: As follows:
1. Overall height and width: 3 mm.
2. Plane of the side mould: 1.5 mm per 150 mm in depth (1/100).
3. Thickness: +/- 3 mm.
4. Out of square (diagonal length): 3 mm in 1.8 m (1/600).

H. Remove the precast elements from the form without damaging or overstressing and store or
place for transportation on a stable bed that will not allow further distortion of the member.
Separate stacked members with battens.

I. Transport the precast element with sufficient battens, bracing and supports so as not to
overstress by vibration or impact loadings.

2.04 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, Gray.

B. Pigment: Pure mineral pigments, resistant to alkalis, non-fading and weather proof, colour as
required and approved by the Engineer.

C. Water: Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work.

D. Sand: ASTM C 144.

2.05 SETTING BED

A. Cement and sand screed 1:10 by volume, mixed with minimum amount of water added to
make the screed workable.

2.06 JOINT SEALANT

A. Comply with specification Section Sealant and Joint Fillers for tile joint sealants and back-
up rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Before delivery, examine and measure units to establish conformity with sizes and
dimensions shown on shop drawings. Units whose dimensions vary in excess of specified
tolerances are unacceptable and will be rejected.

B. Discard and replace units which are cracked, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged.
Patched units are not acceptable, except in specific instances when the Engineer determines
the unit may be repaired. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any unit if it does not
match the accepted mock-up.

C. Before beginning erection, examine all parts of the substrate and the conditions under which
the Work is to be done. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Precast concrete roof tiling.
1. Survey: Before placement of precast elements, survey the base to confirm proper
line and grade.
2. Lay units in accordance with approved shop drawing.
3. Lay Cement and Sand screed bed, compact and level to required thickness,
ensuring proper line, fall and cross-falls to existing on the substrate.
New Jahra Hospital
4. Install precast tile units properly set with close joints and ensuring full bearing on the
setting bed. Set units at skirting true in level, line and matching joints with general
area tiling.
5. Fill all joints in sand. Seal top of skirting with sealant and back-up rod.
6. Provide control joints or expansion joints at 3m centres each way. Control or
expansion joint shall be 10 mm wide, for the full thickness of tile, filled with
compressible filler rod and surface, not less than 15 mm deep pointed in sealant.

3.04 FIELD CUTTING

A. Holes may be field cut only with the Engineers approval, and only with power saws or core
drills. Cracks, spalls and sharp corners created by field cutting are to be ground, eased and
patched with epoxy type bonding and patching compound.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the Work, thoroughly clean exposed surface of precast units, by
scrubbing with a solution of soap powder, using stiff fibre brushes, followed by a thorough
rinsing with clean water. All surface stains shall be removed by means as recommended by
the manufacturer, and to the approval of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/074213-1 Composite Wall Panels
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 074213

COMPOSITE WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.
1. Division 07 Section Air Barriers for weather barrier behind metal wall panel system.
2. Division 07 Section Roof Specialties for manufactured fascia, copings and trim not
part of the metal wall panel system.
3. Division 07 Section Joint Sealants for sealants and gaskets not part of the metal
wall panel system.

A. Metal Wall Panel System: Consisting of aluminum faced composite wall panels of size, type
and profile indicated, and includes all attachment system components, miscellaneous
framing, related trim, flashings, and accessories necessary for a complete system meeting
AAMA 509.
1. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard pressure-
equalized, rainscreen-principle system, with concealed drainage of baffles and
weeps for water which may accumulate in the members of the system, for drainage
at base of wall. Provide horizontal and vertical joints with reveal as detailed.

A. References:
1. International Building Code, 2009 Edition, referred to herein as IBC 2009.
2. ASCE/SEI 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, referred
to herein as ASCE/SEI 7-05.

B. Structural Performance: Architectural components and cladding shall withstand the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Seismic Performance: Architectural components and cladding, including attachments to
other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according
to ASCE/SEI 7-05.
D. Limits of Deflection: Composite wall panel system shall withstand wind loads with the
following allowable deflection:
1. Maximum allowable deflection limited to L/175 deflection of panel head and sill
normal to plane of wall.
2. Maximum allowable deflection of panel stiffeners and aluminum panel material
combined limited to L/60.

E. Drained and Back Ventilated Rain Screen Performance (AAMA 509):
1. Water penetration through panel system: W1 classification.
2. Ventilation V4 classification.
3. Air/Moisture Barrier: Refer to Division 07 Section Air Barriers.

New Jahra Hospital
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, oil-canning, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-faced composite wall panel assembly indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturers specifications, material descriptions, finishes, installation instructions and
other data needed to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements for each type of
metal wall panel and accessory.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Provide shop drawings in sufficient detail and drawn to adequate scale to accurately
indicate the following information:
a. Design performance criteria and applicable loading values.
b. Layout and dimensions of panel system and components.
c. Supports, fastening and anchoring methods.
d. Detail and location of joints and gaskets, including joints necessary to
accommodate thermal movement.
2. Drawings shall be approved prior to fabrication.
3. Include structural analysis data indicating panel system complies with design loads,
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Minimum 12 x 12 inches. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal-faced composite wall panel accessories.
2. Panel Assembly: Include four-way joint for composite panels and fasteners, closures,
gaskets, and other metal wall panel accessories.

E. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
B. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be signed and
sealed by a professional engineer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material
panel Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative,
structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal
composite material panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel
installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
New Jahra Hospital
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests
and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel
assembly during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
furnish copy of record to each participant.


A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as
not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection
during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with
suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to
ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite
material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during
installation.

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according
to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before metal-faced wall
panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing,
trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
New Jahra Hospital

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled,
metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to
a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated.
Include attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for
weathertight system.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
a. 3A Composites USA, Inc.; Alucobond Plus.
b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond ZCM.
B. Zinc-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, zinc sheet
facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm).
2. Core: Fire retardant.
3. Face Sheets: Titanium Zinc Alloy, 99.995 % Zn and alloying additives of 0.08% -
1.0% copper and 0.07% - .12% titanium, .001% - .015% aluminum in accordance
with ASTM B69-11 Architectural Rolled Zinc - Type 1 and Type 2.
4. Exterior Finish: Mill.
C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing.
D. Attachment Assembly: Rainscreen principle system.

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated
steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation
unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for
support and alignment of metal composite material panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel
system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite
material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls,
framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing
and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of
plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed
fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and
remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel
manufacturer.
New Jahra Hospital

2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the
factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and
that minimize noise from movements.
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with
flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.

2.04 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal
composite material wall panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
New Jahra Hospital

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal
composite material panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.03 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written
instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels
perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material
panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.
2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten
with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers
and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts,
or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar
elements with self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners: Stainless-steel.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material
panel manufacturer.
D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal
composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system,
including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor
channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material
joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
D. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings,
and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements
specified.
1. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

E. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with
vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at base
of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported
by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal composite material wall panels by inserting
horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of panels. Leave
horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.
New Jahra Hospital
1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed without
disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly
including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material
panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by
metal composite material panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof
performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within
24 inches (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), non-accumulative, on level, plumb,
and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of
alignment of matching profiles.

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite
material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written
installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean
finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels
of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/075552-1 Modified Bituminous Protected
New Jahra Hospital Membrane Roofing
SECTION 075552

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Modified bituminous roofing membrane in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Work includes but shall not be limited to the
following:
1. Flame bonded single ply membrane.
2. Lightweight concrete.
3. Screeds
4. Accessory item.

1. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
2. Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation
3. Section 073200 - Roofing Tiles
4. Section 076200 - Flashings and Sheet Metal

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C 140-05a : Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units
2. ASTM C 208-95 (Reapproved 2001): Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating
Board
3. ASTM C 728-05 : Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
4. ASTM D 312-00 : Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing
5. ASTM D 448-03a : Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and
Bridge Construction
6. ASTM D 1079-05a : Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and
Bituminous Materials
7. ASTM D 1227-95 (Reapproved 2000): Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a
Protective Coating for Roofing
8. ASTM D 1653-03 : Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic
Coating Films
9. ASTM D 1668-97a (Reapproved 2006): Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and
Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing
10. ASTM D 2178-04 : Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
11. ASTM D 2370-98 (Reapproved 2002): Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic
Coatings
12. ASTM D 2626-04 : Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and -Coated Organic
Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing
13. ASTM D 2824-04 : Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof
Coatings, Non-Fibered, Asbestos Fibered, and Fibered
without Asbestos
14. ASTM D 3617-02 : Practice Sampling and Analysis of New Built-up Roof
Membranes
15. ASTM D 4263-83 (Reapproved 2005): Test Method for Indicating Moisture in
Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
16. ASTM D 4586-00 : Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
17. ASTM D 4601-04 : Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet
Used in Roofing
18. ASTM D 4798-04 : Practice for Accelerated Weathering Test Conditions and
Procedures for Bituminous Materials (Xenon-Arc
Method)
19. ASTM D 4897-01 : Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting
Base Sheet Used in Roofing
20. ASTM D 6083-05 : Specification for Liquid Applied Acrylic Coating Used in
Roofing
21. ASTM D 6152-99 (Reapproved 2005): Specification for SEBS-Modified Mopping
Asphalt Used in Roofing
22. ASTM D 6162-00a : Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a
Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber
Reinforcements
23. ASTM D 6163-00 : Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber
Reinforcements
24. ASTM D 6164-05 : Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester
Reinforcements
25. ASTM D 6222-02 : Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester
Reinforcements
26. ASTM D 6223-02 : Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of
Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements
27. ASTM D 6298-05 : Specification for Fiberglass Reinforced Styrene-
Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheets
with a Factory Applied Metal Surface
28. ASTM E 108-05 : Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
29. ASTM E 119-05 : Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
30. ASTM E 1980-01 : Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of
Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces

B. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications, codes, and specifications
shall apply throughout the modified bituminous membrane roofing works:
1. National Roofing Contractors : NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing
Association Manuals
2. National Roofing Contractors : Quality Control Recommendations for
Association/Asphalt Roofing Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing
Manufacturers Association
3. The Midwest Roofing Contractors : Technical Document MB-30
Association Recommended Performance Criteria for
Modified Roof Membrane System in
1983


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand
specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-120.
2. Hail Resistance Rating: [MH] [SH].

E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR
"Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

G. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance not less than 0.70
and Thermal Emittance not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer for information only in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, manufacturers specifications and installation
instructions for roofing membrane and accessory items, and other data to show compliance
with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer shop drawings of all edge terminations and flashing
details at large scale. Details shall show reference of each material, sequence of placement
and application procedure.


Documents I and II.

A. Manufacturer Qualification: The products or materials shall be manufactured by a firm that
has specialised in the manufacture of such items of the type specified for a continuous
period of at least Five (5) years.

B. Installer Qualification: Roofing membrane work shall be executed by an approved specialist
Sub-Contractor having a minimum of Ten (10) years experience in the installation of materials
specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. The firm shall have the approval of
the waterproofing materials manufacturer.

C. Pre-Installation: Prior to installation of roofing, meet at the Project Site to review the material
selections, installation procedures and coordination of the work with other trades. Meeting
shall include the Contractor, the Engineer, the Subcontractor Manufacturers Representative
and any other Contractors/Subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers unopened containers or bundles fully identified with
brand, type, grade, class and all other qualifying information.

B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the name, type and
grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load (or furnish
manufacturers blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the Work.

C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign
matter. Conspicuously mark Rejected on materials which have once been wet or damaged
and remove from the job site.

1. Do not proceed with roofing work during inclement weather. Comply with
manufacturers recommendations for application and curing under specific climate
conditions.

B. Protection
1. Protect roofing membrane installation from damage during construction period so
that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at the time of substantial
completion.
2. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of
materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing membrane
operations.
3. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains or other services.
4. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,
storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local
ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or
required under this section.

1.07. WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit written warranty executed by the Contractor Manufacture
and installer stating the modified bituminous waterproofing will be free from defects. Upon
notification of any leak occuring within the period stipulated, the Contractor shall, at the
convenience of the Employer, effect all repairs and replacements necessary to remedy
defects in accordance with the Contract Documents and approval of the Engineer.

B. The warranty period for the Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing shall be Ten (10) years
after Substantial Completion of the Works.

C. The warranty shall be supported by a bank guarantee of the same duration obtained from a
bank approved by the Employer and shall be for the minimum amount the value of the works
established by a final measurement of the same at the unit rates contained in the Bills of
Quantities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Membrane:
1. DWI Dermabut Waterproofing Industries
P.O. Box 10308
Jubail 31961
Saudi Arabia
Tel: 03-341-0464
Fax: 03-341-0481
2. Calotex Corp.
P.O. Box 31602-4010
Scout Boulevard
Tampo, FL-33631-3602, U.S.A
Tel: (800) 235 6839 / (813) 873-4173
3. GS Roofing Products Co. Inc.
5525 MAC Arthur Boulevard Suite 900
Irving TX 75038, U.S.A
Tel: (214) 580 5600
4. Bitumat Company Ltd.
P.O. Box 7487 Dammam, 31462
Saudi Arabia
Tel: 966 3 812 1210
Fax: 966 3 812 1190
5. Siplast, Kopal Group
12 rue de la Renaissance
Zip Code 92184
Tel: +33 140 96 3515
Fax: +33 140 96 3507


2.02 MATERIAL

A. Modified Membrane:
1. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the roofing material
manufacturers latest published manual for the slope and type of substrate shown.
2. Modified Bituminous Membrane:
a. Flame bonded single-ply membrane, composed of high quality distilled
bitumen modified with selected elastomeric (APP) polymers and
antioxidants.
b. The top surfaces shall be coated with a layer of material slate flakes
(Chips/Granules) or as per manufacturers standard.
c. Membrane shall be reinforced with 200 gms/m non-woven polyester core
and the core shall be continuous thread, rot-proof material, high tensile
strength and high resistance to tear and puncturing loads.
d. Properties:
(i) Softening point of coating mixture : 155 C
(ii) Water Absorption : Less than 0.15%
(iii) Thickness : 4mm to 5mm
(iv) Number of Layers : As shown on the
drawing
(v) Reinforcement core of the membrane : 200 gms/m polyester
(Non woven with
continuous thread)
(vi) Adhesion strength : 0.8 Kg/cm
3. Primer for Bitumen Sheet Roofing Membrane:
a. As recommended by the manufacturer of the waterproof membrane
4. Protection Board: As recommended by the manufacturer of waterproof membrane.
5. Cant Strips: Cant strips are required at all angle changes, greater than 45. All cant
strips shall be fire resistant material (i.e. Perlite, fibreglass, poured in place concrete).

B. Lightweight Concrete: Refer Section 033000 - Cast-in-place Concrete.

C. Screed: Refer Section 033000 - Cast-in-place Concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all surfaces upon which roofing work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Do not proceed with roofing work until all vents, drains, curbs, blocking, nailer strips and
projections through the roof deck have been installed and until the substrate is cleaned of
debris and deleterious materials which would impair the work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roofing system in strict accordance with manufacturers direction for
conditions of each application.

B. Prime all surfaces receiving roofing membrane. Use products and methods recommended
by the roofing membrane materials manufacturers and in accordance with ASTM D 41.
C. Apply roofing membrane in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Overlap joints a minimum of 100 mm. Starting at the low point of the
roof install one layer of membrane. Torch apply the rolled portion of the membrane by
passing the flame of the torch evenly across the face of the roll. Heat the membrane with the
torch until it develops a sheen or glossy appearance. Apply heat to the seam area of
previously installed sheet as well as just before applying the roll. Roof top traffic must be
kept to a minimum after installation of membrane in order to minimize damage.

D. Apply cant strips at all edges and around any penetrations in the roofing, as shown on
Drawings.

E. Bond protection board to roofing membrane as shown on Drawings.

F. Flash all roof outlets, pipes, sleeves, and other projections through roof deck and provide
tight construction throughout.


A. Before completed roofing on horizontal surfaces is covered, plug all drains and openings and
test for leaks with a 100 mm depth of water maintained for 48 hours. Examine substructure
for leaks or damage. Repair leaks and damage and repeat test until no leakage is observed.

B. Conduct test in one operation or in number of operations by dividing roof areas into
convenient sections. However, any method employed shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/076200-1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 076200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Flashing , Trim and sheet metal work in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents, work includes:
1. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.

1. Section 033000 - Cast in place concrete.
2. Section 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry.
3. Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation.
4. Section 073200 - Concrete Roof Tiles.
5. Section 075552 - Modified Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing.

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A167-92b : Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2. ASTM A526/A526M-90 : Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated Galvanized
by the Hot-dip process, Commercial Quality.
3. ASTM B209M-92a : Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet
and Plate.

shall apply throughout the sheet metal, flashing and trim works:
1. NRCA : Roofing and Waterproofing Manual Third Edition 1989.
2. SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Manual Fourth Edition 1987 October.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer for information only, copies of manufacturers
specifications and installation instructions for flashing and sheet metal and other data as may
be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer shop drawings drawn to a large scale showing
layout, profile, method of jointing and anchorage details of flashings around obstruction,
protrusions and also expansion joint details. Details shall reference each material, sequence
of placement and application procedure.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers unopened containers or bundles fully identified with
brand, type, grade, thickness and other qualifying information. Store, protect and keep
materials dry.
New Jahra Hospital

1. Do not proceed with flashing and sheet metal work during inclement weather. Comply
with manufacturers recommendations for application under specific climate
conditions.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and
protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Formed metal flashing and trims:
1. Alas Aluminium Corporation
6612 Snowdrift Road
Allentown PA 18106
U.S.A
Tel: (215) 395-8445
2. Fry Reglet Corporation
www.fryreglet.com
3. MM System Corp.
50 MM Way
P.O. Box 98
Pendergrass, GA 30567
U. S. A
www.mmsystemcorp.com
4. Cheney Flashing Company Inc.
623 Propeet Street
P.O. Box 818
Trenton NJ 08605
U.S.A.
Tel: (800) 322 2873
(609) 394 0175
5. Metroll
3 Jannali Road
West Dubbo, New South Wales
Australia
Tel: 02 6882 8277
Fax: 02 6882 8008


2.02 MATERIALS, FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS

A. Aluminium Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, anodized finish, colour to match
adjoining work or as selected by the Engineer, 1mm thick (20 gauge), unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:
1. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer.
2. Bituminous coating; SSPC-paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of
sulphur, compounded for 15 mil. dry film thickness coat.
New Jahra Hospital
3. Mastic sealant: Polyisobutylene, non-hardening, non-skimming, non-drying, non-
migrating sealant.
4. Reglets: Metal or plastic units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing
indicated, non-corrosive.
5. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching and compatible with
material installed, non-corrosive, size and gauge required for performance.
6. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards: 20 gauge non-magnetic stainless steel mesh of
fabricated units with selvaged edges and non-corrosive fasteners.
7. Roofing cement: Asphaltic ASTM D2822.
8. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell materials
recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure
movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all surfaces upon which flashing and sheet metal work is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate and install flashing and sheet metal work as shown, and in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Latest Edition, as
published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA).

B. Continuous through-wall flashing shall be lap-seamed and soldered at splices and
intersections.

C. Provide for thermal expansion of running trim, flashings, expansion joints and other items
exposed for more than 4.5 metre continuous length. Maintain a water tight installation at
expansion joints and seams. Locate expansion seams as shown or, if not shown, at the
following maximum spacing for each general flashing use:
1. Flashing and Trim: At 3.0 metre intervals, and 600mm each side of corners and
intersections.

D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible in exposed work, and locate
so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal work as required for a minimum
of 100mm embedment.

E. Underlayment: Where aluminium is to be installed directly on cementitious substrate, install
a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

F. Insert flashings into pre-formed grooves and similar retainers, and provide mechanical
anchorage as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturers of the flashing
and reglets devices. Where shown, provide saw cuts, retaining bars and similar devices for
securing the edges of flashings to other work. Where reglets or retainer does not provide for
snap-in anchorage of the flashing, provide wedges of lead or other compatible metal, spaced
600mm centres, and driven well into the retainer so as to be completely covered by sealant.

G. Separate dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic corrosion, with fibre spacers or bituminous
coatings.

3.03 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.
On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners,
metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean
condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

Amiri Diwan III-2/077100-1 Roof Specialties
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 077100

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Factory fabricated and finished roof edge flashing and trim in the following
categories:
a. Roof edgings
b. Copings
1. Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for wood blocking for roof
edge system.
2. Division 07 Section Protected Membrane Roofing
3. Division 07 Section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for shop and field fabricated
metal flashing and trim.
4. Division 07 Section Expansion Control for roof expansion joint covers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/SPRI ES-1, Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing
Systems, referred to herein as ANSI/SPRI ES-1, inclusive of the following testing
standards:
1. ANSI/SPRI Test Method RE-1, Test for Roof Edge Termination of Ballasted or
Mechanically Attached Roofing Membrane Systems, referred to herein as
ANSI/SPRI Test Method RE-1.

A. Provide manufactured roof edge products that are listed with FM Global (FM) Approval
Guide approved for Class FM 1-90.
B. General: Install manufactured roof edge flashing and trim systems to withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failing.
C. Design Wind Loads: Refer to the following roofing section(s) for design wind load (uplift)
values applied by membrane roofing system to prefabricated roof edge system(s).
1. Division 07 Section Protected Membrane Roofing

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers product data or each type of roof edge product
specified. Include installation instructions, specifications and other data demonstrating
that materials and performance comply with the specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings in sufficient detail showing layout, profiles, methods of
joining, accessory items, anchorage details, and interface with adjoining roof and wall
construction.
C. Certifications
New Jahra Hospital
D. Samples for Verification: Samples of each type of prefabricated roof edge system, and
accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture
variations, include sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of
variations expected
1. 8-inch length section of each different product to be exposed as finished surfaces.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof edge system from one source
and by a single manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed roof edge
system flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Pre-Roofing Conference: Prior to commencement of work under this section, participate in
and comply with the provisions of the Pre-Roofing Conference specified in Division 07
Section Protected Membrane Roofing.
D. Roofing Manufacturers Inspection:
1. Coordinate and cooperate with roofing manufacturers inspection (refer to Division
07 Section Protected Membrane Roofing and Field Quality Control requirements
specified in Part 3 of these specifications).
E. Owners Inspections and Testing:
F. Manufacturer Certification: Prefabricated roof edge system manufacturer shall provide the
following written certifications:
G. Prefabricated roof edge system shall meet performance design criteria according to the
following test standards:
1. The roof edge termination system shall be tested to secure the membrane to
minimum 100 lbs/ft in accord with the ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-1.
2. The roof edge fascia system shall be tested in accordance with the ANSI/SPRI ES-1
Test Method RE-2 for design wind loads (uplift) meeting or exceeding performance
requirement values specified herein.
3. The roof edge coping system shall be tested in accordance with the ANSI/SPRI ES-1
Test Method RE-3 for design wind loads (uplift) meeting or exceeding performance
requirement values specified herein.
H. Mockups: Prior to installing roof edging construct mockups indicated to verify selections
made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location designated by Owner.
2. Provide 12-inch straight length, and 12-inch by 12-inch corner sample of coping and
gravelstop.
3. Notify Owner one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
New Jahra Hospital

1.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE:
A. Manufacturers Standard Warranty:
1. Warranted materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for five
years after shipment. If, after inspection, the manufacturer agrees that materials are
defective, the manufacturer shall at their option repair or replace them.

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing
of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and
protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function
required, drawings and specifications are based on standard products by W.P. Hickman
Company, Asheville, NC 28813, (800) 892-9173; Web: www.wph.com and trade names of
that manufacturer are used herein.
comparable product with characteristics that meet or exceed the requirements specified

2.02 METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for use intended and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability of alloy and temper designated below
1. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of
0.050 inc hunless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; commercial quality;
provide 24 gauge material, unless otherwise indicated

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories designed and manufactured to
match and fit roof edge treatment system indicated
B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of same metal as sheet metal flashing or other non-corrosive
metal, of type and size as recommended by roof edge system manufacturer for product
and substrate application. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating
sealant.
New Jahra Hospital
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and
fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants
as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, splice plates, anchoring devices, and
similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with
material being installed; non-corrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
G. Coping Chair: Provide manufacturers standard molded styrene support chair, 3 inch wide,
designed to drain water back to exterior of system.

2.04 WALL COPING
A. Coping System: Provide manufacturers standard system consisting of formed aluminum
coping in shapes and sizes indicated. System shall be watertight and not require exposed
fasteners or sealants.
1. Basis of Design: Permasnap Coping as manufactured W.P. Hickman Company.

B. Include galvanized steel hold down cleats, gutter support chairs, concealed joint covers,
formed coping cap with factory fabricated inside and outside mitered and welded corners,
end caps, and other accessories indicated or required for a complete installation. Provide
components fabricated from the following metal:
1. Coping Cleat: 16 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Coping Cap: 0.050 inch thick aluminum.

2.05 ROOF EDGING (fascia):

2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof edge system
installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install prefabricated roof edging system(s) in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/SPRI ES-1 for the calculated project design wind loads.
2. Install prefabricated roof edging system(s) in accordance with the requirements of
FM Global 1-49 for the calculated project uplift loads.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install work true to line
and levels indicated. Coordinate with installation of single ply membrane roofing
system, as required to ensure that the entire Work performs properly and is
waterproof and weathertight.
B. Install blocking, cleats, clips, coping chairs, and other anchoring and attachment devices
required. Anchor products securely to withstand wind loading, structural movement and
thermal stresses. Use mechanical fasteners of size and type as recommended by
manufacturer for substrate and application.
C. Isolation: Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install prefabricated corner sections, and running lengths of formed aluminum coping and
fascia over cleats and concealed joint covers, allowing 1/8-inch space between sections for
controlled expansion.

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal
or deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure roof edge flashing and trim
Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering
at the time of Substantial Completion.

A. Roofing Manufacturers Inspection:
1. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by the roofing
manufacturer's inspector of the roofing system to ascertain that the roofing system,
inclusive of the prefabricated roof edging system, has been installed according to
manufacturer's published specifications and details.
2. Coordinate and cooperate with roofing manufacturers inspection.
3. Make adjustments and corrections to the prefabricated roof edging system as may
be necessary for roofing manufacturer to issue project roofing warranty.
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/078123-1 Intumescent Fireproofing
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 078123

INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC).
1. Division 05 Section Structural Metal Framing.

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions,
thicknesses, and other performance requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.
2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of
each structural component and assembly.
4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.
D. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate
temperature is 50 deg F (10 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are
provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for
24 hours after product application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing
complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

New Jahra Hospital
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements
of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.
C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263
by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted
otherwise.
D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.02 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
A. MIFRC: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation, and complying with indicated
fire-resistance design.
a. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad TF.
b. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products
Div.; AD Firefilm III.
c. Isolatek International; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 4.
2. Application: Designated for "interior general purpose" use by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
5. Hardness: Not less than 45, Type D durometer, according to ASTM D 2240.

2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates
and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with
required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing
manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing
manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.
E. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.

New Jahra Hospital
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and
according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:
1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign
substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under
conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or
other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.
B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify
that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance
of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials
during application.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.
C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is
in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface
imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of
fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-
resistive products after application.

3.03 APPLICATION
A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and
products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers,
topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.
B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply
fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings indicated.
C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or
remove fireproofing.
1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other
items penetrating fireproofing are in place.
2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying
fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design
and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and
intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by
fireproofing manufacturer.
H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing
material and matching finish approved for required mockups.
I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.
J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied,
inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.
K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:
1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each finish selected.

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the
following special inspections:
2. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11.

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not
proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously
completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values
must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-
resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and
retest.
2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.05 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and
clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged
areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.
New Jahra Hospital
D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using
manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/078413-1 Penetration Firestopping
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 078413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-
resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items.
1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-
resistance-rated construction, and at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in
smoke barriers.
2. Division 09 Section Gypsum Board for acoustical and smoke sealant at
penetrations through non-fire-rated assemblies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Include
manufacturers specifications, material descriptions, performance and limitation criteria,
test data and other information needed to demonstrate compliance with specified
requirements for each type of fire-resistive joint system.
C. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of
construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of
penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting
agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on
buyer.
B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction
condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the
New Jahra Hospital

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the
a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping.
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become
concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's
inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function
desired, drawings and specifications are based on fireproofing products as manufactured
by the following manufacturers; and trade names of those manufacturer are used herein.
1. Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ 08876; (800) 992-1180.
2. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK 74146; (800) 879-8000.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping
systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and
with penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg.
New Jahra Hospital

1. Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25
and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
C. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components
specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and
inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

2.03 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only through-penetration firestop system products that have been tested for
specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly
type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each
separate instance.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component, low VOC, latex formulations that do not re-emulsify
after cure during exposure to moisture.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal AS200 Elastomeric Spray.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
1. Products:
a. Floor Slabs:
1) Hilti, CP680 Series Cast-In Firestop Device.
b. Walls:
1) STI, EZ Path Fire Rated Pathway.
2) STI, SpecSeal Series LCC and SSC Firestop Collars.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal CS Composite Sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no
solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with plastic
film on both sides.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal Series RED2/BLU2 Wrap Strips

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, Portland
cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
form a nonshrinking, water-resistant, homogeneous mortar.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.

H. Firestop Pillows: Reusable, non-curing, heat-expanding pillows consisting of flame-
retardant bags filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents,
and fire-retardant additives.
1. Product: STI, SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
1. Product: STI, Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants
of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Products:
a. Vertical Application: STI, SpecSeal SIL300 Silicone Firestop Sealant.
b. Horizontal Application: STI, SpecSeal SIL300SL Self-Leveling Silicone
Firestop Sealant.

2.04 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration
firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality
with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration
firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;
do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's
seal with substrates.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will
be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding
labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Engineering Department of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because
of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only
after inspection reports are issued, reviewed by owner, and firestop installations comply
with requirements. Contractor shall obtain owners direction to proceed prior to enclosing
and concealing firestop systems.

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut
out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.07 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/078446-1 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 078446

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
1. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
2. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-
rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.
2. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems.
3. Division 09 Section Gypsum Board for acoustical and smoke sealant at perimeter
of non-fire-rated assemblies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
manufacturers specifications, material descriptions, performance and limitation criteria,
test data and other information needed to demonstrate compliance with specified
requirements for each type of fire-resistive joint system.
B. Shop Drawings: For each perimeter joint firestop system, show each type of fire-resistive
joint assembly, and relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance
with requirements for each condition indicated.
C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's
illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-
protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on
buyer.
B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of joint and construction condition
indicated only from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the
1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
designations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER
B. Basis of Design Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function
desired, drawings and specifications are based on fireproofing products as manufactured
by the following manufacturers; and trade names of those manufacturer are used herein.
1. Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ 08876; (800) 992-1180.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements provide either the named product or a

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only fire-resistive joint system products that have been tested for specific fire-
resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, linear
void width, movement capabilities, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.
B. Forming Material: Mineral wool board insulation, Nominal 4 pcf density, used as forming
materials .
1. Products:
a. Thermafiber, Safing 4.0.
b. Fibrex, FBX Safing Insulation.
c. Roxul, Safe.
C. Fill Material: Single component, low VOC, latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after
cure during exposure to moisture.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: STI, SpecSeal AS200 Elastomeric Spray.
2.03 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-
resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate
New Jahra Hospital
building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot
gases.
B. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with
rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor
assembly.
C. Joints between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls and floor or
roof assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of
construction they will join.
D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and
forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required.
Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by
the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-
resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. Install mineral wool insulation with the grain oriented to allow effective compression
between
2. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
fire-resistive joint system.
C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted labels. Attach labels permanently to
surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge and at 30 foot centers, so labels will
be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use self-adhering-type
labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels
are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb."
2. Designation of Joint System No.
3. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
4. Date of installation.

A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove
New Jahra Hospital
damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials
to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.07 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Systems: Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's
"Fire Resistance Directory".
B. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1. UL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: CW-D-####
2. Integrity Rating: 2 hours.
3. Insulation Rating: 1/4 hour.
4. Linear Opening Width: 8 inches, maximum.
5. Movement Capabilities: Class II and III - 5 percent vertical shear.
6. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1.0 cfm/ft.
7. L-Rating at 400 deg F: Less than 1.0 cfm/ft.
C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-####
2. Assembly Rating: 1 or 2 hours.
3. Nominal Joint Width: 2-inch.
4. Movement Capabilities: Class II or Class III - 100 percent compression or extension.
5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1.0 cfm/ft.
6. L-Rating at 400 deg F: Less than 1.0 cfm/ft.
END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/079000-1 Joint Protection
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 079000

JOINT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes: Joint fillers and gaskets work shown on the drawings or inferable there
from and/or specified in accordance with requirement of the Contract Documents. Work
includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Control joints in concrete and masonry
2. Joints between different materials
3. Perimeter joints between materials listed and frames of doors and windows
4. Other joints as indicated.
5. Fire resistant joint filler where required.

C. Related Section

1. Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM D 1056-85 : "Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials or Expanded
Rubber"
2. ASTM D 1751-83 : "Specification for Preferred Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural"
3. ASTM D 1752-84 : "Specification for preferred Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction"
4. ASTM D 2000 : "Classification System for Rubber and Products in Automotive
Application"
5. ASTM E 119-83 : "Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials"
6. ASTM E 136-82 : "Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Fumace at 750C"

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineer copies of the following information from
the manufacturer.
1. Published data, or manufacturers letter, clearly indicating that each product to be
furnished complies with these Specifications, is recommended for the application
shown, and is compatible with each other material in the joint system.
2. Complete instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection of each
product.

B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer (following the submittal of manufacturers data), samples of
each type of exposed joint filler or gasket. Samples will be reviewed by the Engineer for
colour and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor.

C. Compliance with Performance Requirements: Notwithstanding the types of joint fillers and
gaskets specified herein, the Contractor shall in all cases be responsible for providing filler
and gasket materials the best of their respective kinds, compatible with adjoining materials
and suitable for the purpose intended, all at no additional expense to the Employer.
New Jahra Hospital

A. Installer Qualification: Installer shall be a firm experienced in application of materials
required.

B. Source Quality Control: Testing methods shall be in accordance with the relevant standard
specification to which joint fillers are to conform.


A. Environmental Conditions: Weather and temperature conditions during installations shall
conform to manufacturers recommended limitations.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor and
Installer agreeing to replace components which fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failure includes but is not necessary limited to failure of joint due
to loss of cohesion or adhesion.

B. Warranty period for Joint Fillers and Gaskets shall be Ten (10) years after the date of
Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. 1. Sonneborn Building Products Div.
Chem Rex Inc.
7711 Computer Avenue
Minneapolis, MN 5545-5494, U.S.A.
Tel: (800) Chen Rex: (612) - 835-3434
2. Sika Corporation Inc.
P.O. Box 297
Lyndhurst, NJ 07071, U.S.A.
Tel: (201) 933-8800
3. Ghio Sealants Inc.
7405 Production Drive
Mentor, OH 44060, U.S.A.
Tel: (800) 222-2600, (216) 255-8900
4. MBT Middle East LLC
P.O. Box 37127
Dubai U.A.E.
Tel: 971 4 881 8701
Fax: 971 4 881 8701
5. G.E. International
P.O. Box 11549
Dubai U.A.E.
Tel: 971 4 313 1211
Fax: 971 4 313 1311


2.02 MATERIAL

A. General
New Jahra Hospital
1. Size and Shape: Provide joint fillers and gasket as shown or, if not shown, consult the
manufacturer and determine the proper size and shape considering joint movement
and conditions at time of installation.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Hardness and Compressibility: Provide joint fillers and gaskets as specified, and as
recommended by the manufacturer for proper performance in each specific condition
of use.
3. Compatibility: Provide only the type of joint filler which is compatible with the joint
surfaces and each sealant or caulking compound, as stated in the data published by
the manufacturers of the joint filler and the sealant or caulking compound, or as
certified by the joint filler manufacturer for each application.
4. Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive: Apply to joint fillers and gaskets, wherever applicable
and at Contractors option, to facilitate installation.
5. Colour: For exposed gaskets or joint fillers, provide the colour shown or, if the colour is
not shown, it will be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturers standard
colours. For concealed joints, provide the manufacturers standard colour which has
the best overall performance characteristics.

B. Self-Expanding Cork Joint Filler (SECJF) - For Expansion Joints
1. Resilient and Nonextruding: ASTM D 1752, Type III and AASHTO M 153, Type III.

C. Expanded Polyethylene Joint Filler (EPEJF) - Sealant Back-up
1. Closed Cell: Not less than 34.5 kPa for 25% compression deflection, resistant to
petroleum oils and solvents, surface water absorption of not more than 5%.

D. Concealed, Expanded Neoprene Gasket (CENG) - General Purpose
1. Closed Cell: ASTM D 1056, Grade SCE-41.

E. Moulded, Resilient Neoprene Gasket (MRNG) : ASTM D 2000, 50 to 70 Shore A durometer,
non-cellular, moulded or otherwise fabricated to form the sizes and shapes shown or as
required to effectively seal each joint.

F. Fire Resistant Joint Filler: Semi-rigid fire resistant mineral fibre insulation, withstanding
ASTM E 119 fire test conditions and non-combustible when tested as per ASTM E 136,
approved by Kuwait Fire Department.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the joint surfaces and the conditions under which the work is to be done. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Remove any
loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly.

D. Use bond breaker where required.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply in continuous runs without voids or interruptions, except as may be otherwise shown.
Trim for tight fit around obstructions or elements penetrating the joint.

B. Do not puncture the surface or self-skin on moulded or extruded types of cellular joint fillers.
New Jahra Hospital
C. Depress face edge of joint fillers accurately, wherever used as backup for sealant, as shown
or as specified by sealant manufacturer for proper application of sealant.

D. Recess exposed edges of joint fillers and gaskets slightly behind face of adjoining surfaces,
unless shown otherwise.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Project joint filers and gaskets during the remainder of the construction period so that they
will be without indication of deterioration or damage at the time of Substantial Completion of
the Works.

END OF SECTION
Amiri Diwan III-2/079200-1 Joint Sealants
New Jahra Hospital
SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
Throughout the Work, caulk and seal all joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as
required to provide a positive barrier against passage of air and moisture.
Caulking the following areas with sealant compound.
1. Interior and exterior perimeter of openings in exterior walls, including but not limited
to:
a. Curtain wall framing systems.
b. Aluminum entrance door systems.
c. Door frames.
d. Aluminum louvers.
2. Control and construction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
3. At sheathing for exterior walls:
a. In joints where sheathing abuts dissimilar surfaces or materials.
b. Perimeter of penetrations through gypsum sheathing.
c. Elsewhere that sealant is indicated in conjunction with sheathing.
4. Joints between plumbing fixtures and abutting surfaces.
5. Both sides of door frames and view windows located in interior partitions.
6. Perimeter of all casework.
7. Joints between wood base and floor; and joint between wood base and walls.
8. Joints between wood wall trim and walls.
9. Wherever sealant is indicated on the drawings and where such sealant is not
specified to be installed under other sections of the specifications.
Installing foam sealing strips at foundation perimeter joint where floor slab abuts foundation walls,
and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
Related Sections include the following:
10. Division 07 Section Self-Adhering Sheet Air Barriers for sealing of air barrier
system.
11. Division 07 Sections Penetration Firestopping and Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
for sealing joints in fire-rated construction.
12. Division 08 Section Glazing for glazing sealants.
13. Division 09 Section Gypsum Board for acoustical sealant.
14. Division 09 Section Tiling for sealing tile joints.
15. Division 09 Section Acoustical Ceilings for sealing between acoustical ceiling wall
molding and walls.

1.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Performance and Design Requirements for Sealants: Provide sealants to maintain long
term [20 year minimum] air tight and water tight seals. No cohesive or adhesive failures, nor
cracking or bubbling of sealant surfaces are permitted.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joint sealant product indicated include the following:
1. A complete materials list showing all items proposed to be furnished and installed
under this Section.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Sufficient data to demonstrate that all such materials meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
3. Specifications, characteristics, properties, limitations, installation instructions, and
general recommendations from the materials manufacturers showing procedures
under which it is proposed that the materials will be installed.
4. Manufacturer's tables indicating width and depth of sealant for all applications.
Selections from the manufacturer's tables shall be high lighted to denote specific
requirements for each application.
Samples: Submit samples of each sealant and available colors of each type, each backing material,
each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be used.
Product Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
5. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
6. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
Qualification Data: Provide written evidence of Installers experience on major projects similar in size
and nature to that of the project.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
7. Exposed to view joint sealants on the exterior building envelope shall be restricted to
one manufacturer and product throughout the entire project, unless specifically
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
1. Installer shall have a minimum of 3 years experience on major projects similar in size
and nature to that of this Project.
2. Proper caulking and proper installation of sealants require that installers be
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and thoroughly familiar
with the specified requirements.
3. Use only personnel who have been specifically trained in such procedures and who
are completely familiar with the joint details shown on the Drawings and the
installation requirements called for in this Section.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of every material that will contact or
affect joint sealants.
1. Perform tests in accordance with ASTM C794 to verify sealant compatibility with
abutting surfaces and type of primers required to ensure adhesion to substrates.
2. Schedule sufficient time for testing, analyzing and reporting results, understanding
long lead times are required by sealant manufacturers, to prevent delaying the Work.
3. Submit samples of each type and finish of framing member, precast, masonry and
other adjoining materials for adhesion and staining testing as required for testing by
sealant manufacturer.
4. Obtain manufacturers written report and recommendations regarding proper primer
choice and use. Use sealants and substrates only in combination for which favorable
adhesion and compatibility results have been obtained.
D. Field-Adhesion Testing: Periodically test sealants in place for adhesion using methods
recommended by sealant manufacturer. Promptly replace all sealant which does not adhere
or which fails to cure properly.
New Jahra Hospital
E. Testing Agency: If manufacturers cannot or will not perform theses tests, employ at
Contractors expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect to
perform tests and certifications indicated.
Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
8. Before beginning primary work of this Section, provide 10 linear feet of mock-ups for
each type of sealant and filler work at locations acceptable to Architect and obtain
Architects acceptance of visual qualities and acceptable adhesion qualities.
9. Protect and maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout the work of this Section to
serve as criteria for acceptance of this Work. Acceptable mock-ups may be
incorporated into the finished work.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in the original
unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store only under
conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Do not retain on the job site any material
which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer.
B. Protection: Use all mean necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during,
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.

A. Weather: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within
the limits permitted by the manufacturers of the materials and products used.
B. Temperature: Comply with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
Understand that joints to be sealed should not be near their fully closed nor fully open
extremes, but in the mid-range of the joint's intended movement. All surfaces of joints shall
be clean and dry prior to application of sealant system.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor, agreeing to
repair or replace work which exhibits defects in materials or workmanship. "Defects" is
defined to include, but is not limited to, leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration,
and failure to perform as required. Include requirement for removal and replacement of
covering and connected adjacent work.
10. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. In addition, provide a manufacturers guarantee which shall warrant that the products
provided will perform as watertight weatherseals for a period of 20 years from the date of
purchase. In addition to maintaining the integrity of the weatherseals the sealants shall not
change color when used with back-up materials and substrates that have been approved
for compatibility by the sealant manufacturer.
C. Staining Warranty: Provide a manufacturers guarantee which shall warrant that the sealant
systems provided will not stain or discolor adjacent surfaces.
New Jahra Hospital
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

General: Use only the types of sealants described herein.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealant, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2.02 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Sealant S-1, Silicone Sealant: Provide a one component, medium-modulus, neutral cure,
sealant conforming to the requirements ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT,
M, G, A and O. The sealant shall be compatible with the specified application's substrates
and have a minimum movement capability of 50% and a shore A hardness of 35.
a. Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant
b. G.E. SilPruf SCS2000
c. Tremco Spectrem 2
d. Pecora 864
B. Sealant S-2, Silicone Sealant: Provide a one component, neutral cure, ultra-low modulus,
high-performance moisture-curing sealant conforming to the requirements ASTM C920
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A and O. The sealant shall be compatible
with the specified application's substrates and have a minimum movement capability of +
100% -50%and a shore A hardness of 15.
a. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant
b. Tremco Spectrem 1
c. G.E. SilPruf LM SCS2700
d. Pecora 890
Sealant S-3, Silicone Sealant: A single-component, silicone rubber sealant, one-part, acetoxy-cure
silicone rubber sealant conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT. The sealant shall be compatible with the specified application's substrates and mildew
resistant with a shore A hardness of 25.
a. Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Sealant
b. G.E. Sanitary SCS1700
c. Tremco Tremsil 200
d. Pecora 898
Sealant S-4, Silicone Sealant: A single-component, translucent silicone sealant conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, NT, M, G, A. The sealant shall be
compatible with the specified application's substrates with a shore A hardness of 30.
a. Dow Corning 799 Silicone Glass and Metal Building Sealant
b. G.E. 1000
c. Tremco Tremsil 200

2.03 POLYURETHANE SEALANTS
A. Sealant S-5, Multi-Component Polyurethane: General purpose, non-sag, multi-component,
chemical curing sealant meeting ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, M,
A, O.
a. Sika Corp."Sikaflex 2c NS"
b. Tremco "Dymeric 240FC"
New Jahra Hospital
c. Tremco "Vulkem 227"
d. Dynatrol II
Sealant S-6, Multi-Component Polyurethane: Self-leveling, traffic bearing horizontal joints shall be a
two-part chemically-curing polyurethane meeting ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M,
A, I and O (self-leveling); one of the following or approved equal:
a. Sika Corp. "Sikaflex 2c SL"
b. Sonneborn SL2
c. Tremco "Vulkem 245"
d. Tremco "THC-900"
Sealant S-7, One part polyurethane, tamper resistant elastomeric joint sealant meeting ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5, having a Shore A hardness of 55 +/- 5; provide the following or
approved equal:
a. Pecora DynaFlex SC

2.04 LATEX SEALANTS
A. Sealant S-8, Single component, opaque, acrylic latex sealant for interior applications for
sealing joints that can be painted between a variety of construction materials and joints
requiring sealing for acoustical considerations have a minimum movement capability of
12.5% meeting ASTM C834, Type P, Grade NF, one of the following or approved equal:
a. Tremco "Tremflex 834"

2.05 FOAM SEALING STRIP
A. Premolded Filler for Exterior Application: Emseal Precompressed (PC), as manufactured by
Emseal Joint Systems, Inc., Westborough, MA (800) 526-8386, or as approved equal.
Premolded Filler for Interior Horizontal and Foundation Perimeter Joint Application: Preformed
expanding open cell polyurethane foam impregnated with an acrylic polymer-modified water-based
asphalt emulsion; DHS System as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, Inc., Westborough, MA
(800) 526-8386.
2. Primer: Manufacturers standard two component, high-modulus, high-strength,
structural epoxy paste adhesive; Emseal 820.

2.06 ePOXY JOINT FILLER
A. Control Joint Filler: Two part, self-leveling heavy-duty epoxy based joint compound.
Product:
1. Epoflex SL, manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or as approved
equal.
a. Solids Contents: 100 percent
b. Shore A hardness: 85-90
c. Shore D hardness: 55
d. Tensile Strength (ASTM D-638): 450 psi

2.07 SEALANT COLORS
A. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors to match the
various abutting surfaces.
1. Final colors of exposed joint sealant shall match Architects approved samples. In
concealed installation, standard gray or black sealant may be used.
New Jahra Hospital

2.08 PRIMERS

A. Use only those primers which are non-staining, have been tested for durability on the
surfaces to be sealed, and are specifically recommended for this installation by the
manufacturer of the sealant used.

2.09 BACKUP MATERIALS
A. Backer seal for exterior sealant application shall be a secondary seal consisting of alternate
layers of acrylic-impregnated expanding foam sealant, "Backerseal (Greyflex)"
manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, LTD., Westborough, MA (508) 836-0280.
Backer rod for interior sealant applications, and elsewhere where Backer Rod is indicated on the
Drawings, shall be non-absorbing, non-staining, extruded from a blend of polyolefin. Sof-Rod as
manufactured by Applied Extrusion Technologies or Sof-Type, manufactured by I.T.P. Corp.

2.10 BOND-PREVENTIVE MATERIALS
A. Use one of the materials described in the following paragraphs, as best suited for the
application and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
B. Polyethylene tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive, with the adhesive required only to hold tape
to the construction materials as indicated.
C. Aluminum foil: Conform to MIL-SPEC-MIL-A-148E.
D. Wax paper: Conform to Federal Specification UU-P-270.
E. Caulk Stops: ASTM A240, Type 304, Stainless steel sheet with 2D finish. Formed into angle
shapes.

2.11 MASKING TAPE
A. Masking Tape: For masking around joints, provide non-staining, nonabsorbent masking
tape conforming to Federal Specification UU-T-106C, compatible with joint sealant and
surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of
sealant work means Installer's acceptance of joint surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Concrete Surfaces: All surfaces in contact with sealant shall be dry, sound, and well
brushed and wiped free of dust. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the
surfaces with clean rags. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface
treatment by use of sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove laitance from the joint
cavity. Where backup is required, insert the approved backup material in the joint
cavity to the depth required.
New Jahra Hospital
2. Steel Surfaces: Steel surfaces in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if
sandblasting would not be practical or would damage adjacent finish, the metal shall
be scraped or wire-brushed to remove mill scale. Use solvent to remove oil and
grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. Remove protective coatings on steel by
sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no residue.
3. Aluminum Surfaces: Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant shall be cleaned of
temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil and grease. When masking tape is used for a
protective cover, remove the tape just prior to applying the sealant. Use only such
solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that purpose by the
manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non-staining.
B. Joint Priming: Prime all joint substrates to which sealant is to be bonded. Use only the
primer recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant and approved by the Architect for
the particular installation. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Bond-Breaker: Install bond-breaker tape where recommended by the manufacturer of the
sealant, and where directed by the Architect.
1. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
2. Sealants shall not be applied over tar, asphalt, or similar type of impregnated backup
materials without the use of a bond-breaker as specified above or a polyethylene
bond-breaker tape.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces where the appearance of sealant would be objectionable, and that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
E. Caulk Stop: Install stainless steel angles where indicated on the Drawing to prevent
bonding at dissimilar materials.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL
A. General: Install sealant backings of type recommended by sealant manufacturer to support
sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability, as specified by the sealant manufacturer.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
a. Closed cell polyethylene foam backup material shall not be compressed in
excess of 25 percent. Open cell polyurethane may be compressed 25 to 50
percent.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
B. Installation of Backerseal: Store Backerseal indoors at room temperature. Ensure correctly
sized material is selected for joint. Joint sides shall be clean, dry, sound and free from
contaminates.
1. Remove material from packaging and expose self-adhesive side by removing release
liner.
2. Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking
care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and
intersections of joints.
3. Joining Lengths: Using a sharp knife miter the material at 45 degrees before butting
lengths together. Apply wet sealant to the mitered faces before butting tightly
together.
New Jahra Hospital

3.04 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
Prior to the start of sealant installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to the details on
the Drawings, and verify that the required proportion of width-of joint to depth-of joint has been
obtained. Clean all surfaces prior to application of sealant to insure good bonding.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
4. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power-actuated gun or other appropriate
means. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to
completely fill joints as designed.
5. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
6. Verify that expanding foam backerseal material is firmly expanded in the joint before
applying sealant.
7. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration to the recommended depth.
8. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability as specified by the sealant
manufacturer.
Tooling Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of profile and configuration indicated on Drawings; to
eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Joints in conjunction with masonry soft joints, will be raked out and prepared for the applications of
sealant under the work of other Sections. Sealant shall be applied in accordance with the
recommendations of the masonry materials manufacturer in addition to the specifications of the
sealant manufacturer.
Apply sealant to joints between plumbing fixtures and abutting surfaces.

3.05 Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants
A. General: Install preformed expanding foam in accordance with manufacturers detailed
instructions and as follows:
B. Interior Horizontal and Foundation Perimeter Joint Assemblies:
1. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions to remove
loose particles, foreign matter and other contaminants that may be detrimental to the
adhesion of the sealant. Mix epoxy adhesive and apply to joint gap faces.
2. Remove preformed foam sealant from the packaging, taking care not to cut silicone
face.
3. Join individual strips to provide a continuous length be by means of scarf joints.
Using a miter-box, cut 45-degree miters at ends of material to be joined.
4. Apply heat to both sides of the preformed foam sealant to open the out cells of the
foam to receive the epoxy. Apply a light coat of epoxy adhesive to the bottom third
of the both sides of the foam.
5. Install each length of sealant into joint immediately after application of epoxy
adhesive. Starting from one end feed material into joint, recessing material 1/4-inch
from the top of the joint. Push joints firmly together, taking care not to pull or stretch
material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints.
Temporarily hold in place with wood wedges, if necessary, until expansion has taken
place.
New Jahra Hospital
6. Wipe excess epoxy from the top of the material. Within 4 hours, inject a bead of
silicone between the cured silicone facing and the joint-face. At miters and butt
joints, pry back the silicone facing and inject liquid silicone into the joint. Tool the
freshly applied silicone to blend with the cured silicone facing to ensure a seamless
appearance.
C. Exterior Vertical Joints:
1. Remove Emseal from the packaging and insert the narrow edge into the joint gap.
Set the seal so that when it is fully expanded the face of the seal is located 1/2" back
from the face of concrete. Temporarily hold in place with wood wedges, if necessary,
until expansion has taken place.
2. At temperatures above 20 degrees Centigrade (70 degrees Fahrenheit) the material
will recover in a few hours. At temperatures below 20 degrees Centigrade (70
degrees Fahrenheit) the recovery can be accelerated by heating the material with a
hot air blower.
3. Jointing of the individual strips to provide a continuous length shall only be by means
of scarfed joints, cut at about 45 degrees relative to the sides of the joint. The
scarfed ends shall be pushed well past one another.
4. Apply Type "S-1" Sealant over foam sealing strips to complete sealing of expansion
joints. Prior to applying sealant, perform test to assure that sealant does not adhere
to sealing strips. If sealant adheres to sealing strips, install bond breaker over sealing
strips.
5. Install protection board over all joints located below grade, prior to back filling
operations.

3.06 INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR JOINTS
A. All saw cut or formed floor joints and construction joints in new interior concrete floors shall
be filled with 100 percent solids epoxy filler.
B. Install epoxy filler in accordance with recommendations in ACI 302 and written
C. Joints shall be filled to full depth in 2 passes.
D. Filler shall be flush with concrete floor, or slightly crowned. After initial cure, cutoff overfill
even with floor with a razor, knife, or other similar tool.

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
b. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
2. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are
clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with
other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with
indicated requirements.

New Jahra Hospital
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.

B. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.

3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION

III-1 & III-2 Specifications - Volume 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

III-1 & III-2 Specifications - Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amiri Diwan

New Jahra Hospital

including step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw

HE by The Steel Network.

Prime Roof Board.

You might also like